Skip to main content

Full text of "An Account of the Natives of the Tonga Islands, in the South Pacific Ocean: With an Original ..."

See other formats 


Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 




fiiAB.V' 



JUST PUBLISHED, 
In One Vdume 12mo. neatly done up in Cloth, PHce 7«. 

AirCXBirX 8AXiLA.D8 *. SOHCHBt, 

CHIEFLY FROM 

TVaditioth MimiueripUy amd Searte Works $ 

WITH 
BIOQRAPHICAL h ILLUSTRATIVE NOTICES^ 

Xndadlng Origiiial Poeliy* 

By THOMAS LYLE. 
LONDON : 

HUNTED fOft L. UUE, 1^ OOKNHILL; 

WE8TLEY & TYBIEL, IWHJV'; OOWfTABLE h CO. EOINBUBGH; 

AND JOHN LUMBDEN, GLASOOIT. 

October, 1827. 






k* 



CONSTABLFS MISCELLANY, 
VoU. XV. h XVI. 



HISTORY 

Of TRV 

REBELLION IN SCOTLAND 

1745. 
BY ROBERT CHAMBERS, 

AUTHOE OV '< TftADinONS OT XDZITBUIIGB, " 

f WiU appear 97 A Oct. and 17 A Nov. J 



^ 



s 



#1 



\ 



"^- 



^».ny']'Sri^ i^r,'^ v-b:^^-i-*jtt-^-«. Be ^«i ^ 



■- — 7k the vARiors departiiknts^^ ' 

LITERATIJRB,SCIE?rrB.XfTHBdRTS, 

MARnrXR's TOH&AISLAHSS TOI..n. 




rmti^i-K3i I'D!* co:'a'r''**'* * 

1821. 



^■- 



AN 

ACCOUNT OF THE NATIVES 

OF THB 

TONGA ISLANDS, 

IN THE SOUTH PACIFIC OCEAN. 

WITH AN 

ORIGINAL GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY 

OF THEIR LANGUAGE. 

COMPILED AND ARRANGED FROM ma EX T EJ W mVE 

COMMUNICATIONS 

OF 

MB WILLIAM MARINER, 

SEVERAL TEARS RESIDENT IN THOSE ISLANDS. 

BY JOHN MARTIN, M. D. 

IN TWO VOLUMES. 
VOL. IL 

THIRD EDITION, CONSIDKRABLT IMPROTXD. 



EDINBURGH: 

PRINTED FOR CONSTABLE AND Ca 

AND 

• HURST, CHANCE AND CO. LOITOQ^. 



1827. 



■rs 

/f2 7 






CONTENtS OE VOL. 11. 



CHAPTER 1 



PAOS 

^The liofe Mraw of VaUitoi Rfaiiiitr-1%e late king 
appears to Foonag! (a Amale cU«f) in » dreMn— 
The charm oT Taitao — ToDga-naaa antwca finom 
the Hapai Islands respecting the Inochi — Certain 
political views arising firom this drcumstance— 
I*ermission granted io Toob6 T6ft to come to Va- 
Taoo to perfom^ the nsual ceremonies at Finow'a 
gra^e— tiis conduct on this occkision— -His astonish- 
ment at the warlike appearance of tbenew^mrison 
^-Arrival of Lolohea coW KefoO ftom Hapai^- 
Great stiMrm 6f thuhd^ and lightning ; its effects 
on ibe minds of the people— Dreakna of A number 
of women, predictingtfae death o^ TooHonga— III- 
nesa of TodtOng»— The finjgera of serenl thildren 
cut off as saciiifcca to die g o da Severtd children 
iit nmgl fid T tnHHtrnjfffi death — His burial — Hie 
king prepares hims^ to perform the ustaalcerenKK 
nies at his father's graT^-^cddent of Mr MM- 
ner^ meeiing ; his quarrel with the kins oti tUs 
account; his after conduct • Ifaeir recottcniittiOn • . 9 

CHAPTER 11. 

fhe kiiiff iuuuhilates the divine cbiefdom of Tooiton. 

S, ml the ceremony of Inadil— -Mr Marines a- 
pted mother departs for Hapa!— ^e stratagem 
used to prtircnt her female attendants from accom^ 
panying her-* Spirited speecb-of l^fclo on thisocc*^ 
aion— All communication with the Hapai Islands 
shut up--The kin^s extraor^nary aiteatkvk \0^ 
and d^teooe oC the OQiantn"-Ai)luaceflli:^t&, 



IV C0KTEKT8. 

tAGB 

aneedote respecting two chiefs, Hala A'pi A'-pi and 
T41o— -Atteinpt from the people of Hapai — Mr 
Mariner discoven ap European v^ s nel whiUt oft a 
Ibhing excursion ; his men refusing to take him on 
board, he wounds one mortallyy and threatens the 
others, upon which they paddle towards the ship- 
Anecdote of the wotmded man M r Mariner's ar- 
ri?a] on board, and reception from Hie captain — 
The king visits him in the ship ; his behaviour on 
board ; his earnest wish to go to England — Mr 
Mariner sends on shore for the journal of the Port 
au Prince, and procures the escape of two of his 
couttfryntfen— Further transactions on board — He 
takes a final leave ef the king — The sUp tdh tot 
the Hapai Islands ^. .••••.•... .3^ 

GRAFTfiR lii. 

F^liminary remariw— Anecdote of the late King — 
Character of the present King— Parallel between 
him and faia fioher — Hia humanity— His under- 
standings— Anecdote of lum respecting a gun-lock 
—-Respecting the; pulse ■ His love of astronomical 
knowledge--Hi8 obaervatioas upon European ac- 
quirements — BBa remarks concerning the antipodes 
—•Anecdote of him respecting the mariner's cem- 
pasa' -His attentipR to the arte — Cursory view of 
the character of Finow F^ji—-Hi» early wvUke pro- 
pensirici- His peaceable disposition and i^mx^^ 
Cuiaory diancter (^Hala Api A^— fiis mischiev- 
«us diqpoaition-His generositjrf wisdom, hermc bra- 
▼ery, and occasional moderation— His swiftness of 
foo^ Arrival of the Favourite at the Hapai Islands 
—Generosity of Robert Brown— Anecdote of the 
boatswain of the Port au Prince — ^Three men of 
the Port an Mnce received on board— Anecdote 
of an Hqpai warrior — Excuses and apologies of the 
Hapai people fai regard to the cloture of the FttrC 
au Prince— ne Favourite departs ibr the FQiM- 
lands— Remarks on Uie condnct of one ot0KB En- 
S^Uhmen left behind— An aooooM of tfie Inlentioas 



TAQt 

dole resflecting the death of (his forest man — ^Arri- 
val of the Favourite at the Islatiid of Pau— Some 
aocomit of the natiTeSy and of the white people 
there— Departure of the ship from the F^i Islands, 
and her arrival in Macao Road»^Mr Mariner's re- 
ception by Captain BiMsandby Captain Welbank— 
His arrival in EngUuid ■ -Coneluding observations . 5^ 

CHAPTfiR IV. 

Preliminary obaervationa— Rank in society — Tooti- 
toBga Vaachi Inspired priests — The king — No- 
bl crf Order of saecesHon to rank—- Matabooles — 
Mooas Tooaa — Phifessional daases of society, he> 
reditary and o^rwise— Table of the order or pro- 
fessions— Succession to property — Old age — Fe- 
male sex— Wives of chief8---^dopted mothers-— 
Concnbinea of chiefiH-Arta practised by women— 
Chikben 82 



CHAPTER V. 

Enumeration of the prioidpal notioBS on which the 
religion of Tonga is foimded — Traditionary account 
of the Island of Bolotoo— DiTlsidn of the gods into 
six classes-^Namos and attrtbntcs of the principal 
orinnal gods— Souls of Cliicfs — Souls cf Mata- 
bowes— -Odier Hotooas or inhabitants at Bolotoo 
— Hotooa Pow, or mischievous gods — The god that 
supports the earth-observations upon death — 
Origin of the habitable earth, or rather of the Isl- 
ands of Tonga— Popular traditions respecting the 
original inhabitants of Tonga— ^ Remarks— Another 
tradition respecting the same subjeet — Fin story 
respecting an island of immortal women — Popular 
acooant^ the origin of Turtles — General notion 
of the earth, sky, and heavenly bodies— Notions re- 
specting the human soul and animol life— Ideas 
concerning the liver— The soul's immortality— No- 
tions of the F^i people in rqpird to the soul « . ^ 



[Engraved S^ccmins or thb Songs and Music or vhjb 
Tonga Pioruc, rACivo paox 320.] 



ACCOUNT 

OF THE 

TONGA ISLANDS- 



CHAPTER I. 



Soon after the burial of the late king, Finow Fiji 
proposed to his nephew to rebuild the large gar- 
rison at Felletoa, which might serve as a strong 
and impenetrable fortification, in case of attack 
from a foreign enemy ; besides which, he justly 
observed, being rebuilt, it would serve as a place 
of residence for all the chiefs and great warriors. 
This measure was in itself highly political, as it 
would prevent the seditious from forming cabals 
and parties, which they could more easily do whilst 
living at a distance up the country, than under 
the eyes of the king. It was not proposed, how- 
ever, that they should reside constantly at the 
garrison, and, by that means, neglect their plan- 
tationsy but that each should have a house with 
the usual conveniences for his wife and family <» 
built within the fencing, to teaivdc vci ^^ 'clx^X'* 

VOL, IT, K 



10 TRANSACTIONS AT 

or to retire to wholly, in case of invasion, civil 
commotion, or whenever the king should order 
him to do so. This proposal of Finow Fiji heing 
assented to hy the king, the former requested 
permission to have the sole management of laying 
out the plan, and' to see it carried into effect, 
which the latter readily agreed to. 

During the time the garrison was rebuilding, 
a circumstance happened which seemed to indicate 
that a conspiracy was on the eve of being formed, 
if not actually begun ; and, as the circumstance al- 
luded to is connected with a certain superstitious 
ceremony worthy of detail, we shall be particular 
in giving the account of it exactly as it happened. 
Foonagi, the wife of Finow Fiji, and formerly 
the wife of Tymomangnoongoo (a gi*eat warrior, 
who was a party concerned in taking the Port au 
Prince), was a woman of uncommon penetration 
and discernment, and, on that account, as well as 
from the circumstance of her being the daughter 
of a chief who was a friend of his father, she 
was highly regarded by the late king ; who indeed 
had attached himself to her so much, it is sup- 
posed she lived with him as his mistress during the 
time she was actually the wife of her first husband. 
She was extremely religious, and universally re- 
spected, on account of her accurate knowledge of 
religious ceremonies, on which subject she was fre- 
quently consulted by the chiefs; and, upon political 
matters, Finow himself often applied to her; for in 
this also she stood eminent in the esteem of every one. 
To Finow she seemed as much attached as he to 
jjdMMMd) after his death, she mourned his loss with 
^^^^w beyond the reach of comfort. She, above 
» waa most attentive m deco^Xw^ ^\t.li 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 11 

flowers planted by her own hand, and with the 
utmost solicitude keeping in order, the fytoca 
where lay the body of her deceased friend. For 
the space of six months this &ithful mourner scarce- 
ly ever slept but on his grave, watering it with 
her tears, and disturbing the silence of the night 
with her sighs. One day she went to the house 
of Mo-oonga Toobo, widow of the deceased chief, 
to communicate what had happened to her at the 
fytoca during several nights, and which caused her 
^e greatest anxiety. She related having dreamed 
that the late How appeared to her, and, with a 
countenance full of disappointment, asked why 
there yet remained at Vavaoo so many evil design- 
ing persons ; for that, since he had been at 
Bolotoo, his spirit had been distm'bed by the evil 
machinations of wicked men conspiring against his 
son ; but he declared that " the youth " should 
not be molested, nor his power shaken by the 
spirit of rebellion ; that therefore he came to her 
with a warning voice, to prevent such disastrous 
consequences. The apparition next desired her to 
place in order the pebble-stones upon his grave,* and 
pay every attention to the fytoca; then disappeared. 
Mo-oonga Toobo, upon hearing this account, thought 
it expedient to search ihefytoca, to see if the charm 
of tattoo f had not been practised in regard to 

* It must here be recollected, that mourners were ac- 
customed to smooth the graves of their departed friends, 
and cover them with black and white pebbles. 

f The charm of tattao consists in hiding upon the 
grave, or in any part of the fyloca, some portion of tlie 
wearing apparel of an inferior relation of the deceased, in 
consequence of which that relation will s^ickati «wi <iSkft. •, 
or, it may be buried in the Viou^ col\sec^«te^^»^^^'*^^^^«^ 
god of the family. This ch&nn *» itfA %\ivv«««2i^ v^ ^«»« 



13 TRANSACTIONS AT 

the present Finow. They accordingly went to^ 
gether to the grave, and^ after accurate examina- 
tion, they discovered several bits of gnaJtoOy and 
a wreath of flowers curionsly formed in a peculiar 
manner, invented by one of the wives of the king, 
and which they recollected to have seen him wear 
round his neck a few days before. 

This circumstance being communicated to fi- 
now, and coming to the ears of his chiefis, and of 
the matabooles of the late How, produced con- 
siderable consternation among many of them. Fi- 
now, however, with that cool presence of mind 
which marked ins dhanicter, issued orders to his 
chiefis to keep a vigilant k)ok out ;* and, without 
discovering the least alarm, did every thing in the 
way of preparation i^ainst the worst that might 
happen. He kept Mr Mariner constantly near 
him, that they might not be accidentally separated 
in case of any public disturbance. On all occa- 
sions he endeavoured to make the conspirators (if 
any such .there were) believe that he was perfectly 
off his guard, and in conscious security, and, the 
better to convince them of this, he feigned to ima- 
gine that the bits of buried gnatoo, &c. must have 
been hidden there by some dogs in their play. 
All this precaution, however, and studied policy, 
were unnecessary, as no signs of conspiracy be- 
came evident, and perhaps no conspiracy existed. 
In the mean time, die building and fortifying the 
garrison with extra ditches went on with despatch, 
and, in a short time, was completed to the per- 
fect satisfaction of Finow. 

t^ desired effect wbcn the grave of a deceased person is 
fP^c use of, unless the deceased vras o£ WK^moi tvg^ Xo 
® pcrsifn on whom the charm is piacuaeA. 



THE TONGA ISLAND5. 13 

Shortly after the fortress was finished, a canoe 
arriyed from the Hapai Islands with Tonga- mana> 
m chief of the line of Tooitonga, who came from 
Toobo Toa, with a request to know how the 
inachi * was to be sent to Tooitonga, seeing 
Finow had declared that no commmiication what- 
ever was to be kept up with Hapai. As all on 
board were habited in mats, with leaves of the ifi 
tree round their necks, as a token of submission, 
and that they came upon a religious duty, they 
were permitted to land. After having presented 
cava to several consecrated houses, they came be- 
fore Finow, and presented some to him ; then open* 
ed the subject of their mission. They came they 
said with a request from Toobo Toa, that Finow 
would grant him permission to present himself at 
Vavaoo, to pay his last respects to the memory of 
the late king, by performing the usual ceremonies 
at his grave; hoping that, although he seemed 
determined to cut off all communication with the 
Hapai Islands, he would not cairy his decree to 
such an extent as to form an insuperable bar to 
the performance of a religious duty ; for that he 
(Toobo Toa) wished to take his last farewell of a 
great chief, who, while living, he so highly esteem- 
ed, and whose memory he had now so much rea- 
son to respect. After Finow had heai'd the sub- 
ject of the embassy, he said in reply, that he 
should consult his chiefs and matabooles as to what 
measures he ought to take, and would return a de- 
finitive answer as soon as possible. Tonga-mana 
and his party then rose up and went down to the 

• The annual tribute of the ftral fruvU o? «itV \^w\^> 
to TooiUmga, 

a2 



14 TRAMSACTIOMS AT 

beadi, where their canoe was, and passed the night 
^mthe canoe-honse. 

Immediately after they had departed, Fmow 
held a council with his chiefs and matabooles, the 
result of which was, that Tooh6 Toa should he 
allowed to send the inachi^ provided Tongarmana's 
canoe only were sent, and that this particular canoe 
should he allowed to come on any after occasion, 
upon condition that there were no more men on 
hoard than should be sufficient to constitute a 

i 

crew : and if he encroached upon this law, the ca- 
noe was never to be allowed to come again. But 
the question regardiDg Toob6 Toa's coming was 
reserved for a future opportunity. This resoln* 
tion was made, partly from religious motives, and 
partly to show the Hapai people that they enter- 
tained no fears of them, but chiefly, perhaps, to 
demonstrate to Toob6 Toa, how well provided 
and well armed they were against all attacks from 
a foreign enemy. The following morning, at 
cava, this resolution was communicated to Ton- 
ga-mana, upon which, he departed immediate- 
ly, on his return to the Hiqmi Islands. As soon 
as Toob6 Toa heard the permission granted by 
Finow, he ordered the tributes from the different 
islands (intended for the inacM) to be collected 
together, and put on board Tonga-mana's cieuioo. 
At the same time, the inhabitants of Tofooa, an 
island belonging to Tooitonga, eager to send their 
tribute for tbe inackif also despatched a canoe to 
accompany that of Toobo Toa ; and although this 
was contrary to Finow's strict injunction, still they 
Mattered themselves that, as it was a canoe from 
Tooftongn's own island, it would be overlooked* 
■fhit la this thev were mistaken, te no ^wsiict ^\^. 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 15 

tbe people of Vavaoo perceive two canoes, instead 
of one, coining to their shores, than tliey raised a 
great clamour, contending that the Hapai people 
had a mind to he treacherous — that, under the 
mask of religion, they were coming as spies ; and, 
making these complaints to Finow, they called 
loudly for orders against such a proceeding, in* 
sisting that one of the canoes should be sent 
back before the other was allowed to land. Fi* 
now, seeing the conduct of the Hapai people, and 
hearing the complaints of his own, immediate- 
ly gave orders tliat Tooitonga's canoe should be 
instantly sent away, else neither of them wovild 
be allowed to land. Perceiving, however, after- 
wards, that Tooitonga's canoe was laden with part 
of the tribute, and as it would have been sacrile- 
gious to have sent back any poi*tion of what was 
intended for the inachi, he ordered it to be land- 
ed, and the canoe, with all its men, who, by the by, 
were choice warriors, to be sent back immediately. 
On this occasion, Finow, reflecting how easy it 
would be for any of the Vavaoo people to leave 
the island in Tooitonga s canoe, because the law 
which he had previously made extended only to 
that of Tongarmana ; and seeing no way of pre- 
venting the evil, he openly proclaimed to the peo- 
ple, that if any wished to go and reside at Hapai, 
they had now an opportunity, but that they would 
not be permitted to return to Vavaoo. No one^ 
however, thought proper to leave the island. 

After the ceremony of inachi, the canoe of 
Tonga- mana was sent away, with permission to 
bring Toobo Toa, and any of his chiefs that thought 
proper to come, even althoxi^ ii)cic^ ^^\ \svsst^ 
than one canoe, provided tViey cm\7 ^X^\ w^a to 



16 TRANSACTIONS AT 

at Vavaoo just to perform the ceremonies at the 
grave of the late How. Finow had begmi to 
consider that it would be bad policy to impose 
too many restrictions on the admission of the Ita« 
pai people, as it would indicate want of strength, 
and a certain degree of apprehension ; and on the 
other hand, as the foitress was very strong, and 
able to resist almost any adverse force, he had 

. not^so much occasion to be under alarm. In the 
mean time, he despatched several small canoes to 
the outer islands of Hafooloo How,* to watch the 
arrival of Toobo Toa, and to retmn with imme- 
diate notice of this event to Vavaoo, which they 
did as sooD: as they saw three canoes which hove 
in sight. Thereupon, Finow sent back several 
of his own canoes to meet those of Toobo Toa^ 
with orders that the Hapai canoes should not 
advance farther than the neighbouring islands, 
but that they should bring Toobo Toa and his 
party along with them up the creek to Felle- 
toa, in the Vavaoo canoes. This was accord- 
ingly done, and Toobo Toa, and about sixty of 
his warriors, were now landed near the for- 
tress. They were all dressed in mats; their 
heads were shaven, and leaves of the iji tree 
were round their necks, according to the cus- 

. tom at burials. Several boys bearing a few 
spears, arrows, and clubs, followed. They pro- 
ceeded immediately to the grave of the late How, 
and after having sat before it a little time, with 
their heads bowed down, Toobo Toa arose, and 
taking a sharp dub from one of the boys, inflicted 
several very severe wounds on his own head, cal- 

* The name given to Vavnoo and a\\ \1& wxttouudintt 
y/u/e islaads. 



THB TONGA ISLANDS. 17 

ling out to the deceased to witness this proof of 
his love and fidelity, and declaring aloud that his 
sentiments towards his son were the same as those 
he formerly entertained towards him, notwith- 
standing that death had occasioned this seem- 
ing hreach hetween them : — ^protesting how much 
he wished a perfect and fnendly understanding 
with the Vavaoo people, that he might occa- 
sionally have the opportunity of preparing the 
cava for young Finow ; and by such and other as- 
siduities prove his respect and loyalty towards his 
family. But since as he supposed the chiefs of Bo- 
lotoo had decreed otherwise, he should be con- 
tented to live at the Hapai Islands, and evince his 
remembrance of the deceased, by sending, in Ton- 
ga-manas canoe, the produce of his own islands 
as presents to his son. This speech was followed 
by those of several of his party, all much in the 
ssune sentiment, and then, after bruising their 
heads, running spears and arrows through their 
checks, thighs, and breasts, they left the grave to 
attend to the cava of Finow. In the evening, Fi- 
now, Toob6 Toa, and Finow Fiji had a short con- 
versation together, when Toobo Toa expressed his 
wish to be tributary to Vavaoo, notwithstanding it 
might still be thought politic, as long as any of 
Toobo Nnha's near relations were living, to keep 
him and his people at a distance, acknowledging 
that such a separation was the only way of pro- 
serving peace between the two powers. He sta- 
ted, moreover, that with the view of keeping his 
own people from meditating eithei conspiracies a*i 
gainst himself or wars against Vavaoo (which they 
would be sure to do if they remaMie^ ^o^^ \^^^ 
be should turn his attention to t\ie wwifiXaavcft oS. *5b» 
gm-ison of Hihifo at Tonga, w\ac\\ w» ^^w' 



18 TRANSACTIONS AT 

friendly tenns with him, but which he had ktely 
heard was very weak, and in great danger of be- 
ing destroyed by the enemy. To succour his 
friends, therefore, he meant to proceed to Tonga 
with a strong army as soon as possible. To Too- 
bo Toa's proposal of still sending. a tribute, Iinow 
objected for two reasons ; first, because Vavaoo it- 
self yielded quite enough for the maintenance of 
his people ; and, secondly, because any tribute re- 
ceived from Toobo Toa might be construed by the 
people into an act of fiiendship and alliance, which 
ill suited with the sentiments they entertained to- 
wards the man who had formerly killed ibear be- 
loved chief Toobo Nuha. As to the annual tri- 
bute for the inachi it could not be dispensed with, 
because it was a religious act, and was necessary 
to be performed to ensure the flavour of the gods, 
and prevent any calamities which might otherwise 
be inflicted on them. Toobo Toa accordingly was 
obliged to accede to all that Finow had so reason- 
ably said upon the subject ; but his pride, it was 
believed, was much hurt at feeling the necessity of 
coinciding in the wishes of so young and inexpe- 
rienced a chief. While yet speaking, the tears ran 
down his cheeks, influenced probably by the feel- 
ings of his heart towards the late How, and sincere 
regret for his loss. The same evening he took his 
leave of Finow, by performing the ceremony of moc' 
moey * and repaired with his men to the canoes, in 

* A kind of salute paid to the greatest chief present, 
and consists in bowing the head (whilst sitting cross-leg- 
ged before him^, so that the fordiead touches the sole of 
the chief's foot, who sits in like manner, and then touch- 
ing the sole of the same foot (which may be either the 
r(srAt or the left), first with the palm and then with the 
^ac^ of ^f^ch l^and. The ceremony is aiiD peT^onaeA. Vj 



THE TQNGA ISLANDS. 19 

which the foUo^nng morning he departed for 
Hapai. 

Tooho Toa was greatly pleased with the ap- 
pearance of the new garrison, declaring that he 
had never seen any thing so warlike and fonni- 
dahle, not even at the Fiji Islands, where he had 
lived several years. Rnow had indeed given the 
strictest orders to make every thing appear as im- 
posing as possible, producing a tasteful display of 
clubs, spears, and arrows, arranged against the 
houses, with wreaths of flowers and certain warlike 
decorations. Upon the whole, when the size and 
strength of the place, with its situation, was taken 
into consideration, it was perhaps by far the most 
formidable fortification that had ever been esta- 
blished in any of those clusters of islands in the 
midst of the Southern Ocean. 

About a month after the departure of Toobo Toa, 
during which time nothing particular occurred, a 
fisherman from one of the neighbouring islands 
brought word that a small canoe had been seen 

persons wfao may have accidentally touched any part of a 
superior chief's person, or any thing whatever belonging 
to him ; and, unless this ceremony is performed after such 
contact, they cannot eat, as they suppose, without danger 
of swelling up and dying. They are very subject to in*' 
durations of the liver, and certain forms of scrofula, here- 
after to be spoken of^ and which, as they conceive, fre- 
quently happen from a neglect of this ceremony, after 
touching any thing belonging to a superior chief. They 
most ft«quently, however, perform it^ without knowing 
themselves to have occasion for it, merely as a matter of 
caution. And if a man has eaten any thin^ without peiv 
forming thb ceremony when he had occasion for it, the 
chief applies the sole of his foot also to the man's belly, as 
a greater security against such swqY^h^ "^Qfe-TBs»\ns»jN^ 
litenllf to touch or press* (^See uo\»» '^qV, V '^» \^^'^ 



20 TRANSACTIONS AT 

coming in a direction from Hapai. In a short time 
it arrived, bringing one of Finow's principal war- 
riors, Lolo Hea Cow Keifoo, and his two brothers, 
young lads, who had been at tlie Hapai Islands in 
consequence of the illness of their father, who re- 
sided there, but was since dead. They brought 
intelligence that Toobo Toa had ordered all the 
canoes to be put in a state for sea ; and his 
fighting men to hold themselves in readiness to 
depart at a moment's notice. In consequence 
of this order, Lolo Hea suspected, and indeed it 
was universally believed, that it was Toob6 Toa's 
intention to make a descent upon the island of 
Vavaoo. Hence he took the first opportunity to 
make his escape with his two brothers ; for, had 
he waited on the invading army, he could not in 
honour have deserted it, and would thus have been 
obliged to fight against^Ms own countrymen. Fi- 
now, on hearing this intelligence, was not back- 
ward in making the most judicious preparations 
to receive his enemy, although he believed that 
his intention was to land his men at Tonga, with 
a view to assist the garrison before spoken of ; but 
still he held himself well prepared, according to 
the Tonga maxim, never to suspect any thing 
without immediately making preparations for the 
worst, Mr Mariner now got ready a caiTonade, 
which having been spiked had hitherto not been 
used. Having nothing wherewith to drill the 
touch-hole, he collected together a vast quantity 
of wood, and made a large fire, in the midst plac- 
ing the gun, of which, when hot, he readily cleared 
the touch-hole. It was then mounted upon a carri- 
age. Thus Finow had three gmia, six barrels of 
powder, and plenty of shot, for almost aW l\\es\vQt 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 21 

whidi had been fired in he fonner attacks upon 
the ganison were again found and collected ; be- 
sides which he also sent a canoe to the islands of 
Togoo, N. W, of Vavaoo, to collect a cargo of round 
black pebbles, which are found there in abundance. 
With all this ammunition, Finow was fai* su* 
perior to Toobo Toa, who had only two guns, 
and was withal very short both of powder and shot. 
All these preparations, howeyer, were never re- 
quired, for, shortly after, Tonga-mana's conoe ar- 
rived, bringing intelligenjce t^ Toobo Toa had 
proceeded with his army to the assistance of the 
ganison before spoken of in the island of Tonga. 

About this time there happened a very heavy 
storm of thunder and li^tning, which is always 
considered ominous by the natives, and esteemed 
the harbinger of some great event, such as invfr- 
sion^ death of a great chief, arrival of an European 
ship, &C. This event therefore produced, as it 
generally does, considerable anxiety in the minds 
of the people, which was much increased by the 
dreams of several women. One dreamed that 
during the time of the hiac/ii, Tooitonga, at the 
head of a number of hotooas, attacked them, and 
broke to pieces the consecrated yams ; another, 
that she had been at Bolotoo, and heard a decree 
of Higooleo (one of the principal hotooas), that 
Vavaoo should shortly experience some, great ca- 
lamity, because the people had neglected some 
particular and important ceremonies. In this state 
of the public mind, parties were sent to the outer 
islands to keep a pei-petual watch, and to bring 
immediate intelligence of any canoe that might 
appear. In the course of a \iU\e Ijoae, \X "^^ "t^ 

VOL. 17. B 



S2 TRANSACTIONS AT 

marked that Tooitonga decreased considerably in 
size, losing flesh every day, although otherwise 
in good health. It was not long, howerer, be- 
fore he began to complain of wc^Bikness and loss 
of appetite. His illness beginning thus to be con- 
firmed, occasioned his reUtions and attendants 
to have reconrse to the nsual ceremonies on 
such melancholy occasions. Accordingly, every 
day one or other of his young relations had a 
little finger cut off, as a propitiatory offering to 
the gods for the sins of the sick man. * These 
sacrifices, however, were found of no avail ; and 
greater were soon had recourse to. Accord- 
ingly, three or four children were strangled, at 
different times, in the manner which has already 
been related ; and invocations were made to the 
deities atfytocasy consecrated houses, and in the 
persons of the priests, but still without effect, for 
the gods were deaf to their entreaties ; and the 
illness of the sacred chief grew every day more 
alarming. As a last resource, to excite the com- 
passion of the deities, they carried the emaciat- 
ed person of 'Tooitonga to the place where his 

* Nothing is more common in these islands than the 
sacrifice of a little finger on occasion of the illness of a 
superior relation ; insomuch, that there is scarcely a 
grown-up person (unless a very great chief, who can have 
but few superior relations) but who has lost the little fin- 
ger of both hands. Nor is there ever any dispute between 
two persons, with a view to get exempt from this ceremo- 
ny : On the contrary, Mr Mariner has witnessed a violent 
contest between two children of five years of age, each 
claiming the favour of having the ceremony performed on 
him, so little do they fear the pun of the operation. The 
j>3Jn, Indeed, is but very trifling, from the mode, probably* 
»/r fvJjjcIj It is performtiij which will be fully deioibed in 
another place. 



THK TONGA ISLANDS. 2S 

pi'Of ia kms were cooked — m the same manner 
as fmow was carried : — ^bat notwithstanding all 
ifaisy death oyertook him, after six weeks illness. 
About a month or six weeks after the funeral 
ceremonies were finished, (which will be described 
imder the head of Religions Ceremonies, in the 
sequel), finow, who had not broken his head 
(as they call it) at the graye of his father, 
because, perhaps, on a public occasion, it would 
have looked in him like an ostentatious display of 
what might haye been thought affeded feeling, 
resolyed to perform this ceremony in a more pri- 
vate manner, accompanied only by a few of his 
warriors, to whom he now signified his intention. 
Accordingly, one morning, he and his men began 
to prepare themselyes for this afiair, when unfor- 
tunately an accident happened, which to us Eu- 
ropeans, in the present times, would not have at- 
tracted the slightest attention ; but which, in the 
estimation of these people, was a matter pregnant 
with the most important and serious consequen- 
ces. Mr Mariner, on entering the house, happen- 
ed to sneeze 1 1 Immediately eyery one present 
threw down his club, for who would proceed on 
so important an expedition after so dire an omen! * 
Finow's eyes flashed with the fire of rage ; — di- 
recting them full on Mr Mariner, he cursed him 
with the most bitter curse, *' strike your god ! "— 
and, rising from the ground, demanded why he 
came there? To this Mr Mariner answered, 
'^ Your father would not haye asked me the qnes- 

• To sneeze at the moment of setting out on an expe- 
dition argues, in their opinion, the most fatal results. 
Cven FSnow, who bad a superior loiud) ciQi^iX^ ^^^ ^^s^ 
from it tin depth of the impreanoiu 



24 TRANSACTIONS AT 

tion ; and I am surprised thai you are to mxnth 
unlike him, as to believe in .such supentitioiia. 
nonsense. " This was too inach for the king to 
bear, particularly before so many of his men; and 
snatching up a club that lay near him, he would 
have instantly despatched Mr Mariner, if some of 
the men present had not pushed him out of the 
bouse, while the rest held Finow. Upon this Mr 
Mariner wislied him good bye * — said, tliat if he 
wanted him he might send for him, adding, that 
he did not before know that his presence was so 
disagreeable. Sev(3ral men then came out of the 
house, and hurried Mr Marinfir away» lest Finow, 
before his passion had time to cool, should pursue 
him, and effect some desperate revenge. He re- 
tired, therefore, to a house near the grave* 
Shortly after, Finow having consulted with his 
men upon the subject of Mr Mariner s sneezing, 
resolved that, as he was a foreigner, and had dif- 
ferent gods, his sneezing was not to be considered 
of any consequence. They then proceeded to the 
grave to perfoim tlie ceremony, when Finow and 
all his men, inspired with enthusiasm, cut and 
bruised their heads in a shocking manner. Finow> 
in particular, not contented with the usual instru- 
ments, made use of a saw, the teeth of which he 
struck against his skull with such vehemence and 
good-will, that he staggered as he went home 
with loss of blood. These scenes need not be 
further described ; we have already had enoog^ 
of them. 

Mr Mariner, immediately after this, proceeded 

* The expresnon answering to this in tlit Tonga laa- 
sn*agc IB Sea ffer nefo^ (and you remain)) and is a phnM 
aJwajra used in taking leave of any one. 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 25 

to his plantation, resolving to remain there, and 
see how long Finow woald be contented without 
his company. This conduct, according to the 
manners and customs of Europeans, appears ex- 
tremely haughty, arrogant, and presumptuous ; for 
although Finow, in this instance, was imdoubtedly 
much to blame in putting himself in such violent 
rage, Mr Mariner, being so much the inferior, we 
might suppose it to be his duty first to ask pardon 
for the offence so unintentionally committed. But 
this plan would be far from producing a good ef- 
fect in the Tonga Islands; on the contrary, he 
would have been thought a mean-spirited fellow, 
ever willing to sink himself below the dignity of a 
man, to purchase the pardon and friendship of a 
superior. And had he acted in this way, the 
king would most undoubtedly have thought mean- 
ly of him, and never again have made him a con-' 
Jidential friend, which always implies something 
of an equality. 

In the evening, (a few hours after his arrival at 
his plantation), a girl came with a message from 
his adopted mother, assuring him that he was per- 
fectly safe, Finow having expressed his extreme 
sorrow for his own conduct. She advised him, 
however, not to return to the king till after several 
invitations, nor even till he came in person to re- 
quest a jenewal of his friendship ; for although it 
was dangerous in Tonga to be too haughty, — on 
the other hand, upon the principle above allud- 
ed to, too much submission would be as bad. Be- 
sides, as she was shortly going to live at the Hapai 
Islands along with her father, she wished before- 
liand to see Mr Mariner safe wgivnaX ^ VoN^a^ 

b2 



* 



26 TRANSACTIONS AT 

designs and insults from inferior chieiii» by thus 
counselling him to act with becoming dignity to- 
wards even the king himself, whose Mendship and 
sentiments towards Mr Mariner she well knew. 
He therefore took her advice^ and remained at 
the plantation ten days, notwithstanding repeated 
'messages from Finow, and entreaties to return ; 
and at last he so intimidated the messengers, by 
threatening to shoot them if they appeared again 
with that errand, that Finow resolved to fetch him 
himself. Accordingly one morning he entered his 
house, and having awakened him^ saluted him in 
the kindest and most afiectionste manner, begged 
pardon for his too hasty condnct, and wept a- 
bundantly. From this period tfaey were insepar- 
able friends. 

During this reconciliation, Finow explained to 
Mr Mariner the canse of his unseasonable rage a- 
gainst him for sneezing. It was not that he had 
any superstitious idea of it as a bad omen, but that 
it might haye this effect upon the minds of his men, 
and pot off his intended ceremony. 



TUB TONGA IS&AMDS. 27 



CHAPTER II. 

In consequence of Tooitonga's death, the great 
obstacle to shutting up the communication with 
Hapai was, for a time at least, removed ; but that 
it might be so more completely, the king came 
to a determination of having no more Tooitongas, 
and thus to put a stop for ever to the ceremony 
of inachi; conceiving that there was very little 
public utility in what was supposed to be the di- 
vine authority of Tooitonga, but that it was, on 
the contrary, a great and useless expense to the 
people. This measure, as may be imagined, did 
not prove objectionable to the wishes of the multi- 
tude, as it relieved them from a very heavy tax, 
and, in times of scarcity, one extremely oppressive. 
In regard to the reli^ous objections which one 
might suppose would be started against this mea- 
sure, it must be noticed that the island of Tonga 
had, for many years, b%en deprived of the power, 
presence, and influence of Tooitonga, owing to its 
political situation ; and, notwithstanding, appeared 
no less ftiToured with the bounties of heaven and 
of nature than the other islands, excepting the 
mischief and destruction which arose from hu- 
man passions. If Tonga t!bwrfcfl» crtqSA ^s»s^. 
without this divine d)ie{> yfts% tio\. Nvrw^> ^ 



28 TRANSACTIONS AT 

any other island ? This strong argument grow* 
ing still stronger, upon a little reflection, brought 
the chiefs, matabooles, and older members of so- 
ciety, to the conclusion, that Tooitonga was of no 
use at all ; and the people, ever willing to fail in- 
to measures that greatly promote their own in- 
terest, notwithstanding a few religious scruples, 
very soon came to be of the same opinion. 

As soon as Finow had come to this determina- 
tion, and to that of shutting up aU commimication 
with the Hapai people, it became necessary to ac- 
quaint Tongamana^ on his next arriyal, and to for^ 
bid him ever to return to VavBoo. In the mean 
time, however, as Finow had promised Tooi Bo- 
lotoo that his daughter (Mr Mariner s adopted 
mother) should be allowed to proceed to him at 
the Hapaisy she was ordered to get herself and at- 
tendants ready to accompany Tongamana on his 
way back. Now, it happened that this person 
had a great nmnber of female attendants, many of 
whom were the handsomest women in Vavaoo ; 
and, as the leave granted her to depart was equal- 
ly a license for the departure of her attendants, 
Finow became apprehensive that the expatriation 
of so many fine women would occasion consider- 
able discontent among his young men, and per- 
haps tempt some of them to take the same 
step. He sent, therefore^ for Mdfi Hdbe, and 
told her, that, with her leave, he would con- 
trive some means to keep back her women : in 
which she perfectly coincided — two favourite at- 
tendants excepted. Matters being so far agreed 
^^^ Finow, to avoid the appearance oi \tkya&\Ac» 
f^ ^^''s part, gave Mr Mariner instructiotv* \io>n \ft 
^4 as if jf; ^^y^ ^ thought and \mpuW oi V6» 



THB TONGA ISLANDS. 99 

ewn* Accordin^y, when Tongamana's canoe was 
ready to depart, and every one in it, saye Mdfi 
H^be and her attendants, she was carried on board, 
and her two fayonrites immediately followed. At 
this moment, when the rest of the women were 
about to proceed into the canoe, Mr Mariner, who 
had purposely stationed himself close at hand with 
his musket, seized hold of the foremost, and threw 
her into the water, and forbad the rest to follow, 
at the peril of their lives. He then called out to 
finow's attendants, who were seated on the beach, 
to come to his assistance, pretending to express 
his wonder at their folly, in permitting those wo- 
men to leave them, for whose protection they had 
often hazarded their lives in battle. Upon this 
(as previously concei-ted) they ran forward, and 
effectually prevented any of them from departing. 
While their lamentations yet rent the air, Finow 
came down to the beach, and inquiring the cause 
of this disturbance, they told him that Togi (Mr 
Mariner) had used violent measures to prevent 
their accompanying their beloved mistress, and 
that the young chiefs had cruelly assisted him. 
One of these chiefs (Talo) then addressed Finow 
— ^^ We have all agreed to lose our lives rather 
than suffer these women, for whom we have so 
often fought, to take leave of us for ever. It is 
probable that we shall soon be invaded by the peo- 
ple of Hapai ; and are we to suffer some of the 
finest of our women to go over to the men who 
will shortly become om* enemies'? Those women, 
the sight and recollection of whom have so often 
cheered our hearts in the time of danger, and en- 
abled na to meet the bravest «xidL %eK0iX> ^^^oas^^ 
BBd pnt them to the nmt? li wt ^w»e^«t^ ^» 



so TRANSACTIONS AT 

be seat away, in the name of the gods, send awar^ 
also the guns, the powder, and all onr spears, om 
clubs, our bows and arrows, and erery weapon oE 
defence. With the departure of the women one* 
wish to liye departs also, for then we shall haye^ 
nothii^ left worth protecting, and, having no mo-<» 
motive to defend ourselves, it matters little how wet 
die. " Finow upon this was obliged to explain t» 
Tongamana the necessity of yielding to the sen- 
timents of these young chiefs, to prevent the dis- 
content and disturbance which might otherwise 
take place. The canoe was now ordered to leave 
Vavaoo for the last time, and never more to re- 
turn ; for if she or any other canoe should again 
make her appearance from Hapai, her approach 
would be considered hostile, and proper measures 
adopted. The women on the beach then earnest- 
ly petitioned Finow to be allowed a last ferewell 
of their dear and beloved mistress, which being a- 
greed to, nearly two hours were taken up in this 
affecting scene. 

From this time Finow devoted his attention to 
the cultivation of the islMid ; and the exertions of 
this truly patriotic chief were so far successfnl 
that the country soon began to assume a more 
beautiful and cultivated appearance. Nor did he 
in, the mean time neglect diose things which were 
necessary for the better defence of the place : the 
fortress underwent frequent examination and im- 
provements. In the midst of these occupations, 
however, a circumstance happened which might 
have been the cause of much civil disturbance. 
It is well worth relating, as it affords an admirable 
character of one of the personages concerned, and 
Bhowa a principle of generosity^ wlaicbi icrasX «ffiai4 



THE TONGA I3LANDS. SI 

the highest pleasure to those who love to hear of 
acts honourable to human nature. On one of the 
days of the ceremony known by the name of 
tow towy the young chief, Talo, entered into a 
wrestling-match with Hala Api Api. It should 
however be noticed, that a few days before, they 
had held a debate upon some subject in which 
neither could convince the other, and on such an 
occasion, it is usual to settle the affair by wrestling : 
not that this mode is considered in the light of a 
knock-down argument, perfectly convindng in its 
nature, but it is the custom to end the afiair, by a 
contention in physical strength ; afl;er whieh the one 
who is beaten seldom presumes to intrude his opi- 
nion again on the other, at least not upon the same 
sul^ect. Hala Api Api therefore challenged Talo 
on the spot. For a long time the contest was 
doubtful, both being well made, and both men of 
great strength. At length, howev^, it was the 
&te of Talo to fall, and thus the contest ended. 
T^ie fallen chief, chagrined at this event, could 
not allow, in his own mind, that his antagonist 
had overcome him by superior strength, but ra- 
ther owing to an accidental slip of 1& own foot : 
and consequently resolved to enter the lists 
with him again at some future and favourable 
opportunity. This occasion of the ceremony of 
tow tow presenting itself, Talo left his companions, 
and seated himself immediately opposite Hala Api 
Api— a conduct which plainly indicated his wish 
that the latter in particular should engage with 
him. A conduct, too, which, though sometimes 
adopted, is generally considered indicative of a 
quarrelsome disposition, becKos^ ^^^ ^^sa^&ss^si^ 
ought HOC to be made to oiift Va ^5w!^'!wiMt'>\s«^^ 



32 TRANSACTIONS AT 

any individual among those of a different place or 
party who chooses to accept it. As soon as Hala 
Api Api and his friends perceived this, it was a- 
greed among them, that he alone should oppose 
him. In a short time Talo arose, and advanced ; 
Hala Api Api immediately closed with him and 
threw him, with a severe iiall. At this moment, 
the shouts of the people ^eo exasperated Talo (for 
he had made sure in his own mind of gaining a 
victory), that, on ^e impulse of passion, he struck 
his antagonist, whilst rising off him, a violent blow 
in the face ; on which Hala Api Api threw him- 
self in a posture of defence, and demanded if he 
wished to box with him. Talo, without returning 
an answer, snatdied a tocco tooco, * and would evi- 
dently have run him through the body, if he had 
not been v^ithheld. Hala Api Api, with a noble- 
ness of spirit worthy of admiration, seemed to take 
no notice of this, but, smiling, returned to his seat 
amid the acclamations oi the whole assembly. AH 
applauded his greatness of soul, as conspicuous 
now as on other occasions. Finow, in particular, 
showed signs of much wtisfiEU^on; and, in the 
evening, when he was drinking cava with the ma^ 
tabooles, whilst this noble diief had the honour to 
wait on them, the king addressed him, returning 
thanks for his presence of mind and coolness of 
temper — conduct which had placed his superiori- 
ty and bravery in a far more splendid light than if 
he had given way to resentment. As to his re- 
tiring, without seeking fkrther to prolong the quar- 
rel, he was convinced (he said) that he had in 
view nothing but the peace and happiness of the 

* A spear about five feet long, used by them as a walk- 
y'^^ su'ck, but seldom employed in battle. 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 33 

people, which would undoubtedly have been dis- 
turbed by an open rupture with a man who was at 
the head of so powerful a party. To this the 
young chief made only this reply : — " Co ho wo- 
6ni ; " ♦ appearing overcome by a noble modesty 
at being so mach praised (contrary to custom) be-* 
fore so large an assembly. 

In the meanwhile, Talo, conscious of his error, 
and ashamed to appear in public, retired to one 
of his plantations called Mote; whilst Hala Api 
Api, imagining the distress of his feelings, resolv- 
ed upon a reconciliation, and having intimated 
this to his men, he desired them to go armed, in 
case any misunderstanding should accidentally 
arise. Accordingly, one morning, they left the 
tnooa, giving it out that they were going up the 
country to kill hogs, lest the circumstance of his 
men being armed should occasion false and dan- 
gerous suspicions respecting his intention ; and, at 
the same time, he invited several of Finow's men 
to come and partake of the feast. So soon as they 
had left die fortress, he imparted to them all his 
real intention to offer Talo his former friendship, 
and to assure him that he had forgotten the late 
affair. When they arrived near the plantation, 
Hala Api Api went on a short distance before, 
and on entering the house found Talo fast asleep, 
attended only by his wife and one of her servants, , 
who were employed in fanning him. He left his 
spear on the outside of the house, and carried 
his club in with him. The noise he made on en- 
tering awoke Talo ; who, imagining that the other 

• Meaning literally, ** it is youT tcul\i •,"— 'Od»X.\^ >N>^aX 
you My IS trot* 

VOL. 11. C 



34 TRANSACTIONS AT 

had come to assassinate him, started up, and, seizing 
his club, rushed out of the house. Hala Api 
Api pursued him, taking with him his spear ; his 
feelings being greatly hurt to see one fly him so 
cowardly, who of late had matched himself as his 
equal, and at length became so exasperated, he 
threw his spear, which however fortimately got 
entangled in some bushes. At this moment Talo 
was considerably in advance, in consequence of 
the time which it took Hala Api Api to go to the 
opposite side of the house for his spear. The 
latter was noted, however, for his swiftness, and, 
conscious that he ahoiild overtake him, he conti* 
nued the pursoit. Before Talo had crossed the 
field of high grass adjoining his house, he was im* 
der the necessity of throwing off his gruUoOy and 
very shortly after his club ; which Hsda Api Api 
picked up, and, though loaded with two clubs, 
boimded after him with such extraordinary fleet- 
ness, that, before they had half crossed the next 
field, he overtook him. Catching hold of him by a 
wreath of flowon that hung round his neck, he 
exclaimed with generous indignation, '' Where 
did you expect to escape to ? Are yon a bird, that 
you can fly to the skies, or a spirit, that you can 
vanish to Bolotoo ? Here is your club, which you 
so cowardly threw away ; take it, and learn that I 
come not to dieprive you of life, but to proffer you 
my friendship, which you once prized so highly." 
With that he embraced him, and tearing his own 
gnatooy gave him half to wear. By this time Hala 
Api Api's men coming up, he despatched them im- 
mediately to the garrison, to prevent any disturb- 
ances which might arise from a fiaJse report of this 
adventure ; for a iew of Talo's men \)m|^T«B VJc^ 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 35 

house, and mistaking Ha!a Api Api's intention, 
imagined the fkte of their chief inevitable, and had 
betaken themselyes immediately to the garrison, 
with a view to excite the adherents of Talo to 
revenge his death. He was a powerful chief, had 
belonged to the former garrison, and would un- 
donbtedly have had most of the chiefs of Vavaoo 
for the avengers of his cause. The two chiefs re- 
turned as soon as possible to Felletoa, to show the 
people that they had entered again into a fnendly 
alliance. When they arrived they found the whole 
place in a state of disturbance, all being up in 
arms, party against party, but at the sight of them, 
matters were soon adjusted, and their mutual 
friendship became stronger than ever. 

A short time after this, the people of Hapai 
clearly showed their intention of commencing hos- 
tilities ; but were defeated in the veiy act by the 
vigilance and bravery of some of Finow's young 
warriors, among whom Mr Mariner had the ho- 
nour to take an active part. One day most of the 
large sailing canoes were launched, for the double 
purpose of ptocunng from some of the outer islands 
a quantity of coarse sand, and to convey those 
whose business it was to cut flag-stones for the 
grave of Tooitonga, to diiferent places. Owing, 
however, to contrary winds, they Were not able 
to make the shores of Vavaoo that evening ; and, 
in consequence, Finow, who was with them, pro- 
posed to remain at the island of Toonga duiing 
the night. Shortly afterwards, they received in- 
telligence from a fisherman that a canoe, appar- 
ently from Hapai, was approaching^ and^ it 'w^a^ 
supposed, with an hostile intewV ^» ^*^ ^^^ ^ 
quaathyofumu on board, and twkky "w^w^* X^^^rr^* 



36 TRANSACTIONS AT 

sequence ,of this, the young warriors requested of 
Finow leave to proceed in small canoes, (the wind 
being unfavourable for large ones), to cut them 
off. After a due consultation this was granted ; 
and eleven canoes, manned with the choicest war- 
riors, paddled towards a small island at a little 
distance, on which the Hapai people had landed. 
As it was a moonlight night, the enemy saw them, 
and concealed themselves behind certain bushes 
at a small distance from the beach, where they 
supposed Finow's men would land. They were 
right in their conjecture. As soon as Finow's 
warriors were arrived, the enemy rushed upon 
them with their usual yell, and occasioned much 
disorder and alai'm ; but the Vavapo warriors soon 
rallying, they pressed in return so closely and 
bravely on their opponents, that they were ob- 
liged to retreat towards the place where their 
canoe lay. Here a most severe conflict ensued. 
Unfortunately, in hurrying on shore from the ca- 
noes, Mr Mariner's ammunition got wet, which 
rendered his musket of little use ; hence he was 
obliged to employ only a bow and arrows. The 
enemy, finding themselves so well matched, and 
thinking they might soon be attacked by forces 
from the main land (Vavaoo), embarked as speed- 
ily as they could ; in doing which, they lost ten 
or twelve men. Mr Mariner again tried to use 
his musket, and, after repeated trials, succeeded 
in shooting the two men that steered (it being a 
double canoe), after which he returned with his 
own party to their canoes, leaving nineteen of the 
^^y dead on the field, besides tbe two VKJ^e^ \xv 
i^canoe. Their own loss was four \uXVe(i ouxJaa 
^MDd three others, who died aiterww^ ^^ 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 37 

their weunds. The enemy were ahout sixty in 
number ; they fifty. In this affair Mr Mariner 
unfortunately received a violent blow on the knee 
by a stone from a sling, which lamed him for a 
considerable length of time. It appeared, from the 
account of a boy who was wounded and taken 
prisoner, that the enemy intended to proceed as 
secretly as possible to the westward of Vavaoo, 
and, under cover of the night, make incursions on 
shore, and do all the mischief in their power. 

For the space of two months after this affair, 
no circumstance worthy of note took place ; no 
other attack from the people of Hapai was attempt- 
ed, and all seemed peaceable and quiet. About 
the end of this period, however, there happened a 
circumstance, the most fortunate of all to Mr 
Mariner, viz. that of his escape. In this time of 
peace, when he had nothing in which to employ 
himself but objects of recreation and amusement, 
sometimes with Finow or other chiefs, and some- 
times by himself, he would frequently go out for 
two or three days together, among the neighbour- 
ing small islands, on a fishing excursion. As he 
was one evening returning homeward in his canoe, 
after having been out three days, he espied a sail 
in the westward horizon, just as the sun had de- 
scended below it. This heart-cheering sight no 
sooner caught his attention than he pointed it out 
to the three men with him (his servants that work- 
ed on his plantation), and desired them to paddle 
him on board, holding out to them what an advan- 
tageous opportunity now offi^ed itself to enrich 
themselves with beads, axe&, \ooVcLTi^-^«^^^'ey^ ^"5^*% 
an opportunity which they m\^ TkfcN^v: ^5gscc^^s^!fes^ 



38 TRANSACTIONS AT 

with. To this they replied, that they had seen it 
before, but that their fear of his wishing to go on 
board prevented them pointing it out to him, hav- 
ing often heard their chiefe say, that they never 
meant to let him go ; hence they were apprehen- 
sive, if they suffered him to escape, that their 
brains would be knocked out on their return. 
Mr Mariner then condescended to entreat ihem to 
pull towards the vessel, promising them very rich 
rewai'ds. After conversing together, and whis- 
pering something between themselves, they told 
him, that, notwithstanding their great esteem and 
respect for him, they owed it as a duty to their 
chiefs to refuse his request ; upon which they 1be- 
gan to paddle towards the nearest shore. Mr 
Mariner instantly demanded, in an elevated tone 
of voice, why they talked about the fear of chiefs ; 
were they not his servants, and had he not a right 
to act with them as he pleased ? He then took 
his musket from behind him, when the man who 
sat nearest immediately declared, that, if he made 
any resistance, he would die in opposing him, ra- 
ther than allow him to escape. Upon this, Mr 
Mariner summoned up all his strength, and struck 
him a most violent blow, or rather stab, near the 
loins, with the muzzle of the piece, exclaiming at 
the same time> " Ta gi ho Hotoouy co ho male 
e. " * This lunge produced a dangerous wound ; 
for the musket, being a very old one, had grown 
quite sharp at the nxjozzle, and was, besides, im- 
pelled by the uncommon force with which the 

• Meaning, literally, ** Strike your Hotooa, there*« 
j^our death ! " which are forms of energetic expressions, 
used like oaths, on extraordinary occasions, calcuUtad lo 
•*;p^vs3 vengeance. 



THB TONGA ISLANDS, 3V 

prospect of escape inspired him. The man 
fell flat in the bottom of the canoe, senseless^ 
and scarcely with a groan, f Mr Mariner is- 
stantly palled his 1^ out straight ; then present- 
ed his musket to the other two, who appeared 
somewhat panicnstruck, and threatened to blow 
out their brains if they did not instantly obey his 
orders. They accordLagly put about, and made 
towards the vessel. The one whom Mr Mariner 
wounded was a piece of a warrior, but the other 
two had never been in battle, and, as he supposes^ 
imagined he could fire off his musket when he 
pleased without loading it. Be this as it may, 
they were now perfectly obedient, and he encou- 
raged them farther, by reminding them that they 
had a good excuse to make to their chiefs, since it 
was by compulsion, and not by will, that they 
acted. In the mean time, he kept a strict eye 
both upon them and the man in the bottom of the 
canoe ; upon those, lest they should take an oppor- 
tunity to upset it, and swim to the shore, with 
which they were well acquainted ; and upon this, 
lest he should recover and make an unexpected 
attack. They did not come up with the vessel 
till about daylight next morning, owing to the dis- 
tance they had to go, for they were about four 
miles off the north-west part of Vavaoo, and the 

f This roan, whose name was Teoo Fonon^, well de- 
served the fate he met with. He used to beat his wife un- 
mercifully, for which Mr Mariner had frequently knocked, 
him down with a club. He formerly had a wife who, in 
time of scarcity, he killed and ate. Since that time, hav- 
ing several children, more llian he wished, he killed a cou- 
ple of them to get them out of the wa^. Hi* b«5t o(v«\Je- 
ties were being an cxceWeut fia\iaTft«ft, «cA%.NWi\«^ 
working Mhw, 



40 TRANSACTIONS AT 

ship bore wcst-soulh-west, about five miles disr-' 
tant, steering under easy sail, to the south end of 
that island. Besides which, they were much hr 
tigued with having pulled about the whole day 
against a heavy sea, and were short of any provi- 
sions, except raw fish. During the night, the man 
in the bottom of the canoe lay perfectly still, and 
showed no signs of life, except now and then a 
slight gurgling noise in his throat. As soon as 
the canoe pulled up alongside the brig, Mr Mari- 
ner, without stopping to hail, on the impulse of 
the moment, jumped up into the main chains, and 
was very near being knocked overboard by the 
sentinel, who took him for a native, for his skin 
was grovm very brown, his hair, very long, and 
tied up in a knot, with a turban round the head, 
and an apron of the leaves of the chi tree round 
liis waist. This disguise would have warranted 
the conduct of the sentinel, but, as soon as Mr 
Mariner spoke English, and told him he was an 
Englishman, be allowed him to come on deck, 
where the captain cordially shook hands with him. 
The latter had heard from the captain of a schooner 
the whole unfortunate afiiedr of the Port au Prince, 
for the schooner brought away two men from one 
of these islands, while Mr Mar.ner was in another 
quarter, upon some business for Finow. 

The captain now presented him with a pair of 
trowsers and a shirt ; and the latter being neither 
very new nor very clean ; he took the pains to 
wash it, and hang it up in the rigging to dry. In 
the morning however, it had disappeared, at the 
honest instigation of somebody : hence, his whole * 
fitack of apparel consisted of the said "^ak of trow- 
'^o/yf ; nor did he get better proTided la^Wft «rcw^^ 



TUB TONGA ISLANDS. 41 

in China, about seven weeks afterwards. But to 
return to the subject. The brig proved to be the 
Favourite, Captain Fisk, from Port Jackson, 
about 130 tons burthen; having on board ninety 
tons of mother of pearl shells, procured from the 
Society Islands. She intended to make up her 
voys^e with sandal- wood from the Fiji Islands, and 
thence to proceed to China. 

On Mr Mariner requesting the captain to giva 
the men who brought him some beads, as a re- 
ward for their trouble, and also an axe as a pre- 
sent for Finow, he liberally complied ; and the 
canoe left the ship, with a message from Mr Mar 
riner to the long, requesting him to come on board. 
As to the wounded man, he was in all probability 
dead ; at least the other two seemed to think so 
by his not stirring, and they took no trouble with 
him. By this time lliere were about two hundred 
small canoes near the vessel, and several large ones, 
so that all the people of Vavaoo seemed to be as- 
sembled to view the brig, for the whole beach was 
also crowded. As the vessel was very short of 
provisions, a brisk traffic was now carried on with 
the natives by the captain and mate, for ^^ms and 
hogs, &c. ; and orders were given to the ci^ not 
to purchase any more trinkets, till they had procur- 
ed plenty of provisions. About the middle of the 
day Finow came alongside with his sister and seve- 
ral of her female attendants, bringing off, as a pre- 
sent for Mr Mariner, five large hogs, and forty 
yams, each weighing not less than thirty pounds, 
and some of the largest sixty or seventy. These 
things Mr Mariner begged leave to transfer •te 

♦ It is a Tery common thing amow^ V>2i^ Tfflj2W«» \x:^\xva<> 
fer a present 



42 TRANSACTIONS AT 

the captain, akid presented them accordingly. Nof-* 
vrithstanding repeated messages from the chiefs 
on shore to Finow, requesting him to return, he 
resolTed to sleep on botord that night, if the cap- 
tain wotdd allow him, which he readily did. The 
women, however, intimated their wish to return, 
not liking the thought of trusting their persons a- 
mong a number of strange men ; and Mr Mariner 
found it very difficult to remove their scruples, 
assuring them that they should not be molested. 
At lengtb, however, they consented to remain, on 
his promise to take care of them, and to roll them 
up in a sail, in which state they lay all night in the 
steerage, and, as they said, slept comfortably. 

' As to Finow, he was very well contented with 
sleeping on a sail on the cabin deck ; and the wea- 
ther being remarkably fine, the brig did not come 
to an anchor, but stood off and on during the whole 
of the night. At daylight canoes came alongside 
in great numbers ; but from prudent motives, dic- 
tated by former disasters, no more than three of 
the natives were allowed to come on board at a 
time, six sentinels being kept constantly on deck 
for that purpose. In the canoes were several chiefs, 
who came to request Finow to return on shore, 
as the people were greatly alarmed lest he should 
form a determination of going to Papalangi (land 
of white people). They brought off some cava for 
him, but which he declined drinking, saying that 
he had tasted some on board (wine) which was 
far preferable : indeed he considered it so much 
superior, that tlie thoughts of cava quite disgusted 
him. He made a hearty dinner at the captain s 
table — atejilenty of roast pork, with whicli he ad- 

^^?/rcf/ fvry much the flavour of the sage and owVona^ 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 43 

The fowls he cared little ahout, hut partook of some 
made dishes. The ladies also ate very heartily. Fi- 
now handled a knife and fork, though for the first 
time in his life, with very great dezteiity. Some- 
times, indeed, his majesty forgot himself a little, and 
laid hold of the meat with his fingers ; but, instantly 
recollecting that he was doing wrong, he would 
put it down again, exclaiming, woe! gooa tegnaJo! 
£hl I forget myself ! The natural politeness which 
he evinced on every occasion, charmed the captain 
and the officers so much, they could not help ac- 
knowledging that it far surpassed any other instance 
of good manners they had witnessed among the 
inhabitants of the South Sea Islands. And not 
only in behaviour, but in intelligence, he seemed 
to excel. His inquiries about the use and appli- 
cation of what he saw were frequent, and indeed 
troublesome ; but then his deportment was so af- 
fable, aifd his manner so truly polite, nobody could 
be oiFended. He requested permission to lie down 
in the captain's bed, that he might be able to say 
what none of the people of Vavaoo could boast 
of, that he had been in a Papalangi bed. Permis- 
sion being readily gi-anted, he lay down, and was 
delighted with his situation ; and said, that being 
now in an English bed, he could fancy himself in 
England. Some time after, being left in the cabin 
by himself, though watched unknown to him, he 
did not offer to take, or even touch, a single bead, 
or any thing else, excepting the captain's hat ; but 
which, not choosing to put on without asking 
leave, he went on deck on purpose to request Mr 
Manner to obtain permission of the captain for so 
great a liberty — so differenti 'w^a \ift ^wa. "^cft ^^ 
nerality of these islaadexB) 'wVio, «{&BSNNa^«^'^'^ 



44 TRANSACTIONS AT 

riofiity, if not by a less honest motive, would not 
scruple to take a man's hat off his head, unbidden, 
twirl it about, and be very careless as to returning 
it, if not reminded by the owner. About the 
middle of the day, Finow went on shore to quiet 
the people, who were become very clamorous on 
account of his long stay. But he returned on 
board soon after, bringing vdth him a quantity of 
cooked victuals, ripe bananas, &c. for the crew ; 
and also a present for the captain, consisting of a 
valuable spear and club, a lai'ge bale of gnatoo^ a 
large hog, a hundred small yams, and two canoes'- 
load of cocoa^nuU. 

So delighted was finow with every thing he 
saw on board, so high an opinion had he of the 
chaiactte of die Papakmguiy and so desirous was 
he •f arriving at those accomplishments which 
raised them so high above the Tonga people, 
he could not help several times expressing his 
wish to accompany Mr Mariner to England. On 
die third day, which was the day of the brig's 
departure, his importunities on the subject be- 
came extremely urgent, so much so, that Mr Ma- 
riner could not refrain expressing them to the 
Gimtain; but who refused (as might be expect- 
ed^ to accede to a wish which seemed to promise 
no future good to an individual in Finow's circum- 
stances, arriving in a strange coimtry, without pro- 
tection, and without patronage. This was a sore 
disappointment to one who was willing to make 
such large sacrifices for the accomplishment of his 
hopes ;'— to one who would have resigned a princely 
state and dignity, and all tlie respect paid by obcH 
tUent subjects to an arbitrary monarchy for the sake 
^f vmtiDg a country^ where, aa Mr Mansi«c eit- 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 45 

plained to him, he could expect at best but a very 
inferior mode of life, compared with what he had 
been accustomed to. But bis arguments were all 
in vain ; Finow would not — c^uld not be divested 
of his wishes. He thou^rht if he could but learn 
to read and Write, and think like a Papalangi, a 
state of poverty, with such high accomplishments, 
was far superior to regal authority in a state of 
ignorance. 

Seeing, however, that his wish was this time at 
least destined to be thwarted, he made his friend 
solemnly promise — and before their ^nal separa- 
tion made him again repeat that promise, and swiear 
to the fulfilment of it • ^ his father, and hy the 
God who governed him, that he would some time 
or another return, or endeavour to return, in a 
large canoe (a ship), and take him away with hini 
to England ; and in case his subjects should stand 
averse to such a measiure, that he would complete 
his project by force of arms. Mr Mariner bavin? 
repeated this promise, Finow embraced him, and 
shed tears. 

It would be very interesting to know what would 
be the result of removing an individual of Pinow's 
disposition and intellectual powers, from the state 
of society in which he had been brought up, into 
a civilized country — ^into a scene so widely differ- 
ent from every thing he had been accustomed to^ 
where every circumstance would be new, and every 
•object calculated to draw forth the powers of his 
natural understanding. Iinow's intellect, as we 
shall by and by more clearly see, when we take a 
survey of his character, was very hi above the 
coinmon. There was interwovea \a \SekA "sw:^ xk^* 

VOL, 11, B 



46 TRANSACTIONS AT 

tiire of his mind a spirit of philosophical inquiry, 
directed hy the best of all motives — the desire of 
human improvement ; — not the o0sprinf( of com*- 
mon curiosity, but that noble impulse, which goads 
the mind on in the pursuit of knowledge, at what- 
ever risk, and with whatever suffering. — But we 
must leave this subject for the present, to take a 
farther view of the ti'ansactions on board. 

The captain had a quantity of pearl oyster* 
shells, which are considered by the natives a very 
beautiful ornament, and very scarce among them, 
as those which they have are not capable of being 
so finely polished. These attracted f inow's fancy, 
which the captain observing, made him a present 
pf several. But, however, he did not direct his 
attention to mere matters of ornament. Reflect-r 
ing that he had very few gun-flints on shore, he 
ventured, in a very modest manner, to ask the 
captain for a supply of ap article that would be so 
useful to him * in defending his newly established 
kingdom of Vavaoo against the encroachments of 
the Hapai people ; and the captain liberally com* 
plie^ ^vith his request. 

Mr Mai'iner had on shore, in a concealed place, 
the Journal of the Port au Prince, which he was 
now desirous of securing. The reader may here 
be reminded, that in the early part of Mr Mari^ 
per s residence at these islands, the late king or«> 
dered him to give up his books and papers, which 
were afterwards bmut, as instruments of witchcraft. 
It happened, however, fortunately, that he had con*- 
cealed this Journal beneath the matting of the 
fiousa, and tijua it ^soaped the 0aix\cs« After that 

%f/now knew the use o£ a mustLet cxw^Aw^\':j ^^V 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 47 

fM^riod, reflecting what a risk there was of its being 
fiiscovered, whether he left it there, or carried it 
about with him, particularly as the times were so 
unsettled, he confided it to the care of his adopted 
motlier, Mafi H6be, who faithfully kept it in her 
possession, concealed in the middle of a bale of 
gnatoo ; which, along-with others, was always con- 
veyed to whatever island or distant place she went 
to reside. When she left Vavaoo to go and live 
with her father at the Hapai Islands, she gave it 
up to Mr Mariner, who concealed it in the middle 
of a barrel of gunpowder, without the knowledge 
of any one else ; for although he had at that time 
considerable power and mfluence, and a sufficient 
number of confidential friends, he thought it best 
to conceal it in a safe place, where no native was 
likely to find it, and consequently no ridiculous 
prejudice likely to deprive him of it. To get it 
again into his possession, he obtained the captun's 
consent to detain Know Fiji (the king^s uncle) on 
board till the Journal was brougbt to him ; and 
accordingly two natives were despatched, with 
directions where to find it. They had orders, at 
the same time, to bring back with them three Eng^ 
glishmen who were on shore, viz. James Waters, 
Thomas Brown, and Thomas Dawson. In the 
mean while, Finow Fiji, on understanding that he 
was detained a prisoner, turned very pale, and was 
evidently greatly alarmed. Even when Mr Mari- 
ner explained to him the cause, he seemed still to 
think every thing was not right ; and expressed his 
uiprehension that they were going to take him to 
England to answer for tlie crime of the H«^ 
people, in taking the Port au YntvcA, «»ftL tmqs^^^-- 
ingthe crew. The other %Bwae^ Voxa /fiaaX "^ 



48 TRANSACTIONS AT 

fears were groundless ; for, as he was not a party 
concerned in that sad afiair, the English people 
would never think of punishing the innocent for 
the guilty. " True ! " he replied, " and you know 
tliat I have always befriended you, and that I am 
not a ti*eacherott8 character ; and that rather than 
assist in taking a Papalangi ship, I would do all 
that lay in my power to prevent such an outrage/' 
To this Mr Mariner cordially gave his assent, and 
the chief seemed quite satisfied. His people in 
the canoes were, however, far from being so ;— * 
they raised great clamours, and loudly demanded 
bb liberation ; and even his own asmrances could 
scarcely remove their apprehensions, finow Fiji 
told Mr Mariner, that he should have been parti* 
cularly sorry to have been taken away, when his 
nephew was just in the infancy of his reign, and 
9iight want im counsel and ^vice, and thus be de- 
prived of th^ pleasure of seeing him govern pros- 
perously, and ipake lus people happy, which, from 
his acuity and eiu^eUent disposition, he had no 
dpubt would be the case. At length the canoe 
ireturued with the journal and the Englishmen* 
Jaqaes Watei's was not disposed, however, to re- 
turn to England. He was aQ old man, and had 
become infirm, and he reflected that it would be a 
diyS^cuU matter for him to get his bread at home ; 
and as he enjoyed at Vavaoo every convenience 
that he could desire, he chose to end his days 
there. 

Finow's sister, a girl of about fifteen years of 

^e, vf^ent on shore, and brous^it on board several 

ot/ier wojnen of rank, who were a\\ gte«Ji\v ^V^- 

fw^ tL^t (bey were allowed to come Vato \V\ft ^v^ 

H^ WtiBfy dteir curiosity. Slie waa a ves^ \j^w^- 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 49 

tiftil lively girl, and proposed, in joke, to go to 
England, and see tbe white women. She asked 
if they would allow her to wear the Tonga dress, 
*^ tliougb perhaps," she said, " that would not do 
in such a cold country in the winter season. I 
don't know what I should do at that time ; but 
Togi tells me that you have hot-houses for plantn 
from warm climates, so I should like to live all 
winter in a hot-house. Could I batlie there two 
or three times a day without being seen ? I won- 
der whetlier I should stand a chance of getting a 
husband ; but my skin is so brown, I suppose none 
of the young Papalangi men would have me ;— 
and it would be a great pity to leave so many hand- 
some young chiefs at Vavaoo, and go to England 
to live a single life. If I were to go to England, 
I would amass a great quantity of beads, and then 
I should like to return to Tonga, because in Eng- 
land beads are so common, that nobody would ad« 
mire me for wearing them, and I should not have 
the pleasure of being envied. " — She said, laugh- 
ing, that either the white men must make very 
kind and good tempered husbands, or else the 
white women must have very little spirit, for them 
to live so long together without parting. She 
thought the custom of having only one wife a very 
good one, provided the husband loved her ; if not, 
it was a very bad one, because he would tyrannize 
over her the more ; whereas, if his attention was 
divided between five or six, and he did not behave 
kindly towards them, it would be very easy to de- 
ceive him. These observations, oC "wVvVlVv ^!(tt ^^'- 
riner was interpreter^ afforded "vcty ^e»X «Ksa»ft- 
ment. Frnow, and the late Too\Iot\^* %oTw(^iwwQ5w 

D 2 



50 TRANSACTIONS AT 

\2 years of age), together with the females, now 
commenced dancing and singing at the request of 
the captain, which gave the ship s company much 
entertainment. 

Before the ship's departure, Mr Mariner was 
changed with several messages froip the chiefs of 
Vavaoo to those of Hapai. Among others, fmow 
sent his strong recommendations to Tooho Toa to 
be contented with the Hapai Islands, and not to 
th^ik of invading Vavaoo ; — to stay and look to 
the prosperity of his own dominions, for that was 
the way to preserve peace and happiness. '^ Tell 
him again, " said he, " that tlie best way to make 
a country powerful and strong against all enemies 
is to cultivate it well, for then tlie people have 
i^omething worth fighting for, and will defend it 
^ith invincible bravery. I have adopted this plan, 
and his attempts upon Vavaoo will be fruitless ! " 
-^-Several warriore sent insulting messages to the 
Hapai people ; such as, " We shall be veiy hap- 
py to see them at Vavaoo, and will take care to 
^tertain them well, and give them plenty of beard- 
eel spears to eat ; and, besides, we have got somQ 
excellent Toa wood (clubs), of which we shall be 
glftd to give them an additional treat ! We hope 
they wiU come and see us, before they shall have 
T^pm out the fine Vavaoo gnatpo, of which they 
took away so much when they visited us last, " 
(alluding to their late unsuccessful expedition.) — 
Hjala Api Api had considerable property at die 
Island of Foa, and he sent a message to an old 
jmatalioolc residing tliei'e (who had been a faithful 
servant to his fatlwr), to gather a\\ Vub \x\vi\«^Uft 
prQperty, consistmg oi some whaWa tftelVv w\<i ^ 
^ft^erable quantity of Hamoa mats, miA ^e^o^\V 



TU.B, TON04^ ISLAND* Sl- 

it III' a lipuse of his up^o th^ beach, that he might 
come some time mider cover of the night and se- 
cure jt. Some of the Vava^o wairiois also pro- 

^ posed a plan, if the captain would lend them the 
use of th^ ship to kill Toobu T6a and his greatest 
ijigbting-men, in revenge for his n3.urder of their. 

.lamented chiefs the brave Toobo Nuha. The plan 
^as for about two hundred of the <^ipicest Vavaoo 
n^arriors to conceal ^emselves below on board the 
Fa,vourite, and yvi^en she arrived at the Hapai Isl-*. 
anfi(s, Topbo Toa and many other considerably 
cljaefo and warriors were to be invited on board, 
and then, the boarding nettings being hauled up^ 
that none might escape, at a signal to be given, the 
Vavaoo people were to rush on deck and despatch 
them all with theii* clubs. To this, of com*se, the 
captain did not consent. Finow consigned to Mr 
Manner's care a present for Mafi Habe, consist- 
ing of a bale of fine Vavaoo gnatoo, and five or 
six strings of handsome beads, and also his ofa 
tai'toogoo (" love unceasing/') His wife also sent 
her a present of three valuable Hamofi mats, with 
her ofa tai-toogoo. 

The ship now prepared to take her departure 
from Vavaoo, and Mr Mariner to take leave of his 
Vavaoo friends, probably for ever. The king a- 
gain embraced him in the most affectionate man- 
ner, made him repeat his promises to return, if 
possible, to Tonga, and take him back to Eng- 
land, that he might learn to read books of history, 
study astronomy, and thus acquire a papalangi 
mind. As to the government of Vavaoo, he ssdd 
it might be consigned to the care of his uncle, who 
would make a good king, for he was a brave maxk^ 
a wise jnao, and withal a \o\ei oi )^«ai^a% hx"^^ 



52 TRANSACTIONS AT 

parting:, abundance of tears were shed on botli 
Hides, Finow returned to his canoe with afbeav) 
heart, and Mr Mariner felt all the sweet bitteraesc 
of parting from much loved friends to visit his na- 
tive country. He bade a long adieu to the brave 
and wise Finow Fiji — to the spirited and heroic 
Hala Api Api — natural characters which want ol 
opportunity render scarce, or which are not ob- 
servable amid the bustle and business of civilized 
life. The canoe returned to the beach — the ship 
got under weigh, and steered her course to the 
Hapai Islands, leaving Vavaoo and all her flouriah- 
iiig plantations lessening in the distance. 



THE TONGA ISLAND^. 53 



CHAPTER in. 

la takiBg leftve of those with whom we have long 
resided, and whose ways and habits we ha^e got 
accustomed to, whose virtues have gained oar 
«8teem, and whose kindnesses have won our af- 
fections ; — in leaving them and the scenes that 
surround them, never to return, the human heart 
feels a sad void, which no lapse of time, no occu- 
pations, no new friendships seem likely ever to 
fill up. All their good qualities rush upcm thtt 
mind in new and lively colours, and all their faults 
appear amiable weaknesses essej^itial to their cha- 
racter. When we lose a friend by death, we com- 
pare it, by way of consolation, to a long absence 
at a long distance ; but it is equally just to reverse 
the comparison, and to say of a separation like 
this that it is as death, which at one xauel stroke 
deprives us of maiiy frieods I 

Mr Mariner, as he looked towards Vavaoo, now 
fast declining in the horizon, experienced senti- 
ments which he never before had felt to such a 
degree ; his futhfnl memory presented a thousand 
little incidents in rapid succession, which he won- 
dered he had never before sufficiently noticed. The 
late king, though lying in the fytoca ol \^ «&kk»(> 
tprsf was jio w fs much a^v^ \o \^ «iv\fi^ v^^^ S^^ 



54» TRANSACTIONS At 

Finow Fiji, or Hala Api Api, or any other friend 
that lio had just parted with. He recollected how 
often, at liis request, lie had laid down upon the 
Rame mat with him, in the evening, to talk about 
the kinp^ of England, and after a long conversa- 
tion, whAi Finow supposed him to be asleep, he 
would lay his hand gently upon his forehead and say^ 
* Poor Papalangi ! wliat a distance his country is 
off! Very likely his fathel* and tinother are now 
talking about him, and comforting themselves by 
saying, *• Perhaps to-morrow a ship will arrive and 
bring our son back to us ! " ' The next moment 
all the amiable qualifications of the present king 
presented themselves to his view; and as we have 
not yet drawn a character so well worthy to be 
noticed, we shall now attempt to display it in its 
true and native colours, trusting that it will afford 
a considerable share of pleasure to the generality 
of readers. 

Finow, the present king of Vavaoo, about twenty- 
five years of age, was in stature 5 feet 10 inches ; 
well proportioned, athletic, and graceful, his coun- 
tenance displaying a beautiful expression of open- 
ness and sincerity. His features, taking them al- 
togther, were not quite so sti'ongly marked, nor 
was his forehead quite so high as tliose of his fa- 
ther, nevertlieless they expressed an ample store of 
intellect ; but notwithstanding the benevolent mild- 
ness and play of good humour in his countenance, 
liis eye sliot forth a penetrating look of inquiry 
from beneath a prominent brow that seemed to be 
the seat of intelligence. The lower part of his 
^re was well made ; his teeth were ^cty vA\\\.^, 
«/?// /lis lips fieemed ever ready to expTCaa ^om^- 
^^S-s-oofJ humoured or witty. H\a wV\o\e ^V^- 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 55 

siognomy, compared with that of bk late father 
possessed less diguity, but more benevolence ; les8 
chief-like superiority, but more intellect. His whole 
exterior was calculated to win the esteem of the 
wise and good, wliile that of his father was well 
adapted to command the admiration of the multi* 
tude. The character of the father was associated 
with the sublime and powerful ; tliat of the son 
with the beautiful and engaging. His language 
was strong, concise, and expressive, with a voice 
powerful, deep, and melodious. His eloquence 
fell shoit of effect compared with that of liis fa- 
ther, but he did not possess the art of dissimula* 
tion. TJie speech which he made on coming into 
power struck all the matabooles with astonish- 
ment ; they wondered to hear so much eloquence 
tempered with wisdom, so much modesty combined 
with firmness, proceed from the li]>s of so young 
a man ; and they prophesied well of him, — that he 
would reign in the affections of his people, and 
Jbave no conspiracies or civil disturbances to fear. 
His general deportment was engaging ; his step 
firm, manly and graceful ; he excelled in all atliietic 
sports, racing, wrestling, boxing, and club-fighting; 
he was cool and courageous, but a lover of peace. 
He was fpnd of mirth and good humouF — was a 
most graceful dancer, and passionately delighted 
with romantic scenery, poetiy, and vocal concerts. 
These last had been set aside, in a great measure, 
during his fathers warlike reign; but when the 
pon came into power, he revived them, and had 
bands of professed singers at his liouse almost 
every night. He used to say that the song amus- 
ed mens minds, and made them ^^wc^ -s^Vick. v»jS?v 
p/Aao— causing them to \o^e \!b«a c^svJa^^x>^^'w^^'^ 



56 TRANSACTIONS AT 

hate conspiracies. He was of a most humane and 
benevolent disposition, bat fiEir, very far from 1)eing 
weak in this respect, for he was a lover of jnstice. 
llie people readily referred to him for a decision 
in their private quarrels, and on these occasions he 
was never thought to have judged rashly. If he 
could not immediately decide, he adjourned the 
cause till the next day, and in the mean time took 
the trouble to inquire fiirther particulars fi'om those 
who knew more of the matter. If he was severe 
with any body, it was with his own servants, for 
lie used to say that his father was too partial to 
them, by which means they had become assuming, 
taking upon themselves the character of chiefs, and 
oppressing others of the lower orders ; but now he 
would make them know their proper places. If 
they did any thing wrong, they trembled in his 
presence. Nevertheless, the benevolence of his 
heart was wonderfully expressed in his manners. 
While he was yet on board the ship. Captain Fisk 
desired Mr Mariner to tell him that it would be 
bad policy for him ever to attempt taldug a ship, 
as it would prevent others coming to trade with 
them, or, if they came at all, it might be to punish 
him and his people for their treachery. As soon 
as Finow understood what the captain said, he 
made a step forward to Mr Mariner, and taking 
his hand, pressed it cordially between his,* saying, 
with tears in his eyes, and a most benevolent and 
grateful expression of countenance, " Tell the chief 
that I shall always consider the Papalan^es as my 

^ He had learnt the action of taking the Yiaiid. ftcsnt \S\« 
^n^lishmcn tliere, and used to say it waa the iivo»\.it\eiidb- 
& and most expressive way of defioting oive's ieeWu^^R 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 57 

relations, — as my dearest brothers ; and rather 
would I lose my life than take any thing from 
them by force or treachery. " He had scarcely 
finished speaking when the captain exclaimed, *^ I 
•ee, I see what he means, — you need not trans- 
late that to me ! " 

Finow's intellect was also very extraordinary, 
that is to say, it was naturally strong, and was 
very little obscured by prejudices. We have 
Been several instances of the wisdom of his 
conduct ; and a few anecdotes will serve to 
show that his specific reasoning faculty was far 
above the common. He had learnt the mecha- 
nism of a gun-lock by his own pure investiga- 
tion. One day, on taking off the lock of a pis- 
tol to clean it, he was astonished to find it 
somewhat differently contrived, and a little more 
complicate than the common lock, which he had 
thought so clever and perfect that he could not 
conceive any thing better. On seeing this, how- 
ever, he was somewhat puzzled, at firat with the 
mechanism, and afterwards with its superiority 
to the common lock, but he would not have it 
explained to him ; it was an interesting puzzle, 
which he wished to have the pleasure of solving 
himself. At length he succeeded, and was as 
pleased as if he had found a treasure ; and in the 
afternoon at cava, he was not contented till he 
bad made all his chiefs and matabooles understand 
it also. He did not know the existence of the 
pulse till Mr Mariner informed him of it, and 
made him feel his own, at which he was greatly 
surprised, and wanted to know ho^ tVkfe^v^* 
langies first found it out. H.^ Nroa \s5&»Tsa&^ '•x 

VOL. II. ^ 



56 TRANSACTIONS AT 

tlie same time, that the pulse was influenced t^> 
various diseases and passions of the mind ; aix^ 
tliat in most parts of tlie world, those whose pr^^ 
fession it was to cure (liseases, often judged of tV^ 
state of tlie complaint by the pulse. Upon whic:^ 
he went about to two or three that were ill to 
feel tbeir pulses, and was much delighted with 
the new discovery. A few days afterwards one 
of bis servants very much offended him by some 
unwanimtable act, upon wliich he became i^iolently 
angiy, but on a sudden the thought struck him of 
the association between the passions and the pulse^ 
and imu^ediately applying his hand to his wrist> 
he found it beating violently ; upon which, turning 
to Mr Mariner, he said, you are quite right ; and 
it put him in such good humour, that the servant 
got off with a mild remonstrance, which astonish- 
ed the fellow very much, as he did not understand 
the cause, and was sitting trembling from head to 
foot, in full expectation of a beating. 

Mr Mariner explained to him the form and ge- 
neral laws of the solar system ; the magnificent 
idea of the revolutions of the planets, the diurnal 
revolution of the earth, its rotundity, the doctrine 
of gravity, the antipodes, the changes of the sea- 
sons, the borrowed light of the moon, the ebb and 
flow of the tides, &Cf These were his frequent 
themes of (]iscoui*se — they pleased him, astonished 
him, and filled him with intense desire to know 
more than Mr Mariner was able to communicate. 
He lamented the ignorance of the Tonga people ; 
he was amazed at the wisdom of the Papalaiigies, 
and wished to visit them, tiiat he might acquire a 
fuind like t/jeii*s. The doctrine of tlie sun's cen- 
trul situation aiul the consenutul leNoWvvovk vsil ^vi 



THE TOVGA tStAKDS. 5{^ 

planets he thoiiglit so sublime, and so like what 
he sapposed mi^ht be the ideas and inventions of 
a God, that he could not help believinp: it, althong:h 
it was not quite clear to his understandinf!^. What 
he seemed least to comprehend was liow it hap- 
pened that the antipodes did not fall into the sky, 
below (as he expressed it), for he could not free 
his mind from tbe notion of absolute up and doum : 
but said he had no doubt, if he could learn to read 
and write, and think like a Papalangi,that he should 
be able to comprehend it as easily, addinpr, that 
the minds of the Papalangies are as superior to 
the minds of the Tonga people as iron axes are 
superior to stone axes ! — He did not, however^ 
suppose that the minds of white people were es- 
sentially superior to the minds of others ; but more 
clear in consequence of habitual reflection and study, 
and the use of writing, by which a man could leave 
behind him all that he had learnt in his lifetime. 

One day as Mr Mariner was sharpening an axe, 
and Finow was turning the grindstone, the latter 
observed that the top of the stone was not only 
always wet, but so replete with water that it was 
constantly flying off in abundance on the applica- 
tion of the axe. This on a sudden thought puzzled 
him ; it seemed to him strange that the supera- 
bundance of water should not run off before it got 
to the top. Mr Mariner began his explanation 
thus : ^' In consequence of the quick successive 
revolutions of the stone " — ^when on a sudden 
Finow eagerly exclaimed (as if a new light had 
shot across his mind), '' Now I understand why 
the antipodes do not fall off the earth, — ^it is 
in consequence of the earth s quick t«voVoK«KvV** — 
TJbii wBs a Mae explanatum, umSlVa 100& «n^ *^°^^ 



60 TRANSACTIONS AT 

it was, much to hifi disappointment ; but it shows 
the activity of liis mind, and how eager it was to 
seize every idea with avidity tliat seemed to cast a 
radiance upon the object of his research. 

On another occasion tliey were returning to 
Vavaoo from the Hapai Islands^ where the king 
had been to fetch some of liis property, consisting 
cliiefly of things which originally belonged to the 
oiHcers of the Port au Prince. Among othen 
there was a box containing sundry small articles^ 
and a pocket-compass — the latter he did not know 
the use of, and had scarcely yet examined. During 
the whole day it was nearly calm, and the paddles 
were for the most part used. A breeze, however^ 
sprang up after dark, accompanied with a thick 
mist ; and taking it for granted that the wind was 
in its usual direction, they steered the canoe ac- 
cordingly, sailing for about two hours at the rata 
of seven knots iui hour. As they did not readi 
the shores of Varaoo, the thought now occurred 
to Mr Mariner that the wind might possibly have 
changed, and in that case, having no star for a 
guide, a .continuance of their course would be ex«> 
ceedingly perilous ; he therefore searched for the 
compass to judge of their direction, when he was 
much alarmed to find that the wind had chopped 
rpAind nearly one quarter of the compass. He 
ngientioned this to the king, but he would not be- 
lieve tluit such a trifling instrument could tell which 
way the wind was ; and neither he, nor any other 
chief on board, was willing to trust their lives to 
it. If what the compass said was true, they must 
indeed be running out to sea to an alarming dis- 
tance ; and as night was already set in, and the 
g^e strong, their situation was perilous^ Most m 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 61 

board, however, thought that this was a trick of 
Mr Mariner to ^t them out to some distant land, 
that he might afterwards escape to Papalangi ; and 
even Finow hegan to donht his sincerity. Thus 
he was in an awkward predicament. He was cer- 
tain they were going wrong, but the difficulty was 
how to convince them of what was now, in all 
probability, essential to their existence, for the 
weather threatened to be bad, and it seemed like- 
ly that the night would continue very dark. At 
length, he pledged his existence for their safety, if 
they would but follow his advice, and suffer him 
to direct their course ; and that they should kill 
him if they did not discover Vavaoo, or some of 
the other islands, by sunrise. This pledge was 
rather hazardous to him, but it would have been 
still more so for them all to have continued the 
course they wei-e then in. They at length con- 
sented ; the canoe was immediately close hauled, 
and Mr Mariner directed their steering. The gale 
luckily remained nearly steady during the night ; 
hut all on board were in great anxiety during the 
whole time, and Mr Mariner not the least so a- 
mong them. In the morning, as soon as the light 
was sufficiently strong, a man, who was sent up to 
the mast-head, discovered land, to the great relief 
of their anxiety ; and the rising sun soon enabled 
them to recognise the shores of Vavaoo, to the 
wonder and amazement of finow, who did not 
know how to express his astonishment sufficiently 
at the extraordinary properties of the compass. 
How such a little instrument could give informa- 
tion of such vast importance, produced in him a 
sort of respectful veneroticm, xVfflX vntfsraK^^^ xk^ 

ir2 



62 TRANSACTIONS AT 

what wafl little nhort of idolatry ; for finding tha^ 
Mr Mariner could not explain why it always point- 
ed more or less to the north, he conld Wdly be 
persuaded but that it was inspired by a hotoocu 
lie was so pleased with this property of the com« 
pass, that he almost always carried it about him 
afterwards ; using it much oftener than was neces^ 
sary both at sea and on shore. 

It may easily be supposed, that ¥mow, with 
such an inquiring mind, took delight in every 
thing that afibrded him mstruction, or satisfied hu' 
curiosity. He was accustomed to visit the houses 
of canoe-builders and carpenters, that he might 
learn their respective arts, and he often made very 
judicious observations. He frequently went into 
the country to inspect the plantations, and became 
a very good agriculturist, setting an example to all 
the young chiefs, that they might learn what was 
useful, and employ their time profitably. He used 
to say, that the best way to enjoy one's food was 
to make one's self hungry by attending to the cul- 
tivation of it. There were many individuals, how- 
ever, at the Tonga Islands that possessed uncom- 
mon intellect, as well as good disposition of hearty 
but none of them seemed endowed with that ex- 
tniordinary desire of investigation which so strong- 
ly characterized the king. Among the most re- 
markable of these were his uncle, Finow Fiji, and 
his friend, Hala Api Api. The first of these was 
venerated for his wisdom ; a quality whicli he de- 
rived rather from his great experience, steady tem- 
per of mind, and natural solid judgment, than from 
the light of extraordinary intellectual research. 
Jyevenhelesa, this divine quality was marked in 
^ countenance^ Tbere was someAung ^gnAfiSol 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 63 

9f^i\ veper^ble about liis forehead and brow that 
comipanded respect and confidence. He liad no 
q\iick ^arkling look of ardour, nor fire of impe- 
tuosity, but his deep-8eat«d eye seemed to specu- 
late deliberately upon objects of impoitance and 
utility. His whole physiognomy was oversha- 
flowed by a cast of sublilne melancholy, but lie 
luul been one of the greatest warriors that Tonga 
^er produced. The islands of Fiji (whence he 
d^ved Ms name) had been the scenes of his a* 
chieyements, and the stories recorded of him e- 
qipalled those of romance. His arm had dispen- 
sed death to many a Fiji warrior, whose sunrivLog 
friends still recollect the terror of his name ; but 
9U the warlike propensities of this mighty chieftain 
now seemed absorbed in a conviction of the vanity 
and absurdity of useless bloodshed ; and nothing 
seemed to afford him a greater pleasure (next to 
giving counsel to those who asked it) than to play 
ivith little children, and to mingle with unwonted 
cheerfulness in their amusements. Finow Fiji was 
perhaps about fifty years of age, * and was become 
rather corpulent. His whole demeanour was not 
erect, powerful, and commanding, like that of his 
brother the late king, but his slow step and steady 
action showed something of solid worth in his charac- 
ter, that wrought respect in the beholder without 
ivay mixture of fear. It has just been said, that 
(mow Fiji performed most of his warlike fbatsat 
the Fiji Islands ; and the greater part of the time 
that he was there, Hala Api Api, though a much 
younger man, (about thirty), was his constant 
friend and companion. They always fought to- 

* No native of Tonga knows ^% ^^<&^tQT tis^ %kx»«dX ^ 
ibe rer^luUoa o£ years is kept^ 



64 TRANSACTIONS AT 

gothcr, and were said to have owed their livei Uf 
each other thirty or forty times over. Their mntu-' 
al friendship was very great, although in many re- 
spects their characters were widely different. 

To form a tolerable idea of HsJa Api Api, we 
must conceive to ourselves a slim yet athletic and 
active figure, of a middling stature, full of fire and 
impetuosity, endowed with a mind replete with 
the most romantic notions of heroic bravery. Full 
of mischief, without malignity ; wrought up with 
the most exuberant generosity ; the heat and incon- 
stancy of youth was in him strangely mixed with 
the steadiness and wisdom of age. No man per- 
formed more mischievous tricks than he, at the ex- 
pense of the lower orders, and yet they all liked 
iiim. If any other chief oppressed them, they flew 
to Hala Api Api for redress, and he always de- 
fended their cause as if it were his own, often at the 
lisk of his life ; and this he did seemingly irom 
pure motives of pity. He would weep at the dis- 
tress of which they complained, and the next mo- 
ment his eyes would flash with indignation, at the 
injustice of the oppressor, and seizing his club he 
would sally foith to i*edresH their wrongs. If he 
I'Oinmitted any depredations himself he would 
Homelimce be equally sorry, and make ample re- 
ptntiofl. On other occasions, however, his mind 
would raimaa Hor a considerable length of time in 
the Mine wild and' ungovernable disposition : and 
the repon of his depredations would reach the 
king*R eon (tlie late king), who would say, 
*' What shull I do with this j-lala Api A)>i ? I be- 
/u'vo I must id}l hiin. " But Ha\a Ap\ Xi^\ w^v- 
///^v ff^nrt'd death nor the king, not atv^ o\\iet 
JH^r. There wau nobody but Uked \\\ia, »»A 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 65 

yet evoiy body feared him. His mind wa-o like a 
powerful flame, constautly in action, and constant- 
ly feeding upon every thing that could be made 
food of. Talk to him about battles, and he looked 
88 if he were inspired. Relate to him a pathetic 
story, and the tears would run down his cheeks 
bster tl.an you could comit them. Tell him a 
good joke, and there was nobody would laugh 
more heartily than he. Old Finow used to say, 
that HaU Api Api would prefer two days hard 
fighting without food more readily than the most 
peaceable man would two days food without fight- 
ing. No sooner did the younger finow come to 
be king, than his friend, Hala Api Api» (to the as- 
tonishment of every body), left off his mischievous 
tricksy and ceased to commit any acts of depreda- 
tion. On being asked by Mr Mariner the cause, 
he replied : — " The present king is a young man, 
i^thout much experience, and I think I ought not 
tp throw obstacles in the way of his peaceable 
government. The old king had great experience, 
lAoul knew how to quell disturbances : besides, he 
was fond of fighting, and I gratified my humour, 
without caring about the consequences ; but such 
conduct now might be bad for the country. " Hala 
Api Api s countenance, and his whole figure, very 
Vf^ell ponrtrayed his character. His small quick 
eye gave an idea of wonderful activity; and, though 
he looked as if he were a mischievous fellow, his 
general physiognomy expressed much geherosity, 
good sense, and understanding. His whole body 
was exceedingly well proportioned, and he was 
considered one of the best made men at Vavaoo. 
He was beyond conception swiffc of foot ; to see 
him rail; you would tbutkliB ouV^i^svgi^^^^'^i^^^v 



ft6 TRANSACTIONS AT 

tho fn^m rpotimhI not to bend beneath his feet, and 
on the lH*acii yon would scarcely expect to find tlie 
trar«8 of his footstep. Sudi is a general sketch of 
some of the principal men of Vavaoo, who had al- 
ways behaved in a most friendly way to Mr Ma- 
riner, and with whom of course he could not help, 
feeling very gr^Q^ regret at parting. His attention 
was soon occupied, however, by the arrival of the 
ah^i at the Hapai Islands, where, for two days, she 
stood off and on, betweeen the islands of Haano 
and Lefooga. 

A vast number of canoes came alongside from 
the neighbouring islands, and several of the chiefs 
were allowed to come on board. Mr Mariner now 
took the earliest opportunity to procure the escs^ 
of any Englishmen who might be there ; and to 
fulfil the sundry commissions he had received from 
bis Vavaoo friends. Robert Brown, the cooper of 
the Port au Prince, who, it will be recollected, 
was the last man that remained on board with him, 
was now under the protection' and in the service 
of Voona, who, with Toobo Toa, came on board 
the Favourite. He, therefore, immediately took 
proper means to get him on board, and had the plea- 
sure of succeeding. Other Englishmen were at the 
more distant islands, and Robert Brown most gene- 
rously undertook to go for them, at the risk of being 
detained, or of the ship's departure without him. 
The captain advised him not to go, if lie valued 
his own liberty ; but he replied, '' it would be 
very hard indeed if one Englishman could not as- 
Mst another, although it was at his own risk. " 
//e jvaa pai'ticularly interested m tW ^»Ji» o\ ^««« 
we/ Carlton, tiie boatswain of ^"Poxtwu'Wawc*, 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 67 

who had always been his ultimate frieml. This 
man's case was rather hard. Wlien he was in Eng- 
land, ho was about to be married to a young wo- 
man to w}iom he had been long attached ; but 
thinking he liad not yet sufficient to begin the 
world witli, in some business on shore, he thought 
it would be moiie prudent to go first another voy- 
age and increase his means, and accordingly he 
entered on board the Port au Prince. During his 
residence at the Hapai Islands, he was always iii 
a low and almost desponding state of mind, and 
his friend Robert Brown most coniially participa- 
ted in his distress. At the moment we are speak- 
ing of, the latter conjectm'ed that he was at Na- 
mooca, and was resolved to run the greatest risks 
to effect his escape, as well as that of others wbom 
he supposed to be with him, pai'ticularly George 
Wood, the carpenter's mate. Accoixlingly, aftev 
much trouble, and ofter of considerable rewanlH, 
he persuaded four of the natives to accompany him 
to Namooca, a distance of fifty miles, in a single 
sailing canoe, where, when he arrived, to his great 
mortification, he found that the object of his search, 
as well as two or three other Englishmen, were 
gone to the Island of Tonga, to assist the friends 
of Toobo Toa, in the garrison of Hihifo. lie then 
deliberated, whether he should push on to Tonga, 
a distance of sixty miles farther ; but the men re- 
fused to take him, and he was obliged to return, 
bringing with him Emanuel Perez, a Spaniard, and 
Josef, a black, who both belonged to the Port an 
Prince. In the mean time, t\\ree mw^lLvwgw^^sMK^ 
arrired on board, viz. NiehoW ^\aJi««i Vjauaxaas^^; 
uud ThomHti E versaeld aud WWVumxx ^voN«t!i^ ^^ 



68 TRANSACTIONS AT 

of seventeen years of age), who afterwards retnm- 
ed on shore, refusing to go away. * 

* It must l>c mentioned, that two or three men- belonj^- 
tngto tlic Port au Piince, got away about eigliteon raontlis 
before, in a schooner which happened to touch at Vavaoo. 
Amon^ these was William Towel, who lately resided in 
Cross Street, Westmorland Place, City Road, and followed 
the business of a hair-dresser. Mr Mariner was at that 
period at tlie Hapai Islands, and knew nothing of the 
Mhooner's arrival. We should also state that the conduct 
of one of those (who chose to remain behind) was very 
suspicious. He did not oi%inally belong to the Port au 
Prince, but was taken by her in one of her prizes (a Spa- 
nish vessel), when he gave himself out to be an American, 
though it appeared afterwards that he was a native of Corn- 
wall. He resided at Hapai, with a chief named Lioofau, 
who was known to be a cunning, treacherous character, 
and, according to the accounts of many natives, this man 
was as bad. Thus much, however, is certain, that when 
Mr Mariner took leave of Finow, the latter, taking Iiim 
on one side, whispered to him to have a watchful eye upon 
Lioofau, and the Papalan^, mentioning his name, for that 
they certainly meant to take a vessel the first favourable 
opportunity. When the ship arrived at tlie Hapai Islands, 
this man came on board, expressing his wish to return to 
Europe, and, as he was not to be judged upon mere hear- 
say evidence, the captain gave him a pair of trowsers and 
shirt, and he fulfilled his duty with the rest of the sailors ; 
though there was, as Mr Mariner conceived, a great deal 
in his manner and watchful eye that looked badly. JuAt 
upon the ship's departure, however, he got into & canoe, 
and told the captain that he had changed his mind and 
would remain where he was, and went on shore without 
returning the trowsers and shirt. Mr Mariner afterwards 
heard, in China, that he had served the captain of the 
schooner before mentioned exactly in the same way. The 
gentleman from whom be had this information in China 
received it from the captain himself, who, at the same 
time, expressed his firm opinion, that tliis man meant to 
take an European ship the first opportunity, or at least to 
be Inntrumenta] in doing so, by giving the tvativcs inKtni&> 
ii'oas how it was best to be done. Wc ioi\w:vxt tc\v»j2»w 



THE TONGA ISLAHD9. 69 

Mr Mariner was much disappointed on finding 
that his adopted mother, Mafi Ha1)e, was gone to 
a distant island to see some iriend ; tlu> presents that 
he brought for her, therefore, he left with one of her 
relations, to be given to her as soon as she return- 
ed, witii some presents from himself, to keep in 
remembrance of him. He sent on shore, to the 
island of Foa, for the old mataboole, tlie confident 
of Hala Api A pi, and communicated to him the 
message from tliat chief. He also communicated 
to ToIkm) Toa the king's advice to him, viz. never 
to attempt the invasion of Yavaoo, but to confine 
himself to the cultivation and prosperity of his 
own islands ; to which he replied, that war was 
necessary to keep the minds of his chiefs employ- 
ed, that they might not meditate conspiracies ; and 
that he should, therefore, direct his arms against 
some of the ganisons at the island of Tonga. He 
had the greatest respect, he said, for Finow's fa- 
mily ; but he could not help it if some of his chiefs 
(as on the late occasion) made attacks upon Ya- 
vaoo, for want of otlier employment. One of 
the warriors who had been engaged in that 
nnsuccessful expedition was now on board ; he 
had been wounded in the arm by a ball from 
Mr Mariner's musket. About a twelvemonth 
before, he laid a wager with Mr Mariner tliat he 
could not hit a mark which he put on a cocoa-nut 
tree at a certain distance with his musket ; the bet 
was a pig. Mr Mariner accepted the wager, and 

the name of this individual, lest the reports of him should 
have been greatly exaggerated. There is too much reaMm 
to fear, however, that his designi were bed ;— «nd this 
notice may serve as a hint to ships who ma^l Vv^tvaL^sat. 
touch tlierp. 

VOL. II, V 



70 TRANSACTIONS AT 

the king promised to pay the pig if he lost ; it 
happened, however, that he ifiissed, and the king 
loHt his pig. The warrior, as soon as he saw Mr 
Manner on boaixl, came up to him, and said, 
smiling, '^ I find you can shoot better than yon 
did at the cocoa-nut ti*ee. " Mr Mariner inquired 
after his wound, and was happy to find that it had 
got nearly well. The ball had passed through the 
fleshy pai*t of the arm. 

It was very ludicrous to hear the different 
Rtrange excuses and apologies made by the natives, 
in i-egard to the affair of the Port au Prince, with 
a view to persuade the captain that they had no- 
tiiing to do in it. Many said that they were not 
on board ; and knew nothing about it till it was 
all over, and then they were very sorry indeed 
to hear of it, and thought it a very Imd thing. 
One man acknowledged that he was on board, 
being there out of curiosity, but that he knew no- 
thing beforehand of the cons])iracy, and took no 
part in it. Another acknowledged tliat he was 
on board under like circumstances, and he was 
quite astonished when they began to kill the white 
men ; he declared, that he saved one white man s 
life, but while he was turning round to save an- 
other's, the man whose life he had just saved got 
killed on the spot. Several regretted they were 
not at Lefooga at the time, as they were sure they 
could have saved several of the Papalangies ; of 
whom they all affirmed that they were very fond^ 
Toobo Toa, and Voona, both asked Mr Mariner 
why he had chosen to remain, at Vavaoo, and 
if they had not beliaved equaW^ Vm^ \ft \v\m v^ 
the king, or any of the Vavaoo fStoafife"? To 
^« replied, that he preferreA Vavaoo \« >Xa«k ^tt»S» 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 71 

Islands, as the latter place brought to his mind 
many disagreeable recollections. It was where his 
ship had been destroyed, and where he had met 
with many insults fi*om the lower orders on his 
first arrival. Bi^sides, he acknowledged that he 
preferred the disposition of the Vavaoo people ge- 
nerally, and that he thought it would be highly 
ungrateful in him to leave the protection of a fa- 
mily that had befriended him all along. After two 
days stay at the Hapai Islands, Captain Fisk or- 
dered the natives out of the vessel, and directed 
his coiu^e to the Fiji Islands, to lay in a stock of 
sandal-wood for the China market. 

The character of the Hapai people is not na- 
turally more treacherous than that of the people 
of Vavaoo ; but as they have more petty chiefs 
whose interest they have to consult, the oppor- 
tunity for treachery is perhaps more frequent; 
and if our great circumnavigator, whose death the 
world had so much reason to deplore, had known 
them in this respect, he would not have misnam- 
ed them Friendly, In fact, they had deliberately 
planned a conspiracy against him, and which would 
infallibly have been put in execution, if the chiefs 
who planned it had not disputed about the exact 
mode and time of making the assault. Finow (at 
that time tributary chief of the Hapai Islands, 
Toogoo Ahoo being king), was not the designer 
of this conspiracy, but he gave counsel and ad- 
vice iieapecting it. The other chiefs proposed to 
invite the captain and his officers to a grand bo-m^e 
(a night dance by torch light), wvA «X %i «v^'5s^. ^» 
maassu're him, his ofticers, and. «3\ "Ocva xcwara^^*^ 
But Finow (the late king a faAietV o%^v^^»^^^ 
Ba the darkness of the n\^t w«oVA. V*e t«S»n«s«: 



72 TRANSACTIONS AT 

Hl>ie to theit ()])erationR in taking tlie two vessels, 
and proposed nither that it should be done by 
<hiy, and tliat they should seize the opportunity 
of making die attack on the occasion of a grand 
eut(utainment which was shortly to be given to 
him in honour ot his arrival, and after tliey were 
all destroyed, the men, who would naturally come 
in search of him, were t« be conducted to the 
farther part of the island under pretence that 
he was ^ere, and d/icy were then to be destroy- 
ed in like manner. Thus the two ships, tlieir 
crews being so weakened, might be taken (as they 
supposed) with ease. The entertainment was 
prepared, and Captain Cook and several officers 
being invited, were present. It happened, how- 
ever, a little before the appointed time when the 
signal was to be given, that most of tlie chiefa 
still expressed their opinion that the niglit-time 
would have been better tliau the day, and Fiuow, 
finding that the majority were of this opinion, was 
much vexed, and immediately forbade it to be done 
at alL Thus, no signal being given, the amuse- 
ments went on without inteiTuption, and Captain 
Cook and his officers were much pleased with their 
entertainment, acknowledging it to be far better 
tlian any other that they had received at the 
Friendly Islands. (See his Third Voyage.) Mr 
Mariner had this information at different times 
from several chiefs who were present, and in par- 
ticular from Finow himself (tlie fatlier of the pre- 
sent king, and son of the chief who was at the 
I/ead of ihe conspiracy.) 
As every information must \>e m\ftT«ft\wa^ "w\\\K5a. 
regards the history or fate o£ tJoaa ^5ce«X wA ^wA 
^»aojr to whom society owca so mucVx, ^^ cwbmjX 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 73 

omit mentioning some circumstances, subsequent 
to his death, upon which the above anecdote so 
naturally leads tlie mind to reflect. The people 
of the Tonga Islands behaved towards Cook with 
every external demonstration of friendship, whilst 
they secretly meant to kill him ; and the people of 
the Sandwich Islands, although they actually did 
kill him, have paid, and still continue to pay him, 
higher honours than any other nation of the earth. 
They esteem him as having been sent by the gods 
to civilize them, and one to whom they owe the 
greatest blessings they enjoy. His bones (the great- 
er part of which they have still in their possession !) 
they devoutly hold sacred. They are deposited 
in a house consecrated to a god, and are annually 
carried in procession <o many other consecrated 
houses, before each of which they are laid on the 
ground, and the priest returns thanks to the gods 
for having sent them so great a man. When the 
Port au Prince was at Woahoo (one of the Sand- 
wich Islands), Mr Mariner was informed of the 
above circumstances by an Englishman (or perhaps 
an American), who was a resident there. His 

name was Harehottle; he seemed a man 

of some information and respectability, and was 
formerly the mate of an American vessel, but, 
in consequence of some disagreement with the cap- 
tain, he chose to remain at those islands, where he 
now acted in the ci^>acity of harbour-master to 
the king, and pilot to all ships that arrived, from 
each of which he demanded five or six dollars 
for his servic-es. This persow Vsv^owci^^t ^^^i- 
riner that t/ie natives of Ow^Xxftfe \^\x«:w^ "'^^ 
few k the honea of Captaiu CooV, \i\>N. cSxsa^^ ^"^ 

y1 



74 TRANSACTIONS AT 

stitated the bones of some other Englishman that 
WB8 killed on that melancholy occasion. When 
Mr Mariner afterwards understood the Tonga lan- 
guage, he conTersed upon the subject with natives 
of Owyiiee, at Vavaoo ; who corroborated every 
thing that Harebottle had said, and stated, more- 
over, that the natives had no idea that Cook could 
possibly be killed, as they considered him a super- 
natural being, and were astonished when they saw 
kim falL The man who killed him was a carpen- 
ter, either in the apprehension that Captain Cook 
was, at that moment, ordering his men to increase 
their fire, or, not knowing him to be the extraor^ 
dinary being of whom he had heard so much, for 
he lived a considerable distance up the country, 
and was not personally acquainted with him. The 
flesh of their illustrious victim was shared out to 
different gods> and afterwanls burnt; whilst the 
bones were disposed of as before related. Among 
the natives of Owyhee, from whom Mr Mariner 
heard this, one was a chief of middling rank, the 
rest were of the lower order, but they all agreed 
in the same statement. They had not been eye- 
witnesses, however, of that melancholy transaction 
(for they were all young men), but they spoke of 
these tilings as being universally known at the 
Sandwich Islands, and beyond all doubt. It is 
related in Cook's Voyages, that, as soon as he re- 
ceived his wound, the natives were seen to snatch 
the da^er (by which his death was effected) from 
each other's hands, displaying a savi^ eagerness 
to join in bis c/estniction. In all pTobability, how- 
c^er, this eagerness to seize the dfi^er "ww Ytoxix^ 
"^ in eacli by the wish to be pwweHSftA o^ «iv\ 
^'^ment which had become conaecraX^A, «a 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 75 

were, by the death oiP so great a man ; at least this 
is pn^sumed, from what would have been the sen- 
timent bad it happened at the Tonga Islands. 

At.jength the Favourite arrived at Pau (one of 
the Fiji^ Islands), and anchored off Vooilia, ikmouB 
for sandal-wood, for which the captain soon began 
to treat with the natives, and, before the ship s 
departure, laid in several tons. In the mean time, 
Mr Mariner went sundry times on shore, and had 
opportunities of receiving confirmations of what 
he had heard from Cow Mooala. The natives ajp- 
p^ared to be a race considerably inferior to thie 
Tonga people, partaking rather of the negro cast 
of countenance and form. So ^ as Mr Mariner 
had opportunities of observing, their domestic com- 
forts were also much inferior to those of the peo- 
ple he had just left. They do not oil themselves, 
and to this he attributes the coarseness and harsh- 
ness of skin, which is so different from that of the 
Tonga people. Their hair was somewhat more 
curly, and rather disposed to be woolly. Their 
whole external character, taking it generally, seem- 
ed fierce and warlike, rather than brave and noble. 
Their only dress was the mahi (see vol. I. p. 
272), and this nakedness of appearance serves at 
once to sink them in a degree of civilization be- 
low the natives of Tonga, tund the Society Islands. 
It is to be lamented that Mr Mariner had not an 
opportunity of drawing a juster comparison be- 
tween the natives of these islands, and a people 
with whose manners he was so well acquainted ; 
but dreading that some accld^ivX mV^X. vg»s^ ^fe- 
tatn Mm when on the eve oi xetarKca.^ V> ^J^* 
Jized society, he refrained feom ^ovdj^ ©isli^ms^ *^ 
ofltea, or so flup, as he othcTw\»B tnci^xXMW'^ ^^^ 



TRANSACTIONS AT 

felt curious to discover what opinion they had 
ertained of the natives of Tonga, and found, 
iformly, that they were considered a very trea- 
erous race ; whilst the Tongans, as already re- 
ted, accuse the Fiji people of possessing the same 
ad character. From all that he has seen and 
leard, however, he is disposed to helievo that the 
Fiji people fight with more fury than they of 
Tonga ; but that the latter, where they have been 
seriously injured, harbour sentiments of revenge 
for a longer time. Mr Mariner witnessed no in- 
stance of cannibalism among them, but they made 
no scruple to acknowledge tliat such instances 
were very frequent ; and iCow Mooala's account 
of the feast of Chichia was confirmed by the re- 
port of several of tlie natives of Pau, who spoke 
of it with much indifference. He luui it also con- 
firmed by a native of Tonga, resident at Pau, who 
acted as his interpreter, and wlio was present at 
this horrible feast. The language of tliese people is 
very different in sound from the Tonga language, 
and is much more hai'sh to pronounce ; it is replete 
with very strong percussions of the tongue, and 
with a frequent rattling of the letter r. It is ra- 
ther a curious hcty if true, and it appears to be 
so from all we can learn that the language of the 
Sandwich islanders is more similar to tlie Tonga 
language than that of Fiji, tlK)ugh not more than 
one ninth part of tlie distance from Tonga. 

There were several Englishmen (or Americans 
at the island of Pau, but none of tliem wished it 
come aw&y in the Favourite, except one ; and i 
Captain Fiak hail already move \vwidH on. \\w 
f/ian lie wanted^ and eh this man waa uot. iXw* 
^'ddentany (by s/iipwreck or otiieirwiwi) W 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 77 

tliese people, but had loft his ship voluntarily, the 
captain <lid not chuuse to take him. It is much 
to he resetted that moHt of these men were, from 
all report, hut indifferent chai'acters, and had left 
their respective ships from no good motive. They 
had frequent quaiTels among themselves, in wliich 
two or three were murdered. Mr Mariner's in- 
f<N7Dation upon this pomt is partly from Fiji na- 
tives who visited Tonga ; and since his return to 
London, an Englishman * who lived two or three 
years at Fan, and whom he accidentally met 
near town, declared that he was heartily glad 
to come away, heing afraid to live on the same 
itfland with his companions. 

The Favourite, having laid in her store of san« 
dal-wood, after five or six days stay at Pan, weigh- 
ed a9chor and resumed her voyage, and, in about 
five weeks, aiTived at Macao* At an early oppor- 
tunity Mr Mariner procured the following certifi- 
cate from Captain Fisk, thinking it might be of 
service to him, being totally unknown to any body : 

" This is to certify, that the bearer, William 
Mariner, belonged to the unfortunate ship tlie 
Port au Prince, that was cut off at the Hapai Isl* 
ands, and that he was taken from thence by the 
brig Favourite. " (Signed) « A Fisk, "— " Ma- 
cao Roads, Dec 28. 1810. " 

As he had but little money in his pos8e68ion,f 

* This man's name is Thomas Lee; he lived at that 
time at Hendon, and was frequently ouployedin bringing 
hay to London. He has since left that pUce, and if 
somewhere in town, but we have not been able to ftwdbivvcv.* 
He was very well ac(][uainled V)\\iv Con« ^w«^»»% ^"^^ 
Tonga ffiatahoole. ^^. 

f He bad about fifty or rixt^ doV\Mii> ^^1 «\^^tlrS 
been given to him by hi« adopted nw^ct^^Vk^^^*^ -^ 



78 TRANSACTIONS AT 

he resolved, the first opportunity, to enter on 
board one of the East India Company's ships 
bound to England, and work his passage home. It 
happened^ however, luckily, that he fell in with 
the oHicers of the Company's cruiser, the Ante- 
lope, who, taking an interest in his story, corrobo- 
rated by the account of Captain Fisk, they invited 
him on board the Antelope, where, with the per- 
mission of Captain Ross, he remained for a couple 
of months, till an opportunity offered of going to 
England. He is happy to acknowledge, through 
this medium, his deepest sense of obligation to 
this gentleman in particular, and to his officers in 
general, for their extraordinary civility and kind- 
ness ; nor must he omit Captain Robert Welbank, 
of the Honourable East India Company's ship, the 
Cufihells, who, on the recommendation of Captain 
Ross, received him on board Ids ship, and gave 
liim his pBBBOge to England. 

The CnfihellB arrived at Gravesend in June 
1811, when Mr Mariner went on shore, and im- 
mediately came up to town ; but, whilst looking 
out for his fiftther s house, who in the mean while 
had changed his residence, he was impressed and 
sent on board the tender. He immediately wrote 
to a friend, to acquaint his father with his arrival 
and his situation. His father, not less overjoyed 
than surprised at this tmerpected information, re- 
paired on board to visit his son, whom, an hour 
before, he had imagined if alive, to be resident 
among a savage people on the other side of the 

remainder he procured from a female native of Lefooga, 
by giving her a consideration for them in beads, &c. Thas9 
doUsis beloDged onginally to the Pott au. 'Pcii:u:e« 



THE TONGA ISLANDS. 79 

glol)e, with little or no view of making his escape. * 
After seven years long, hopeless absence, the hour 
of meeting arrived, the circumstances and senti- 
nients of which we leave to the imagination. Mr 
Mariner found his father in mourning for his mo- 
ther. Each had much to relate ; but this was not 
the time for iree and unreserved communication. 
Whilst the son was a prisoner, the father had to 
exert himself to procure his liberation, in which 
he at length succeeded after a week's detention. 

As it may be considered interesting to know the 
fate of all the ship's company of the Port au 
Prince, we shall conclude this chapter with a list 
of those who, along with Mr Mariner, survived 
hei capture. Besides the eight natives of the 
Sandwicli Islands, there were belonging to the ship 
fifty- two persons ; twenty-six (including Mr M.), 
were on board at the time the ship was taken, and, 
of these twenty-two were massacred on the spot. 
Of those who were on shore, three, besides Mr 
Brown, the whaling-master, were also murdered, 
making, in all, twent^t^ux, who lost their lives on 
that disastrous occasion. The remaining twenty- 
six are correctly ac^^onnted tor in the following 
list. The eight natives of the Sandwich Islands, 
probably, had a hint from their countryman, Tooi- 
Tool, to keep themselves out of hai'm's way, which 
they effectually di<l. The ensuing statement, there- 
fore, is drawn up in the order in which the differ- 
ent events happened* 

** Mr Mariner's father had hoard from William To«bI, 
who had escaped about eighteen months hafore hiin« that 
his son was living, and still at Vavaoo ; twit he HrA t%\a'fe- 
sented bis siCfiatioa as rather hazudovu asvi Yio^^n&« 



\,ilJtl^'^ ,n. bo^,' »Wfl Ires. 



THE TONGA ISHANDS. 81 

the late king (the widow of the late Tooitonga), and 
was much noticed : he probably still remains at Vavaoo, 
and must now (1827) be about twenty-two years old, 
being two when he left his father. 
Robert Brown, Cooper; Thomas Dawson, Seaman; 
Thomas Brown, Landsman; Manuel Peres, Sea- 
man ; Josef, a black.— These came away with Mr Ma- 
riner in the Favourite; all but Thomas Brown were 
imder the necessity of remaining in the East Indies. 
Thomas Brown got employment on board one of the 
homeward-bound vessels frpm China, and came to Eng- 
land in the same fleet with Mr Mariner. Thomas 
Dawson has since been in London. 

Mr Mariner regrets reiy much not being able 
to famish dates. His only method of keeping time 
was by cutting certain notches on certain trees 
(unknown to any one), but even with such rude 
memoranda, he was only out in his calculation 
one day at the time of the Favourite's arrival. 

In die ensuing pages, we shall endeavour to 
furnish a correct view of all the manners, customs, 
and sentiments of the Tonga people, that have not 
been mentioned, or sufficiently dwelt upon in the 
foregoing part of the work ; and which it is hoped 
will be found exceedingly interesting, as offering 
a striking contrast to the manners, customs, and 
sentiments of civilized nations. Upon these sub- 
jects we shall speak in the following order ; viz. 
Rank in society, religious, civil and professional ; 
Religion ; Religious Ceremonies ; Knowledge ; 
Dress ; Domestic Habits ; Pastimes ; Music and 
Poetry ; and lastly, Lai^guage. 

* Thomas Eversficld has since been some years in 
London (1627.)— £o. 

VOL. H. O ^ 



S2 BAVK IN SOCIETY 



CHAPTER IV. 

Thb rank or estimation in which individuals are 
held in society at the Tonga Islands, may be most 
conyeniently treated of, first, imder three different 
points of view, viz. religious, civil, and profession- 
al, with reference to their mythology, political 
fiubordination, and their arts and manufactures ; 
and, secondly, with reference to old age, female 
sex, and infancy. In this chapter, we propose to 
speak merely of rank in society, and the degree 
of respect due from one man to another ; all which 
is determined in regard to every individual, by 
one or other, or more of the foregoing circum- 
stances, mythology, politics, arts, age, sex> and 
childhood. 

To divide society into distinct classes, and to 
discourse of the degree of rank or respect accru- 
ing to individuals, accordingly as they may belong 
to one or other of these classes, would be a task 
very difficult to execute, and perhaps impossible 
in respect to the people of these islands ; at least, 
Jjot without making numeTOua exceptions and ex* 
pJanationSy which would oivAy Yift iivft m^«xv^ ^ 
'endering the description botVi te^wia wv^ wov- 
^icate. For one and the «ame V£vii:vvvii\«^> ^?» 



OF THE TONGA PBOPLl. 89 

priest), who to-day is held in scarcely any estima- 
tion, may to-morrow, (nnder the influence of in- 
spiration), take place of every body present, seat 
himself at the head of the cava ring, be respected 
as the god himself, and his discourse attentively 
listened to as oracular. Again, — the king himself^ . 
whom one might suppose to be the greatest per- 
son in the country, (and in fact he has the great- 
est power), is by no means the behest noble, but 
must yield in point of rank to many others. In 
this order of things, therefore, we shall first speak 
of those persons to whom rank and respect is 
yielded, on the score of religious cu*cnmstance8 ; 
and these are Tooitonga, Veachi, and the priests. 
We here speak oi Tooitonga as if actually ex- 
isting in his Ml rank, with all the public honours 
of religious estimation ; but it will be recollected^ 
that, before Mr Mariner s departure from Vavaoo^ 
the king had done away entirely with all the cere- 
monies formerly considered due to tlie divine cha- 
racter of this chief. As this was done imme- 
diately after Tooitonga's death, his son did not 
succeed to this high title ; so that, if affairs still 
remain in the same state at Vavaoo, there is at 
present no Tooitonga, and probably never again 
will be ; but, if there should happen some violent 
political change, it is possible the son of the late 
divine chief may be raised to that honour. We 
therefore speak of Tooitonga asif actually existing. 
The family name of Tooitopga is Fatafehi, and the 
present head of the family, the only son, (of legi- 
timate rank), is now (1817) a youth q& i^craX.«ci.- 
teen or seventeen years of a^ ; \na xi»s£^e S»^^ftar 
fehi Low £li Tonga. He Va «aii ewMft^^eA. ^ 



84 BAKK IN SOCIETY. 

chief of liigh rank, and has respect paid to him 
accordingly. 

Tooitonga and Veachi are both acknowledged 
descendants of chief gods who formerly Tisited 
the islands of Tonga ; but whether their original 
niotheiB were goddesses, or merely natives of 
Tonga, is a question which they do not pretend to 
decide. Of these two personages, Tooitonga, as 
may be guessed from his title, is far higher in. 
rank ; — the word imports chief of Ton^ which 
island has always been considered the most noble 
of all the Tonga Islands, and from time immemo- 
rial the greatest chiefs have been accustomed to 
make it t^eir principal place of residence, and, af- 
ter their decease^ to be buried there in the tombs of 
their ancestors. This island, mareover, gives name, 
by way of pre-eminence, to all the islands taken 
coUectiyely, as a capital town sometimes gives 
name to a country ; and withal it has acquired 
the epithet of sacTed, taboOy and is thus sometimes 
called Tonffa TdhoOy denoting its excellence. 
From this circumstance it is erroneously noted 
down in our charts Tongataboo ; but taboo is only 
an epithet occasionally used. The respect whicl 
is shown to Tooitonga, and the high rank whid 
he holds in society, is wholly of a religious nature 
and is fiEU* superior, when occasion demands it, t 
that which is shown even to the kmg himself; f<i 
the king, as will by and by be seen, is by no mea 
of the most noble descent, but yields in this ] 
spect to Tooitonga, Veachi, and several famil 
related to them ; and if he were accidentally 
'neet any chief of nobler desceivt. \\\asv 'Vi\isi«Ad&. 
^ould hare to sit down on tV\c groxiiA^^J^^ 
^^ passed liini, which is a mwk oS t«we*^ 



OF THE TONGA P80PLE. 85 

common peasant would be obliged to sbow to any 
chief or Egi whatsoeT^*. For this reason the 
king never associates with any chief superior to 
himself, and always endeayoms to avoid meeting 
them ; and they in like manner endeavoar to avoid 
him, that he might not be put to the trouble of 
sitting down while they passed ; for if any one 
were to forego this ceremony in presence of a su- 
perior Egiy some calamity from the gods wotdd 
be expected as a punishment for the omission* 
Sitting down is with them a mark of respect^ as 
standing up is with us, before a superior ; upon 
the principle, perhaps, that in this posture a man 
cannot so readily attack or assassinate the person 
in whose presence he is ; or it may be diat in 
in this posture lowering his height is significant of 
his rank or merit being humbled in presence of 
the other. 

There are many ceremonies which characterize 
the high respect and veneration shown to Tooi- 
tonga ; but as in this place we are discoursing of 
rank, not of ceremonies, the full description of the 
latter must»be deferred till we come to speak of 
religious rites. Here we shall only mention, in 
a general way, of what these ceremonies chiefly 
consist. 

1. The grand ceremony of inachiy which is per- 
formed once a year (about the month of October)^ 
and consists in ofifering the first friiits of the year 
to Tooitonga* It was supposed that if this cere- 
mony were neglected, the vengeance of the gods 
would &11 in a signal manner upon xW ^^0^^% 

2. PecttUarity of hia mairiage oeitenvQii):^* 
3, Peculiarity of his buxial ceiooiau^* 

g2 



®6 RANK in BOCtETY 

4. PecuHarhy of the mourning for his decease^ 

5. Tooitonga is not circumcised, as all the other 
men are, milen he goes to foreign islands to un- 
dergo this ceremony ; nor is he tattowed. 

6. Peculiarities of speech, nsed in regard to 
Tooitonga. For instance, if the king or any chief 
bat Tooitonga be sick, they say he is tcfiga tangi ; 
bnt Tooitonga being sick, he is said to be booloohu 
So with many other words that are nsed exclusively 
for him, and which will be noticed hereafter. 

These things are mentioned in this place, merely 
to afibrd an idea of the high veneration in which 
Tooitonga is held ; for to whom bnt the greatest 
personage can such peculiarities belong? Not- 
withstanding his high rank, however, he has com- 
paratively but very little absolute power, which 
extends in a direct and positive manner only over 
his own family and attendants. As to his pro- 
perty, he has somewhat more than the generality 
of die nobles, but much less than the king, who' 
by his arbitraiy sovereignty can lay claim to almost 
any thing. Thus all that can be said in this place 
of Tooitonga is, that he is by far the greatest £!ffi, 
having the credit of a high divine original, and that 
all respect and veneration is therefore due to him. 

Veachi', as mentioned before, is another Egi 
of divine original, but far from being equal to 
Tooitonga. The king, indeed, avoids his presence, 
the same as he would that of Tooitonga, and al- 
ways pays him the usual obeisance when he hap- 
pens to meet him. But he has no peculiar marks 
of high respect shown to him, as are shown to 
Tooitonga : that is to say, no ceremonies that are, 
in tijemselvcs, peculiar"and diiferent from what are 
shown to other chiefs V>y t\vevr vDSKnsst^. TWe ia 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLE. 87 

this one universal acknowledgment, however, viz. 
that he is a great chief descended from a god — 
that he is next in rank to Tooitonga, and superior 
to every other chief. His name has no known li- 
teral meaning that Mr Mariner can discover. 

Priests, or Fahe-gehe. The term ^aAc-^e^ 
means, split off, separate, or distinct from, and is 
applied to signify a priest, or man, who has a pe- 
culiar or distinct sort of mind or soid, differing 
from that of the generality of mankind, which dis- 
poses some god occasionally to inspire him. These 
inspirations, of which an account has been given 
Vol. L p. 101, frequently happen, and on such oc- 
casions the priest has the same deference and re- 
spect shown to him as if he were the god himself. 
If the king happen to be present, he retires to a 
respectful distance, and sits down among the body 
of the spectators. So would Veachi, and so would 
even the high divine chief Tooitonga, because 
a god is believed to exist at that moment in the 
priest, and to speak from his mouth. At other 
times, a priest has no other respect paid to him 
, than what his own proper family rank may require. 
They generally belong to the lower order of cjiiefs, 
or to the matabooles, though sometimes great chiefs 
are thus visited by the gods, and the king himself 
has been inspired by Tali-y-toobo, the chief of the 
gods. During the l!ime a priest is inspired, he is 
looked on with more or less veneration, according 
to the rank of the god that inspires him. But more 
upon this subject under the head of Religion. 

The civil ranks of society may be thus divided 
—How, or King ; Egi, or Nobles ; Mata- 
booles; MooAs, and Too AS. 

The How, OT King> is oa «iiV>\\su:^ xEkfiroax^^t ^^ 



90 HANK IN SOCIETY 

As no son of a mataboole can assame that rank 
and title till his father be dead, the gi*eater part of 
them are beyond the middle age of life, and, as it 
is their business to make then^selves acquainted 
with all rites and ceremonies, and with the man- 
ners, customs, and afiairs of Tonga, they are al- 
ways looked up to as men of experience and su-* 
perior information. * Some of the matabooles are 
adepts also at some art or profession, such 9» 
canoe-building, or superintending funeral rites ;— 
this last, though a ceremony, the generality of ma^ 
tabooles do not attend, as it is also a distinct pro- 
fession. Those few that are canoe-builders are 
very perfect in their art, and only make canoes 
for the king, or other great chiefs. The mata- 
booles also make themselves acquainted with tnn 
ditionary records, and hand them down to l^eir 
sons. 

Moo AS are the next class of people below the 
matabooles ; they are either the sons or brothers 
of matabooles, or descendants of the latter. As 
the sons and brothers of matabooles are mooas, 
and as no mooa can become a mataboole till his 
father or brother whom he is to succeed be dead, 
so, in like manner, the sons and brothers of mooas 
are only tooas, and no tooa can become a mooa 
till his father or brother whom he is to succeed be 
dead. The mooas have much to do in assisting 
at public ceremonies, such as sharing out food and 
cava under the direction of the matabooles. They 

* The rank and office of the matabooles must be a very 
great advantage to the Tonga people ; it may be presum- 
ed to be one great cause of the superiority of this nation 
over the inhabitants of the Fiji, Society, and Sandwidi 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLE. 91 

flometiines arrange and direct instead of the mata- 
booles, nnless on very grand occasions. Like the 
latter, they form part of the retinue of chiefs, and 
are more or less respected according to the rank of 
their chiefe. Most of the mooas are professors of 
some art. 

Both matahooles and mooas have the business 
of attending to the good order of society, to look 
to the morals of the younger chiefs, who are i^t 
to run into excesses, and oppress the lower orders 
(the tooes), in which case they admonish them, 
and if they piEiy no attention, they report them to 
^e older chiefs, and advise that something should 
be done to remedy such evils. They are very 
much respected by all classes. Tooa§ are the 
k^west order of all, or the bulk of the people. 
They are all, by birth, hy fonnoody or peasants ; 
but some of them are employed occasionally in 
the various occupations of performing the tattow, 
cooking, club-carving, and shaving, according to 
their abilities in these respective arts, and meet 
with encouragement by presents. These tooas 
that are related to mooas, and consequently have 
chance of becoming mooas, are respected by those 
who can trace no such relationship. 

Professional Class of Society. — We now 
come to speak of those who draw respect rather 
than rank according to their usefulness in different 
arts and manufiMStures, more or less regarded. Some 
of these, as we have before seen, are matahooles, 
and rank accordingly; the greater part of them 
are mooas, and the remainder of course tooas. 
Among tiiose that practise the arts, there are many 
that do it because their fttthers ^d \Sq!& «ss(\^\^- 
fQT9 tbem, and these are for the mcy&x ^^xN* ^^a^^Osv^A 



i 



92 RANK IN SOCIETY 

practise ai*ts that are considered ingenious, and 
therefore respectable ; and hence they have no mo- 
tive sufficiently strong to engage them to relin-* 
quish it, particidarly as they obtain presents from 
their chiefs for their ingenuity. There is no posi* 
tive law to oblige them to follow the business of 
their fathers, nor any motive but the honourable 
estimation in which their arts are held, or their 
own interest, or the common custom. None of 
them are matabooles but a few of the canoe build- 
ers and the superintendants of funeral rites, per- 
haps about a fifth or a sixth part of them ; and 
some of these are very expert in catting ornaments 
out of whales' teeth for necklaces, or for inlaying 
clubs, likewise in . making clubs and spears, and 
other warlike instruments, which are not separate 
professions, but arts practised by the canoe build- 
ers as being expert in the use of the togi or axe ; 
at least there are no toofoonga f<mo le (inlayers of 
ivory), nor toofoonga gnahi mea tow (makers of 
warlike instruments), but who are also canoe-build- 
ers. All the toofoonga fo 'vaca (canoe-builders), 
and toofoonga taboo (intendants of funeral rites), 
that are not matabooles are mooas, for no person 
of so low a rank as a tooa can practise such re- 
spectable arts. The remaining professions are fol- 
lowed both by mooas and tooas, with the excep- 
tion of the three following, viz. toofoonga fy cava 
(barbers or shavers with shells), tangatafe oomoo 
(cooks), and kyfonnooa (peasants), all of whom 
are tooas. 

Of the different professions, some are hereditary 

in the way before mentioned, and some are not ; 

the latter consist of toofoonga ta tattow (those who 



OF TBS T0K6A PBOPLE. 93 

perform the tattow), toofoonga tongi aeow (dub 
carvers, or engravers of the handle, not inlayers) ; 
and toofoonga fg cava (barbers). These are not 
hereditary, for they are not of that respectability 
to engage a man to follow any of them because 
his fiather did the same. They are practised by 
any one who has a natural turn that way. But 
the two lowest of all, viz. the cooks and peasants^ 
are such by inheritance, for the chiefe, in whose 
service tliey may be, necessarily require their ser- 
vices, and their children naturally succeed them, 
for neither of these arts require any great talent to 
learn. Every body knows how to cook and till 
the ground in a tolerable degree ; but those who 
are bom to no better fate have no alternative left 
them ; they must follow these necessary employ- 
ments as the business of their life, if theii* chiefs 
command them ; and to such alone the terms cook 
and peasants are here applied. The cook is some- 
what the superior. He sees to the supplying of 
provisions, takes care of the storehouse, looks to 
the thatching and fences of the dwelling-house, 
occasionally gives an eye to the plantation, and 
sometimes works upon it himself. The head cook 
is generally not a little proud of himself, and is 
looked on with some respect by the cooks below 
him and the common peasants. The term cook is 
frequently applied to a man, though he be not a 
cook, to fii^oify that he is of very low rank. For 
although a cook belonging to a chief may give 
himself many airs, and be thought something of 
by the common tooas about him, yet if there be a 
company of peasants together, he that has the 
least to boast of in respect of family connexions 

VOL, II. H 



M 



BAVK Itf 80CIBTT 



Hereditary. < 



Followed both 
by matabooles 
and mooas* 



11 Hire to be made the cook» and as it were Mr« 
▼ant to the rest. 

The following then will be the order in which 
die difierent professions stand as to the respect 
they may command in society. All indivi- 
diuJt are not, however, esteemed according to 
their profession, but according to their abilities in 
it ; for a clever man in one art will be sometimea 
more esteemed than a man of moderate abilities 
in a higher. In this arrangement the cooks are 
placed before the peasants, because the cooks of 
cfaiefii generally have to overlook them. 

"Toofoongafo vdca: canoe-' 
builders. 

Toofoonga fono le ; cutters 
of whale-teeth ornaments. 

Toofoonga taboo ; superin- 
tendants of funeral rites. ^ 

Toofoonga ta maca ; stone-' 
masons, or makers of 
stone vaults. 

Toofoonga jia cobenga; net- 
makers. 

Toofoonga toty ica ; fisher- 
men. 

Toofoonga langafallef large 
house* builders. 

Toofoonga ta tattow; those 
"who perform the tattow. 

Toofoonga tongi acow j 
club-carvers. 

Toofoongafy cava ; barbers') 
or shavers with shells. f Followed only 

Tangaiafe oomoo ; cooks. | by tooas. 

Kyfonnooa; peasants. J 

Property in these islands, as may easily be 
conjectured^ consists pfmcipaWy m "^MvXaSassw^ 
houses, und canoes ; and the ng\i\ oi wic)c«a»K»L 
ta It is regulated by the order oi te\atox»Q^^ «» 



Hereditary 
or not. 



Hereditary. 



Followed both 
by mooas and 
tooas. 



J 



OF THB TONGA PEOFLB. 95 

given under the head of Nohles, so in like man- 
ner is the right of succession to the throne. 

Having now given a view of the rank of indi- 
viduals in society, with reference to religion, civil 
government, and professional occupations, we have 
now to consider it in respect to old age, sex, and 
childhood. 

Old persons of hoth sexes are highly reverenced 
on account of their age and experience, insomuch 
that it constitutes a branch of their first moral and 
religious duty, viz. to reverence the gods, the 
chiefs, and aged persons ; and, consequently, there 
is hardly any instance in these islands of old age 
being wantonly insulted. Women have consider- 
able respect shown to them on account of their 
sex, independent of the rank they might otherwise 
hold as nobles. They are considered to contribute 
much to the comforts and domestic happiness of 
the other sex, and, as they are the weaker of the 
two, it is thought unmanly not to show them at- 
tention and kind regard ; they are therefore not 
subjected to hard labour, or any very menial work. 
Those that are nobles rank like the men according 
to the superiority of their relationship. If a wo- 
man, not a noble, is the wife or daughter of a ma- 
taboole, she ranks as a mataboole ; if she be a no- 
ble, she is superior in rank to him, and so are the 
children, male and female ; but in domestic matters 
she submits entirely to his arrangements. Notwith- 
standing this, however, she never loses the respect 
from her husband due to her rank, that is to say, he 
is obliged to perform the ceremony o£ tnioe-m^'^V^- 
fore he can feed himself. If tYie\v«^«a^«sv^'^'^^ 
are both nobles of equal rwiV, iSaft c«t«ai^^ ^ 
Moe-moe ia dispensed widi ; Wv iRte«» ^«^^ ^ 



98 RANK IN SOCIETY 

cannot add to a woman's rank, though it does 
somewhat to the estimation in which she may be 
held ; for such things, when well done, are honour- 
able in a woman of rank. These things will be 
farther spoken of hereafter. 

Children acquire their rank by inheritance, as 
before observed, from the mother s side. If she 
be not a noble they are not, and vice versa. If a 
man, however high his rank, were to have a child 
by a woman who is only a tooa, no matter whether 
they are married or not (but indeed there is no 
instance of a noble marrying a tooa), that child 
would not be a noble, though it were known that 
the father was a noble. The child might rank as 
a mooa, but not higher ; on the contrary, if a wo- 
man who is a noble were to have a child by a 
tooa, the child would be a noble ; but this per- 
haps seldom happens, for the pride of the females 
would not allow of such a low intrigue ; or if such 
a circumstance were to take place, the greatest 
care would be used that it should not be known. 
Children that are nobles are somewhat less re- 
spected, as may be supposed, on account of their 
childhood ; but then any fieaniliarity or slight dis- 
respect that might be shown them would only be 
by nobles nearly equal or superior to them. K 
Know were to see a child of superior rank ap- 
proach or be brought near him, he perhaps would 
say (and frequently does on such occasions), take 
that child away ! why do you bring him here, 
troubling me with the taboo ? or some such abrupt 
expression. Such language, however^ would not 
be decorous from an inferior, TmVej»\^^^^ Q5l\«sat- 
^r equal rank, and then oxA^ V>1 woJSmskvVj ^ >aa 
^^periar agpe. 



•r ■ 



OF THX TONGA PEOPLE. 99 



CHAPTER V. 

The Religion of the Tonga Islands rests chiefly 
upon a belief of the following notions. 

!• That there are Hotooas, gods, or superior 
beings, who have the power of dispensing good 
and eyil to mankind, according to their merit, but 
of whose oi-igin they form no idea, rather sup- 
posing them to be eternal. 

2. That there are other Hotooas or -gods, viz. the 
souls of all deceased nobles and matabooles, 
who have a like power of dispensing good and 
evil, but in an inferior degree. 

3. That there are besides seyeral Hotooa Pow, 
or mischievous gods, whose attribute is never 
to dispense good, but petty evils and troubles, 
not as a punishment, but indiscriminately, 
from a pure mischievous disposition. 

4. That all these superior beings, although they had 

a beginning, will have no end. 

5. That the world also is of doubtful origin, and 
co-existent with the gods ; the solid sky, the 
heavenly bodies, and the ocean, be^m^ Y'^^-^*^^- 
ent to the habitable earth, aad \>a»X. ^^"X-ws^ 

IslaDds were drawn out oi tYie w«Xj«^s^ "^^ ^^ 
Tangaloa, whilst fishing wt\i «kVc» «cA^s$3(^^ 



100 RELIGIOUS TENETS 

6. That maDkind, according to a partial trac- 
tion, first came from Bolotoo, the chief resi- 
dence of the gods, and resided at the Tonga 
Islands, hy command of Tangaloa. They con- 
sisted of two brothers, with their wives and at- 
tendants, whose original they know nothing about. 

7. That all human evil is inflicted by the gods up- 
on mankind, on account of some neglect of re- 
ligious duty, either in the pei-son or persons 
who suffer the inflictions, or in the egi or chief 
whom they serve ; and the contrary of good. 

8. That all egi or nobles have souls, which exist 
hereafter in Bolotoo, not according to their moral 
merit, but then* rank in this wwld, and then 
they have power similar to the original gods, 
but IcNM. The matdbooles also go to Bolotoo 
aA;^ deethy whetre they exist as matabooles or 
ministers to the gods, but they have not the 
power of inspiring priests. The mooas, ao 
0(»iding to the belief of some, also go to Bolo- 
too, but this is a matter of great doubt. But 
the tooas have no souls, or such only as dis- 
solve with the body after death, which conse- 
quently ends their sentient existence. 

9. That the sonl during life is not a distinct es- 
sence from the body, but only the more etherial 
part of it, which exists in Bolotoo, in the form 
and likeness of the body, the moment after death. 

10. That the primitive gods and deceased nobles, 
sometimes appear (visibly) to mankind, to warn 
or to afford comfort and advice : that the pri- 

midve gods also sometimesxome into the bodies 

of lizards, porpoiaea^ and a specieaoi v«x«t-«v^^% 

^>eace these animals are mudi tw^X»^\ ^^«« 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 101 

coming into porpoises is supposed to be for the 
purpose of taking care of vessels, &c. 

11. That the two personages known by the name 
of Tooitonga and Veachi, are descendants in a 
right line from two chief gods, and that all res- 
pect and veneration is therefore due to them. 

12. That some persons are favoured with the in- 
spiration of the gods, by an actual existence of 
the god for the time being, in the person so 
inspired, who is then capable of prophesying. 

13. That human merit or virtue consists chiefly 
in paying respect to the gods, nobles, and aged 
peraons ; in defending one's hereditary rights ; 
honour, justice, patriotism, friendship, meek- 
ness, modesty, fidelity of maiTied women, pa- 
rental and filial love, obseiTance of all religious 
ceremonies, patience in suffering, &c. 

14. That all rewards for virtue, or punishments 
for vice happen to men in this world only, and 
come immediately from the gods. 

15. That several acts acknowledged by all civi- 
lized nations as crimes, are under many circum- 
stances considered by them as matters of in- 
difference ; such as revenge, killing a servant who 
has given provocation, or any body else, pro- 
vided it be not a very superior chief or noble ; 
rape, provided it be not upon a married woman, 
or one to whom respect is due, on the score of 
superior rank, from the perpetrator ; theft, ex- 
cept it be consecrated property. 

16. Omens are considered direct indications of 
die gods to mankind. Charms ot ^sQi^^t^^a^«sQ& 
ceremonies to bring evil u^otl «k^ ««>»^ ^=^ ^**^'' 

Bidered for the most ^art S»Si«3K^<&> «^>q(w®s^^ 
nerally effectiTO meam V> ^a»e«» ^«^ ^'^^ 



lOS HXLZOIOUS TENETS 

accord with the cnrse of the malevolent invoker. 
To perform these chaims is coDsidered cowardly 
and jooDanlyf hat does not constitute a crime* 

Ihe Tcmga people muyersally and positively be- 
lieve in the existence of a large island, lying at a 
condderaUe distance to the north-westward of 
their own islands, which they consider to be the 
place of residence of their gods, and of the souls of 
their nohles and matahooles. This island is sup- 
posed to be much lai^er than all their own islands 
put together, to be well stocked with all kinds of 
ns^iil and ornamental plants, always in a state of 
high perfection, and always bearing the richest 
firnits and the most beautiful flowers, according to 
their respective natures ; that when these fruits or 
flowers are plucked, others immediately occupy 
their place, and that the whole atmosphere is fill- 
ed with the most delightful fragance that the ima- 
^nation can conceive. The island is also well 
stocked with beautiful birds of all imaginable kinds, 
as well as. with abundance of hogs, all of which are 
immortal, unless they are killed to provide food for 
the hotooas or gods ; but the moment a hog or 
bird is killed, another living hog or bird immediate- 
ly comes into existence to supply its place, the 
same as with the fruits and flowers ; and this, as 
for as they know or suppose, is the only mode of 
propagation of plants and animals. The island of 
Bolotoo is supposed to be so far off as to render it 
dangerous to attempt going tliero ; and it is sup- 
posed moreover, that even if they were to suc- 
ceec/ in reaching so far, unless it \Ys»^v^ive^ \o >Q» 
he particular will of the gods, t!lcv©Y ^^^^^ 
^re to tniss it. They give, Yiowe;v«, yji w»w«l. «A 



OF THS TONGA PSOPI.E. 103 

a Tonga canoe, which, on her return firom the Fiji 
ijslands a long time ago, was driven by stress of 
weather to Bolotoo. Ignorant of the place where 
they were, and being much in want of provisions, 
— seeing the country abound in all sorts of fruit, 
the crew landed, and proceeded to pluck some 
bread-fruit, but, to their unspeakable astonishment, 
they could no more lay hold of it than if it were 
a shadow ; they walked through the trunks of the 
trees, and passed through the substance of the 
houses, (wliich were built like those of Tonga), 
without feeling any resistance. They at length 
saw some of the hotooas, who passed through their 
bodies as if there were nothing there; and re- 
commended them to go away immediately, as 
they had no proper food for them, promising them 
a fair wind and a speedy passage. They accord- 
ingly put directly to sea; and in two days, sailing 
• with the utmost velocity, they arrived at Hamoa, 
(the Navigator s Islands), at which place they want- 
ed to touch before they went to Tonga. Having 
remained at Hamoa two or three days, they sail- 
ed for Tonga, where they arrived with great speed ; 
but in the course of a few days they all died, not 
as a punishment for having been at Bc^otoo, but 
as a natural consequence — the air of Bolotoo, as 
it were, infecting mortal bodies with speedy death. 
The hotooas are supposed to have no canoes, not 
requiring them : for if they wish to be any where, 
there they are ther moment the wish is felt. 

The Hotooas, or supernatural intelligent be- 
ings, may be divided into classes. 

i' The of%uial gods. 

2. The sonis oi nobles havit^ A\ ^\xx^sn^«^ ^^ 
common with the first, b\i\ VnieWJt yq.^^^^"^* 



104 RELIGIOUS TEITSTS 

3. The souls of matabooles, that are still inferior, 
and have not the power, as the two first haye, 
of coming back to Tonga to inspire the priests, 
though they are supposed to hare the power of 
appearing to their relatives. 

4. The original attendants, or serrants, as it were, 
of the gods, who, although they had their origin, 
and have ever since existed in Bolotoo, are still 
inferior to the third class. 

5. The Hotooa Pow, or mischievous gods. 

6. Moooi, or god that supports the earth, and 
does not belong to Bolotoo. 

The first class, or ori^nal hotooas, are suppose 
ed to be rather numerous, peiiiaps about three 
hundred ; but ^e names of very few are known, 
and those only to some of the chiefs and mataboo- 
les ; for it may easUy be supposed that, where no 
written records are kept, only those whose attri- 
butes particularly concern the affairs of this worid 
should be much talked of. As {or the rest, they 
are, for the most part, merely tutelar gods to par- 
ticular private families ; and having nothing in their 
history at aU interesting, are scarcely known to 
any body else. 

Several of these primitive hotooas have houses 
dedicated to them ; the houses are built in the 
usual style, but, generally, somewhat more care 
is taken, both in building them, and keeping 
them in good order, decorating their enclosures 
with fiowers, &c. About twenty of the gods have 
houses thu8 consecrated to them, some having five 
or SIX, others one or two. The ^oWowm^ w^ tW 
names and attributes of the princi^ ^oda, 
^-ACL/.y-TooBo'; (the Utenl meaittaft <& Ok» 



THB TONGA PE6PLI. 105 

name, from which nothing can be deduced, is 
Wait there, Toobo /) He is the patron of the 
How and his family, not of Finow in particular, 
who is the present king, but of any one who may 
be king. He is also god of war, and is conse- 
quently always invoked in time of war by the 
How 8 party. In time of peace he is also occa- 
sionally invoked for the general good of the na- 
tion. He has four houses dedicated to him in 
the island of Vavaoo ; two at the small island of 
Lefooga, one at Haano, one at Wiha, and two or 
three others of smaller importance elsewhere. He 
has no priest, unless it be the How himself, whom 
he sometimes inspires ; but it has happened ihat 
a How, during his whole reign, has not been in- 
spired. • 

Too'i FOOA Bolo'too ; the literal meaning of 
this is, '< Chief of aU Bohtoo, ** From this name 
one would suppose him to be the greatest god in 
Bolotoo, but he is inferior to the one before mention- 
ed. How he came by this name the natives them- 
selves can give no account ; the only answer they 
make is, that such is his proper name. Although 
he is the god of Bolotoo he is inferior to Tali y 
Toobo, insomuch that they scarcely make a com- 
parison between them. If you' ask them whether 
Tooi fooa Bolotoo is a great god, they will an- 
swer, " Yes, he is a very great god. " " Is 
Tali y Toobo a greater god ? " " Yes, much 
greater. " " How great, then, is Tali y Toobo ? " 
'< He is a great chief, from the top of the sky 
down to the bottom of the earth ! " He is also 
the god of rank in society, Mid m ^>a qjmS^^V^ 
18 often invoked by the lieaudi^ o^ ^C8X tos&sa^ " 

VOL. lU 1 



106 HELIGIOUS TENETS 

the king, and other great nohles, on occasion of 
sickness, or other fiunily troubles. He has sere- 

^ ral houses dedicated to him ; three or four at Va- 
yaoo, one at Lefooga, and a few at other islands. 
He has three or foui* priests, whom he occasion- 
ally inspires ; at least Mr Mariner was acquainted 
with three or four, but perhaps there are others. 

Higoole'o (no literal meaning that we can dis- 
cover, unless igoo leOy to guard the tail) ; a very 
high god, regai'ded principally by Tooitonga's fi^ 
mily. He has no priest, nor any house, and is 
supposed never to come to Tonga. The natives 
are uncertain about his attributes. 

TooBO ToTTy literally, Toobo tke mariner. 
He is the patron of Finow's fEunily, also the god 
of voyages. In the first quality he is often in- 
yoked by Finow ; in the second by chiefs, going 
upon any maritime expedition ; also by any body 
in a canoe during a voyage. He is not tlie god 
of ?dnd, but is supposed to have great influence 
with that deity. His chief power is extended to 
the preservation of canoes from accidents. This 
god has several houses dedicated to him, chiefly 
at Vavaoo and the contiguous isles. Mr Mariner 
only knew one priest belonging to him, but he, 
perhaps, has several. It will be recollected, in 
the former part of the history, at the time when 
Finow's daughter was ill, this priest, when in- 
spired, foretold that either she or Finow must die, 
as decreed in Bolotoo. In consequence, Finaw, 
after his daughter's death, was so exasperated with 
/fj^ godf Tooho Toty', for not making arrange- 
toents among the gods more favonwiXA^ V>\v\\£k^ 

thut he vowed to JdlJ his priest ; ^\sai^ «»«p^^- 
^tia iatention was prevented by \om vwn ^b«A^ 



OF THE TONGA PXOPLS. 107 

Ala'i Valoo ; (AkUy no discoverable meaning; 
Valoo, the number eight) ; a god that patronizes 
the How's family, but being particularly the pa- 
trim god of Tee Oomoo, the late king's aunt, he 
has a large consecrated fencing at Ofoo, one of 
the islands in the vicinity of Vavaoo. Has at 
least one priest, and is very frequently consulted 
in behalf of sick persons. 

A'lo A'lo ; literally, to fan. God of wind and 
weather, rain, harvest, and vegetation in general^ 
who is generally invoked about once a month, if 
the weather is seasonable, that it may remain so ; 
but if imseasonable, or desti-uctive oo shore by ex- 
cessive wind or rain, he is invoked every day. 
Alo Alo is not the god of thunder and lightning, 
of which, indeed, there is no god acknowledged 
among them, as this phenomenon is never recol- 
lected to have done any mischief of consequence. 
In boisterous weather at sea, the superior god 
Toobo Toty', the protector of canoes, and other 
sea-gods, are always invoked in place of A% A1o. 
About the time when the yams are full grown 
(near the latter end of December), the ceremony 
of taw tow begins, consisting in an offering of 
yams, and other provisions, to the god A1o Alo. 
It is repeated every ten days, for eight times suc- 
cessively, as will be described under the head of 
religious rites. This god has only two houses de- 
dicated to him, one at Vavaoo, and the other at 
Lefooga : also two priests, one at each place. 

Too'i Bolo'too ; literally. Chief of Bolotoo, 
This and the three following are dIIL iximoR %<ck^^ ^ 
the sea and of voyage^ and pTO\ftcX.«t% ^l^xassw '^ 
family. Notwithstanding Yna mme^ \i» >s^ '\s&wss^ 
io all the goda mentioned beioie \bsc^> "^"^"^ ^"^ 



108 RBLIGIOUS TENBTS 

upon an eqiiality with the three following. He 
has two houses dedicated to him at Vavaoo, and 
one at Lefooga ; none elsewhere that Mr Mariner 
knew of. He has perhaps two or three priests. 

Ha'la A'pi A'pi; literally, a road crotadecL 
He has the same attributes as Tooi Bolotoo. Mr 
Mariner knows of no house dedicated to him. He 
has one priest. 

To'gi Oocumme'a ; literally, an mm axe. The 
aame attributes as the above. 

Toob6 ' Bo6goo ; literally, Tcobo the Short 
The same attributes as. the above. 

Tang A l6 A ; god of artificers and the arts : 
doubtful if he has any house dedicated to him : 
has several priests, who are all carpenters. It was 
this god that brought the Tonga Islands from the 
bottom of the sea, whilst fishing. 
/ Such are the names and attributes of the chief 
primitive gods ; next to whom in rank and power 
come the 

Souls of Egies, or Nobles. Of these there 
must be a vast number. Their attributes are si- 
milar to those of the primitive chief gods. They 
have the power of inspiring priests, and of appear- 
ing in dreams and visions to their relatives and 
others. They have no houses dedicated to them ; 
but the proper places to invoke them are their 
graves, which are considered sacred, and are there- 
fore as much respected as consecrated houses. 
Their names are the same as they had whilst liv- 
ing, and they hold the same rank mutually among 
themselves as they held during their mortal exis- 
tence. Whethev their deeds wer^ ^wj^ w wU 
during their life, is a circumstaaa^ce \V»X ^^"^ ^^'^ 
^^ affect their state in Bolotoo, aSX ig»uTOJaMft«sii\a 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 109 

for crimes being supposed to be inflicted by the 
primitive gods upon men dnring their lifetime ; in 
which inflictions the second class of gods have a 
proportional power with the first. As many of 
these souls of nobles have had strong warlike dis- 
positions in this world, it might be supposed that 
they ws^ed war against each other in Bolotoo ; 
but this is not the case, for, in that state of exis- 
tence, their understanding is clearer than in this 
world, enabling them to discern what is right, and 
disposing them to choose it in preference to what 
is wrong. Not but what they, and even the pri- 
mitive gods, have verbal disputes, but which, from 
the clearness of their intellect, and the justice of 
their views, are supposed to be managed with di- 
vine temperance ; but as the temperate discussion 
of gods may appear awful violence to weak-mind- 
ed man, so it is not to be wondered that such dis- 
putes at Bolotoo should produce thunder and 
lightning at Tonga ; as happened in the discussion 
among the gods respecting the fieite of Finow and 
his daughter. 

The Souls of Matabooles come next. Of 
these little need be said, as they hold the same 
name and rank as dnring their life. They have 
not the power of inspiring priests ; they cannot 
punish nor reward mankind, at least by any direct 
influence ; though their friends and relatives some- 
times beg their intercession with the higher gods, 
in behalf of their health, or prosperity, &c. They 
have no houses dedicated to them ; but they some- 
times appear to their friends. ^Qiii» ^ ^wsv ^is% 
tnteJar gods, and protectore est 1^ tooa».> ot Vro^t 
orders, which they are> as iX ^«n^\s1 ^^wssosNa^- 



110 RBLICIOtTS TENETS 

The Attendants, or Servants of the Pri- 
mitive Gods. These, like. the gods to whom 
they belong, are original inhabitants of Bolotoo. 
They are considered of less quality than the souls 
of Matabooles. They have no power in Tonga, 
and if they go there, they cannot manifest them- 
selves« Their number is supposed to be immense. . 

Tlie Hotooa Pow, or mischievous Gods, are 
perhaps several in nimiber, but only five or six are 
supposed to be particularly active ; and from their 
disposition to plague mankind, they reside more 
frequently at Tonga than at Bolotoo. They are 
accused of being the cause of all the petty incon- 
veniences and troubles of life ; and at Ham6a (or 
the Navigator 8 Islands), they have an idea, which 
is very convenient to the reputation of the females, 
that some of these hotooa poio molest them in their 
sleep, in consequence of which there ai*e many su- 
pernatural conceptions. At Tonga, however, the 
matter is never carried to that extent. These 
hotooa pow have no priests, have no houses dedi- 
cated to them, nor are they ever invoked. All 
the great misfortunes of life, as before noticed, are 
special inflictions from the gods for the crimes of 
men; whereas the mischievous tricks played by 
the hotooa pow are for their own whim and delight. 
They lead travellers astray, trip them up, pinch 
them, jump upon their backs in the dai'k, cause 
the nightmare and frightful dreams. They are 
never seen. 

M6001 — A god that supports the earth, the 

earth lying on him, he l)eing prostrate. This, as 

may be supposed, is a very gigantic being, greater 

j'n personal bulk than any of the others. He never 

'JispireB any body, nor ever leaves \na «vVo«!d~~ 



OF THK TONGA PEOPLE. Ill 

He has no house dedicated to him. When an 
earthquake happens, it is supposed that this god, 
feeling himself in an uneasy posture, is endeavour- 
ing to turn himself about ; and, on such occasions, 
the people give loud shouts, and beat the ground 
Vfiih sticks, which is supposed to have the effect 
of making him lie still. They hare no idea of 
what he lies on, nor ever make any inquiries about 
it ; and say it would be folly to do so, for who 
can go there and see ? 

Such is the account they give of their gods ; and 
the respect which they pay to these imaginary 
beings is so great and so universal, that scarcely any 
instance is known of downright impiety. Inde^^ 
they have very strong motives to keep them in 
proper order in this respect, founded in their firm 
and fixed belief, that all human miseries are the 
consequent punishment of crimes, and that acta of 
atrocity are most frequently punished by disease 
and death ; and thb risk of premature death, among 
the tooas in particular, must have a frightful aspect, 
as they consider the termination of life as the ter- 
mination of their existence altogether. With re- 
spect to the chiefs, indeed, to whom death is only 
a change to a better life, this apprehension may 
not take quite so strong a hold. Nevertheless, 
life is always sweet, there are always some purposes 
of ambition or enjoyment yet to be satisfied ; and 
when death does come, it is rather to be wished 
foV in the field of battle, than prostrate on a mat, 
overcome with pain and disease, in the midst of 
one's friends and relatives weeping and lamenting. 

The next subject to speak of, is the origin of 
the habitable earth, which, according to their no- 
tions, vague as they are, liad tl^eA&^N^^^'^'^^^^^ 



lis RELIGIOUS TENETS. 

(See Tol. I. p. 228.) Tangaloa haying discovered 
knd, as therein described, by the divine inflvence 
of himself and other gods, it was soon replete with 
all kinds of trees, herbs, and animals, such as were 
in Bolotoo, but of an inferior quality, and subject 
to decay and death. Being now willing that 
Tonga should also be inhabited by intelligent be- 
ings, he commanded his two sons thus : * ^' Go, 
and take with you your wives, and dwell in the 
world at Tonga : divide the land into two portions, 
and dwell separately from each other. They de« 
parted accordingly. The name of the eldest was 
Toobo, and the name of the youngest was V^- 
ac6w-o61i, who was an exceeding wise young 
man ; for it was he that first formed axes, and in- 
vented beads, and cloth, and looking-glasses. The 
young man called Toobd acted very differently, 
being very indolent, sauntering about and sleep- 
ing, and envying very much the works of his 
brodier. Tired at length with begging his goods, 
he bethought himself to kill him, but concealed his 
wicked intention. He accordinigly met his brother 
walking, and struck him till fa^ was dead. At 
that time their father came from Bolotoo with ex- 
ceeding great anger, and asked him, Why have 
you killed your brother ? Could not you work like 
him ? Oh thou wicked one ! begone I go with my 
commands to the family of Vaca-acow-ooli ; tell 
them to come hither. Being accordingly come, 
Tangaloa straightway ordered them thus : Put 
your canoes to sea, and sail to the east, to the 
great land which is there, and take up your abode 
there. Be your skins white like your minds, for 

* The following story is as nearly as possible a Kierai 
trnalaiion of the iaiiguage in which they \eW\t» 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 113 

your minds are pure ; yoa shall be wise> making 
axes, and all riches whatsoever, and shall have 
laige canoes. I will go myself and command the 
wind to blow from your land to Tonga ; but they 
{the Tonga people) shall not be able to go to you 
with their bad canoes. 

*' Tangaloa then spoke thus to the others : — 
You shall be black, because your minds are bad, 
and shall be destitute ; yon shall not be wise in 
useful things, neither shall you go to the great 
land of your brothers. How can you g« with your 
bad canoes? But your brothers shall come to 
Tonga, and trade with you as they please.'' 

Mr Mariner took particular pains to make in- 
quiries respecting the above extraordinary story, 
with a view to discover whether it was only a cor- 
rupted relation of the Mosaic account; and he 
found that it was not universally known to the 
Tonga people. Most of the chiefe and matabooles 
were acquainted with it, but the bulk of the peo- 
ple seemed totally ignorant of it. This led him at 
first to suspect th^ the chiefs had obtained the 
leaduig facts from some of our modem mission- 
aries, and had interwoven it with their own no- 
tions ; but the oldest men affirmed their positive 
belief that it was an ancient traditionary record, 
and that it was founded in truth. It seems strange 
that they should believe an account which serves 
so much to degrade them, and makes even their 
▼ery chiefs to be descendants of bad men, cursed 
by their father with the evils of poverty and igno- 
rance. Nevertheless, they readily own the supe- 
riority of the Papalangies, not only in knowledge, 
but disposition to do good ; but, on the other 
hand, they do not bo readilY tfxoSsKA ^\fis^V(^\s^ 



114 RELIGIOUS TENETS 

lie under a malediction. On the contrary) ihitj 
maintain that they are far superior to us in p^* 
sonal heauty ; and though we have more instm- 
ments and riches, they think that they could make 
a better use of them if they only bad them in their 
possession. Of the chiefs and matabooles who r^* 
lated the foregoing account, some believed it firm- 
ly, others left it as they found it ; none positively 
disbelieved it. Mr Mariner related to them our 
scriptural and traditionary account of Cain and 
Abel, and ^expressed his opinion, that they must 
have received their information either from the 
missionaries, or from some Papalangi at an early 
period, whom accident had thrown among them ; 
but some still persisted that it was an original tra* 
dition of their own, whilst others owned there was 
■o great a ftimilarity between the two accounts^ 
that they were disposed to believe they had 
received theirs from us, perhaps two or three 
or four generations back. But such things de 
not very often form a subject of conversation 
among them ; consequently theii* knowledge and 
belief of these matters (as they have no writings) 
become very vague, incongruous, and uncertain. 
They have several other accounts of the origin 
of mankind, or rather of the first inhabitants of 
Tonga ; but most of them are not only ridiculous, 
but very confused and indeterminate, and, as Mr 
Mariner believ-es, of no greater antiquity than the 
present generation, invented perhaps for the pur> 
pose of passing away time for lack of better con- 
versation — most of the natives being very fond of 
inventing tales for amusement, like the continental 
nations west of them, but very void of the poetic 
elegance of those nations. The account tiiat is 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 1 15 

more universally known and belieyed, which is 
the least inconsistent with their general notions^ 
and probably the most ancient, is the following : 

'^ At a time when the islands of Tonga were 
already existing, but not yet peopled with intel- 
ligent beings, some of the minor gods of Bolotoo 
being desirous to see the new world (which Tan- 
galoa had fished up), put to sea, about two hun- 
dred in number, male and female, in a lai^ canoe, 
and arrived at the island of Tonga. Tliey were 
so well pleased with the novelty of the place, that 
they determmed to remain there, and accordingly 
broke up their canoe to make small ones of it ; 
but in a few days two or three of them died. This 
phenomenon alarmed all the rest, for decay and 
death was what their notion of theii* own immorta- 
lity did not lead them to expect. About this time 
one of them felt himself strangely affected, and by 
this he knew that one of the superior gods was 
coming from Bolotoo to inspire liim. In a little 
time he was actually inspired, and was told that 
the chief gods had decreed, that as they had come 
to Tonga, and had breathed the air of the place, 
and had fed upon the produce of it, they should 
become mortal, and people the world with mortal 
beings, and all about them should be mea mama. * 
Upon this they were all exceedingly grieved, and 
were sorry they had broken up their canoe ; but 
they made another, and some of them put to sea 
with the hope of regaining the island of Bolotoo ; 
in which endeavour, if they succeeded, they were 

• Things of this world, mortal, subject to decay and 
death, in contradistinctioa to mia hoto6a, tilings of the 
other world (Bolotoo), or hmd d fto(o6(U^ vaa&.<Si?a&^«^^ 
aXwBys Hounshittg, 



16 BXLJOIOVB TENKTS 

' oome back and ibtdb their companions ; bnt the5r 
K>ked in Tiin for the land of the gods, and were 
bliged to retam sorely afflicted to Tonga. ** 

In die above stoiy there is a little inconsist- 
eocy in respect to llie gods coming from Bolotoo 
in a canoe; for the gods are generally under- 
stood to haye no canoes, not requiring them ; for 
tiie naoment they wish to be any where, their 
mih is accomplished without any farther trouble, 
which is a mode of conveyance far superior to any 
of our inventions, either ancient or modem. 
Hie Tonga people have also a story among 
them respecting an island of immortal women 
existing somewhere to the north-west of Fiji; 
bat this is suspected to be rather a Fiji tale than 
a tradition of their own, and consequently is not 
mnch believed among them. These immortal 
women are considered to be hotooas ; but they are 
thought to have all the passions and propensities 
properly belonging to women of this world, inso- 
much that it is dangerous for canoes to put in 
there ; not that the crew would be positively iU- 
treated by these fair goddesses, but too much 
kindness sometimes destroys as effectually, though 
perhaps not so quickly, as too much severity. It 
is reported that a Fiji canoe was once driven there 
by a gale of wind. The men landed, and were 
charmed with the truly kind reception they met 
with; but in a day or two, finding the climate 
much too warm for their constitution, they wisely 
betook themselves again to their canoe, and witl 
jsowe difficulty reached the Fiji Islands, bringing 
sundry marvellous accouivta o^ \\ie xisX^ox^ q!1 ^ 
country, and the reception Ac^ ^^'^ ^^^^« ,7 
^toiy 18 prevalent, not only a-tToxv^wi^YlS 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLX. 117 

also at HamoB (the Navigator*s Island). Some 
of the Fiji people heliere it : the Hamoa people 
doubt it yery much; and the generality of the 
Tonga people deny it altogether. 

The natives of the Toi^ Islands have a tra- 
ditionary story respecting the origin of turtles; 
and as we are here discoursing about their notions 
of the world, \^ch in some measure involve their 
knowledge of natural history, it ought properly to 
be told in this place. A considerable time after 
the existence of mankind at Tonga, a certain god, 
who lived in the sky, and whose name was Langi, 
received a command from the superior gods of 
Bolotoo to attend a grand conference, shortly to 
be held at the latter place, on some point of uni- 
versal importance. Now it happened that the god 
Langi had several children ; * among others, two 
daughters, beautiful young goddesses, who were 
of an age in which vanity and the desire to be ad- 
mired was beginning to be a very strong passion, 
and consequently they had often expressed their 
wish to see the islands of Tonga, and to visit the 
people that dwelt there ; but their father was too 
wise readily to give his consent. Business of im- 
portance, however, now demanded his absence 
irom the sky ; but being fearful that his inexperi- 
enced daughters might in the mean time descend 
to Tonga, he gave them the strictest commands 
not to kave thor celestial residence till his return ; 
and as a motive for their obedience, he promised 

* It would appear ftom this that the gods are supponed 
to have children ; nevertbelecs Mr Mariner believes that 
tbia M Dot consistent with the gi^eiiX. Oi^Ycvvcscv cR.^dBft'CA< 
tives. 

VOL. U. ic ^ 



118 RELIGIOUS TENETS 

to conduct theni, when he came back, to Tongft, 
and gratify their wisli with Hafety to themselves. 
Witli a view to strengthen his injunction's and bet- 
ter to ensure their compliance, he represented ia 
lively colours the many dangers they would subject 
themselves to, by infringing upon bis commands^ 
In the first place, he told them that the Hotooa 
Pow, who retuded at Tonga, WAXuld take every 
opportunity to molest them, and to throw diflicul- 
ties and dangers in tlieir way. Besides which, 
tliere were other evils of greater consequence to 
fear, for they were so beautiful (he told them) that 
the men of Tonga would furiously fight among 
themselves to obtain them for their wives, and 
that the quarrels occasioned by them would, no 
doubt, offend the superior gods of Bolotooy and he 
(Langi) should thereby get into disgraeeu The 
two goddesses having promised obedience to their 
father's orders, he descended with speed to Bolo- 
too. He had scarcely left the sky, when they be- 
gan to reason together on what he had told them. 
One said to the other, our father has only promis- 
ed 'to take us to Tonga tliat he may keep us here 
till he come back ; for has he not often promised 
us the same thing, and neyer folfilled his word ? 
True, said the other ; let us go to Tonga by our- 
selyes for a little time, just to look at the fnama 
people and we will return before he sliall know 
any thing of it ; besides, (said both of them to- 
gether) has he not told us that we are more bean- 
tiful than the women of Tonga ? Yes I let us go 
immediately to Tonga and be admired, Ux in the 
sky there an; many other goddesses nearly as beau- 
tiful as our8elves, and we are scarcely noticed. 
Upon this thvy desceadcd togelW V> \lkv& ^sSand 



OF THE TONGA FEOFLB. 1 19 

of Tonga, and, liaving alighted in a lonely place' 
tiiey walked towards the vnooa^ discoursing as they 
went on tlie homage that was soon to he paid to 
tlieir cliarms. When they ai'rived at the mooa^ 
tliey found the king and all his chiefs and princi- 
pal people engaged in some grand ceremony of 
rejoicing, and were drinking their cava. The 
moment they arrived all eyes were turned upon 
them, and all hearts, except tliose tliat envied, 
were fille<l with admiration and love. The young 
diiefs vied with each other in showing them the 
most signal attentions ; * they already began to he 
jealous of each other ; they left ofif drinking cava, 
end the whole assembly was put in confusion. At 
length the young men began to quan'el among 
tliemselves ; but the king, to settle ali disputes, by 
virtue of his superior power, took them home to 
}iis own residence. The sun had scarcely set, 
however, before certain chiefs, with a strong arm- 
ed force, rescued them from the king's house. 
TJie whole island was soon in a state of confusion 
and alarm, and early the following morning a 
bloody war was commenced. In the mean time 
the gods of Bolotoo heard what was going forward 
at Tonga ; and they immediately, with great indig- 
nation, charged poor Langi with being tlie cause 
of these distmbajices. This god said in liis de- 

* It IS not the least remarkable trdt in the character of 
tlie Tonga people, that on almost all occasions they show 
very marked attention to females ; and we believe that 
among all the different clusters of islands in the South 
. Seas, the natives of these arc <?ingular in this respect The 
u'omcn of 'I'onf^a arc not obliged to lalxmr to procure the 
iKHXSsarips of lile for tiietr idle husbands. The mcu work ; 
tlic women do chiclly those offices that arc requisite for do- 
mestic comfort, and for the promoV\oTvo£\«^^X"v^^^^^"*2^- 
/rncssr. 



120 RELIGIOUS TENETS 

fence, that he had ordered his daughters to re* 
main at home, but unfortunately they were dis- 
obedient children. He immediately left the synod 
of gods, and flew with all speed to Tonga, where 
he found that one of his daughters, by haying 
eaten of the productions of the place, had depriT- 
ed herself of immortality, and was already dead. 
The loss of his daughter enraged him to the ut- 
most extreme ; he sought for the other, and, seis- 
ing her by the hair, severed her head from her 
body. The head he threw into the sea, then flew, 
with rage and disappointment, back to the sky. 
The head in a short time turned into a turtle, and 
was the origin and source of all the turtle now 
found in the world. This story obtains almost 
unirersal credit at the Tonga Islands ; in conse- 
quence, turtles are considered as almost a prohi- 
bited food, very few will venture to eat them with- 
out first offering a portion to some god, or send- 
ing some to any chief that may be at hand ; and 
there are many that will not eat turtle on any ac- 
count, being fearful of its producing enlarged 
livers, or some such visceral complaint. It is not 
supposed, however, to be so likely to have a bad 
effect upon great chiefs, as they approach so near 
in rank and character to the gods themselves. 

Such are their principal notions respecting the ori- 
gin of things. As to the first formation of the solid 
sky (as^they deem it), or the island of Bolotoo, or 
the gods themselves, they pretend to form no idea, 
and never think of agitating the question, whether 
they are eternal, or whether they had a beginnings 
deeming all such speculations as vain and fruitless ; 
for who, say they, can remember, or who has 
been there to see? Tbey have tm) \e||8Bda oc 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 121 

tales that seem to resemble those of the Society 
Islaiuls, as related by Captaiu Cook. Respecting 
tlie eaith, their notion is^ that it has a flat surfiEu^, 
ending abruptly, which the sky overarches. If 
yon ask them why the sea does not run over, the 
answer will be, '' How can I tell ? I liave never 
been there to see ; there are rocks, or something 
to b<M*der it, probably. " With regard to the sun 
and moon, they pass through the sky, and come 
back some way, they know not how. As to the 
spots in the moon, they are compared to the figure 
of a woman sitting down and beating gnatoo* 
When tlie moon is eclipsed, they attribute tlie 
plienomenon to a tliick cloud passing over it. The 
aame with the sun. 

Ilespecting the human soul, in particular, they- 
ifliagine it to be the finer or more aeriform part of 
the body, and which leaves it suddenly at the mo- 
ment of death ; and it may be conceived Uy stand 
mnch in the same rdation to the liody as the per* 
fume and more essential qualities of a flower do to 
the more solid substance whicli constitutes the 
vegetable fibre. Tiiey have no proper word to ex- 
press this fine eilierial part of man. As to the 
word lo40i though it may he sometimes used for 
this pttq)08e, it rather means, a man's disposition, 
inclination, passion, or sentiment. The soul is 
rather supposed to exist tlnt>ughout the whole ex- 
tension 'oi the body, bnt particularly in the heart, 
^le pulsation of which is the strength and power 
of tlie soul or mind. They have no clear distinc- 
tion between tlie life and the soul, but they will 
tell you tliat the foftomaanaoa (the right auricle of 
Uie heart) is tlie seat of life, ThjC^ Cot«\ \\^ >*!». 

k2 



1!^ RBLIGIOUS TBNETS 

respecting the um of the brain, unless it be, per- 
haps, the seat of memory ; (they have a distinct 
word for memory, mamUod), They derive this 
notion from the natural action of putting the hand 
to the forehead, or striking the head gently when 
trying to remember any thing. The liver they 
consider to be the seat of courage, and they pre- 
tend to have remarked, on opening dead bodies, 
that th^ largest livers, not diseased, belong to the 
bravest men. They also say they have made an- 
other observation respecting this viscus, viz. that, 
in left-banded people, it is situated more on the 
left than on the right side ; and, in persons that 
are ambidexter, it is placed as much on one side 
as the other. They are very well acquainted with 
the situation of all the principal viscera. They 
acknowledge that the toocts, or lower order of peo- 
ple, have minds or souls ; but they firmly believe 
that their souls die with their bodies, and, con- 
sequently, have no future existence. The gene- 
rality of the tooas, themselves, are of this opinion ; 
but there are some who have the vanity to .think 
they have immortal souls as well as matabooles 
and chiefs, which will live hereafter in Bolotoo. 
There seems to be a wide difference between the 
opinions of the natives in the different clusters of 
the South Sea islands respecting the future exis- 
tence of the sold. Whilst the Tonga doctrine li- 
mits immortality to chiefs, matabooles, and at most 
to mooas, the Fiji doctrine, with abundant libe- 
rality, extends it to all maiddnd, to all brute ani- 
mals, to all vegetables, and even to stones and 
miner2\ substances. If an animal or a plant die, 
j'ta soul ii/imcdiately goes to Bolotoo ; if a stone 
or any other substance is bifAuen, \xaiao£\iSeft^ *\^ 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLE. 12S 

its reward ; nay, artificial bodies have equal good 
luck with men, hogs and yams. If an axe or a 
chisel is worn out, away flies its soul for the ser- 
vice of the gods. If a house is taken down, its 
immortal part will find a situation on the plains of 
Bolotoo. And, to confirm this doctrine, the Fiji 
people can show you a sort of natural well, or 
deep hole in the ground, at one of their islands, 
across the bottom of which runs a stream of water, 
in which you may clearly perceive the souls of 
men, women, beasts, plants, stocks, stones, canoes, 
bouses, and all the broken utensils of this frail 
world, tumbling along one over the other, into the 
regions of immortality. Such is the Fiji philoso- 
phy ; but the Tonga people deny it, unwilling to 
think that the residence of the gods shoidd be en- 
cumbered with so much rubbish. The natives of 
Otaheite entertain similar notions respecting these 
things, viz. that brutes, plants, and stones, exist 
hereafter (see Ci^ptain Cook's Voyage); but it is 
mentioned that they extend the idea to objects of 
human invention. Mr Mariner is not acquainted 
with the notions of the Sandwich islanders upon 
these subjects. What we have related respecting 
those of the Fiji people he obtained from Fiji na- 
tives resident at Vavaoo, from Tonga people 
who had visited the Fiji Islands, and from iJie na- 
tives of Pan, when he was there. The human soul, 
after its lepaiation from the body, is termed a 
hatooa (a god or spirit), and is believed to exist in 
the shape oi the body ; to have the same propen- 
sities as diuing Kfe, but to be corrected by a more 
enlightened understanding, by which it readily 
distinguishes good from evU, tmtk from ^«2a^^^^^ 
f^bt from wroDg; having the saaocie 'dX.X3r^s\)X^ '^i^ 



124 UELIGIOUS TENETS 

the original gmlR, bnt in a minor degree, and 
havinjr its dwelling for ever in tlie happy rcgionB 
of Bolotoo, l»o]ding the same rank as during life. 
It lias, however, the power of retnming to Tonga 
to inspire priests, relations, or others, or to appear 
in dreams to those it wishes to admonish ; and 
Rometimes to the external eye in the form of a 
ghost or apparition* But this power of lenippear^ 
ance at Tonga particularly belongs to the souls of 
chiefe, rather than of matabooles. It was thought 
that Finow the First was occasionally visited by a 
deceased son of his, not visibly, hut announcing his 
presence by whistling. Mr Mariner onoe lieard 
this whistling, as he was widi the king and iMime 
dliiefs in a house at night lying on their mats. It 
was daik, imd the sound appeared to come from 
the loft of liie house. Mr Mariner thinks this to 
have been some trick of Finow's. The natives be- 
lieved it to be a spirit. It is to be observed that 
they consider it taboo to whistle, as being dis- 
respectful to the gods. It has already l)een stat- 
ed, that llie gods are believed sometimes to enter 
into the bodies of liKards, porpoises uid water- 
snakes ; but Uiis power bekmgs only to the ori- 
ginal gods, not to the «ouls of chiefs. There is 
no future place of existence for the souls of men 
lyut Bolotoo, and, consequently, no state of future 
punishment — all rewards for virtue, and punisli- 
ments for vice, being inflicted on mankind in this 
iworid, as before noticed. When Mr Mariner ac- 
quainted some of them with the Christian doctrine 
of etenial punishment, they said that it was " very 
bad indeecl for the Papalangies. " 



OF THE TONGA PSOFLE. 125 



CHAPTER VL 

The two divine personages, viz. Tooitonga and 
Veachi, or those who are supposed to be peculiarly 
of high divine origin, have already been spoken of 
as far as their rank is concerned. In respect to 
their habits, we might very naturally imagine that, 
in consequence of their high rank as divine chiefs, 
they would very ^quently be inspired by the 
gods, and become the oracles of divine will ; but 
this, as fietr as Mr Mariner has seen and heard, has 
never been the case ; and it seems strange ,that 
the favour of divine inspiration should be parti- 
cularly bestowed upon men seldom higher in rank 
than matabooles. Such however is the case ; and, 
to reconcile it with propriety, we may suppose 
that Tooitonga and Veachi are supposed to be of 
too high a rank to be the mere servants of the gods, 
^and mere instruments of communication between 
them and mankind, but rather as the higheit and 
most worthy of mankind, and next to the gods in 
rank and dignity. These two persons, howejer 
high in rank, have very little comparative power. 
Mr Mariner once witnessed an instance where 
Tooitonga ventured to advise Finow (the late 
king) respecting his warlike proceeding agaixv^ 
Varaoo, at the time when \a& aunt) Toq OoxQ>SM^^ 



126 HABITS OF THE 

revolted. For this purpose lie went into the house 
on a 7nalai, and sent a messenger to the king to 
say that he was there ; which is the polite mode 
of telling a person you want him fo come, that you 
may speak to him. He did not go to the king's 
house in person to communicate what he had to 
say, because, being the superior chief, every thing 
would have been tabooed that he happened to touch. 
When the king arrived, Tooitonga mildly address- 
ed him on the subject of his aunt's revolt, and ad- 
vised that he should endeavour to accommodate 
matters rather than invdve the country in war : to 
which the king shortly replied, ^* My Lord Tooi- 
tonga * may return to his own part of the island, 
and content himself in peace and security ; mat- 
ters of war are my concern, and in which he 
has no right to interfere. " He then left him. 
Thus, in all respects, we are to regard Tooi- 
tonga as a divine chief of the highest rank, but 
having no power or authority in aifaii*s belonging 
to the king. It is presumed, however, that 
when the Tonga Islands were in a state of peace, 
llwt ifl before the pitople had acquired their war- 
fHkb liabits, that Tooitonga, as well as Veachi, 
had some influence even in matters of civil go- 
it, that their advice was often asked, and 



; .• -fBo Egi Tooitonga means, literally, " ihy lord Tooi- 
tann,** in which the possessive pronoun thi/^ or i/mtr, is 
UiM ii4ltcad of m^ : or, if the word egi be translateid lord- 
rid^ or-chiefiship, the term of address will be more consist- 
•Dt. and similar to ours, yaur loribkip^ i/our gracct your 
mmfif^' The title, ho egif is never used hut in address- 
iDlg a Biii>crior chief, or speaking of a god ; or in a public 
^Wbch." ■ Ho Egi / also means chiefs, as in the commerice- 
nient of the speech of Finow the Second, on coining into 
power. 



DIVINE CHIEFS AMD PRIESTS. 127 

sometimes taken. Veachi nsed often to lament to 
Mr Manner^ tbat those happy days were passed 
away when they nsed to lire in peace and happi- 
ness at the Island of Tonga, when every ho<lypaid 
the highest respect to the divine chiefs, and there 
were no disturbances to fear, the land being well 
cultivated, and frequent rich presents sent to 
tliera : others made the same complaint. In short, 
it would appear that tempora mutarUury the al- 
most universal cry of dissatisfiBCtion, is heanl at 
the Tonga Islands as well as elsewhere ; but the 
distant prospect generally appears more beautiful 
than the place whereon we stand. In all proba- 
bility, Tooitonga and Veachi had great reason to 
complain, particularly Tooitonga, respect towards 
whom was evidently falling oft' oven in Mr Ma- 
riner s time ; for, formerly, it was thought neces- 
sary, when Tooitonga died, that his chief wife 
should be strangled and buried with him, but, in 
respect to die two last Tooitongas, this was not 
performed. Again, the late king would not allow 
Tooitonga to give him any advice in matters of 
war, but insisted that he should remain in peace 
and quietness at liis own side of the island : and 
astly, the present king, when the late Tooitonga 
^ied, would not allow his son to succeed to that 
igh title, but, at one bold stroke, freed the people 
om a burden of taxes, by annulling the title of 
ooitonga, and the expensive ceremony of Inachu 
»chi, being a sensible, good, quiet sort of man, 
\o interfered in no public matters, and who had 
hing to do witli the people of any other island 
his own (Toongooa), was still s«Keie^>A \^- 
his difrinty, and probably Aoea to V\»& ^«?j« 
^at case, be ia the greatest c\nei a\ \S»ftTLo"o^ 



198 HABITS OF THE 

Isknda ; for the late Tooitonga's son, if he have 
not ainoe been inwle a Tooitooga, is below Veachi 
in nmk. Thus it appears that the Tonga Islands 
are iuifiei;going considerable changes, both in re- 
spect to religion and politics ; and if the commn- 
nicatioa between Vavaoo and the Hapai Islands^ 
and between both places and Tonga, should remain 
dosed for a number of years, it would be a cu- 
riooB inquiry, to investigate what changes the 
hngnage will undergo in those respective places. 
In regard to the priests, their habits are precisely 
the same as other persons of the same station ; 
and, when they are not inspired, all the respect 
that is paid to them is that only which is due to 
their private rank. Mr Mariner recollects no 
chief that was a priest : he has, indeed, seen the 
king inspired by Taly-y-Toobo (who never inspires 
any body but the king), but he is not considered 
a priest on this account ; those only being consi- 
dered such, who are in the frequent habit of be- 
ing inspired by some particular god. It generally 
happens that the eldest son of a priest, after his 
fatlier s death, becomes a priest of the same god 
who inspired his father. When a prie^ is inspir- 
ed, he is thought capable of prophesying, or ra- 
ther the god within him. These prophecies 
generally come true, for they are mostly made on 
the prol>abIe side, and when they do not, the 
priest is not blamed. It is supposed the god, for 
some wise purpose, has deceived him ; or changed 
his mind ; or spoken prematurely, without consult- 
ing the other gods. 
At the Sandwich Islands, the priests appear to 
^ B (Uatinct order or body oi meTi,\mft% for the 
uoet part together^ holding occaaVoiVB^ «w&wsw^^> 



'divine chiefs and priests. 129 

and 8t all times respected by the body of the peo- 
ple ; whereas, at the Tonga Islands, the priests 
lire indiscriminately with the rest of the naliYes, 
are not respected on the score of their being 
priests, unless when actually inspired, and hold no 
known conferences together, as an allied body. 
Mr Mariner frequently associated with them, 
knew their general conduct, and inquired the opi- 
nion of all classes of the natives respecting them ; 
and has no reason to think that they combine to- 
gether for the purpose of deceiying the people. 
He found nothing remarkable in their general 
character. If there was any difference between 
them and the rest of the natives, it was that they 
were rather more given to reflection, and some- 
what more taciturn, and probably greater obser- 
vers of what was going forward. They have no 
peculiarity of dress to distinguish them. The 
most remarkable of their prophecies, if they de- 
serve that name, are those mentioned vol. I. of a 
young chief being inspired by a female spirit from 
Bolotoo ; and on the illness of Finow and his 
daughter, when one became better the other be- 
came worse, as the priest foretold. The priests 
associate with the chiefs as much as other mata- 
booles and mooas ; and, although Tooitonga and 
Veachi are considered divine chiefs, they have no 
more to do with the priests, nor are they other- 
wise connected with them, than are other chiefis. 

Having thus hs given a general view of the re- 
ligious opinions of the Tonga people, and of the 
habits of their divine chiefs and priests, we shall 
proceed to unfold, with as much accuracy and im- 
partiality as possible, their notions nsvd VvaSE3»S\& ^^ 

VOL. II, L 



ISO MOliAL STATE 

morality; and in another chapter conclude the 
suhjeets connected with religion, hj a detail of 
tfieir religious ceremonies. 

Moral virtue will appear to have a very slender 
foundation in these islands, when we consider that 
the natives believe in no future place of reward, 
but what a man will equally possess, whether he 
live virtuously or not, and that they have no idea 
of a future state of punishment of any kind or de^ 
gree whatsoever. Neither will our opinion of their 
notions of moral virtue be exalted, when, on a 
strict examination of their language, we discover 
no words essentially expressive of some of the 
higher qualities of human merit, as virtue, justice, 
humanity ; nor of the contrary, as vice, injustice, 
cruelty, &c. Tliey have indeed expressions for 
these ideas, but they are equally applicable to o- 
ther things. To express a virtuous or good man^ 
they would say tangata lillSy a good man, or ftzn- 
ffata loto liUe, a man with a good mind ; but the 
word liUe, good (unlike our word virtuous), is 
equally appficable to an axe, canoe, or any thing 
else. Again, they have no word to express hu- 
manity, mercy, &c. but cfa^ which rather means 
friendship, and is a word of cordial salutation. 
Neither have they any word expressive of chasti- 
ty, except nofo mow, remaining fixed or faithful, 
and which in this sense is only applied to a mar- 
ried woman, to signify her fidelity to her husband; 
but in another sense it is applicable to a warrior, 
to signify his loyalty and attachment to his chief. 
Farthermore, when we learn that theft, revenge, 
rape, and murder, under many circumstances, are 
not held to be crimes, we shall be tempted to er- 
^Jaiiu, How miserable are thew 'WT<i\«SaRA\wi^^\ 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLE. 131 

the viitiies bave left their abode, and they are ^vcn 
ap a prey to every evil passion ! The picture is 
indeed dark, but we must throw a little more lighft 
apon it, and approach to take a nearer view. 

The Tonga people do not indeed believe in any 
future state of rewards and punishment, but they 
believe in that first of all religions tenets, that there 
is a power and intelligence superior to all that is 
homan, which is able to control their actions, and 
which discovers all their most secret thoughts ; and 
though they consider this power and intelligence 
to be' inherent in a number of individual beings, 
the principle of belief is precisely the same. They 
firmly believe that Ae gods approve of virtue, and 
are dLspleased with vice ; tlftit every man has his 
tutelar deity, who wUl protect him as long as he 
conducts himself as he ought to do ; but, if he 
does not, will leave him to the approaches of mis- 
fortune, disease, and death. And here we find 
some ground on which to establish a virtuous line 
of conduct. But this is not sufficient. Tliere is 
implanted in the human breast a knowledge or 
sentiment which enables us sometimes, if not al- 
ways, to distinguish between the beauty of disin- 
terestedness and the foul ugliness of what is low, 
sordid, and selfish ; and the ejQTect of this senti- 
ment is one of the strongest marks of character in 
the natives of these islands. Many of the chiefs, 
on being asked by Mr Manner what motives they 
had for conducting themselves with propriety, be- 
sides the fear of misfortunes in this life ; replied, the 
agreeable and happy feeling whicli a man experi- 
ences within himseU* when he does any good ac- 
tion, or cx)nductH himself nobly and ^Tv^TQiSk»\^^^& 
a man ought to do. And this qtuefiVX^m. ^^l ^^'^ 



ISS UOBAh «TATE 

aw«rodt as if tliey wondered snch ahoold be ask- 
ed. After thii^ we cannot but sappose (unless 
we are led by piejodiee), that the seeds of very 
great virtues are implanted in their breasts ; and 
it would be very unreasonable to imagine, that 
there are not many of the natives in whom these 
■eeds geiminate, grow up, and flourish to a great 
extent; and if so, they must be imiversally im- 
proved of and admired. If we wish for an ex- 
ample of these sentiments, we have one in the 
character of the noble Toobo Nuha, who lived aa 
a great chief ought to do, and died like a good 
man. It is true he killed Toogoo Ahoo ; but a 
native would observe, that in doing so he freed 
Tonga from the dominion of an oppressive and 
cruel tyrant. We have another noble instance of 
disinterestedness and generosity in the person 
of Hala A'pi A'pi, in his liberal conduct towards 
his friend Talo. He said afterwards that he knew 
very well that Talo was no coward, but that a 
little petulance or disappointed vanity had occa- 
sioned him to make the first false step, of which 
he was so ashamed, he had not the proper use of 
his judgment ; and that knowing what must be the 
wounded state of his feelings, he pitied his situa- 
tion, and immediately sought a reconciliation. 
Hala A 'pi A 'pi indeed, in the fiery wildness of 
his disposition, often committed excesses ; but hia 
general character rendered him imiversally belov- 
ed. He was generous in the extreme ; he was 
endowed with a certain share of wisdom. He 
knew well what was right, and, what is still better, 
he practised it. . We have given here but two 
£^ Jo wing instances of liberal sentiment; but we 
maat ivAect that they were xajwcwaSi^ «^s^«^\ 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 133 

and eD tko principle <m which they were admin d 
must have been universally felt, it would be strange 
indeed, if the fruits of such seutinients were seen 
only in a few solitary instances. If it be neces- 
sary, however, to give another, we beg to cite one 
of a nature different from either of the above. The 
instance alluded to is where Mr Mariner, with four 
ladiaa warriors, was flying from a large party of 
the enemy, when on a sadden he fell into a deep 
hole. His fate seemed certain ; the enemy would 
have gloried in killing him, for they had not for- 
gotten the guns ; but his four faithful companions 
exclaimed, " Let us stop for the Papalangi I '* 
They did stop. One of them was killed in his 
d^ence, but ^ey saved him. (Vol. I. p. 106.) 

Their higli admiration of what is generous and 
liberal is well borne out by many of their establish- 
ed customs and practices. If one chief sees some- 
thing in the possession of another which he has a 
strong desire to have, he has only to ask him foj: it, 
and in all probability it is readily and liberally 
^ven. The very tributes which the chiefs receive 
from inferiors come as much as possible in the 
form of presents. Foreigners are exempted from all 
tributes, except those for the purpose of religious 
ceremonies, even though they occupy considerable 
plantations at Tonga. They readily excuse fo- 
reigners for not ac^nrding with their customs, .or 
not paying respect to their gods, saying, tibey have 
gods of their own, and are not governed by our 
divinities. When any one is about to cat, he al- 
ways shares out what he has to those about him, 
wiUiout any hesitation ; and a contrary conduct 
woald be considered exreedii\g\Y '^Ve ^ov^ wd&^ 

J. 2 



i 



IM MOftAX. StATS 

At meak, ttrangMv or foreignera are always shoWn 
ft preferenQe» and famales are helped before men 
of the aame xwnk, because they are the weaker 
sex, and require attention. Many snch instances 
might be given if necessary, but these, it is pre- 
somedy are sufficient to demonstrate that the peo- 
jUe of the Tonga Islands are not only not selfish, but 
admire liberality, and practise it. We may readi- 
ly suppose that the sentiments of yeneration and 
respect are felt in a considerable degree ; and, ac- 
coidingly, every mark of such is shown to the 
gods, to chiefs, and aged persons. Actual impiety 
is little known among them. Hnow (the late 
king) was indeed an impious character ; but we 
have already seen how much the people wondered 
at his success. There is no necessity to dwell 
upon the respect that is uniyersally paid to chiefs, 
for it forms the stable basis of their government, 
and, of course, cannot be infringed upon. It is a 
superior sacred duty, the non-fulfilment of which 
it is supposed the gods would ptmish almost as se- 
verely as disrespect to themselves. The great vene- 
retion which they pay to the aged is a very ami- 
able trut in their character ; and, though it is now 
kept up by old habit and custom, it must have 
arisen from notions which would do honour to the 
most civilized people. And it is not only to those 
who are old, both in years and wisdom, that such 
respect is paid, for every aged man and aged wo- 
man enjoy the attentions and services of the 
younger branches of society. Great love and re- 
spect for parents is another prominent mark of their 
charsLCter ; and, indeed, it must be so, arising, as 
j't does, out of a two-fold motive, !• e. on the score 
ofparmt^ge, and bt. that of tra^o« xjkosKAq^ «t 



OF TflB TONGA PZOPI.E. IB5 

tvakm Every chief also pays the greatest respect 
towards his eldest sister, which respect he shows 
in an odd way, viz. by never entering Uie house 
where she resides ; but upon what exact principle, 
except custom, Mr Mariner has not satisfieu^rily 
learned. 

The same principle of love and respect for pa- 
rents and superiors engages every man to secure 
and defend his hereditary rights as another point 
of religious duty, and in honour to the memory of 
his ancestors, from whom he received them. By 
a fiirther extension of the same sentiment, he loves 
the island on which he was bom, in particular, 
and all the Tonga Islands generally, as being one 
country, and speaking one language. But the 
anwrpairuBy in the more extended sense, cannot 
be supposed to prevail in a very high degree. Ne- 
yertheless, in the history of the war at Vavaoo, we 
shall discover proofs of the existence of this noble 
sentiment, as well as in the life of Toob6 Nuba, 
and in Uie death of the late king, who lamented 
that he left the country in a critical situation. The 
present king, and his uncle Finow Fiji, are, no 
doubt, patriots in the best sense of the word. 

Honour is another principle upon which we 
must speak ; but, in regard to which, it is difficult 
to give the just character of the Tonga people. 
That they are honourable in many respects, there 
can be no doubt ; and that, in other respects, they 
do things which are, seemingly at least, very dis- 
honourable, there can be as Uttle question. It was 
agreeable to every generous and honourable senti- 
ment in Teoo Cava's men, to help him out of the 
ditch at the peril of their own livea ; ox Vn'^^*^ 
jiaerg fyar companion^ tO savd Ynnx 2X V)(^ «»ssk^ 



-■\ 



136 liQMi'^VAT^ 

risk- It wai honoaiaUe ^^ ^^ late king, who 
a very pasaionate mWi >&<! expected to be obeyed, 
to reoeive in good fart, and readily to excose, Mr 
Marinor^fl nAtel^ on many occasions, to coofonn 
to ocdflFt tiwt ware not consistent with his princi- 
ples. It was hononrable in the Vayaoo people to 
iiaie 80 DMch respect for the memory of dieir late 
cUefy Toob6 Ni^a, as to resent his wrongs by 
tfaor Btaady and determined conduct in regard to 
his marderers ; and the behaviour of Toe Oomoo 
and her sister on this occasion is not unworthy of 
admiradon. Finow Fiji, on the death of hia 
brother, might easily have made himself king, for 
his party was exceedingly powerful, and heartily 
wished him to take the supreme command ; but im 
was a man of too much honour to rob his nephew 
of his right. If a man goes to another island, the 
chief of which, during his visit, makes war with 
the island from which he comes, he is bound in 
honour to side with the chief on whose island he 
is ; and this point of honour, except on extraordi- 
nary occasions, is faithfully kept. Thus Finow 
Fiji was at Vavaoo when liis brother, the king, 
waged war with that island, and, honour binding 
him, he remained in the service of Toe Ooomoo, 
directing his hostilities chiefly against Toobo Toa, 
and those men who were the actual assassinatora 
of Toobo Nuha. These diiferent instances (and 
many others might be mentioned) are not only, ta 
a certain degree, honourable in themselves, but 
are universally cronsidered so by the natives : But 
then, what shall we say on the other side of the 
question ? How can we oxcuse thcii* own acknow- 
Jeflged flesign of assassinating their great and good 
^ne/kctor, Captain Cook and \n» o^ce»>«iii» 



OF TRB TONGA PJEOPLK. 137 

18tli May 1777— -the capture of the Port au 
iVmce, and the atrocious circumstances attending 
it — ^the assassination of Tooba Nuha — and the 
treadiery of Tarky, chief of the garrison of Bea ? 
If we were to measure their conduct by the no- 
tions of virtue, honour, and humanity received 
among enlightened nations, we should do them 
great wrong, and forfeit our own titles to the epi- 
thets of just and honourable. We shall therefore 
endeavour to ascertain in what their notions of 
honour 'consist, and judge them upon their own 
principles. Their ideas of honour and justice do 
not very much differ from ours except in degree, 
they considering some' things more honourable 
than we should, and others much less so ; but there 
is one principle which, to a greater or less extent, 
is universally held among them, which is, that it 
is every man's duty to obey the orders of his su- 
perior chief in all instances, good or bad, unless it 
be to fight against a chief still superior ; and even 
then, it would not be actually dishonourable. If 
a chief, therefore, designs to assassinate another, it 
is the duty of his men to assist him to the utmost 
of their power, whether they think it right or not. 
If two or three combine together to take a ship, 
they may depend upon their men's readiness, as a 
Mint of duty, to execute their intentions ; and if 
hey are ordered to kill every man oii board, they 
all roost assuredly do it if they possibly can. If 
ley are denied to save every man's life, they will 
iiudly obey the order, by merely endeavouring to 
3are them, though perhaps at the risk of their 
n lives. Thus the crime of one man will a^- 
\r extended to two or three Kandse^^ ^^cs^a^ 
are perhaps only tlie uawi\iVii^ \sQaX\\»si^v^»^ 



188 MORAL STATE 

obedient because it is their duty : Bat let the niftt^ 
ter rest here for a moment, whilst we endeaFom 
to examine the degree of oime of which the chief 
is guilty, who is at the head of the conspiracy. la 
the fint place, his own opinion, and ikaX of hia 
countrymen, is, that it is no oime at all, that is 
to say, it is not what the gods will pnnish himi 
for : he will however candidly acknowledge it to 
be wrong ; but add, that he took the ship beouifle 
Tonga, being a poor country, was in want of many. 
useful things, which he supposed were in great 
plenty on board, and that he killed the crew Uie 
better to e£fect his object. In respect to the in- 
tended assassination of Captain Cook, every native 
of Tonga would have considered it, if it had taken 
place, a very base act, for which probably the gods 
would have punished them. Toobo Nuha's as- 
sassination of Toogoo Ahoo was esteemed rather 
a virtue than a crime ; but that of Toobo Nuha» 
by Toobo Toa, was looked upon with universal 
detestation. An old mataboole used to say, that 
useless and unprovoked murder was highly o£fen" 
sive to the gods ; and that he never remembered a 
man guilty of it but vrho either lived unhappily, 
or came to an untimely end. 

Theft is considered by them an act of meanness 
rather than a crime ; and although some of the 
chiefs themselves have been known to be guilty of 
it on board ships, it is nevertheless not approved 
of. Their excuse is the strength of the tempta- 
tion : the chiefs that would do it are, however, few. 

I'Vom the above considerations, we are disposed 
to say, t)mt tlie notions of the Tonga people, in 
r^npect to honour and justice, Bft ^e have abeva 
yiewed them, aro tolerably wdidje&si«d*»«\ff«^iBsV 



OF THE TONGA VEOPLE. 189 

anlTeiM ; but that, in point of practibe, both the 
chiefs and the people, taking them genendly, are 
irregnlar and fickle ; though diere are several ad- 
mirable exceptions, whose characters become more 
splendid and meritorious by the contrast. 

As being closely allied with principles of honour 
and justice, we shall now examine the character of 
these people, as it regards their opinion of one an- 
other ; and here we shall find something greatly to 
admire, and much to be approved of. While we 
accuse them of treachery and cruelty, they as loud- 
ly cry out that we are calumniators and detractors ; 
for no bad moral habit appears to a native of 
Tonga more ridiculous, depraved, and unjust, than 
publishing the faults of one's acquaintances and 
friends ; for while it answers no profitable purpose, 
it does a great deal of mischief to the party who 
fiufien ; and as to downright calumny orjidse ac- 
cusation, it appears to them more horrible than 
deliberate murder does to us. It is better, they 
think, to assassinate a man's person than to attack 
his reputation. In the first; case, you only cause 
his death, which must happen to him some time 
or another ; but in the latter, you take from him 
what otherwise he might have carried with him 
fiiultless to the grave, and which afterwards might 
have remained attached to his memory. And they 
not only hold this as a just and honourable prin- 
ciple, but they put it in practice ; so that instances 
of calumny and defamation are very rare. On the 
other hand, they equally avoid the baseness of 
flattery; and even where a man has performed 
some achievement really praiseworthy, they seldom, 
commend him in his presence, lest Vt t^vwiX^ tsm^^ 
Mn vain, Ja regard to liam«mi!tY> oi «k.\€^^s^' 



140 UOBAL STATE 

feeJing for one another, much is to be said on both 
BideB of the. question. The sentiment itself is nni- 
venally approved of, and they speak highly of 
Eoropeana for their mild and humane conduct. It 
most be coqfesaedy however, that they do not so 
extensively practise it, at least according to our no- 
tions, nor even, we may add, according to their 
own ; which must be attributed in some to a want 
of thongfat, and want of feeling, particularly in 
boys and young lads ; and in the older branches 
of society to motives of revenge, which, if it be 
for some serious injury, is deemed almost a virtue. 
We are here speaking of the men ; as to the wo- 
men, they are universally humane. A few, in- 
deed, of the principal wives of chiefs are proud 
and haughty, and consequently tyrannical; but, 
considering the women generally, they are exceed- 
ingly benevolent ; and though in their talkative- 
ness, as in other parts of the world, they natm*ally 
speak of one another's faults, it is usually of such 
as are of a trifling nature, and without any malice, 
being mostly in the way of humour or joke. As 
to considerable faults, such as a woman's infidelity 
to her husband, it would remain as much a secret 
with any of her own sex, (if they accidently knew 
it), as it possibly could with herself I Quarrels 
among the women are very rare. There is a lesser 
species of humanity, known commonly by the 
term good-nature, which is imiversally prevalent 
among the men as well as the women, and which 
in general vs plainly depicted in their coimtenances. 
The next subject we shall consider is chastity. 
In respect to this, their notions are widely different 
^Tom those of most European nations. We must, 
therefore, Brst examine what are theix Q!wii\!QftA& 



OF THS TONGA FXOFLK. 14i 

regarding it, and if they are such as are consistent 
with public decorum and due order and regularity 
in the social state, without tending to enervate the 
mind or debase the .character of man, we shall 
take those ideas as the standard by their adherence 
to which we shall judge them. But here it may 
be asked how are we to judge whether their own 
notions upon this subject are consistent with the 
good order of society ? To this we can make no 
other answer than by referring to the actual state 
of society there, and pointing out those evils which 
may be supposed to anse from their wrong notions 
upon this subject. In the first place, it is univer- 
sally considered a positive duty in every married 
woman to remain true to her husband. What we 
mean by a married woman is, one who cohabits 
with a man, and lives under his roof and protec- 
tion, holding an establishment from him. A wo- 
man's marriage is frequently independent of her 
consent, she having been betrothed by her pa- 
rents, at an early age, to some chief, mataboole 
or mooa ; and perhaps about one third of the mar- 
ried women have been thus betrothed. Every 
married woman must remain with her husband 
whether she choose it or not, until he please to 
divorce her. Mr Mariner thinks that about two 
thirds of the women are married, and of this num- 
ber fall one half remain with their husbands till 
death separates them ; that is to say, full one third 
of the female population remain married till either 
themselves or their husbands die : the remaining 
two thirds are married and are soon divorced, 
and are married again periiaps three, four, or 
five times in their lives, with the exce^ition of 
« few wbof from whim or aome «c£v^'Q^&^ ^soos^^ 

VOL. II. M 



IIS MORAL STATE 

are never mttried. This calcnlation is made with 
doe reforence to the women liTing cm the planta- 
tions, who are almost all married to the tooas, who 
till the groond, and remain constantly so ; tiie im- 
married women, therefore, Hye principally at the 
mooa, or place where the chiefe, matahooles, &c. 
dwell, and are attendants upon them or their wives. 
Girls that are too yonng to be marriageable are 
not taken into account. Having thus .ascertained, 
as nearly as possible, the proportion of married 
women, we shall make an inquiry how far it may 
reasonably be supposed they are entitled to the 
reputation of fidelity. Dunng the whole of Mr 
Mariner s four years residence at one or other of 
these islands, he had frequent opportunities of in- 
timacy with the wives of chiefs ; for beii^ a fo- 
reigner, and a wliite man, he was free from a great 
many restrictions to which the natives are subject. 
For instance, whenever he pleased he 6ould go into 
the houses of Hnow's wives, or of the vrives of other 
chiefs, and converse freely with them as long as 
he chose, which was a liberty that no male native 
could take except the husband, relations, or the 
cooks that carried .in the victuals ; and from ha^ 
bit, they became so much accustomed to his com- 
pany and conversation, as to think very little more 
of his presence than one of their own sex. Con- 
sequently he had every favourable opportunity of 
becoming acquainted with their habits and senti- 
ments, particularly as one of the old king's wives, 
his adopted mother, was a woman of very good 
sense and unaffected manners, and freely discours- 
^^rfn^'tfi hbn upon all points tY\«A. tc^&\j&^ \.q Visr 
"^^^IfaaBB^ to that of her female acA]|jwMv\ai«fe> w 
vcondition of the women m ^cimsr^- /^- 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLE. 143 

sides which, it must be recollected, diat Mr Mari- 
noTf bein^ upon the greatest intimacy with the 
principal chiefs, was acquainted with most of their 
intrigues, which they did not scruple to relate to 
him, both on account of the confidence they had 
in him, and his being a foreigner* * With such 
opportunities of knowing the habits of the natives, 
relative to the subject in question, Mr Mariner is 
decidedly of opinion that infidelity among the 
married women is comparatively very rare. He 
only recollects three successful instances of plaki- 
ned intrigue during the whole of his time ; one at 
the Hapai Islands, on the part of Voogi (the young 
chief mentioned on the occasion of the old king a 
death), who was considered the handsomest man 
at the Tonga Islands ; and two on the part of 
the present king, whose high rank and authority 
must on the one hand render his attentions flat- 
tering to the women, whilst on the other it may 
bo supposed to excite a little apprehension of the 
consequences of a refusal. A fourth instance may 
perhaps be added, on liie part of the late king, 
with respect to Foouagi, tlie wife of Tymomang- 
noonp^oo, but this is only upon suspicion. Seve- 
ral otlier instances probably were at different isl- 
ands. Where it does happen, it must be with tlie 
connivance of their female attendants and servants, 
who always attend them abroad, not as spies over 
their conduct, bat as companions, it not being 
tliought decorous, particularly for tlie wife of a 

* This seems an odd reason for placing confidence in 
such matters ; but it arises from this circumstance, that, 
being a foreigner, he was not supposed to take that interest 
in their concerns which might \eaA«t Vi^jA^^^ft^Qcw'^*^'^'^ 
rondiict which he did not \\appeix Vn v\^v^ccn«^ qK.« 






144 MORAL STATE 

dnefy to walk ont by herself. Besides tMs re- 
striction npon the condnct of married women^ 
there is one still greater, viz. the fear of discoyery, 
which most operate yery strongly on the part of 
the irires of chiefs, in whom death might be the 
speedy reward of infidelity. As to those of lower 
rank, they might at least expect a severe beating, 
and the offender himself come off as badly, if not 
worse ; bnt, independent of these restrictions, Mr 
Mariner is of opinion that the women are dis- 
posed to be faithful to their husbands, who are 
their acknowledged superiors, guardians, and pro- 
tectors; and most of them, he firmly believes, 
much attached to them, judging from their con- 
duct when they become widows. Witness the 
behaviour of Toobo Nuha's widows, and those of 
the late king. Mafi Habe, Mr Mariner's adopted 
mother, did not, afiter the king died, marry an- 
other, or admit a lover ; although Voogi, who was 
considered ^ handsomest, and one of the most 
agreeable men in all the Tonga Islands, became 
passionately in love with her, and would have paid 
his addresses with the greatest fervour and perse- 
verance, if she had allowed him opportunities. 'At 
this time she was at the Hapai Islands, residing 
with her &ther, about eight months after her hus- 
band s death ; though she might have married 
again, without any impropriety, two months after- 
wards, or allowed of an amour without any re- 
proach. With respect to the wives of the lower 
ranks in society, they are oftener to be met with 
alonef and on suck occasions sometimes consent 
die solicitationti of chiefs wViom iXv^^ \avj \>a^- 
to meet, not, as Mr Maimer t\«i3i»> fe«a^ ^s*- 
^one<I principle, or want of ^SwiCvoTL \o ^«« 



OF THE TOKGA PEOPLE. 145 

LuBbandd, but from a fuar of inc:urrinf|r the resent- 
meiit of tiu'ii' HU|)enorH. 

I'Vom tlie above investigation, wo think it would 
bo but giving a fair opinion of t]ie reputation of 
the married women to 8ay, tliat they are not only 
circamspect in conduct, but chaste in principle ; 
and when we consider tliat the married women 
form about two-tliirds of tlie female population 
that are marriageable, it gives us no mean opinion 
of their moral reputation. When a man divorces 
his wife, which is attended with no other cere- 
mony than just tt^lliog her she may go, slie be- 
comes perfect mistress of her own conduct, and 
may many again, which is often done a few days 
afterwardsy ^thout the least disparagement to her 
character. If she remain single, she may admit a 
lover occasionally, or coliabit witli her lover, and 
remain at his house without being considered his 
wife, liaving no particular charge of his domestic 
concerns, and may leave Jiim when she pleases, 
witliont tlie least reproach or the least secrecy. 
From this circumstance we may draw an argument 
in fiivour of the chastity of tlie women generally, 
for if they were of a difierent character, it is na- 
tural to suppose that very few would marry, except 
those who, when very young, were betrothed to 
3hiefB, and consequently married independently of 
lieir consent : But we find that tlu'ee times that 
umber are actually married; and as many are 
larried throe, fimr, or ia^veti times, it cannot be from 
1 unchaste, lil»ertine, or wandering disposition on 
e part of tlie women, seeing that, when onco 
vorced, they may remain single if they please, 
d enjoy all the lil)crty that \i\& t&»rX W^xlv^sw^ 

M ^ 



146 MOEAX. BTATK 

bMt can derin. If now it be asked^ «< Vfbf 
then do they many ? " The answer is, for loveof 
one djecty with the idea that the object of their 
affsctioni wiD cdkoi^fv make them happy ; and if 
they are dMppouited in one instance, ^y am 
willingto tiy it in a second, a third, &c. In short, 
it wonld appear that the force of sentimental affec- 
tion Minds them to the probability of a disappoint- 
ment, and they willingly make a generoos sacrifice 
of their liberty to prove the strength of their at- 
tachment. * As to those women who are not ac- 
toally married, they may bestow their favours np- 
oft whomsoever they please, without any oppro- 
brium. It must not, however, be supposed, that 
these women are always easily won ; the greatest 
attentions and most fervent solicitations are some- 
times requisite, even though there be no other 
lover in the way. This happens sometimes from 
a spirit of coquetry, at other times from a dislike 
to the party, &c. It is thought shameful for a 
woman frequently to change her lover. Grreat 
presents are by no means certain methods of gain- 
ing her favours, and consequently they are more 
frequently made afterwards than- before. Gross 
prostitution is not known among them. 

With regard to the habits of the men in this 
respect, it must, in the first place, be observed, 
that no man in the Topga Islands is understood to 
be bound to conjugal fidelity. It is no reproach 
to him to intermix his amours, though, if a mar- 
ried man does so to excess, it is thought incon- 
sistent. Notwithstanding this liberty of conduct, 
howeveTy most of the married men are tolerably 

* Thepodxioxit that every womanish at Vvenn^kTvke, does 
not appeax to hold true In th* Tongjn l^\i&^. 



OF THK TOVQA. PBOPLK. I4l9 

trae tx> their wi^es ; and where they have any o- 
ther amonr it is kept a secret from the wife, not 
tmt of any fear or apprehension, hut hecanse it i? 
onneoessary to excite her jealousy, and make her 
perhaps uidiappy ; for, to the honour of the men. 
It must be said, that they consult in no small de- 
gree the happiness and comfort of their wives. In 
such a case of amour, the female he is attached 
to never offers to associate with the wife during 
the time she cohabits with the husband ; for this 
would be thought a great insult, though after- 
wards she may, as freely as if nothing had hap- 
pened, even though the wife may have known of 
the transaction. The women of course feel occa- 
sionally much jealousy, but it is seldom strongly 
expressed, and very rarely produces any fatal con- 
sequences. Pride generally causes them to con- 
ceal this passion. With respect to the unmarried 
men, their conduct is of course free, but they 
seldom make any deliberate attempts upon the 
chastity of other men's wives. Rape, however, 
BometimeB happens, and young chiefs are the per- 
petrators. But if a woman is known to be mar- 
ried, even though her husband be only a tooOf it 
would most likely save her from this outrage. 
When a woman is taken a prisoner (in war), she 
generally has to submit; but this is a thing of 
Goursey and considered neither an outrage nor a 
dishonour. 

When all things are taken into consideration re- 
garding the connubial system of these people, their 
notions of chastity, and their habits in respect of 
it, we shall have no reason to say but what they 
keep tolerably well within those bouTwh ^VvvaVvVtfin 
noar amd deriacy dkiaM ; and \? H\yi& «^^^ n^V^ 



jbS MO UAL &TATK 

effbct diis system has upon the wel&ro and happi- 
ness of society, it may he safely answerod, that 
there is not the least appearance of any had effect. 
The women are very tender, kind mothers, and 
the children are taken exceeding good care of : for 
even in case of divorce, the children of any age 
(requiring parental care) go with the mother, it 
being considered her province to superintend their 
welfiBLre till they grow up ; and there ia never any 
dispute upon this subject. Both sexes appear con- 
tented and happy in their relations to each other. 
As to domestic quarrels, they are seldom known ; 
but this must be s^d to happen ratlier from the 
absolute power which every man holda in his own 
family : for even if his wife be of superior rank, 
he is nevertheless of higher authority in aU domea- 
tic matters, and no woman entertains the least idea 
of rebelling against that authority ; and if she 
should, even her own relations would not take 
ber part, unless the conduct of her husband were 
undoubtedly cruel. That tlie men are also capa- 
ble of much paternal affection, Mr Maiiner has 
Witnessed many proofs, some of which have been 
related ; and we have already mentioned that filial 
piety is a most important doty, and appears to be 
universally felt. 

Upon these grounds we would venture to say, 
that the natives of these islands are rather to be 
considered a chaste than a libertine people, and 
that, even compared witli the most civilized na- 
tions, then* character in tliis respect is to be rated 
at no mean height ; and if a free intercourse could 
exist with European society, it is a matter of great 
fhuht /whatever might be the change in their sen- 
^itneats), if their habits or dispo»t.\OYia m \\\\» ifc- 



Of TRI TOMOA VaOPLB. 149 

spect would be much improved by copyfag the ex- 
amples of their instructors. If, on the other hand, 
we compare them to the natives of the Society 
Islands, and the Sandwich Islands, we should add 
insult to injustice. 

We have thus endeavoured to give a just and 
impartial view of these people, as fieu: as regards 
their notions and practices of the most important 
points of morality, trusting that the account will 
be found useful and interesting. A great |deal 
more might, no doubt, have been said ; but the 
fiirther we enter into minutise upon such a subject, 
the more we are likely to form an erroneous opi- 
nion; whilst the general outlines may be given 
without so much danger of being deceived ; and 
what may be thought imperfect in this sketch, the 
inteUigent reader will be able to supply according 
to his own judgment, by his attentive perusal of 
other parts of the work. If, for instance, it be 
objected that we have not taken into consideration 
the question of tiieir being anthropophagi, we re- 
ply, that all the instances that can any way go to 
substantiate their character in this respect, -and 
which happened during Mr Mariner's stay there, 
have been faithfully mentioned, with the motives 
and occasions of them : from which, we think it is 
easy to draw the conclusion, that they by no 
means deserve this opprobrious name. Although 
a few young ferocious warriors chose to imitate 
what ihey considered a mark of courageous fierce- 
ness in a neighbouring nation, it was held in dis- 
gust by ovary body eke. 



150 HKLIGIOUS RiT£S: 



CHAPTER VII. 

As attention to relif^ons ceremonies forms an im- 
[vortant feature in the character of the Tonp^ peo- 
ple, and as they consider that any neglect in this 
respect wonld amount to a crime, which tlie gods 
wonld punish with tibe most severe temporal in- 
flictionsy it becomes necessary to ^ye a particnlar 
account of them. The punishmoits which tliey 
consider themselves liable to, for disrespect to the 
gods and neglect of religious rites, are chiefly con- 
spiracies, wars, famine, and epidemic diseases, as 
public calamities ; and sickness and premature 
death, as punishments for the ofiences of individu- 
als. These evils^ wh^^ver they happen, are 8up-> 
posed to proceed immediately from the gods, as 
visitations for their crimes. 

Tliere is no public religious rite whatsoever, 
and scarcely any in private, at which the ceremony 
of drinking cava does not form a usual and often a 
most important part ; for which reason, although 
cava is taken on other occasions several times 
daily, we shall endeavour to give a ftiU descrip- 
tion of its preparation and form of distiibution, be- 
fore we proceed to those ceremonies which are 
more strictly religious. Tlie root which they 
term atra, and by which name the plant pro- 
dacing it ia aho called, belongs to a «n^eiafift 



OF THE TONGA PKOPLB. 151 

of the pepper plant. It is known by the tame 
name at the Fiji Islands ; but at the Naviga- 
ten's Islands (which the Tonga people also yiait), 
at the Society Islands, and at the iSandwich lalr 
ands, it is nniversally called ana. At all these 
places it is used for the same or similar purposes. 
The state in which it \a tdcen is that of infusion. It 
is drunk every day by chiefs, matabooles, and o- 
thers, as a luxury ; the form of preparing and seir- 
ing it out is the same, whether at a large party or 
a small oiie ; the greatest order is observed during 
the whole time, and the rank of persons is parti- 
cularly attended to. The following description 
we shall suppose to be of some grand occasion, 
either religious or political. At all cava parties, 
provisions are also shared out; but the habitual 
cava drinkers seldom eat more than a mouthful, 
and l^is they do to prevent the infrorion, when 
drunk in large quantities, from affecting liie sto- 
mach with nausea ; but there are a few who will 
not even use this preeauti<m. When the party is 
very large, it is held on a ntikd^ for the sake of 
room, the chief who presides sitting within the 
eaves of the house : the time of the day is in- 
difierent. Small cava panties are frequently held by 
torch light ; but for religious ceremonies, whether 
of large or small parties, mostly in the morning. 
Women of rank never attend laige public cava 
parties. 

In the first place, we shall endeavour to de- 
scribe the form and order in which the company 
and attendants sit. The diief who presides, and 
who is always the greatest chief present, sits about 
two feet, or perhaps three> ^tlbmxSci^ «wi^» ^V*^^. 



152 RELIGIOUS RITKS 

house, * on the mattiiig which oonstitntes thB 
flooring, with his face towards the open maldi, in- 
to which the circle on either side extends. On 
his right and left hand sits a mataboole, who order 
and arrange the ceremonies alternately in the man- 
ner directly to he shown, and whom, for the sake 
of distinction, we shall call presiding mataboolea* 
On the lower hand of either of them sits the next 
greatest chief present, and another, who may be 
his equal or a little inferior to him, on the opposite 
side, near the other mataboole. After these, come 
other chiefs, matabooles, and mooas, sitting more 
or less according to their rank ; for as it frequent*- 
ly happens that the higher chiefs are not the first 
that come, the places due to their rank are found 
occupied by persons inferior to them, and rather 
than disturb the company, they take their seats a 
little out of the proper order. Ab a general rule^ 
however, the higher chiefs sit towards the top ; for 
it is not so much in iJie order of sitting that their 
rank is paid respect to, as in the order of their be- 
ing served, which is done with the most scrupu- 
lous exactness. It is the characteristic of a malar 
boole, to know how to serve out cava and provisions 
according to iJie rank of individuals, so as not to 
give offence. Thus, the ring extends itself on 
either hand of the presiding chief, but it is in gene- 
ral not an exact circle, the greatest diameter divid- 
ing the top from the bottom, which last is rather 
less curved iJian the top. About one third of the 
ring whidi constitutes the bottom, is generally oc- 

* It must he recollected, th^r bou^eft «i« T«.\hex of an 
<wa/ form, closed at the two ends and. open vtv lifcfc Iwsnx 
fuid back, the eaves comins wVthin about ^oox iwx cjI ^Qqa 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 153 

copied by the young duefs and sons ot maftabooles 
belonging to the chief who presides ; and in the 
middle of these, exactly opposite the chief, sits the 
man who is to mix and prepare the cava after it 
is chewed. He is generally a mooa, tooa, or cook, 
thongh sometimes a chief ; at any rate, he mnst 
be able to perform his task, which is not an easy 
one at large parties, with strength, dexterity, and 
grace. Behind those at the bottom of the ring, 
tffXs the body of the people, which, on extraordi- 
nary occasions, may consist of three or four thou- 
sand individuals, chiefly men, the number of wo- 
men being comparatively small. If either of the 
presiding matabooles now discovers any person of 
rank sitting much below the place he ought to oc- 
cupy, he desires the individual who sits in that 
place to change situations with him ; or if he sees 
1 chief coming after the ring is formed, he orders 
tome one to retire, and calls out to the chief by 
\ia name, saying, ** Here is a place for you. " 
Before we go further, we must make an impor- 
mt distinction between what we have here called 
le bottom and the rest of the ring. The latter, 
ginning with the chief, and advancing onwards 
either side, constituting about two thirds of the 
tole ring, consists of but a single row of indivi- 
ils, and this, for the sake of distinction, we shall 
lominate the superior circle ; the bottom, which 
7 be considered only the front of the body of 
people, we shall name the inferior circle ; and 
wily of the people, who are closely seated to- 
er indiscriminately, * we shall call the extericr 
)• No person, Uiough he be a chief of hi(:h 

e. One row behind anoOieT^ -vVBew VSossa \wi«v v^ 
tlie chief, 

.II. yk ^ 



154i RELIGIOUS RITES 

rank, can nit in the nuperior circle at the Rame time 
that hiH father is there (or any superior relation), 
even though he be at a considerable distance ; and 
if he be already seated there, when his father comes, 
he must necessarily retire to the inferior or exte* 
rior circle, no matter which, out of respect to bis 
superior relation. In either of the other circles, 
however, fiather and son may sit near to each o- 
ther if they please. On this account, the superior 
circle is alone considered the true cava party ; all 
the rest, both inferior and exterior, being rather to be 
considered attendants^ and persons looking on, al- 
though several of them frequently obtain their share 
of provisions and cava, according to the quantity 
thsLt tliere may be. From this circumstance it hap- 
pens, that the inferior ring is generally composed 
of the sons of those chiefe and matabooles, who 
belong to the presiding chief (forming his cow 
n€fo\ who are peiliaps situated in the superior or 
true ring ; and that very great chiefs are some- 
times seated in the exterior circle ; it being thought 
no particular advantage to be in the inferior, un* 
less for those who wish to be assiduous in serving 
out the cava, which is an honourable office. Dur* 
ing the late king's life, his son, the present king, 
usually sat in the inferior or exterior circle, and 
assisted in chewing the root and serving it out. 

The company being thus all arranged, the pro- 
visions, if they have not been already brought, are 
now fetched by the cooks belonging to the chief at 
at the head of the company, and who do this with- 
out ret'eiving aiiy orders. If the cava is not al- 
^r*a{/y brought, one of the pr^suVm^ xwaXaXw^Xv* 
porhaps calls out to one of t\w cooWa m xV^i wlX»« 
^^r rJiig, who iiriniediately ri»e«^ «^<^ ^(ivwKfc^ 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 155 

thron^rb die inferior ring towards the mataboole, 
and, sitting down before him, receives orders to go 
to the chiefs home, and fetch such a root or such 
a quantity of cava. When he returns he enters 
the ring as before, through t^ie inferior circle, 
bearing the cava root in Ins arms. If the provi- 
sions are coming in at llie same time, the man 
with the ca^a advances at the head, amidst the 
thanks of the company, and proceeds close up to 
the chief and sits down, laying the cava root be- 
fore him. The pronsions are placed aliout eight 
or ten paces off, on the ground, and the c^Hiks 
immediately retire to their places in the exterior 
circle. In the mean while, tlie man who has 
brought the cava remains seated before the chief 
till he receives orders from the same presiding 
mataboole, to take the cava root to be broken up 
and chewed. He accordingly rises, and carries 
the root to the man opposite the chief, who sits 
in the middle of the inferior circle, places the root 
before him, and retires to his seat. The root is 
now split into small pieces by the man who is to 
mix the cava, and those about him ; then scraped 
clean with mnscle-sbells, &c., and handed to those 
in the inferior and exterior circle, to be chewed. 
There is now heard a universal buzz tlirou<rhout 
this part of the company, which forms a curious 
contrast to the silence that reigned before, several 
crying out from all quarters, my ma cava ; my, my 
ma cava ; my lie cava ; give me some cava ; give 
me cava — some cava : eacli of tliose who intend to 
chew it crying out for some to be handed to them. 
No one offers to chew the cava but young persons 
wiio have good teeth, clean mouths^ and hu.^^ \v^ 
coIlIh : women frequently sibsakSL Vl Sa mgtf>\ N^\^^^ 



156 RELIGIOUS RITES 

how remarkably dry they preserve the root, while 
it is undergoing this process of mastication. In 
abont two minutes, each person having chewed hb 

. quantity, takes it out of his mouth with his hand, 
and puts it on a piece of plantain or banana leaf; 
or sometimes he raises the leaf to his mouth, and 
puts it off his tongue in the form of a ball, of to- 
lerable consistence, (particularly if it be dry cava 
root). The different portions of cava being now 
all chewed, which is known by the silence that 
ensues, nobody calling for any, some one takes 
the wooden bowl * from the exterior circle, and 
places it on the ground before the man who is to 
make the infusion. In the mean while, each per- 
son who sits at any distance from the inferior cir- 
cle, passes on his portion to another till it is re- 
ceived by three or four persons, who are collecting 
it, and depositing it in the wooden bowl. It is not, ' 
however, thrown in promiscuously : each portion 
is kept distinct and separate from the rest, till at 
length the whole inside of the vessel becomes 
thickly studded, beginning at the bottom, and going 
up on every side towards the rim. This is done 
that a judgment may afterwards be formed of the 
quantity of beverage that it will make. 

The cava being thus deposited in the bowl, 
those persons who had been busy collecting it re- 
tire to their places and sit down ; and the man be- 
fore whom the bowl is placed, now tilts it up a 
little towards the chief, that he may see the quan- 
tity of its contents, saying, coe cava heni gooa moy 
this is the cava chewed. If the chief (having con- 

sulted the mataboole) t\unk& t\\ex« \& liQit ^wou^h^ 

^ ^ The bowl used at a large patty \* «8oouV xJcvteft iwx.uk 
|*liiio£er, and about one foot in dcpOa Viv \he c«tvvc«i. 



OF THE TONGA PBOPLE. 157 

he sftyn, oofi^oofi^ hta how he tangdlOy oorer it o- 
▼er, and let there come a man here. The bowl 
is then covered over with a plantain or banana 
leaf, and a man goes to the same presiding mata- 
boole to receive more cava root, to be chewed as 
before ; but if it be thoi^ht there is a sufficiency, 
he says, paloo, mix. The two men, who sit one 
on each side of him who is to prepare the cava, 
now come forward a little, and, making a half turn, 
sit opposite to each other, the bowl being between 
them. One of these fians off the flies with a large 
leaf, while the other sits ready to pour in the wa- 
ter from cocoa-nut shells, * one at a time. Before 
this is done, however, the man who is about to mix, 
having first rinsed his hands with a little of the 
water, kneads together (the mataboole having said 
paloo) the chewed root, gathering it up from all 
sides of the bowl, and compressing it together. 
Upon this, the mataboole says, lingi hi vy, pour 
in the water ; and the man on one side of the 
bowl continues pouring, fresh shells being handed 
to him, until the mataboole thinks there is suffi- 
cient, which he announces by saying, mow he t?y, 
stop the water. He now discontinues pouring, 
and takes up a leaf to assist the other in fanning. 
The mataboole now says, paloo ger tattow, hea 
fiwca moWf mix it every where equally, and make 
it firm, i. e. bring the dregs together in a body. 

* These shells are whole, having merely two small holes 
at the top. The lai^e ones are always chosen for this 
purpose. The nuts destined for this use are filled with 
salt water, and buried in the sand until the inside becomes 
decayed or rather deliquescent, when it is poured out, and 
the inside well washed. 

^1 



159 RXLI6IOU8 RITXS 

Things being thus fSar prepared, the matabode 
•ays, y hefow, put in the fow. * A large quan- 
tity of this fibrons substance, sufficient to cover 
the whole surface of the infusion, is now put in by 
one of those who sit by the side of the bowl, and 
it floats upon the surfiace. The man who manages 
the bowl now begins his difficult operation. In 
the first place, he extends his left hand to the far- 
ther side of the bowl, with the fingers pointing 
downwards, and the palm towards himself; he 
sinks that hand carefully down tlie side of the 
bowl, carrying with it the edge of the fow $ at the 
same time his right hand is performing a similar 
operation at the side next to him, the fingers point- 
ing downwards, and the pahn presenting outwards. 
He does this slowly, from side to side, gradually 
descending deeper and deeper, till his fingers meet 
each other at the bottom, so that nearly the whole 
of the fibres of the root are by these means en- 
closed in the fow f forming as it were a roll of above 
two feet in length, lying along the bottom from 
side to side, the edges of the fino meeting each 
other imdemeath. He now carefully rolls it over, 
so that the edges overlapping each other, or rather 
intermingling, come uppermost. He next doubles 
in the two ends, and rolls it carefully over again, 
endeavouring to reduce it to a narrower and firmo: 
compass. He now brings it cautiously out of the 
fluid, taking fii*m hold of it by the two ends, one 
in each hand (the back of the hands being up- 
wards), and raising it breast high, with his arms 

• Thefoto is the bark of a tree std^ped into small fi- 
bres, and baa very much t\\c a^v^aiwvc* ol ^5^^ nt^wi 
f havings that are used in Eug\and to dsfiOt^kA ^y^^^^^ma 
xq Juxmner-tune. 



OV THX TOITGA PSOPLE. 159 

GOQBiderably extended, he brings his right hand 
towards his breast, moving it gradually onwards, 
and whilst his left hand is coming round towards 
his right shoulder, his light hand partially twisting 
^efowy lays the end which it holds upon the left 
elbow, so that the fow lies thus extended upon 
that arm, one end being still grasped by the left 
hand. The right hand being now at tiberty, is 
brought under the left fore-arm, (which still re- 
mains in the same situation), and carried outward- 
ly towards the left elbow, that it may agsdn seize 
in that situation the end of the fow* The right 
hand then describes a bold curve outwardly from 
the chest, whilst the left comes across the chest, 
describing a curve nearer to him, and in the oppo- 
site direction, till at length the left hand is extend- 
ed from him, and the right approaches to the left 
shoulder, gradually twisting the fow by the turn 
and flexures principally of that wrist. This dou- 
ble motion is then retraced, but in such a way, (the 
left wrist now principally acting), that the fow, in- 
stead of being untwisted, is still more twisted, and 
is at length again placed upon the left arm, while 
he takes a new and less constrained hold.* Thus 
the hands and arms perform a variety of curves of 
the most graceful description. The muscles, both 
of the arms and chest, are seen rising as they are 
called into action, displaying what would be a fine 
and uncommon subject of study for the painter, 
for no combinations of animal action can develope 
the swell and play of the muscles with more grace 

* This is described from seeing Mr Mariner mimic the 
action ; and I have ^ven a minute account of it, because 
it is an operation which the niiJtvi«A t5E«^l '«As^^ ^^lit^^tsi. 
well performed. 



160 RELIGIOUS RITES 

or with belter effect. The degree of strength 
which he exerts when there is a large quantity 
is very great, and the dexterity with which he 
accomplishes the whole never foils to excite the 
attention and admiration of all present. Every 
tongue is mute, and every eye is upon him, watch- 
ing each motion of his arms, as they describe the 
various curvilinear turns essential to the success of 
the operation. Sometimes the fibres of the faw 
are heard to crack with the increasing tension, yet 
the mass is seen whole and entire, becoming more 
thin as it becomes more twisted, while the infu- 
sion drains from it in a regularly decreasing quan- 
tity, till at length it denies a single drop. He 
now gives it to a person on his left side, and re- 
ceives fresh ^^m; from another in attendance on his 
right, and begins the operation anew, with a view 
to collect what before might have escaped him. * 

* No man undertakes to perform this operation at a 
large party, but who has been well practised on smaller 
occasions ; for it is considered a great accomplishment, 
even worthy of a chief; and a failure on such an occasion 
would look very bad. Mr Mariner, however, never wit- 
nessed one. The cava dregs which have been thus put 
aside are afterwards taken away by the cooks, and chewed 
over again to make fresh infusion for themselves. The 
disgusted reader will here perhaps call to mind the asser- 
tion we have formerly made, that no nation can excel the 
Tonga people in personal cleanliness, and will regret that 
they are not equally clean in their food. If this objection 
were made to a native, he would say, ** It is not indeed 
very cleanly, for we would not eat a piece of yam which 
another had bitten ; but chewing the cava is an ancient 
practice, and we think nothing of it ; but wliat, " he will 
perhaps add^ *' can be more filt\iy and A\ft^M«dtv^tlian tlie 
^apalangi practice of drinking tV\e mWV o^ «^ W«fiX, wA 

jgiving it to yom children for food? ** "^nqt^ towwrjVw 

-'to customs. 



OF THB TOHOA PEOPLS. 161 

Dming the above operation, yarions people in 
the exterior circle are employed making cava cups 
of the unexpanded leaf of the banana tree, which 
is cut into lengths of about nine inches; eadi 
piece being then unfolded, is nearly square. The 
two ends are next plaited up in a particular man- 
ner, and tied with a fibre of the stem of the leaf, 
forming a very elegant cup, not unworthy of imi- 
tation. These leaves are provided before-hand, 
as well as the water, the bowl, &c. by the c4)ok8. 
Sometimes it happens that there is not water e- 
nough, in which case off starts some one from the 
exterior circle to fetch more, running as if it were 
for his life, and twenty more after him, each anxi- 
ous to show his readiness in arriving first with the 
water. In a short time, if these do not return, 
twenty or thirty more will rush off with equal 
swiftness. Presently after they are seen coming 
back at full speed, vrith three or four cocoaruut 
shells of water ; or if any thing else is wanted, 
it is fetched in the same prompt way. 

In the meanwhile, also, the fonoy or provisions 

to be eaten with the cava, is shared out. This 

fl^nerally consists of yams, ripe bananas, or plan- 

'.ains, in sutticient quantity that each in the supe- 

ior circle may have a small portion to eat after 

is dish of cava. The mataboole calls out for 

)mebody to come and divide the forw : a couple 

morally advance forward and proceed to make 

e division. A large portion is first separated, 

d presented to the presiding chief, by laying it 

fore him ; this being done, the mataboole orders 

remainder to be divided equally between the 

I sides, left and right, of tibft fsoi^Ttfst ^^^\ 

i pei'son lias conseqaeuxVY * 'yaxvoxi^'t^^Kc^R^ 



164 RELIGIOUS RITES 

the side of the president, and who is not actually 
giving directions; for one mataboole only regu- 
lates the serving out of each bowl; and if the 
bowl is filled a second time, the other mataboole 
directs the ceremonies, and so on alternately. 

Ist, Where the cava is a present, and the giver 
is in company, the order is thus : the giver, 
the mataboole, the president. 

2d, The cava not being a present, or the giver 
not in company, but there being a visitor, thus : 
the visitor, the mataboole, the president. 

3d, There being two or more visitors of nearly 
equal rank, and the master of the ceremonies 
not knowing how to choose without giving of- 
fence, thus : the president, the mataboole, the 
chief next below the president in rank. 

4th, There being no visitor present, thus : the 
mataboole, the chief next in rank to the pre- 
sident, the president. 

At large cava parties very few, in proportion to 
the immense midtitude present, get served with 
this infusion ; but there must always be enough . 
for the superior circle, and for their relations, who 
may be either in the inferior or exterior : which 
latter, who, for reasons before given, do not sit in 
the upper circle, are served nevertheless in the 
order of their rank, or nearly so. One thing more 
is to be observed ; viz. when a cup of cava is an- 
nounced to be given to a person whose superior 
relation is present, that superior relation has a 
right to counter-order it, which he does by calling 

oat, ^^ give it to , " mentioimi^ lilicv^ tsaxel*^ q£ 

|#aa>e individual whom he diooaea »\iOAi\^ Vw^ 'ix 
WP'^fowce to his relation : «ad iJbMiSa^Aten ^««fc< 



OF THS TONGA PEOPtK* 165 

When ^ bowl is emptied, if the chief thinks 
projiier, he orders another to be got ready ; or if 
any person in company sends away for some cant 
root, to make a present of it to the chief, a fresh 
quantity must be prepared ; bnt the president him- 
self often sends away for a second, a third, and 
eren a fourth supply of cava root. Each bowl 
must be served round as long as it will last. When 
the individuals of the superior circle, and the per^ 
sons related to them, are served, if any remcdns, 
it is given out to others in the inferior and exte- 
rior circles, no person receiving two cups out of 
the same bowl. When a second bowl is filled, it 
is served out the same as the first, i. e. not begin- 
ning where the first left off, but commencing and 
going on with the same individuals as if it were 
the first bowl ; the third in the like manner, &c. 
Every bowl is provided with a 6<esh quantity of 
fcmo^ or Victuals to be eaten with the cava, and 
which are shared out in the same way as before. 
These generally consist of yams, bananas, or plan- 
tains, but sometimes a baked pig is brought, in 
which case the liver and a yam is the portion pre- 
sented to the chief ; if fowls are brought, the skin 
of the throat and the rump are the president's 
share. If, before the conclusion, any one in the 
superior circle wishes to leave, he says to the 
chief, Ik^ teoo mow cata, I cannot provide cava ; 
and, with this apology, he leaves. Or, if he has 
actually provided cava, he has only to state some 
reason for his leaving the company, such as going 
to another island, or to superintend some work. 
Of the two matabooles who are^ on each side of 
the president} it must be meiktioii<^> ^3cflS^» isw^^^'^ 

VOL. II. o 



166 RELIGIOUS RITES 

gulatee the first bowl, and the oUier the seeondy 
and so on alternately. They generally sit dose 
to the chief, except when Tooitonga presides, when 
there is an intervening space between him and 
them of about six feet. No chief comes to the 
cava party of an inferior, or, if any extraordinary 
circomstance was to make this necessary, the in- 
ferior wonld be obliged to retire to his own exte- 
rior circle, and the superior visitor would preside. 
The greatest chief present must always preside^ 
unless there be an inspired priest present, who 
then sits at the head of the circle, and the other 
chiefs retire to the exterior circle, not out of respect 
to the priest, who may be only a mooa, but out of 
veneration to the god supposed to exist within him* 
When a priest presides, which is the case at all re- 
ligions ceremonies, except where they are consult- 
ing a god who has no priest, * the latter always 
has the fii*st cup ; the presiding mataboole, not 
actually officiating, has the second; the third, 
fourth, fifth, and perhaps sixth cups, are given to 
the next hi^er persons in the superior circle ; and 
then the chiefs who have retired to the exterior 
drde are, out of respect, helped ; but this reeta 

* When a god has no priest, as TaU-y-Toob6, for in* 
stance, no person actually presides at the head of his cava 
circle, the place being left apparently vacant, but which, 
it is supposed, the god invisibly occupies. On such occa- 
sions, the cava party is always held before the house con- • 
secrated to the god (as in the commencement of the ill- 
ness of Finow*s daughter.) And they go through the 
usual form of words, as if the first cup was actually filled 
and presented to ttie god. Thus, before any cup is filled, 
tlw wan by the side of the bow\sa\s Cojoa (ooa Keca> Th& 
cava is deposited (in tlie cup'). Tbc ^cvata^ioo\ii »»!k>n«^ 
^fr^'t ma ho e^^U Give it to your god-, VjuVVVi^Vsmw*^ 
*»># for there is no cup filled fot tbe ^od. 



07 THS TONGA PEOPLE. 167 

at the option of the officiating mataboole. After- 
wards the remainiler of the superior cirde are ser- 
ved. At smaller cava parties, the forms and words 
of ceremony are precisely the same ; hut when a 
priest does not preside, familiar conversation, and 
even joke and merriment, are indulged in. On 
all occasions every individual pays the greatest at- 
tention to his dress, that it be decorous and well 
tied on, that is, with neatness. * 

We have been particular in the description of 
Ab ceremony of preparing and drinking this infu- 
sion, because it sets in so strong a light the man- 
ners and customs of the people, and because it so 
frequently accompanies almost every kind of reli- 
gious ceremony. It is not pretended, however, 
that drinking cava is essential to every religious 
ceremony, or to most of them, but that it is the 
custom to take it generally on such occasicms. 
These religious ceremonies we shall now describe, 
taking them nearly in the order in whidi, by 
the natives, they are considered of most im- 
portance, or most sacred ; viz. Ifuwhif Fuccaiahi^ 
cava fueca egi^ Touotow, Nawgia^ Tootoonimay 
Bootoo^ Langi^ TaJboo^ Fota^ MSe-mo'e, to6goocava. 

Although the ceremony of inachi was entirely 
abrogated by Finow just before Mr Mariner left 
Vavaoo, we place it first in rank, because it al- 
trays used to be considered of the utmost import- 

* Some of our readers will perhaps find some difficulty 
in believing this ; but nothing is more true than that the 
Tonga people of any degree of rank are very particular 
in regard of their perswial cleanliness and neatness of 
dress, insomuch, that a man will often refuse to join a 
neighbouring cava party, because the gnatoo which he 
happens to have on may not be «o iift^ w tA ^g^icA %Sk Ve^ 
could wiah. 



168 EELIOIOUfl RITES 

aace before it was done away with ; besides wfaicb^ 
it was a ceremony which affected the property of 
every individual in Vavaoo, and all the Hapai 
Islands, and formerly in the Island of Tongti also. 
Inachi. This word means, literally, a share 
or portion of any thing that is to be, or has been 
distributed out ; but, in the sense here mention- 
ed, it means that portion of the fruits of the earth, 
and other eatables, which is offered to the gods ia 
the person of the divine chief Tooitonga, which 
allotment is made once a year, iust before the 
yams in genend ore »riyed at a .tL of matnrity ; . 
those which are used in this ceremony being of a 
kind which admit of being planted sooner than 
others, and, consequently, they are first fruits of 
the yam-season. The object of this offering is to 
insure the protection of the gods, that their ikvonr 
may be extended to the welfare of the nation ge- * 
neially, and in particular to the productions of the 
earth, of which yams are the most important. The 
time for planting most kinds of yams is about the 
latter end of July, but the species called caho' 
caho^ which is always used in this ceremony, is 
put in the ground about a month before, when, on 
each plantation, there is a small piece of land 
chosen and fenced in, for the purpose of growing 
a couple of yams of the above description. As 
soon as they have arrived at a state of maturity, 
the How sends a messenger to Tooitonga, stating 
that the yams for the inachi are fit to be taken 
up, and requesting that he would appoint a day 
for the ceremony. He generally fixes on the tenth 
day afterwards^ reckoning tYie ioWo^wVxi^ dawj Cot 
tbe £rst. There are no particuVai v^«<^nnaa«QA 
^^pde till the day before the ceremotvy \ «X xa^x^ 



OF TRK TONGA PEOPLE. 169 

however, the 8oand of the conch is heard occasionally 
in different parts of the islands, and as the day of 
the ceremony approaches it becomes more fre- 
quent, so tliat the people of ahnost every planta- 
tion sound the conch three or four times, which, 
breaking in upon the silence of the night, has a 
pleasing effect, particularly at Vavaoo, where the 
number of . woods and hills send back repeated 
echoes. The day before the ceremony, the yams 
are dug up, and ornamented with ribands prepar- 
ed from the inner membrane of the leaf of a 
•pedes of pandanns, and died red.* When thus 
prepared, it is called mellecooloy and is wrapped 
round the yam, beginning at one end, and run- 
nmg round spirally to the other, when it is 
brought back in the opposite direction, the turns 
crossing each other in a very neat manner. As 
the ceremony is always performed at the island 
where Tooitonga chooses to reside, the distant 
islands must make these preparations two or 
three days beforehand, that the yams, &c may 
be sent in time to Vavaoo, where we will suppose 
the affair is to take place. The ninth day then 
is employed in preparing and collecting the yams 
and other provisions, such as fish, cava root, and 
mahoay and getting ready mats, gnatoo, and bun- 
dles of meUecoola : but the yams only are to be 
carried in the procession about to be described. 
The sun has scarcely set when the sound of the 

* It is first soaked for six or eight hours in lime-water, 
and afterwards in an infusion of the root of the non6^ 
where it remains for about a week ; it is afterwards ex- 
posed to the sun, and becomes of a bright red. The root 
of the non6 is of a dark bright yellow, which, upon the 
action of time-water, becomes red. 



170 RELIGIOUS RITES 

conch begins again to echo through the island^ in- 
creasing as the night ^vances. At the Mooa, 
and all the plantations, the voices of men and wo- 
men are heard, singing Ndfo oooa tegger gnao^ey 
oooa gjuwoey Rest thou, doing no work; thou 
shalt not work. This increases till midnight, men 
generally singing the first part of the sentence, 
and the women the last, to produce a more pleas- 
ing effect; it then subsides for lliree or four hours, 
and again increases as the sun rises. Nobody, 
however, is seen stirring out in tlie public roads 
till about eight o'clock, when the people fix>m aU 
quarters of the island are seen advancing towards 
itie Mooa, and canoes from all the other islands 
are landing their men ; so that all the inhabitants 
of Tonga seem approaching by sea and land, sing- 
ing and sounding the conch. At the Mooa itaeli^ 
the universal bustle of preparation is seen and 
heard ; and the different processions entering from 
various quarters, of men and women, dressed up 
in new gncUoos, ornamented with red ribands and 
wreatlis of flowers, the men armed with speais 
and dubs, betoken tlie importance of the ceremony 
about to be performed. Each party brings in its 
yams in baskets, which are carried by the princi- 
pal vassal of the chief to whom the plantation may 
belong, and deposited on the malai. Some of the 
men now begin to sling the yams upon poles about 
eight or nine feet long, and four inches diameter, 
these proceedings being regulated by attending 
matabooles. The yams being all slung, each pole 
is carried by two men upon their shoulders, one 
walking before the other, and the yam hanging 
between them, ornamented with red ribands. The 
proceaaion begins to move UywBxOA x^ ^^««^ 



07 THS TOKO A PB07LE. 171 

the last TooitongB, the men ftdvandng in a single 
line, every two bearing a yam, with a slow and 
measured pace., sinking at ev^ry step, as if their 
harden were of immense weight. * In the mean 
time the chiefs and matabooles are seated in a semi- 
circle before the grave, their heads bowed down, 
and their hands clasped before them. The pro- 
cession now approaches. Two boys, walking 
abreast of each other, precede it at a little dis- 
tance, blowing couchs ; then come the men, bear- 
ing the yams, about seventy or eighty in number, 
i. e. about a hundred and sixty men in a single 
line, as close to each other as the length of the 
poles will allow ; after them comes a single line of 
men, about forty, singing aloud, as before stated, 
nofo 6oo<Zy &c., followed up by two other boys 
blowing conchs. They proceed between the 
grave and the chiefs, describing there a large circle 
two or three times, the conchs blowing and the 
men singing. The yams are then deposited, one 
after the other, (still on the poles), before the 
grave, and the men sit down by the side of them, 
so that tlie chiefs and matabooles are in the rear. 
One of the matabooles of Tooitonga now rises, 
advances, and seats himself before the grave, a 
little in advance of the men. Here he addresses 
the gods generally, and afterwards paiticularly 
mentioning the late Tooitonga, and the names of 
several others. He returns thanks for their divine 
bounty in favouring the land with the prospect of 
so good a harvest, and prays that their beneficence 
may be continued in future. This prayer he makes 

* And as if meaning to express, " IIow bountiful are 
the gods, to give us so good aharyest^ wd \vra^\!^<&>»»"^iri^ 
yaxDa bo Jorge and heavy I ** 



172 RELIGIOUS RITES 

in the names of several chiefs present, whom lie 
announces aloud. This being done, he arises and 
retires to his former place. The men now also rise 
and resume their loads in the same order, and, af- 
ter having paraded round two or three times be- 
fore the grave, return back to the malai the same 
way they came, singing and blowing the conchs 
as before. The chiefs and matabooles, a short 
time afterwards, rise and follow them to the same 
place, where the yams are now again deposited^ 
and loosened from the poles, still, however, re- 
taining their ornaments. The company seat theia<« 
selves in a large circle, at which Tooitonga pre- 
sides, the king and otlier great chiefs retiring 
behind among the mass of the people. The other 
articles that form part of the Inachi are next 
brought forward. These are dried fish, MO^^ mato, 
gnaioOf and bundles of tnellecodla, which, together 
with the yams, (although not cooked), are shai> 
ed out by one of the matabooles of Tooitonga. 
First, there is a considerable share (about oner 
fourth), allotted to the gods, which the priests ap- 
. propriate, and their servants immediately take 
away. About one half is allotted to the kinff, 
which his servants, without fiuther orders, tal^ 
away to his house, and the remainder is taken 
away by Tooitonga*s servants. It may seem 
strange that the latter has a smaller share than the 
king, but then he has not a quarter the number of 
dependents to divide it among. The materials of 
the Inachi being removed, the company form a 
regular cava pai-ty. Some cava root is brought and 
prepared, and a large quantity oi Aiesa^d vvcXuals^ 
perhaps a hundred and fifty bask<it&-l«^, «. waaS^ 
portion of which is eliared out to \^ ^^"^ ^*^ 



or TUB TONGA PEOPLE. 173 

the cava. While the infusion is preparing, a ma- 
tahoole makes a speech to the people, stating, 
that as they have performed this important cere- 
mony, the gods will protect them, and grant them 
long lives, provided they continue to pay duo at- 
tention to religious ceremonies, and to pay respect 
to the chiefs. When the cava is finished, the cir- 
cle separates, and the provisions are shared out to 
each chief according to his rank. The day con- 
cludes with wrestling, boxing, &c. after whidi 
night-dances commence. When these are ended, 
the people retire home, perfectly assured of the 
protection of the gods. 

At this ceremony, the quantity of provisions 
shared out is incredible. The people, therefore, 
look upon it as a very heavy tribute, though in 
fact the owners of the plantations (cliiefs, mata- 
booles, &c.) are at the expense of it ; yet as there 
11 much more provided than what is eaten, it helps 
to increase the scarcity if the season should not be 
abundant : but it is so much the custom at Tonga 
to make liberal and profuse presents, that the peo- 
ple generally either feast or starve. Sometimes it 
happens that several great feasts are given nearly 
about the same time ; as for instance, the occasion 
of the Inachi ; the arrival of some chief from a dis- 
tant island, after a long absence ; the marriage or 
death of some great chief, as of Tooitonga him- 
self, &C. These feasts threaten a scarcity ; to pre- 
vent which, a taboo or prohibition is put upon 
several kinds of food, that they may not be eaten 
for a certain length of time, at the termination of 
which they perform the following ceremony, which 
takes off the taboo : A famine or war may also oc* 
caaion a necessity Cot t\na taboo \o\»\sss^s»fc^^ 



i74 RELIGIOUS lilTBS 

FuccALARi, i. e. to make all at large, or free 
again ; or to take off a restriction. As the mode 
of performing this ceremony has already been de- 
scribed, (see vol. I. p. 117.) and the particular 
objects of it mentioned, (p. Ill, same vol.) no- 
thing need now be said upon the subject, except 
that it is generally concluded with a cava party. 

Cava Fucca egi. This consists in a cava party, 
where an inspired priest sits at the head. The cir- 
cumstances of inspiration we have already related, 
(vol. I. p. 100), and the form of serving out the 
cava when a priest presides (voU II. p. 166, &c) 
The phrase c(wa fucca egi means litei'ally, agodrUke 
cava. Laying a small piece of cava root before 
the grave of a chief or consecrated house, out of 
respect to a god, or to the relation, is called toogoo 
cava, and will be mentioned in its proper order* 

Tow- TOW is an offering of yams, cocoa-nuts, 
and other vegetable productions to Alo Alo (the 
god of weather) in particular, and to all the gods 
in general, for the purpose of ensuring a continua- 
tion of favourable weather, and consequent fertili- 
ty. This ceremony is first performed at the time 
when the yams are approaching maturity, in tlie 
early part of November, and is repeated every ten 
days for seven or eight times. On the day ap- 
pointed by the priest of A'lo Alo, every plaata- 
tation on the three parts of the island, viz. the 
hahagiy mooa^ and hihifo * districts provide a cer- 
tain quantity of yams, cocoa-nuts, sugar-canes, 
bananas, plantains, 8cc all which are brought to 
the malai, tied upon sticks, so that each stick, 



V 



Haha^ 13 the north end of any \s\a.T\A\ H\JwJ« ^ 
end ; the mooa part of the island \>«ai^6 ^« crisis*. 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 175 

tfdien held horizontally, has about eight small yams 
hanging from it at equal distances ; or a couple of 
bunches of plantains or bananas, &c. ; the sugar- 
canes are tied in bundles, three or four in each. 
These things being brought, are disposed in three 
piles, one erected by the people of Hahagi, with 
thdr offerings, anoUier by the people of Hihifo 
with theirs, and the third by those of the Mooa. 
The piles are placed on one side of the malai up- 
right, the ends of the sticks next the ground di- 
verging from each other, and the upper ends meet- 
ing together ; whjilst others are placed across them 
on the top. Wrestling and boxing-matches now 
commence, which generally last about three hours, 
and being ended, a deputation of nine or ten men 
from the priest of A'lo Alo, all dressed in mats, 
with green leaves round their neclu, arrives with 
a female diild, to represent the wife of Alo A'lo, 
and seat themselves before the three piles, forming 
a single line, with a large drum (kept there for the 
purpose) immediately in front of them. The de- 
putation now offer a prayer to Alo Alo and 
the other gods, petitioning them to continue their 
bounty, and make the laad fruitful, &c ; which 
being done, they give orders in regard to sharing 
out the provisions ; one pile b^ng appropriated to 
Alo Alo and the other gods, the other two be- 
ing shared out to different prindpal chiefs, and 
sent home to their houses, the pile for the gods 
remaining still in its place. They then begin 
another short prayer to the same purpose, at the 
close of which they make a signal by beatuv^wj^^w 
the dram, when all that c\io(»q \i\^^ «» %\\.\^viw 
dash at the pile appropriated Xo tVve^ ^o^^-* ^"^^ ^"'^^ 
/nauaecwrea as much ia lie caxx^ \*> ^^ ^^^^^ "^^ 



176 RELIGIOUS RITES 

nmsement of all the spectators, tliotigh many of 
the scramblers come oft* with wounded heads, and 
sometimes with fiuctored limbs, the broken sticks 
being thrown about in every direction. All the 
women now get out of the way, while the men 
stand np and commence a general pugilistic con- 
testy one half of the island against the other half: 
this combat is termed toe tacoWy and forms an es- 
sential part of this ceremony, but it is now and 
then practised at other ceremonies. At these 
genend battles, the highest chiefs engage as well 
as the lowest tooas^ and any one of the latter may, 
if he pleases, attack the king, and knock him down 
if he can, or even Tooitonga, without any reserve, 
and handle him unmercifullv, without the least 
danger of giving oftence. These combats are 
sometimes very obstinately kept up ; and when 
neither party seems likely to yield the ground, af- 
ter two or three houre dispute, the king orders 
them to desist. The most perfect good humour 
constantly prevails on these occasions. If a man 
is knocked down, he rises with a smile ; if his arm 
is broken, he retires to get it set, without seem- 
ing to tliink any thing of it : on the contrary, to be 
angry, or to fight with the least animosity, would 
be considered the mark of a very weak mind. Af- 
ter the battle, those who have contended with su- 
perior chiefs, or think they may have touched su- 
perior chiefs, perform the ceremony of mo'e-mo'e, to 
a chief at least as high in rank as any they may 
have come in contact with. 

Every tenth day, as before stated, these cere- 
monies are repeated for seven or eight successive 
timee. The child that has been, mentioned as re- 
preeentiDg the wife of Ala Aio, V» f^CjamSLi OtMURL 



or THB TONGA PEOPLE. 177 

from among the female chiefs of the higher ranks, 
and is about eight or ten years old. During the 
eighty days of this ceremony, she resides at the 
consecrated house of Alo Alo, where, the day he- 
fore the first ceremony, a cava party is held, at 
which she presides, as well as at a feast which fol- 
lows. She has nothing to do on the actual days 
of the ceremony, except to come with the deputa- 
tion and sit down with them. 

Nawgia, or the ceremony of strangling 
children, as sacrifices to the gods, for the re- 
covery of a sick relation. The blackest cloud 
that obscures the understanding of the Tonga peo- 
ple, is surely that which prevents them seeing the 
unnatural cruelty and absurdity of this practice. 
We have, however, the most sanguine hopes that 
" Moloch — horrid king I " will not much longer 
hold his reign in these islands. It is not, we ve- 
rily believe, from a want of natural feeling, but 
from an excessive veneration and fear of the gods, 
created in an era of great superstition,, and new 
upheld by old practice, that the natives perform 
these horrible rites. All the bystanders behold 
the innocent victim with feelings of the greatest 
pity ; but it is proper, they think, to sacrifice a 
child who is at present of no use to society, and 
perhaps may not otherwise live to be, with the 
hope of recovering a sick chief, whom all esteem, 
and whom all think it a most important duty to 
respect, defend, and preserve, that his life may be 
of advantage to the country. The form of this 
ceremony is related (vol. I. p. 190.) Other in- 
stances on the occasions of Finow's last illness, 
and that of Tooitonga. The ceremony of N&w- 

vou lU p 



178 RELIGIOUS RITES 

gia (or strangling), used to be performed upon the 
chief widow of Tooitonga, on the day of her hus- 
band*s buiial, that she might be inten'ed with him. 
Two Tooitongas were buried during Mr Mariner s 
time ; one on his first arrival, and the other (i. e. 
the last), a few months before he came away. The 
first of these two, however, had no chief wife, i. e. 
he had no wife at all, or else none that was of so 
high a rank as to take the charge of his house- 
hold, and be the mistress over the others ; conse- 
quently at his death no such ceremony was per- 
formed. The last Tooitonga s wife (the daughter 
of the late king, and sister of the present) was not 
subjected to this inhuman rite — ^thanks to the good 
sense of the late and present king. When old 
Fiiiow was living, he used to say, tliat if Tooi- 
tonga died before his wife, she should not be 
strangled. " What," said he, " is the use of de- 
stroying a young and beautiful woman? Who 
is there dares say that the gods are merciless and 
cruel? My daoghter shall not be strangled T' 
Tooitonga did not die till the present king came 
into power, and we have ahready seen that he not 
only preserved his aister» but abolished Tooitonga: 
in consequence, it was wiuspered about, that some 
great misfortune would happen to the country. At 
the Fiji Islands, the principal wife of every chief, 
or at least of every considerable chief, undergoes 
this ceremony on the death of her husband. 

TooTOO-MiMA, or cutting off a portion of the 
little finger, as a sacrifice to the gods, for tlie re- 
covery of a superior sick relation, explained in 
notCy p. 22. The finger is laid flat upon a block 
^ of wood ; a hniie, axe, or sharp stone is placed 
preSl^^^ tAo edge upon the line o! ^lojwfcA %8aj«a>- 



OP THE TOVGA PEOPLE. 179 

tion, and a powerful blow being giren with a mal- 
let or large stone, the operation is finished. From 
the nature and violence of the action, the wound 
seldom bleeds much. The stump is then held in 
the smoke and steam arising from the combustion 
of fresh-plucked grass. This stops any flow of 
blood. The wound is not washed for two days ; 
afterwards it is kept dean, and heals in about two 
or three weeks, without any application whatever. 
One joint is generally taken off, but some will 
have a smaller portion, te admit of the operation 
being performed 8eyeral times on the same finger, 
m case a man has many superior relations. 

Boo TOO, or funei*al ceremonies. For a partial 
description of these, reference may be made to the 
burial of Toobo Nuba (vol. I. p. 133); for a par- 
ticular one, as it regards the burial of a king, to 
that of Finow (p. 310). What remains, therefore, 
principally to be described are the peculiarities at- 
tending the burial of Tooitonga. In the first place, 
however, we shall give the names. of the different 
parts of the ceremony of burials in general. 

Fala, x)r procuring small stones (white and 
black) and sand, to cover the grave. 

TooTOO, or burning the persons of the mour- 
ners in spots with lighted rolls of tapa* 

Lap A. Burning the arm in about six places, 
each in form of ^y^ or six concentric circles. 

TooGi. Beating the cheeks, and rubbing off 
the cuticle with cocoa-nut husk, or some sort of 
plait, wound round the hand. 

FoA OoLOo. Wounding the head, and cutting 
the flesh in various .parts, with knives, shells, clubs, 
spears, &c. in honour of the dec«aafid<>«£A iba^'^xi^r 



^ 



180 RELIGIOUS RITES 

timony of respect for his memory and fidelity to 
his family. 

All these have heen accmrately described in the 
ceremony of burying the late king. There is one 
remark, nevertheless, to be made in respect to the 
foor last, particularly Foa Chloo, which appears, 
however inhuman, to be a very ancient and long 
established custom in the history of mankind. On 
turning to Leviticus, chap. xix. ver. 28, we find 
this command, *' Ye shall not make any cuttings 
in your flesh for the dead, nor print any marks 
upon you. " 

The above mentioned five ceremonies are com- 
mon at all burials, and are conducted with more 
or less pomp, according to the rank of the indi- 
vidual deceased. In saying all burials, however, 
we must make one exception, viz. that of Tooi- 
tonga, on which occasion the ceremony of Foa 
Ooloo is never performed ; but the reason of this 
Mr Mariner was unable to learn. At the funeral 
of the greatest chiefs, in general, this outrage is 
usually exercised with the utmost readiness and 
enthusiasm ; but at that of Tooitonga, who is far 
higher than any other, it is altogether omitted. 
The natives have no laws for this, but custom. 

Lang I, or the ceremony of burying Tooitonga. 
This word is applied to signify the gi*ave of this 
chief during the whole of the funeral ceremonies. 
It literally means the sky ; also, a band of singers ; 
but there appears no connection between these dif- 
ferent meanings. When Tooitonga is ill, the inter- 
cessions with the gods for his recovery are the 
same, though perhaps in a greater degree, as are 
jouu/e on the i/iness of other high chiefs. Prayera 
<*» offered up; priests become VoBpoe^; «waa 



OF THE TONGA FEOFLfl. 181 

children have their little fingers eacrifioed ; others 
are strangled, ^kc When he is dead, his body is 
waslied with oil and water, as usual ; his vndows 
come to mourn over him, &c. ; and, according to 
the former custom, his chief widow should be 
strangled, but whether on the day of his death or 
of his burial, Mr Mariner does not know. His 
fyboca^ or burial-place, is of the same form as that 
of other chiefs. The day after his death (which 
is the day of his burial), every individual at every 
island, man, woman and child, has his head close- 
ly shaved. This is a peculiarity, and so is the 
custom of depositing some of his most valuable 
property along with the body in the grave, such as 
beads, whaW teeth, fine Hamoa mats, &c. ; so 
that his family burying-place, at the island of Ton- 
ga, where all his ancestors lie, must have become 
very rich ; for no native would dare to commit the 
aacrilege of plundmng it. The ceremony of in- 
terment is exactly the same as that of the king. 
The mourning is also the same, viz. old ragged 
mats, with leaves of the ifi tree round the neck ; 
but for Tooitonga the time of mourning is extend- 
ed to four months ; the mats being generally left 
off at the end of three, whilst the leaves are re- 
tained for another month. The taboo^ for touch- 
ing his body, or any thing that he had on when he 
died, extends to at least ten months, and for his 
nearest relations fifteen months. (See vol. I. p. 
133.) Every man neglects to shave his beard foi' 
at least one month ; and during that time merely oils 
his body at night, but not his head. Tlie female 
mourners remain- within the fytoca about two 
mouths^ night and day> onlf i^^nfi% i)R5:»siEs^^^ 



182 RELIGIOUS RITES 

to the neigfabomring temporary houses, to eat, he 
It will be seen, that what wie have already related 
of these ceremonies differs in many respects, some 
in kind, and all in degree, from those attending 
the burial of the king ; but those we are about to 
describe are altogether peculiar to Tooitonga. 
In the afternoon of the day of burial, the body 
being already ia the fi/toca, almost every man, 
woman, and cfiild, provided with a tome* and 
a piece of boldta^ f sit down at about eighty yards 
from the grave. In the course of an hour the 
multitude collects, probably to above three thou- 
sand, all clothed in old mats, &c. and seated as 
just stated. One of the female mourners now 
comes out of the fytocay and advances in front, 
vdiere she calls out to the people, saying. Mo iooy 
bea ofi myy Arise ye, and approach ! whereupon 
the people get up, and, advancing about forty 
yards, again sit down. Two men behind the 
grave now begin to blow conch shells, and six 
others, with large lighted torches, about six feet 
high, and six inches thick, (made of bundles of 
tomes), next advance forward from behind the 
fi/toca^ descend the mount, and walk round one 
after another several times, between the fytoca 
and the people, waving their flaming torches in 
the air ; they then begin to ascend the mount, at 
which moment all the people rise up togetlier, and 
suddenly snap their bolStas, neaiiy at the same 
time, producing a considerable crash. They then 
follow the men with the torches, in a single line, 

* A certain part of the cocoi^nut tree, o^ vi\viOa.\s«^«* 
^re made, 
f Part oftlie stem of the banana or p\axv\^u xxisft, >MtA. 
-^-p^wVe the asheu falling from \igVi\«d loxcYi«». 



OF THB TONGA PSOPLE. 183 

swending the moimt and walking roimd the fyto^ 
cOy as they pass the back of which the first six 
men deposit on the ground their extingcdshed 
torches, and the rest their tSmes and boldtcu^ the 
mourners within thanfcing them for providing these 
things. Thus they proceed round, and return to 
their places and sit down. The mataboole, who 
has the direction of the ceremonies, now advances 
in front of the people, and orders them to divide 
themselves in parties, according to their districts ; 
which being done, he gives to one party the bu- 
siness of clearing away the bushes, grass, &c. 
from one side of the grave, and to another to 
do the same in regard to another part, a third 
to remove such and such rubbish, &c. ; so that 
the whole neighbourhood of the fytoca becomes 
perfectly clear. This being done, all the peo- 
ple return to their respective temporary houses. 
Soon after dark, certain persons stationed at the 
grave begin again to sound the conchs, while others 
chant partly in an unknown language, * and partly 
in Hamoa, a sort of song, or rather a piece of reci- 
tative. While this is going on, a number of men 
in the neighbourhood get ready to come to the 
grave, to perform a part of the ceremony which 
the reader will not think altogether consonant with 
the high character for cleanliness which we have 

* The natives can give no account of ivhat this Ian- 

fuage is, nor how they originally came to learn the words, 
t has been hai|ded down from father to son, among that 
class of people whose business it is to direct burial cere- 
monies. None of thctti understand the words. It begins 
thus : toofia o chi toccalSw chi eio tocctddw ca mefafdnf^o 
cio mandvc t&joto, ^c There are sevcval Tow^«^^w^^^ 
mong 1^ and in all probabiWt^ \\. « o\\ w ^orcvx^vA. 
Tonga, though no sen«c can no-w \» TOsAft o^ >^- 



184 RELTGIOUa RITES 

given tho nativeB : it iniist be conridered, howeT«r, 
a reli^ouB rite, Rtanding npon the foundation of 
very ancient ciifltom. These men, above sixty in 
number, assemble before the grave, and wait far- 
ther orders. The chanting being finished, and the 
conchs having ceased to blow, one of the monm- 
ers comes forward, seats herself outside the^foco, 
and addresses the people thus. '' Men ! ye are 
gathered here to perform the duty imposed on you ; 
bear up, and let not your exertions be wanting to 
accomplish the work. " Having said this, she re- 
tires into the fytoea. The men now approach the 
mount (it being dark), and (if the phrase is al- 
lowable) perform their devotions to Cloacvna^ a^ 
ter which they retire. As soon as it is daylight 
the following morning, the women of the first rank 
(wives and daughters of the greatest chiefs) as- 
semble with their female attendants, bringing bas- 
kets, one holding one side, and one the other, ad«* 
vancing two and two, with large shells to clear iq» 
the depositions of the over night ; and in this ce- 
remonious act of humility there is no female of the 
highest consequence refuses to take her part. Some 
of the mourners in the^foca generally come oat 
to assist, so that in a very little while the place 19 
made perfectly clean. This is repeated the four- 
teen following nights, and as punctually cleared a- 
way by sun-rise every morning. No persons but , 
the agents are allowed to be witnesses of these 
extraordinary ceremonies, at least it would be coft- 
sidered highly indecorous and irreligious to be so. 
On the sixteenth day, earVy m the morning, the 
fame females again assetobXe ; \)\A xlw? ^«^ «$» 
Messed up in the finest gnaJtoo^ vxA \xiQ«x\««a8a.- 
^ ifexnoa mate, decorated ^iivrv>wai^^ wA^^ 



OP THE TONGA FOEPLE. 185 

^wreaths of flowen round their necks : they also 
bring new haskets, ornamented with flowers, and 
little hrooms very tasteiidly made. Thus equip- 
ped they approach, and act as if they had the 
same task to do as before, pretending to clear 
away the dirt, though no dirt is now there, and 
take it away in their baskets. They then return 
to the mooay and resume their mourning mats and 
leaves of the iji tree. Such are the transactions 
of the fifteen days, every day the ceremony of 
the burning torches being also repeated. The na- 
tives themselves used to express their regret that 
the filthy part of these ceremonies was necessaiy 
to be performed, to demonstrate their great vene- 
ration for the high character of Tooitonga, and 
that it was the duty of the most exalted nobles, 
even of the most delicate females of rank, to per- 
form the meanest and most disgusting offices, rap- 
ther than the sacred ground in which he was 
buried should remain polluted. For one month, 
from the day of burial, greats or less quantities 
of provisions are brought every day, and shared 
out to the people. On the first day a prodigious 
quantity is supplied ; but on every succeeding day 
a less quantity, gradually decreasing till the last, 
when, compai*atively, a very small portion is 
brought. The expenditure, and we may say waste 
of provisions, is however, so great, as to require a 
t^oo to be laid on certain kinds of provisions, 
(see vol. I. p. 111.), which lasts about eight or 
ten months ; and at the end of that time the cere- 
mony oifvccalahi is performed to remove it. 

Ta'boo. — This word has various shades of sig- 
nification ; it means sacred ot c^^oai^'caXR^ xk^ '^ 
godp having Uie same s\|pi:^ca2Cko\i «s^ Juccu. e^ \ 



186 BBLIGIOtTS RtTSa 

it means prohibited or forbidden, and is appHed 
not only to the thing prohibited, bat to the pro- 
hibition itself, and frequently (when it is in sacred 
matters), to die person who breaks the prohibition. 
Thus if a piece of ground or a house be conse- 
crated to a god, by express declaration, or the 
burial of a great chief, it is said to be t6boo ; the 
like if a canoe be consecrated, which is frequently 
done, that it may be more safe in long Toyages, 
Ice. As it is forbidden to quarrel or fight upon 
consecrated ground, so fighting in such a place 
would be said to be t6boOy and those that fought 
would be said also to be t^x)o ; and a man who is 
thus iMoo would have to make some sacrifice to 
the gods as an atonement for the sacrilege, as 
instanced in Palavali's case. (See toI. I. p. 
180 j. If a man be guilty of theft, or any crime 
whatsoever, he is said to hare broken the taiboo ; 
and as all such persons are particularly supposed 
liable to be bitten by sharks, an awkward mode 
of discovering a thief is founded upon this no- 
tion, by making all the suspected persons go 
into the water, where sharks frequent, and he 
who is bitten or devoured is looked upon as the 
guilty person. If any one touches a superior 
chief, or superior relation, or any thing immedi- 
ately belonging to him, he tSboos himself; but 
this is not supposed to produce any bad conse* 
quenoe, unless he feeds himself with his own hands, 
without first removing this taboOy which is to be 
done by performing the ceremony of md'i'moe^ di- 
rectly to be explained. If a person touches the 
biHly of a dead chief, or any t\vm^ ^x^wa^'^ \ifc- 
^onging to him^ lie becomea tciboo> «xv^ ^x«v^ ^f»ft 
P» relieve him. (See note, vo\. 1. 1?. \^^^* ^«' 



OV THB TONGA PSOFLE. 187 

tarn kiuds of food, as turtle, and a certain species 
of fish, from something in their nature^ are said to 
be taboOf and must not be eaten until a small 
portion be first giFen to the gods. Any other kind 
of food may be rendered t^foo by a prohibition 
being laid on it. Fruits and fiowers when tdbooed 
are generally marked to be so, by pieces of white 
tapOy or a piece of plait, in the shape oi a lizard 
or shark. * To prevent certain kinds of food 
from growing scarce, a prohibition or tSboo is set 
on them for a time, as after the indckij or other 
great and repeated ceremonies ; and which taboo 
is afterwards removed by the ceremony called 
fucccddlii; but this latter term is not only applied 
to the ceremony which removes the prohibition, 
but is equally used to express the duration of the 
taboo itself, and which, therefore, is often called 
the time of the fucccdahi. During certain cere-* 
monies, as that of the in^chi and the fabh (see 
voL L p. 318), nobody may appear abroad, or at 
least in sight, it being tabooed to do so. f 

MoB-MoE. When » person is tabooed, by 
touching a superior chief or relation, or any thing 
personally belonging to him, he will perform the 
ceremony of md'e-mSis before daring to feed him« 
self with his own hands. This ceremony con- 
sists in torching the soles of any superior chiefs 
feet with the ^ds, first applying the palm, then 
the back oi each hand ; after whidi tbe hands must 

* Nevertheless, ihey would not refuse to pluck and 
eat, if Mr Mariner, or any foreigner, not influenced by 
such superstition, would first remoTe this external sign o€ 
the tdboQ. 

f Any thing not tabooed is said to be gfK)foQa« i. e. «a&i^ 
or at liberty, a term used in coll\x«j^li62QS^2A^^A \(sb^^« 



188 RELIGIOUS KITES 

be rinsed in a little water, or, if there be no wi^ 
ter near, they may be rubbed with any part of the 
stem of the plantain or banana tree, the moisturs 
of which will do instead of washing. He may then 
feed himself without danger of any disease, which 
would otherwise happen, as they think, from eat- 
ing with tabooed hands ; but if any one think he 
may have already (unknowingly) eaten with tabooed 
hands, he then sits down before a chief, and taking 
the foot of the latter, presses the sole of it against 
his own abdomen, that the food which is within 
him may do him no injury, and that consequently 
he may not swell up and die. This operation is 
called fata (i. e. to press.) It is tabooed also to 
eat when a superior relation is present, unless the 
back is turned towards him ; for when a person^s 
back is turned towards another, that other may be 
said, in one sense, not to be in his presence. Al- 
so to eat food which a superior relation or chief 
has touched ; and if either of these taboos is acci- 
dentally infringed upon, the ceremony oijota must 
be performed. If any one is tabooed by touching 
the person or garments of Tooitonga, there is no 
other chief can relieve him from his tahoOf because 
no chief is equal to him in rank ; and, to avoid the 
inconvenience arising from his absence, a conse- 
crated bowl (or some such thing), belonging to 
Tooitonga, is applied to and toudied, instead of 
his feet. In Mr Mariner*s time, Tooitonga always 
left a pewter dish for this purpose, which dish was 
given to his father by Captain Cook. V^achi 
usually adopted a similar plan. Cava, either the 
foot or the infusion, cannot \ife \a\ioo^<ii \s^ <ha 
^ncfi ot any chief of wbat lank ^oesct \ t^^ ^^sax u 



OF THB TONGA PBOPI.Br 189 

common tooa may chew cava which eyeu Tooitoi^ 
lias touched. 

TooGOo Ca'va. This ceremony conakts in 
merely leaving a small piece of cava root before a 
consecrated house or grave, out of respect to a 
god, or to the departed spirit of a chief or rela- 
tion, at the same time the ceremony of toogi or 
heating the cheeks is performed, as related (vol. I. 
p. 93.) The toogt^ which is performed at burials, 
is of a more serious nature. 

LoToo is the term used for praying ; but it is 
more commonly applied to prayers offered up in 
the fields to all the gods, but particularly to Alo 
Alo, petitioning for a good harvest. It will be al- 
so recollected, that prayers are offered up before 
consecrated houses and graves. 

As omens, to which they give a considerable 
degree of credit, and charms, which they some- 
times practise, are more or less connected with 
their religion, we shall say something of them be- 
fore concludiog the present subject. Most of their 
omens we have already had occasion to mention, 
and have given instances of in the course of the 
narrative. As to dreams (see vol. I. chap. 4. and 
voL II. chap. 1.) Thunder and lightning (vol. 
I. chap. 12. and vol. II. chap. I.) Sneezing 
(vol. II. chap. 1.) These omens obtain abnost 
universal credit ; and they are thought to be direct 
indications from the gods of some event that is a- 
bout to happen. There is a certain species of bu*d 
which they call chioota, which is very apt to make 
a sudden descent, and dart dose by one, making a 
shrieking uuisc. This bird they suppose to be en- 
dowed with a knowledge of futurity, and the^ 

VOL. If. Q. ^ 



190 RELIGIOUS RITBS 

consider this aetion to be a warning of some evil 
that is about to happen. 

As Mr Mariner was once going out with the 
present king, and a party of men, upon some ex* 
cursion against the enemy, one of these birds made 
a sudden descent, passed over their heads, settled 
on a tree, passed over their heads again, and again 
settled ; upon which the majority, not excepting 
the king, were for returning immediately ; but Mr 
Maiiner laughed at their superstition, and, to 
prove that the bird had no great insight into mat- 
ters of futurity, he shot it with his musket : but, 
however, this did not prevent them from going 
back to their garrison ; and several had a full con- 
viction that Mr Mariner would soon be killed for 
this sacrilege. 

In respect to the charms practised among them, 
we have also a few words to say. The principal 
is that called tatSoy which has already been de- 
scribed, vol. II. chap. 1. There are only two o- 
ther practices which can well come under this 
head, viz. cabe, or rather vangiy which means a 
curse, or a malevolent order or command ; and ta 
7iioo, a charm to discover whether a sick person 
will live or die. Of the former, viz, c^be, we have 
given instances ^vol. I. p. 237), from which it 
will appear that tliey are chiefly malevolent wishes, 
or commands, that the object may eat, or other- 
wise maltreat his relations or gods ; and when we 
come to reflect that they believe in no future place 
of punishment, but tliat all human evils are the 
consequences of crimes, and that disrespect to 
ones auperioT relations ir \\t\\o ^VotX ^l ^:d£x>\»^ 
to the gods, these malevolent comwaxv^^, Vs3Pw«^«^ 
ridiculous Qom^ of tlieui may ww^^ ^^ ^> ^"a^^^^^^^ 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 191 

to the most horrible curses ; for if sach commands 
were fiilfilled, nothing less than tlie most dreadful 
of human miseries would be expected to fall on 
the head of the sacrilegious perpetrator. But it is 
only when a number of curses are repeated in a 
string, as it were, and pronounced firmly, and with 
real malevolence, that they are supposed to have 
any effect ; and not even then, if the party who 
curses is considerably lower in rank than the party 
cursed. When a whole string is thus uttered, it 
is properly called vangij and is often to the a- 
mount of thirty or forty in number. 

As to the charm of ta nioOf it consists in spin- 
ning a cocoa-nut with the husk on, and judging 
by the direction of the upper part, when again at 
rest, of the object of inquiry, which is chiefly, 
whether a sick person will recover. For this pur- 
pose, the nut being placed on the ground, a rela- 
ti<m of the mck person detennines that, if the nut 
« when again at rest, points to such a quarter, the 
east for example, that the sick man will recover. 
He then prays aloud to the patron god of the fa- 
roily, that he will be pleased to direct the nut, so 
that it may indicate the truth. The nut being 
next spun, the result is attended to with confi- 
dence, at least with a full conviction that it will 
truly declare the intentions of the gods ^t the 
time. The other occasions in which the spinning 
of a cocoa«nut is used, is chiefly for amusement, 
and then no prayer is made, and no degree of cre- 
dit is attached to the result. The women often 
spin a cocoa-nut to decide some dispute at a game. 



192 ARTS AMD MAMUFACtURES 



CHAPTER Vm. 

Thc next subject in order, is the stile of the Arts 
and Mannfactores. It has already been mention- 
ed, that those which constitute distinct professions^ 
being for the most part hereditary, are all exerdsed 
by men : there are others, however, some of which 
are practised by men, some by women, but which 
not being considered professional, do not-oonsti* 
tnte the business of a person's life ; nor is the term 
tooftxmga (artisan) applied to those who perform 
them. Among these are principally the art of 
performing surgical operations ; erecting fortifica- 
tions ; maldng ropes, bows and arrows, dnbs and 
spears, which are practised by men ; whilst die 
manufacture of gnataoy mats, baskets, thread, 
combs, 8cc., constitute the occasional employment 
(^ the women, even those of rank. We shall give 
an ac(20unt of each of the principal arts, beginning 
with diose that are strictly professional. 

Fo VACA, canoe-building. As it would be im- 
possible to give an intelligible and accurate de- 
scription of this ingenious and useful art, without 
refenwg to well-executed plates, and as this has 
been already so ably done Va Coo\l^ ^sA ^'E^tre- 
c^stoavx's Voyages, we prosuni© \x. ^o\j\^ V^ \sox 
*o unnecessary intrusion upon t\\c liXXtwDXAoiv 0*1 ^'«i 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE* 193 

reader to attempt entering into such a deicription. 
It may here be noticed, however, that the Tonga 
people have obtained a considerable share of in- 
formation in the art of bnilding and rigging ca- 
noes, from the natives of the Fiji Islands. It hasr 
already been observed, that, in all probability, the 
commimication between these two nations, at the 
distance of one htmdred and twenty leagacs, began 
on the part of the Tonga people, who being sita- 
ated to windward, it is very likely that one or 
more of their canoes were formerly drifted to the 
Fiji Islands by stress of weather, although they 
have no tradition of such a circumstance. It is 
highly probable that neither of them went out on 
a voyage of discovery, or if such an opinion be ad- 
mitted, there is little doubt but that the people of 
Tonga first made the attempt, although the con- 
stractioa and rigging of their canoes were at that 
time fax inferior. The grounds for this opinion 
arc, first, their situation to windward ; and, second- 
ly^ their superior enterprising spirit, in affairs of 
navigation, which may be said to constitute a fea- 
ture of their national cliaracter. Their superiority in 
tins respect is so great, that no native of Fiji, as fiar as 
is known, ever ventured to Tonga but in a canoe 
manned with Tonga people, nor ever ventured back 
to his own islands, bat under the same guidance and 
protection. If we look to the voyage of Cow Moo- 
ala, related in Chap. 10, voL L we cannot but en- 
tertain a very fiivoiurable idea of his maritime skill. 
He sailed from the Fiji Ldands for those of Tonga^ 
but the state of the weather prevented him mak- 
ing them; he then steered for die Navi^tor's 
Islands ; and the weather \m!D% %iS^ twsS»n wsss^^. 

u2 



194 ARTS AND MANUFACTUBES 

he was drifted to Fotoona, where his caaoe was 
destroyed, and his cargo of sandal-wood taken 
from him. Notwithstanding these misfortunes, as 
soon as another large canoe was hnilt, he again 
ventured to sea, and returned to the Fiji Islands 
to lay in a second cargo. 

The Fiji islanders make their canoes principally 
of a hard firm wood, called fehi, which is not 
liable to become worm-eaten ; and as the Tonga 
Islands do not produce this wood, the natives are 
not able to build canoes so large or so strong aa 
those of their instructors. All dieir large canoes, 
therefore, are either puicfaased or taken by force 
&om the natives of Fiji. The natives of Tonga 
take the greatest pains with their canoes, polidb- 
ing them with pmniee-stcme, and paying every at- 
tention that they are not more exposed to the 
weather than is absolutely necessary. The canoes 
of the Navigator's Islands are similar to those which 
were formerly in use at Tonga, but the natives of 
those ishuids never venture to the latter place hut 
in canoes manned with Tonga people. 

FoNO LE, carving omamenta out of whales' 
teeth for the neck, and inlaying dubs, &c. with 
the same material. This art, as far aa it regards 
ornaments for the neck, is of Fiji origin ; hut iii- 
laying clubs, wooden pillows, &c. is ^ir own in- 
vention. An account of the omamenta for the 
neck has already been given, (voL L p. 250.) 
They inlay their clubs with extraordinary neat- 
ness, considering the rude tool they employ, which 
is generally a ix>§i (or small adze), made out of an 
European chisel, a piece of an old saw, or even a 
AMeaed nail, to which a VnoidiyBSft «S&x»i. They 
^mly ornament thoae cbaiha vtVajcSq. «c^ c/onss^^^^ 



OF THB TONGA PEDPLS. 195 

good on account of their fonn, ot the mialtty of 
the wood, or those which have done mudi execu- 
tion ; to the latter it used to be the custom to 
give a proper name. Those that make these or- 
naments are chiefly canoe-builders. 

TooFOONGA TA^BOOy Superintendents of fune- 
ral rites. These, as the name indicates, have the 
regulation of every thing regarding burials of prin- 
cipal chiefs. They are generally matabooles, and 
are always consulted respecting the preparations 
and forms of ceremony necessary on such occa- 
sions, and which are handed down by them from 
iiEU;her to son. 

TooFOONGA TA MA^ccA, or makers of stone 
vaults for the burial of chiefe. The general form 
of these vaults has been already described, (vol. I. 
p. 135.) The stones used for this purpose are 
about a foot in thickness, and are cut of the requi- 
site dimenmons, out of the stratum found on the 
beaches of some of the islands. 

JiA cobe'nga, net-making. This art is per- 
formed exactly in the same way as with us ; the 
thread is made of the inner bark of a tree, which 
they call olongd ; large nets, however, are made 
of plait, framed from the husk of the cocoa-nut. 

TooFOONGA totVica, fishermen* All those 
who follow this profession are sailors ; their mode 
of catching fish is chiefly with the net, though 
they sometimes make use of the line and hook. 

Lamoa vaxle, house-building. Eveiy man 
knows how to build a house, but Uiose whose bu- 
siness it is have chiefly to erect large houses on 
malaisy consecrated hovues, and dwellings for 
chiefs. The general fonik qH ^^\s 'Wqs^ks^ Nb^ ^^ 
long, mtlier approaclnn^ U> ttn on^> ^v^ v«^ 'soSe. 



198 ARTS AKD MANUFACTURES 

in cookery be one proof of the civilization of a 
people, the natives of the South Seas have some- 
thing to hoast of in this respect ; at least the peo- 
ple of the Tonga Islands can invite you to par- 
take of at least thirty or forty different kinds of 
disheSf consisting in or prepared from one or more 
of the following articles, viz« pork, turtle, fowls of 
different kinds, fish, yams, bread-fruit, plantains, 
bananas, cocoa-nuts, talo, and cabe (esculent roots), 
and mahod, a preparation from a root of the same 
name. We shall give a short account of the prin- 
cipal preparations of food. 

Baked porh The animal is first stunned by a 
blow with a stick, and then killed by repeated blows 
on both sides of the neck. It is then rubbed over 
with the juicy substance of the banana tree, after 
which it is thrown for a few minutes on the fire, 
and, when warm, scraped with mnsde shells or 
knives, and then washed. It is next lud on its 
back, when the cook cuts open the throat, and, draw- 
ing forth the wind-pipe and gullet, passes a skewer 
behind them, and ties a string tight round the latter, 
afterwards to be divided. He then cuts a circu- 
lar piece from the belly, from four to six inches 
diameter, and draws forth the entrails, * separat- 
ing the attachments, either by force or by the use 
of bamboo. The diaphragm is then divided, and 
the gullet, windpipe, contents of the chest, sto- 
mach and liver, are all drawn away together along 
with the bowels. From these the liver is sepa- 

* He has already made a circular incision round the 
anuSf and tied the rectum to secure the contents, lest the 
interior of the abdomen shouVd get dA.TV>j, vAvvOcv S\\vi^ «tt 
very careful to avoid, as they do tvoV. o^ccm^^ ^^^ >^v^ 
inside, which they «ay would lapoW \t. 



OF THB TONGA PEOFLB. 199 

ated to be baked with the hog ; the ramainder is 
cashed and cooked over hot embers, to be tshared 
nt and eaten in the meanwhile. The whole in- 
ide of the hog is now filled up with hot Btones^ 
ach wrapped up in bread-fruit leaves, and all the 
pertures of the body are closed up quickly, also 
rith leaves. It is then laid with the belly down- 
wards, in a hole in the ground, lined with hot 
tones, a fire having been previously made there 
)r that purpose, but prevented, however, from 
ouching them, by smsdl branches of the bread- 
niit tree. A few other branches are now laid 
crosB the back of the pig, and plenty of banana 
eaves strewed, or rather heaped over the whole, 
;pon which, again, a mound of earth is raised, so 
bat no steam apparently escapes. The liver is 
ut by the side of the pig, and sometimes yams. 
(y these means, a good-sized pig may be very 
rell cooked in half an hour. A large hog is ge- 
crally about half done in this way, then taken up, 
ut to pieces, and each piece being wrapped up 
cparately in leaves, is cooked again in like man- 
er. Yams, fowls, bread-fruit, and every thing 
[iat is baked, is dressed after this manner, the 
irger yams being cut into smaller pieces. They 
crform the process of boiling in earthen pots, of 
he manufacture of the Fiji Islands, or in iron 
essels procured 'from ships, or in banana leaves; 
iicy also occasionally roast food upon hot embers. 
Ils to their made dishes, the following is a list of 
lie principal. 

Vy-hoo ; fish-soup, made with a liquid prepar- 
tion of cocoa-nut and water. 

Vy^ooji ; boiled yamS) ixuiabe^Si '^^ Nr\^ ^ai^^"^- 
ut and water. 



200 ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 

Vy-fi6pa ; ripe bananas cat in slices, and boiled 
with cocoa-nut and water. 

Vy-chi ; a sort of jelly made of nao, and tbe 
juice of the chi root. 

Vy-vi; a sort of apple grated, mixed with wa- 
ter, and strained. 

Boboi ; a preparation of ma and cAt, forming a 
stronger jelly, but similar to vychu 

jBoij similar to the above, but not jellied. 

Fycaky IMo ix^otoo ; bread-fruit beaten up and 
cut into small pieces. It is eaten with a prepara- 
tion of cocoa-nut, and the juice either of the chi 
or sugar-cane. It very much resembles, in appear- 
ance and taste, batter pudding, with melted butter 
and sugar. 

Fycaky 1616 m6Ua ; same as the above, eaten 
with the expressed juice of the cocoa-nut. 

Lo<hlol6i; talo leaves heated or stewed with 
the expressed juice of the cocoa-nut. 

Loo-4iff€nioo ; talo leaves heated with grated 
cocoa-nut fermented. 

Loo alo he booaca ; talo leaves heated with a 
fat piece of pork, kept till it is high. 

Loo tahi; talo leaves heated with a small 
quantity of sea- water. 

Ma me ; fermented bread-fruit. 

Ma hopa ; fermente<l bananas. 

Ma natoo; fermented bananas, well kneaded 
and baked. 

Ma loloi ; fermented bananas, stewed vnth ex- 
pressed juice of the cocoa-nut. 
lA)l6ifMc ; dried cat-fish, stewed with the cx- 
pressed juice of the cocoa-uut. 
J^^oloi; a baked puddings wv«lv\g c^^ Ynahfta \wiX, 
«»</ tho expressed juice of t\\e coc.o\v-w\x\.. 



OV THE TONGA FEOPLK. 201 

Tawffootoo ; a baked cake made of mahod root, 
Goco^-nut, and the expressed juice of tlie nat. 

Fucca-lili ; the powder of mahod root sprinkled 
in hot water till it becomes a semi-jellied mass. 

Ve-hdloi a preparation of young cocoa-nuts, 
with their milk stewed together. 

Awti/ ; the inside of young cocoa-nuts, and the 
juice of the chi root mixed with the milk. 

Thus far with those arts that are strictly pro- 
fessional, and are practised by men. There are 
some oilers not professional, which arc also exer- 
cised by men, viz. surgical opemtions, erecting 
fortifications, rope-making, and making bows and 
arrows, clubs and spears. The first will be found 
in the Appendix to this volume, No. II. and for 
the second, see vol. I. p. 94. 

Rope-making. There are two kinds of rope, 
one made of the husk of the cocoa-nut, which is 
the superior sort, and the other of the inner bark 
oftheybtr. AlUiough these ropes are made «i- 
tirely by hand, yet even those of considerable cir- 
cumference are laid with the greatest regularity. 
They are very elastic, and the strength of them is 
universally known. The husk of the cocoa-nut is 
first made into plait, which is then twisted into 
strands, and of these the rope is made. The bark 
of the^^nr is made at once into strands. 

Bows AND ARROWS. The bows are gene- 
rally made of the wood of the mangrove, though 
some few of l^e casuarina wood. The string is 
made of the inner bark of a tree they call olcmgd^ 
and is exceedingly strong. The aiTows are made 
of reed, headed wiUi casuarina wood. Some of 
these heads have thi'ee or four rows of barbs^ aad^ 

VOL, II, B. 



209 ARTS AKB MAKUFAOTURES 

to make them more formidable, are tipped with 
the bone of the stmgray. (See voL I. p. 233.) 

Clubs and spears. Though the making of 
these be not a distinct profession, they are most 
commonly manufactured by the toc^oongafo vaca, 
as being expert in the use of the toffu Their clubs 
are of various shapes; but specimens of both 
may be seen in our museums. 

The next arts to be spoken of are those prac- 
tised by females, not so much as a task or labour, 
but as being their proper occupation. 

Fabrication of gnatoo. This substance is 
somewhat similar to cotton, but not woven, being 
rather of the texture of paper. It is prepared from 
the inner bark of the Chinese paper mulberry tree. 

A circular incision being made round the tree 
near the loot with a shell, deep enough to pene- 
trate the bark, the tree is broken off at that part, 
which its slendemess readily admits of. "When a 
number of ihem are thus laid on the ground, they 
are left in the sun a couple of days to become 
partially dry, so that the inner and outer bark may 
be stripped off together, without danger of leaving 
any of the fibres behind. The bark is then soaked 
in water for a day and night, and scraped carefully 
with shells, for the purpose of removing the outer 
bark, or epidermis, which is thrown away. The 
inner bark is then rolled up lengthwise, and soaked 
in water for another day ; it now swells, becomes 
tougher, and more capable of being beaten out 
into a firm texture. Being thus fiEir prepared, the 
operation of tootoo^ or beating, commences. This 
part of the work is perfoimeAAiy m^«oa ^1 ^\ss^- 
^ a foot long, and two \nclaea iVicNs^, m^^^rav 
^- /mrallelopipedon, two o^V^^iX^ ^^^'^ ^^' 



OV THS TONGA FE0PLS, 203 

grooved longitudinally to the depth and hreadth 
of about a line, with intervals of a quarter of an 
inch. The bark, which is from two to five feet 
long, and one to three inches broad, is then laid 
upon a beam of wood about six feet long, and 
nine inches in breadth and thickness, which is 
supported about an inch from the ground by 
pie6es of wood at each end, so as to allow of a 
certain degree of vibration. Two or three wo- 
men generally sit at the same beam; each places 
her bark transversely upon the beam imme- 
diately before her, and while she beats with 
her right hand, with her Jjeft she moves it slowly 
to and fro, so that every part becomes beaten 
alike ; the grooved side of the mallet is chiefly 
used first, and the smooth side afterwards. They 
generally beat alternately. Early in the morning, 
when the air is calm and still, the beating of gnatoo 
at all the plantations about has a very pleasing ef- 
fect ; some sounds being near at hand, and odiers 
almost lost by the, distance ; some a little more 
acute, others more grave, and all with remarkable 
regularity, produce a musical variety that is Very 
agreeable, and not a little heightened by the sing- 
ing of the birds, and tlie cheerful influence of the 
scene. When one hand is fatigued, the mallet is 
dexterously transferred to the other, without occa- 
sioning the smallest sensible delay. In the course of 
about half an hour it is brought to a sufflcient degree 
of thinness, being so much spread laterally as to be 
now nearly square when unfolded ; for it must be 
observed, that they double it several times during 
the process, by which means it spreads more equal- 
ly, and is prevented from br^Jdn^. TW V«sJ«- 
thus £nr prepared is caWeA febagi^ «xAS& xsiSRS^^^Sf^ 



204 ARTS AKD MAMU)rACTURB6 

afdde till they have a sufficient quantity to eniUe 
them to go on at a future timo with the second 
part of the operation, which is called cocanga^ ot 
printing with coca. When this is to he done, a 
numher employ themselves in gathering the ber- 
ries of the tocy the pulp of which serves for paste ; 
hut the mucilaginous substance of the mahod root 
is sometimes substituted for it ; at the same time 
others are busy scraping off the soft bark of the 
coca tree and the tooiriooi tree, either of which 
when wrung out, without water, yields a reddish 
brown juice, to be used as a die. The cobeckif 
or stamp is formed of the dried leaves of the 
paoongo sewed together so as to be of a sufficieiit 
size, and afterwards embroidered, acconting to va- 
rious devices, with the wiry fibre of the oocoa^nufc 
husk ; ^ they are generally about two feet long, 
and a foot and a half broad. They are tied on to 
the convex side of half cylinders of wood, usually 
about six or eight feet long, to admit two or 
three similar <^rations to go on at the same 
time. The stamp being thus fixed, \rith the em- 
broidered side uppermost, a piece of the pre- 
pai*ed bark f is laid on it, and nneared over with 
a folded piece of gruUoo dipped in one of the 
reddish brovm liquids before mentioned, so 
that the whole surface of the prepared bark be- 
comes stained, but particularly those parts raised 
byjthe design in the stamp. Another piece of 
griatoo is now laid on it, but not quite so broad, 
which adheres by virtue of the mucilaginous qua- 

* Making these cobechis is another eTa^loymcnt of th« 
women, and mostly women of winV. 

The edges of the beaten bwVL, yjVv\c\v \i^ ^gsoMnSes 
tty, and ragged, are cut off ^tw^t. 




OF T&k TONGA peoplk; 205 

lity in the die, and this, in like manner, ib smear- 
ed over ; then a third in the same way ; and the 
substance is now three layers in thickness. Others 
are then added to increase it in length and breadth, 
by pasting the edges of these over the first, but 
not so as there sliall be in any place more than 
three folds, which is easily managed, as the mar- 
gin of one layer falls short of the mar^ of the 
one under it. During the whole process, each 
layer is stamped separately, so that the pattern 
may be said to exist in the very substance of the 
gnatoo ; and when one portion is thus printed to 
the size of the cchechiy the material being moved 
farther on, the next portion, either in length or 
breadth, becomes stamped, the pattern beginning 
close to where the other ended. Thus they go 
on printing and enlai^ing it to about six feet in 
breadth, and generally about forty or fifty yards in 
length. It is then carefdlly folded up and baked 
under ground, which causes the die to become 
somewhat darker, and more firmly fixed in the 
fibre ; besides which, it deprives it of a peculiar 
smoky smell wliich belongs to the coca. When it 
has been thus exposed to lieat for a few hours, it 
is spread out on a grass-plat, or on the sand of the 
sea-shore, and the finishing operation of toogi hea 
commences, or staining it in certain places with 
the juice of the Aeo, which constitutes a brilliant 
red varnish. This is done in straight lines along 
those places where the edges of the printed por- 
'.ions join each other, and serves to conceal the 
ittle irregularities there ; also in sundry other 
<lace8, in the form of round spots about an inch 
nd a quarter in diameter. \^x >)»& ^^ cjwsXo^ 

\\1 



206 ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 

19 expoBod one nig^t to the dew, and the next 
being dried in the son, it is padced np in bales> _ 
be used when reqaired. When gnaJtoo is not pri.-^^^ 
cd or stained, it is called iapau They make cOEw 
an inferior kind of gnatoo of the baric of yotji^ 
bread-frait trees, which liowever is coane, and 
seldom worn, but is chiefly used for varions pniu 
poses at funerals. The whole of these operationflT 
are performed by women. 

In respect to mat and basket-making, they have 
mats of varions kinds, made of strips of leaves or 
bark selected, dried, and otherwise prepared ; aH 
of which, except one or two of a coarser kind, are 
fiabricated by women. The following are tlie 
names and qualities of them. 

Chqfi gnafi^ mats to wear, of a finer quality, 
made of the leaves of ^ fa or paaongo^ that 
have been transplanted, in order to give them a 
finer and softer textm-e. 

Gky stronger mats made of the bark of th^fouf 
or olongiiy worn chiefly by people in canoes to 
keep out the wet, as the water does not damage 
them ; they appear .as if they were made of horse- 
hair. Labillardiere mentions that he saw a wo- 
man of lank with a sort of mat made of the white 
hair of a horse's tail — he supposed from some 
horses that Cook had left there. 

FaUoy mats to sleep on, made of the leaves of 
the ptwongo* These are double, and are of vari- 
oos sizes, from six feet by three, to seventy or 
eighty feet by six. 

Zo, mats for sails, made of the leaves of die^ / 
tfaey are very strong and light. 
Tha^MWy mats for floonngVifima«&) madfi of Ike 
young ieavcs of the cocoorUu\ Uee« 



OF tRK TONGA PSOP1& £07 

Tatt6w, a sort of matting, plaited in a very or- 
namental way, made of yomig cocoa-nut leaves : 
used to screen the sides of houses from the weather. 
CcUOf baskets ; these are of various construc- 
tions ; sometimes of a sort of matting made with 
the leaves of the fa, pajofmgOy Jo cuxnio^ &c. ; at 
other times of the fibrous root of the cocoa-nut 
tree interwoven with plait made of the husk of 
the nut, and have rather the appearance of wicker- 
work : the latter are sometimes variously stained 
and ornamented with beads or shells worked in. 
The larger and coarser baskets are generally made 
by men, to hold axes and other tools in ; also the 
baskets used to hold victuals, made of the leaves 
of the cocoa-nut tree, are generally made by men. 

JBawldf mats for thatching houses ; either made 
by men or women : frequently by the former. 

Most of these mats, baskets, &c are *made by 
women of some rank as an amusing as well as 
profitable occupation, exchanging them afterwards 
for other things; (See p« 97 of this volume.) 
Makii^ of combs, the t^th of which consists of 
the mid-rib of the cocoa-nut leaf, is also an em- 
ployment of women of rank. Making thread Is 
an occupation of females of the lower order : it is 
peiformed by twisting the separate parts of the 
thread, in the act of rolling them with the palm of 
the hand along the thigh, and by a return of the 
hand, twisting them together the contrary way. 
The material of the thread is the prepared bark 
of the ohmgci. Needles are generally made by 
carpenters out of human tibigh-bones, which are 
procured from their enemies slain in battle : the 
only use they have for them m tR) xoftSsa^ ^S8&&« 



203 GENERAL HABITS 



CHAPTER IX, 

Under the Ijcad of lloligiou, wc have given a 
cursory view of tlie general habits of Tooitonga, 
Vcachi, and the Priests ; wo shall now sot forth, 
in a similar manner, those of the rest of society, 
as they regard chiefe, matabooles, mooas, tooas, 
women and children. 

Respecting the general habits of chiefs, mata- 
booles, and mooas ; the higher chieh seldom if 
ever associate freely together, unless at the morn- 
ing cava parties, and those meetings are to bo 
considered, in a great measure, as visits of custom 
and form. The matabooles and mooas freely as- 
sociate with the chiefis to whom they belong., They 
are their necessary attendants at cava parties, Stc^ 
and form the bulk of their fighting men and fol- 
lowers. They not only associate freely with ono 
(mother, but also with the followers of other high 
chiefs, and even with those high chiefs themselves, 
without any reserve, excepting the requisite cere- 
monies of respect which occasion may require. 
Every high "or governing chief has his cow-nofoy 
(those who settle or dwell with him), or, as they 
are sometinics called, coiv-fnea, (adherents), who 
consist of inferior chiefs and matabooles. Eai^h of 
thi>$e inferior chiefs has \\\a cow-tamjfita, w VA^ 



OF THB TONGA PBOHA 209 

of fighting men, consisting chiefly of mooas : the 
matdbooles have no ooW'tangaUa* The retinue, 
or cow-nqfby of a great chief, therefore, consists of 
inferior chiefs (with their couytangcUas) and mn- 
tabooles ; and the retinae or eow-tangata of an in- 
ferior chief consists of mooas, and perhaps, also, 
a few tooas, who have heen fonnd brave fellows. 
A great number of these cow-nofoy perhaps about 
eighty or ninety, actually dwell in and near the su- 
perior chief s fencing (each fencing having many 
houses), whilst there are many others who sleep 
and pass a great portion of their time at their 
own plantations; for not only inferior chie&, 
but also matabooles and mooas, have plantations 
of their own. The matabooles, however, except- 
ing periiaps two or three inspectors of the chief s 
plantations, dwell always in or near his fencing, as 
their presence is so often required by him for the 
regulation of difierent matters. With respect to 
the inferior cluefs, tiiey generally live at thdr plan- 
tations ; but the greater part^ or at least about 
half of the mooas, dwell in the neighbourhood of 
the great chief to whom they belong. We shall 
now explain how these different individuals come 
to attach themselves to a particular chief. We 
will suppose that the present king or any other 
great chief has a sonjdx^or seven years of age, his 
playmates are the sons of the inferior chiefs, mata- 
booles, and mooas of his father's establishment, 
who freely associate with him, accompany him 
upon excursions, and imitate, in many respects, 
the habits of their parents. Ho does not, how- 
ever, designedly play the chief, and conduct him- 
self with arrogance towards them. Tlicy know his 
superior rank without bc\&^ texD^<^d^ ^^ '^n ^^^^ 



210 GENEHAL HABITS 

altbongh they wrestle and box, and play all ift^t2|« 
ner of games with him, they never fail before thre^ 
eat to perform the ceremony of moe-mSey to tjike 
off the taboo which his superior rank has imposed , 
upon his inferior associates. In some of his codm- 
tiy excnrsions, he perhaps meets with two or threes 
of the sons of tooM^ who by their strength and^ 
agility in wrestling, or bravery in boxing, or som^ 
other ostensible quality, recommend themselves to 
his notice, and therefore become also his compa* 
nions. Thus they grow up in years together ; and 
as the young chief approaches towards manhood, 
he does not exact, but he receives, with more or 
less affiibility, the respect and attention which his 
inferior assodates readily pay him, and who now 
may be termed his cow-tanfffxtOy L e. associates, 
siq>porterB, and defenders of his cause. By and 
by the old chief dies, and the young one succeeds 
to his authority, and all the matabooles of hia 
father become his matabooles, and the inferior 
chiefs and mooas also enter his service in addition 
to those he had before ; and though several of them 
upon this change may choose to retire to their plan- 
tations, they are, nevertheless, in his service when- 
ever he may call upon them. 

The natives of Fiji, Hamoa, and the Sandwich 
Islands, who were resident at Tonga, used to say 
that it was not a good practice of the people of 
the latter place to let their women lead such easy 
lives ; the men, they said, had enough to do in 
matters of war, &c., and the women ought, there- 
fore, to be made to work hard and till the ground. 
No, say the Tonga men, it is not giuile fafine 
("consistent with the feminine character) to let 
them do bard work ; wonneea oia^v^ wX^ \ci du 



V 



OF THE TOKO A PEOPLE. 211 

what is feminine. Who loves a masciiHiie wo- 
man ? besides, men are stronger, and, therefore^ it 
is but proper that they should do the hard labour. 
It seems to be a peculiar trait in the character of 
the Tonga people, when compared witli that of 
the other natives of the South Seas, * and with 
savage' nations in general, that they do not consign 
the heaviest cares and burdens of Ufe to the charge 
of the weaker sex; but, from the most generous 
motives, take upon themselves all those laborious 
or disagreeable tasks which they think inconsistent 
with the ^weakness and delicacy of the softer sex. 
Thus the women of Tonga, knowing how little 
their own sex in other islands are respected by the 
men, and how much better they themselves are 
treated by their countrymen, and feeling at the 
same time, from this and other causes, a patriotic 
sentiment, joined to their natural reserve, seldom 
associate with foreigners. Thus, when the Port 
au Prince arrived at the Sandwich Islands, the 
ship was crowded with women ready to barter 
their personal flavours for any trinkets they could 
obtain ; but how different ' at Lefooga ! where 
only one woman came on board, and she was 
one of the lower order, who was in a manner 
obliged to come by order of a native, to whom 
she belonged as a prisoner of war, and who 
had been requested by one of the officers of the 
ship to send a female on board. Captain Cook, 

* If there is any ezception to this in the South Seas, it 
is with the natives of Otaheite ; but there neither men nor 
women work hard. Tho natives of the latter place ap- 
pear altogether a soft effeminate race, strongly addicted to 
vohiptuous habits ; whilst in Tonga tiic men are of a more 
noble and manly character, and ^^bfi'^cmosec^ ^^go^ss?^^ 
morQ reserved. 



819 GENERAL HABITS 

alfo, Strongly notices the reserFO and modesty ^ 
the females of these islands ; and the observ^^ioo^ 
of this accurate nanntor will serve to corrobonsi^ 
what we have been stating. We have already np ^ 
ticed the humane character of the Tonga fema|e% 
and in addition we beg to observe, that iheir h<^^ 
havioar as daughters, wives, and mothers, is ver^ 
hr from being unworthy of imitation. Childrer^ 
consequently, are taken the utmost care of; they 
are never neglected, either in respect of personal 
cleanliness or diet. As they grow older, tlie boys 
ara made to exerdse themselves Iq athletic sports; 
the girls are made occasionally to atteinl to the ao- 
qubrement of suitable arts and manufactures, and 
of a number of little onamental accomplishments^ 
winch tend to render them agraeaUa companions, 
and proper objects of esteem* They ara taught 
to plait various pretty and fancifol devices in 
flowers, &c which they present to their fathen^ 
brothers, and superior diiefs, denoting respect ior 
those who fill higher circles than themselves. There 
is still one observation to be made with respect to 
females, and which is not of small importance^ 
since it tends to prove that the women fte by no 
means slaves to ihe men. It is, that the fenaale 
chiefii are aUowe<l to imitate the authority of the 
men, by having their cow-fafiney as the male chiels 
have their cfmhitmgaJtxu Their cow-fi^'ne consists 
of the wives and daughters of inferior chiefs and 
matabooles ; and it may be easily conceived that 
this tends to siq>port their rank and independence. 
The subject we are now treating of naturally 
leads us to speak of the domestic habits of the 
pet^ki. These may be consAdered in two povits 
of view ; first, in their more {«au&»x> Xcw^, wui^Qs^- 



OF THB TOVGA FBOFLK. SIS 

ib ear vod state ; and, seoondly, on tlie gmd and 
eztensiva scale presented to foreignen by my of 
showing themselTes off to best adyantage. Bok as 
to the fint, erery page of our work seires as an 
Ofantimtion; and with regard to the second, h 
would be difficult to fnrnish a more faithfol ac- 
eonnt than has already been given in Cook's Voy'> 
ages, which we regret is too long for quotation ; 
bat to which we mge the reader to refer, both ont 
of respest to its accoracy, and because it inTolves 
a most interesdng porticm of lime — that in whidi 
the natives had come to the resohition of assassi- 
nating Captain Co<^ and his cranpanians. * 

* In deicribiiig 'the dexterity of the Tongani in their 
vmiling and bratng mttriiw, Gkptun Cook obaerres, 
" Some of our people ventured to contend with them in 
both exerdies, hot were always worBted, except in a few 
im ti ncea , where it iqipeared that the fear they were in of 
oAmding nt co nt r ih uted mora to the Tictory than the wa.- 
periority of the panon they engiwed. *' The rtmuk. is a 
tolerable jmt one. The natives ttienwpWes mentioned the 
circumstance to Mr Mariner, stating that they allowed the 
Papaiangies to get the -rictory sometimes, because they 
did not like to beat the poor fellows so much. There was 
probably, at the same time, a little apprehension of ofiend- 
Ing their visitors ; for it is certain, that when a man is en- 
gaged singly with a chief much superior to him, he some- 
times allows himself to be beaten, or rather yields out of 
iMpect to his opponent ; and the sign by which he shows 
his disposition to do so is a sudden toss rf the head on one 
■de^ upon which his antagonist immediately retires to his 
aeat. There is aomething admirable in the perfect good 
humour and fnbearance of temper which is always mani- 
fested oB these 'MTstiTrr, snfiBdlently so to astonish natives 
of £ttropean co nu tr i cs : for on occasions when there is a 
genend combat, (as related p. 176), even Tooitonga some- 
times gets miserably handled by one of the lowest fellows 
in the island ; bat nevertfaeleBs he retires from the games 
without tha leart ininuBil spnt, t^Si^uin^ ^^sseuK^^wv^ 

VOL. II. S 



^14 GENERAL HABITS 

In the account given by Coc^ there is only 
mention made of two principal dances, viz. tneS law 
folia, and meS loo buggi ; but there are two others 
of some note, called hea and o6la. The fint is 
one of the most anrient dances of Tonga, and is 
practised only by chiefe and superior mataboolc^ ; 
and is a dance very diiiicalt to execute, not only 
on account of the accompanying gesture, bat 
also of the singing. The chorus is composed 
of ten or twelve of the chiefs or principal mata- 
booles, in the middle of whom sits one who beats 
time upon a loose flat piece of hardwood, about 
three feet long, and an incii and a half square, 
fastened only at one end upon another similar 
piece. This is struck by two small sticks, one in 
each hand, and produces a rattling sound. The 
difficulty of keeping the time is owing to the ex- 
trome velocity with which they beat, particularly 
towards the latter end. The dancers, who are 
all men, in the meanwhile perform their evolutions 
round the chorus, exhibiting a vast variety of very 
graceful movements with the arms and head, ac- 
companied by expressions of countenance suitable 
to the character of ^ dance, which is that (ab- 
stractedly) to a manly and noble spirit, consistent 
with the mind and habits of a superior person, 
and therefore it is deemed essential that every 
chief and mataboole should learn it. As among 
the ancient Greeks it was thought inconsistent 
with the character of a gentleman not to know 
how to strike the lyre, so, among the Tonga peo- 
ple, it would be considered a mark of great igno- 

iu8 eyes Wacky bis moudi and nose dreadfully 8fvrclled» 
mnd, it may happen, with bus aonoa VMCoauEn \ ^\ dooA by « 
Auu over whom he has the power <)( He wodi i^ansi^ 



of T»B rOltOA FEiyPLS. 215 

ranee to be unacGomplislied in the gnusefbl, maDly, 
and expressive movements of this dance. - 

' The night dance called oola is a very andent 
one in Tonga, though borrowed no doubt originally 
from the people of Hamoa. This dance was for- 
merly only adopted in the Tonga Islands among the 
lower orders of people ; but of late, some Ton- 
ga dakh on a visit to Hamoa were so pleased 
with Uie superior gracefulness of the o6lch which 
was danced there, that they afterwards brought 
it into fiashion among the higher classes in Tonga, 
with many improvements and - gracefid embel- 
lishments borrowed from the former place ; since 
which, the oola of Tonga is grown quite out of 
use, even among the lower orders, though it was 
once danced in Mr Mariner's time, by <Mtler of the 
present king, on purpose to contrast it with the 
o6ia of Hamoa. It was a very awkward exhibi- 
tion in comparison with the Hamoa refinements, 
and probably will never be introduced again. 
The night-dance which Captain Cook saw (the 
mee low^foUa) is perhaps tlie only one which can 
be considered of Tonga invention, and is the only 
one accompanied throughout with Tonga songs : 
the rest btilong to Hamoa and Nulia, and are ac- 
companied chiefly with Hamoa songs ; for although 
the dance called hea is considered a very ancient 
Tonga one, tliere is not much doubt of its being 
of Hamoa extraction, and accordingly most of its 
songs are in that language. The mee too buggi is 
a Nuha* dance, but the songs accompanying it 
are Hamoa. 

♦ The islanch of Nuha lie between Hamoa and Vavaoo, 
and are known to navigators by the iv«xwc» ^jlftroiXn? ^'V^^ 
and, and Cocas Island. 



216 PUBLIC FESTIVALS 

itfft' hwfoUa, L e. a danoe with the anna out- 
spread : a D^t-danoe : it is also called bo 

Mee too huggi^ L e. a dance stsnding up 
paddles : a day-dance. 

Hea ; sometimes a day-dance, baft mostly a 
night-dance. 

Oda ; a night-dance. 

These public exhibitioiis of dances naftually had 
OS to speak of their mnaic and poetry. With regard 
to their musical instmrnents, they bate already been 
Mentioned^ except {befar^o-fatiffOf which is a sort 
of flute blown by the nose : it is always filled by the 
r^^ nostril, the left being closed with ihe thumb 
of the left hand. There are genendly five holes for 
the fingefs, and one underneath for the thumb ; 
though some have six holes for the fingera, and others 
' only four. Ihe sound of them is soft and grave : 
they are only used as an accompaniment to one spe- 
cies of song called oobe* At all concerts wfaeie 
there is no dancing, Uie singers sit daring the whole 
time. The following are the different kinds of song. 

Low/6Ua ; this is only used with the dance so 
called, and is in the Tonga language. 

Live ; of a similar dianicter with the abore 
sung without dancing, but accompanied with mo- 
tions of the hands ; idso in the Tonga language. 

ZMngi mSe too huggi ; always used witib the 
dance so called : in the Hamoa language. 

Hea ; only used with the dance thus named : 
sometimes Tonga, but mostly Hamoa. 

Hiva; similar to the above, but sung with- 
out dancing: they call European singing hitHMy 
because probably the hiva is very seldom ao- 
f^mpanied either with music or clappiqg of the 
'Aflyods: always in the Tonga VK^gaa^* 



OF TBK TONGA PlSOVLE. 217 

f Ookiy singing aecomp&nie<i by tho dance so 
calleil. To this most of the annexed speeimcns 
belong — generally in the Hamoa langnagc. 

Fucca NyJui, or the Nuba fashion of sin^ng. 
This is never accompanied with dancing, and is 
always sung in tlie Tonga language. Most of thdr 
songs are descriptive of scenery, but some of these 
are descriptive of past events, or of places which 
are out of their reach, sncb as Bolotoo and Papa" 
ioHffim The accounts they give of the latter place 
are ludicrous enough. The poet describes, among 
other things, the animals belonging to the country, 
stating that in the fields there are large pigs with 
horns, that eat grass ; and, at the fnooOy there are 
houses that are pulled along by enormous birds. 
The women are described to be so covered with 
dress, that a native of Tonga, coming into a house, 
takes a lady for a bundle of Papcdangi gnaioo (li- 
nen, &C.), and accordingly places it across his 
shoulder to carry it away, when, to his great a- 
mazement, the bundle jumps down and runs off. 
One of these songs describes the principal events 
that happened during Captain Cook s visit, and 
which, excepting a little exaggeration, is tolerably 
correct. Another describes tbe visit of Admiral 
d'Entrecasteaux. Another the revolution of Ton- 
ga, and the famous battle that was there fought, 
&C. The song in the first volume, p. 244, belongs 
to this class of musical composition. 

Oobe, This kind of singing is always accom- 
panied with X^ f6ngO'fangOy (or nose-flute). The 
subjects of the song are much the same as those 
last described, but tlie style of music is different, 
being more monotonous and ^ve. 

Tow ^hy is never tuccow^vcA»\ V4>J^'\sfi^2r5ssBRsv- 



21S SONOfl AHD MUlIC 

tal music. They are moetiy short Miig% raa^ m 
canoes when paddling, the strokes of the pad«2lb 
being coincident with the cadence of the tmae. 
They are very frequently song on leaving Vavaoo, 
whilst paddlmg out of the mlet. It may not be 
nnacceptable to give the following as an example. 
It is a yery nsnal one, and expresses r^ret at Imt- 
ing Vavaoo and its beantifnl prospects, fiunons for 
the manu&ctnre of superior toopi hea (gnatoo stain- 
ed with the hea)y to go to the Islands of Toofooa 
and Kao, noted for making coarse mats. 

Oi&ooe ! go6a m6w \&oo feldw^ 

Ca to6goo M6oonga-UUk, b^ mo Tal6w ! 

Go6a to Ii6li ger ii6fo ; oob&i t^mie iJk^t f 

Ck lo^oo YvrioOf mA^ in6coo Wo, 

liooo o'ne, ni6e Vioo-ies, 

MbS H&na-Tj' gi M&ocap6p% 

lttfCaI6co, mo ilnga myile, 

A'Da a To6taw-t, Ma Mofo6e,^ 

Iky* t6oo to6 gi be hifo&nga, 

Jio hifo gi he fel6w taf&nga. 

To6goo he toogi-h^ a H4foolooh6w 

Oer Tila he gn&fi-gD&fi a Tofo6a mo Klo. 

Alas! we are entoring apoo our Toyags 

By leaving M6ooDga-14fa and Tal6w ! 

Anxious am I to stay ; who can wish to go ? 

Departing fhxn VaTaoo and her neighbouring isles, 

And IAeSo~6a^ and V&oo-&ca, 

The road of springs near Maccap&pa, 

Mattaloco and the myrtle plain. 

The cave of Tootaw-i, the beach of MofooS,— 

No longer can I stand upon high places, * 

And look downwards on the fleet t/f small canoes* 

We must lea?e the crimson gnatoo of Hafb61ooli6v 

To wear the ooarM maU of Toofo6a and K^ ! 

• This alludes to the Hapai islands being for the f 
/Mut Bat ; and although Tofo6a and Kio are both ' 
'^faadBfjet tbey \mfit not sudi teecv desctnu i&^bi% 
'■on «e Vkvaoo, 



OF THB TONGA PIOPLS. ^19 

The above is a translatioii as literal as the sense 
^1 allow of this song. It ranst not, howevery be 
Iviken as a specimen of the best. It is giTen be- 
cause it is the only one of this kind that Mr BAiip 
finer is acquainted with. 

Such are the names of their different kinds oi 
songs, some of which are to be considered pieces 
of recitative, particnlariy those according to the 
Nuha mode. Otibers again have a conBidetable 
▼ariety of tone, and approach to the character of 
European music : such, for example, are some of 
those to which we shidl directly give expression 
according to the European system of notation. * 
Those who are sldlled in the composition of songs 
and music often retire for several days to the most 
romantic and retired spots of Vavaoo, to indulge 
their poetic genius, and then return to the mooa 
with several new compositions, which they intro- 
duce at the first opportmuty. The man who it is 
related in the Appendix cut off his own legyf 
was very expert in the composition of humorous 
pieces ; but a man of the name Teng6 was famous 
for the higher order of composition ; he was one 
of the lowest mooas belonging to Hala A'pi A'pi, 
bat ranch esteemed for his abilities. He was 
principal instructor id one of the classes (or bands) 
of singers. 

WiSi regard to the following seven spedmens 
of musical composition, it must be noticed, that 
the first six belong to the kind of dance called 

* They have no dtstiiiction of tenn between rcdtadTe 
and actual singing ; thcv call it all hiva (to nog). Thb 
word happens to mean also the number nine, 

f See Apflpndix, Nb* 11.—^' SureuciA \V>n. ^ \>^ '^''(^ 
ga Islanders. " 



220 SONGS AND MUSIC 

oohif and the ln.st to that called mc'e too ha^fyi. 
In respect of the oola it must bo farther notic^W, 
that it lias two species of music, the one called 
hiva, and the other langu The hiva approaches in 
its nature to recitative, is given without dancing, 
and serves as an introduction or overture to the 
lanffiy which is accompanied with dancing, and 
commences the moment the hiva has ceased. The 
hiva, however, is repeated several times ad Ubi' 
turn; but when the langi is about to commence, 
and the hiva to cease, the latter is generally ended 
with a sort of flourish difficult to describe, but in 
a louder tone of voice, and veiy abiiiptly, as if 
significant of a sudden rush or assault. The first 
specimen of the hiva here given admits of being 
thus ended, the other does not. The lanffi may 
also be repeated ad libitum, and may even be 
changed from one specimen into another. Thus 
much for the oola* The last specimen belongs to 
the dance called Mee too hvggi, which has no hiva 
to introduce it, but commences at once with danc- 
ing ; it may also be repeated ad libitum. What 
is here ^ven is, however, only part of a specimen 
of the mee too buggu The words of all these 
songs are in the Hamoa language, and are not 
understood, except the last, which appears to be a 
mixture of Hamoa and Tonga. Where there are 
no words, they are forgotten. The little piece 
quoted as a Tonga song in the Quarterly Review, 
No. XXXIII. p. 34, we can make no sense of; 
it is perliaps Hamoa, or more probably Nuha lan- 
guage. 



1 . ■ 



220 SONGS AND xMUSiC 

nola^ and tlio last to tliat called mc'e too hui^ffi* 



f»r TUB 



VV/A" f*fi/.A. 
niVA,OK IXTBOUrCTUKY KBC'ir*TI\T. TO THK 




■f-i.fM^ - ••-• m - 



r - Wwr W»A- •■» 




J xw» - ■ S E rS ii »r - I »i«r » 




aa ^ S S r 

AspKriMKW or Tmc LAvni. 



/V A'-•'k•«M•^» <^-<vvv//V»<yA- f*nimtt*/^rt, 



^^g^^^^^^ 




i^ 



^"Cjgf 










A///>. 



%Tiiinii KrKriMK.v c>r tiik i..\\gi. 
•fit~ Vi -*- mIs;; — — vs — -il~^ — ii?iCr "in— 







jr.f»etttk*« . ttf ««• 



\ 



»i .* . t- / 



AroTHTH vrKriUBN or IHK I^XOl. 









JiMlTlfRK 


HPKCIMKN or TUB lll«'.\. 


-^ 


-iW-l J. J fTVTP fri 1 y > E M >r CT CF 1 ■ 


T^=r 




% *LJS^.\ 




TSr 


i 


1 


iTti-'y d.j j 1 i p p^TTr-yTEzpT:.- "■ -i 




•C2k"^ 


1-* ;? 

f f f 


fc=±= 






- 




« oui»« MHr-t aK-r 



Jtit'tk^/l^ml 



\ ■PBriMKir Qlt TIB M&K TOO BI'OOI. 




OF THB TOHOA PSOPLB. tSSl 

The games and-&iniliar pastimes in isw among 
them are numerous ; and we shall new gl?e |i short 
account of each, according to the order in whUk 
they are generally esteemed. 

LiagL This is the first and most important of 
all Tonga games. It is one which every chief 
and mataboole is expected to he well acquainted 
with ; and no others ever attempt to learn it. It 
is played either by two persons, or four. For sim- 
plicity's sake, we will first suppose that two are 
playing. They sit opposite to each other, and 
make signs widi the nands simndtaneously. The 
one whose turn it is to count making one or other 
of three signs, i. e. by a sudden jerk of hb vcm. 
presenting either his open hand, his closed hand, 
or the extended index finger (the others and the 
thumb being clenched) : his opponent at tho same 
moment also makes a sign, and if it happens to be 
the same, it becomes his turn to play, and the first 
gains nothing ; but if ho succeeds in making one 
or other of ^ese three signs, mihoat his opponent 
making the same, five difierent times running, he 
throws down a little stick, of which he holds five 
in his left hand. It is now the other's turn to 
play, and he must endeavour to do the same ; ami 
whichever in this manner disposes of his five sticks 
first, wins the game: but U has antagonist imi- 
tates him before he can make five signs, we will 
suppose ait# the fourth, he has a right to demand 
what were the three other movements on each 
side. If his opponent cannot mention them in the 
order in which tlicy happened, and ^ve a feigned 
i«ason for every individual motion on both sides, 
in the technical language of the ^c^imctt acfiot^ 
ing to a certain invanab\e H'ipl«fii\i\^ ^sfw^>'V«. 



222 S0NO6 AND MDISIC 

may begin his count again* Giving these snp— 
posecl or artificial reasons for eacli move is t)ic% 
most difficult part of the game, because it wil\ 
vary according to the order of each of the move^ 
that preceded it. Wlien four play, they sit as it^ 
our game of whist, but each is the antagonist of 
the one opposite to him ; and when one has got out 
haa five sticks, he assists his partner by taking one 
or two of his sticks, and continuing to play. The 
rapidity with which these motions are made is al- 
most incredible, and no inexperienced eye can 
catch one of them. Tlie eagerness with which 
they play, the entliusiasm which they work them- 
selves into, the readiness with which those that 
are clever give the requisite explanation to every 
combination of signs, always appear very exti'aor- 
dinary to a stranger. 

Farma Kalai : for a description of this sport, 
see vol. I. p. 203. 

Fanna Gooma, or rat-shooting : for a descrip- 
tion of this sport, see vol. I. p. 225. 

Jia Loohe^ catching pigeons with a net. This 
is not a very usual sport at present, though for- 
merly it used to be. The net used for the pur- 
pose is small, with a narrow opening, affixed to 
the end of a rod of about twelve feet in length. 
The sportsman who holds it is concealed in a 
small cabin about five feet high, nearly in form of 
a bee-hive, in which there is a perpendicular slit 
dividing it quite in half, by which he can move 
his rod completely from side to side. There are 
eight or nine of these cabins, in each of which 
perhaps, there is a spoitsmaii with his net. The 
pnJy mode of entrance is by separating tlie two 
/fa/wes of the cabin from each odieT. TVva^ iwciS^ 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE* 2'23 

lucres are usually situated round tlie upper part of 
a raised mount. On the outside of eacli there is 
a trained pigeon tied hy the leg, and near at hand 
stands an attendant with another trained hird, tied 
in like manner to the end of a very long line, 
which is suiFered to fly out to the whole extent of 
the string, the other end heing held by the man. 
The pigeon thus describes a considerable circle in 
tlie air round the mount l)eneath. llie flight of 
this bird, and the constant cooing of those below, 
attract a number of wild pigeons to the neigh- 
bourhood, when the man by checking the string 
calls in his pigeon, which immediately perches 
upon his finger. He tlien conceals himself with 
the other attendants, in a sort of alcove at the top of 
the mount. The wild pigeons now approaching 
the tame ones, are caught in the nets by the dex- 
terous management of the sportsmen. 

Aloy catching Bonito. This is performed by a 
line and hook aflixed to a long bamboo, and is so 
placed that the line flails very near the stem of tho 
canoe, and the hook just touches the surface of 
the water, upon which it skims along as the canoe 
proceeds with velocity. The hook is not barbed, 
and there is no bait attached to it. The moment 
the fish is hooked, the fisherman, by a dexterous 
turn of the rod, gives the line a sweep round, and 
the fish swings into his hand. 

Tol6 throwing up a heavy spear, with intent 
that it shall foil on, and stick into the top of a 
piece of sofk wood fixed on the end of a post. 
There are generally six or eight players on each 
side, and whichever party in tliree throws sticks 
in most spears wins the game. TVvft YsexSsi^&esRpox 
£vc or six feet high, aaA t\v"& «vw^^*K'^ ^'^ "^^ '^^ 



%U SPORTS AMD OAMSS \ 

wood is about nine inches in diameter. The 
thrower may stand at what distance he pleases. 

Fwn&fo^ swimming in the smf. Tfaia bold and 
manly exercise has been well described by Cook* 
as seen by him at the Sandwich Islands ; but the 
natives of Tonga use no board. 

Funffato6ay wrestling; Feidgif dnb-fig^ting ; 
JPo6koOf boxing; Toiiacdw^ a general boxing- 
matdiy have been already described. L^Of or 
pitching beans upon a mat, attempting to strike off 
others that have been pitdied there before. 

Tow pSp6^ or throwing false spears at one 
another, to practise the eye in avoiding them. 

They have a sport the name of whidi is fngol- 
ten; but it consists in carrying alaige stone under 
water ten feet deep, from one post to another, at 
the distance of seventy yards, the party who car- 
ries the stone running along the bottom. The 
difficulty is to pursue a straight course : a person 
may thus run much fieister tibuui another can swim. 
Maiooa : this game is somewhat similar to Uag^ 
but there b no discussion about the moves. It is 
usually practised by the lower orders. 

HkOy throwing up balls, five in number, dis- 
charging them from the left hand, catching them in 
the right, and transferring them to the left again, 
and so on in constant succession, keeping always 
four balls in the air at once. This is usually prac- 
tised by women. They recite verses at the same 
time, each jaculation from the right to the left hand 
being coincident witli the cadence of the verse : 
iw every verse that she finishes without missing 
she counts one. Somet^mfis w^cai ox «aa^ ^^^ 
^heroately. 



OT THS TOKGA VBOFLS. 29^ 

SSbo : tbis is a game similar to cup and balV 
and is also practised by women only. 

The natives very often amuse themselves with 
these games. When any dispute arises in their 
play, the women decide it by spinning a cocoa- 
nul^ and the men by a wrestling match : as to a 
serious quarrel from this source, Mr Mariner never 
witnessed one during the whole time he was there^ 
Conversation with people who have travelled is- 
another great source of amusement to them. They 
are very fond of tales and anecdotes, and there are 
many individuals who are tolerably skilful in in- 
venting these things, which are then mostly of a 
burlesque or humorous tendency, but always givea 
as Cables. The kind of conversation which ap- 
pears to afibrd them most pleasure is, concemi* 
ing the manners and customs of the people of 
Papalangiy as being not only strange and won- 
derful,, but also true ! They employ themselves 
in conversation, not only at any time dusing 
the day, but also at night. If one wakes, and is. 
not disposed to go to sleep again, he wakens 
his ne]ghbour,i to have some talk. * By and by,, 
perhaps,, they are all roused, and join in the con- 
versation. It sometimes happens, that the chief 
has ordered his cooks, in the evening, to bake a 
pig, or some fish, and bring it in hot in the middle 
of the night, with some yams. In tliis case tlie 
torches are again lighted, and they all get up to 
eat their share ; after which they retire to their 
mats, the torches are put out, some go to sleep^ 
and bthers, perhaps, talk till day-light. The first 

* Sometimes two or three,, at other times thirty or for"^ 
ty, may be sleeping in the same house. 

VOX. lU T *1 



226 DOMBSTIC HABITS, &e. 

appearance of day is the time of rising. They* 
then get np, wrap their gnafoos round them, and. 
go out to bathe either in the sea or in a pond ; or» 
if neither is at hand, they have water ponred over* 
them out of cocoa-nut shells. They are rery par- 
ticular in cleaning their mouths, and frequently rub 
their teeth either with cocoa-nut husk or charcoal. 
Hiey dry themselves with a piece atgnaioOf wrap 
their dress loosely round them, return to their 
houses, and oil them^lyes all oYer, generally with 
cocoa-nut oil scented with the aroma of flowers^ 
Oteat chiefs frequently use the same oil scente<l 
with sandal-wood. When bathing, they either 
wear an apron of gnatooy or of the leaves of ^ 
chi tree. When they hare bathed and oiled them-* 
selves, they put on their dress widi all possible 
neatness, lliat of the men consists but of one 
piece of gnatoo^ measuring about eight feet by five 
or six : this is folded round the body in a very 
neat manner. There are two or three modes ; but 
the one which is considered the most elegant, amf 
tlierefore the most usual among chiefs, is repre* 
sented in the frontispiece to vol. I. That part 
which circles round the waist is readily loosened, 
and brought over the head and shoulders, in case 
it should be necessary to go out at night. There 
is a band which goes round the body just abov0 
the hips, made also of gnatooy but which is, for 
the most part, concealed by the folds that go round 
the waist. Tliere is some little difference in the 
way in which females adjust their gnatoos, but the 
chief distinction of their dress is a small mat, * 
whicli they wear round the middle, and is about a 

* It wou]({ be considcrtd higWy inAccbxau^, «v\d con- 
trary to the tahoo, for i'eumles to av\Hiat y»\vV\ouX \ix\* m*X, 



OF TRE tOKOA fSOPLlL 22^ 

foot in breadth. Pi^egnant Women, tad oM wo- 
men, wear their dress in front so as to co¥er the 
breasts. Children are not encambered with dress 
in^en at home till they are aboat two years old, 
When they go oat, they have a piece of gnafy» 
wrapped round them. 

Having bathed, oiled, and di^rased themselves, 
the ehiefs hold cava parties, at which women sel- 
dom attend ; fw as dey are no great cava drink-* 
ers, they generally form a circle of their own, and 
eat a meal. Tliey take cava, however, at the same 
time, in a small quantity ; whilst the men, on die 
contrary, take a large quantity, and most of ^em 
very little food, as they genersdly eat a hearty 
meal about the middle of the day. The morning 
cava party usually lasts from two to ^ve hours, ac- 
conling to tlie pleasure of the diiefs. After cava, 
tiie old men generally retire to their houses to sleep* 
or to amuse themselves ^th forther conversation. 
The younger ones follow the example or wishes 
of their superior chiefe, and make an excursion 
with them to some distant part of the island ; and 
whilst an entertainment is preparing for them at 
the plantation of some friend or relation, they a- 
muse themselves at some game, or, perhaps, m 
inspecting the building of a canoe, or a large 
house, or examining the state of the plantations ; 
or in suling about, if near the sea, or in fishing ; or 
in practising dancing and singing. In these ex- 
cursions the unmarried women generally accom- 
pany tliem. The married women, and those who 
choose to stay at the moooy in the mean time em- 
ploy themselves in one or other of the occupa- 
tions suitable to their sex, ox, \i >&«« \»dc«sA^ 
make an excursion to auoxYkSc v^wq.^>^«^ tss^s^^ 



928 SOMSSTIC HABITS, kd. 

take a trip with them. The very yomig giib 
generally employed in the early part of the day ii 
making wreaths of flowers, which they have heei^ 
ont to gather in the morning before snn-rise, whil^ . 
die dew was yet on them ; for, being plncked a.% 
that time, they remain longer fresh. . . 

Sometimes they amuse themselves with walk- 
ing near Lieoo, * where there are many romantic- 
spots. At Vavaoo, for instance, they eftai visit the 
oaye of Tootawi and the beach of Mofooe, places- 
celebrated in- the song p. 218« Concerning the. 
person after i«^om the cave is named> it may be- 
interesting to give the following accxrant, which^ 
Mr Miariner often heard from the natives. 

A considerable time before the revolution o£ 
Tonga, when Voona was governor of Vavaoo, there- 
lived at the latter place a mooa whose name W8S« 
Tootawi. He was a man of a solitary and reflec- 
tive disposition. To indulge bis humour, he would, 
often take with him provisions and retire to the 
nmthem or. unfrequented part of the island neas 
Licoo,. and there saunter about among the rocka 
and' caverns- of the shore- for two or three days to- 
gether. He was so much in the habit of wander- 
ing over craggy and dangerous places, that it wafw 
said he could climb rocks and ascend frightfoL 
steps with a fadlity. beyond the power of any o- 
ther human being* On one occasion he was ah** 
sent so long from the mooa that hi& friends were- 
apprehensive some misfortune had befallen him ;. 
and^they commenced a search, expecting to find 

* lAcoo T& the name given- to tlie back or unfrequented' 
part of any island; whtch is generally bold and rocky, and 
-Bor Sued for the entrance of canoea* Some \^arts of th£t 
^^icoo at Vawaoo were partkularlii tomai^c. 



OV f HE TONGA PVOPLti^ 229 

bi0 body lying at the foot of some preeipiccy 
doWn which in an evil hour he had fallen. No 
▼estige of hiniy however, was to be seen; and 
after a long time spent in the firaitless endea^ 
voor to discover his remains, they imagined 
he must have been devoured by a shark whilst 
hathmg ; and with this reflection they returned 
dejected to their houses. A few months now 
elapsed, when one day some carpenters, whilst 
eniployed in cutting timber in the neighbour* 
hood of Licoo» were surprised, and not a little 
startled, by the sudden appearance of the long 
lost solitary. He no sooner saw them than he 
fled, and they, a little recovered from their first 
astonishment, pursued; but it was in vain they 
followed him among tlie cliffs ; he escaped by a 
path known and accessible only to himself. Many 
months passed away, and no more was seen or 
heard of Toot&wi : several persons endeavoured to 
fliscover liis retreat ;— 4hey called his name aloud 
among the rocks, but no answer was returned save 
the echo of their own voices. His singular con- 
duct formed every where the common topic of dis- 
course, and tlie most ardent wish of the curious 
was to find out the place of his resort. Some 
young females went out early one morning to ga- 
ther flowers while the dew was yet on Uiem ; and 
extending their walk along Licoo, strayed into 
wild and unfrequented places. Whilst they were 
admiring the sublimity of the surrounding scenery, 
iheir attention was suddenly arrrested by the ap- 
pearance of smoke rising from among the neigh- 
iMmring cli£&, and they resolved if possible to* as- 
certain the cause of so unexpected a oiicnm^tAiLCA* 

t2 



290 DOMESTIC HA6IT8, kc* 

Animated by the hope of discovering what had 
been long sought for, they asoeaded with much 

"■ difficulty a steep and craggy place, and, looldiig 
down on the opposite side, they beheld, in a small 
cave, the figure of Toot^wi, near a fire, preparing 
yams. Fear held them mute ; not daring to in* 
termpt him, and apprehennve of exciting his at- 
tention, they drew back, and descended die way 
ihey came. They ran speedily to a plantadon at 
■ome distance, and announced to all they met that 
they had found out the abode of the reidaae. A 
few of his friends immediately set out to visit him^ 
and by the directions of the young women ihef 
approached the cave, at the entrance of which was 
Toot^wi sitting an the ground in a thoughtful pos- 
ture. He did not obseflrve them tiU they were too 
near to allow of flight. He appeared displeased at 
the intrusion, and earnestly begged them to lesfe 
him. There was nothing on esoih lihat he want- 
ed, and all their arguments were thrown away in 
persuading him to return to society. Finding their 
endeavours fruitless, they yielded to his wishes, 
and left him. From that time many people went 
on different occasions, led chiefly by curiodty, to 
visit his cave, but it was very seldom they found 
him there. Whether he had any other place of re- 
treat, nobody ever knew. He lived principally 
upon yams and the juice of the cocoa-nut ; and 
the chief furniture of his cave was a mat to sleep 
on. When Voona, the governor, heard that his 
retreat was discovered, and that many went to 
visit the ])lace, he issued orders, on the occasion 
of nfono or general aaaeTDXA^ o\ ^^ ^^^s^J>kfc, ^isKSi. 

no one should molest Yum \ «ii^ %cc«i<aK^^ ^^w^ 

''aspect ivas paid to the itiymcUWi. 



of TBS TOHOA FEOFL*. 231 

Some time after thin, the b&ttle of Teligft liay-* 
jng been fought, Finow invaded and eonqnered 
Vat^aoo, upon which Voona fled to Hamoa. No 
80ener had the kmg established his authority in th« 
island, tiwufi he took a guide to conduct him to the 
caTe of Tootawi, of whose extraordinary character 
be had heard, and whom he had a most lively de- 
Mfe to see. He found him, and was received as 
any indifferent person. Finow spoke kindly to him ; 
kMpnred if there was -any thing ^at could render his 
sftuflition more comfortable, and ofifmd whatever 
could be thought of to induce him to return to the 
habitations of men ; but Tootawi seemed equally 
incKffsrent to all ; lie wished for nothing but Bo]i^- 
tnde. Canoes, houses, and plantations were to 
hfim matters of no value whatsoever; conversation 
had no charms for him, and the luxuries of life 
irere insipid things* When Finow requested him 
to select a wife from among' hit numerooB female 
attendants, he repKd that it was of all things tliat 
which was most remote from his wishes. At 
lengtli the king gave him an unlimited choice a- 
meng l^e whole extent of his possessions, and in 
the moflit earnest manner entreated him to accqit 
ef som^hing. Being thus strongly pressed, the 
moderate Toot&wi chose a wearing-mat of tlio 
kin^ called gie fow, * and this was the only ai*- 
ticle t^ the eloquence and kindness of Finow 
eouki persuade him to accept of. The king left 
him with sentiments of admiration, and shortly 
alter confirmed the onlers that had been for- 
merly given to prevent any body molesting him. 
Thus lived Tootdwi for some three or four yeart' 

* A certain kind of w(»nTV^-Ta«X'««e\<^«^v:!\'^\xvv»^^ 
, as it is not liable to be Vn}utcd\i^ «aa,.Ni«8«£t . '^^ ^^.'-^SS^^ 



233 DOMESTIC HABlTSy kc 

aftenvards ; but one day he was found lying oo 
the ground, stretdied o«t dead within his cave; 

But to return to our subject. About mid-day if 
is usual to have another meal, when the chiefs 're- 
ceive a number of presents, of difierent kinds of 
provisions, from their dependents or friends, whi^^ 
the matabooles share out. In the afternoon somv 
again join in conversation, others go out shooting 
rats, &C. In the evening they have dancing and sing- 
ing, which is often continued tiU very kte at 
niglit, on which occasion they bum tordies, eadi 
being held by a man, who, after a time, is relieved 
by another. These dances are generally kept «p 
for about four hours after dark. When no dances 
are proposed, 'they retire to rest at sun-set, afte 
bathing and oUing themselves, and even on these 
occasions the houses are lighted up with toreheiy 
during two, three, or four hours after dark, the 
torches being held by female domestics. It can- 
not be strictly said that they have any fixed times 
for meals, though it generally happens to be ia the 
morning, about noon, and again in the evening ; 
but it depends greatly upon how the cfaiefii aie 
occupied, or what presents have been made te 
them. It frequently occurs that several presents 
come at the same time from different quartern ; 
then they have a feast : but whatever tli^y have, 
whether much or little, it is always shared out to 
all present, each having a portion according to his 
rank. Strangers and females generally obtain some- 
what more than is due to their rank. Those who 
g-et more than they want never fail to supply 
others who have not enou^i ^^^L-^-Maj^Va^^^ri 
^w-e quality among them, li ^ TR«cv\«&^^vwi 
"*- ^m, though it be not euou^\ ioT ;;. x«x^^> \s- 



OT TRS TONGA PBOPLE. SS3 

will i^eftdily give half away to any oiMr who may 
want it ; and if any hody dse comes afterwardB in 
like need, with the gre ate st good nature he will 
giv« half the remainder ; scarcely saring himself 
atly, though he may be very hungry. 

If during the day a chief, matahoole, or mooa, 
bat particaJarly a diief, finds himself fatigned with 
walking, or any other exercise, he lies down, and 
Mme of his attendants come and perform one of 
tiie three following operations upon him, vi^. 
iooffi-iooffiy miliy or Jbia, i. e. being gently beaten 
upon, or hating the skin rubbed, or having it 
compitsssed* These sereral operations are gene^ 
M\j perfonned about the foet and legs ; die first 
by constant and gentle beating with ^e fist ; the 
second by rubbing with the palm of the hand ; 
and the test by c omp res s ing or grasping the inte* 
guments with the fingers and ^umb. They all 
nerre to relieve pain, general lassitude, and fa- 
tigue ; they are mostly performed by the wives or 
female domestics of the party ; and it is certain 
that they give very great ease, producing a sooth- 
ing eflect upon the system, and lulling to sleep. 
Headadi is found to be greatly relieved by com- 
pressing the skin of the forehead and the scalp in 
general. Sometimes, when a man is much flBi- 
tigued, he will lie on the ground wlnlst three or 
four little children trample upon him all over ; and 
the relief given by this operation is very great. 



Sach 18 ibe history of the po'li^XcA^ x^v^ssc^^ 'w^^ 

knowledge, — and the maimera, coaxow^-* %sv^^ 

bits of the oeonlA nf tViA ^imiA \s^a3e^\ «»^ 



234 00KCLU8I0K» 

that remftins now to be done, is to fnmiBh an fle- 
connt of their language. For this purpose we 
have confttmcted a grammar and dictionary, or at 
least an extensive vocabulary, which contains, it ia 
presumed, more than eight-tenths of the genuine 
Tonga wordsy accentuated as they are pronounced 
by chiefs and those who think it an honour to 
speak correctly. The greater part of those words 
which are omitted, are such as may be tenned 
technical, belonging to their arts, and which, there- 
fore, are easily forgotten, as expressing objects and 
actions which Mr Mariner is no hwger accustom- 
ed to. At the same time it must be confessed^ 
that there are a few other objects which are more 
familiar, but of which, also^ by an^^ unfortunate 
ittpae of memory, the Tonga is forgotten* A- 
mong these we may mention the rainbow, the 
word for which Mr Mariner has in vain endea^ 
voured to recover : but these are imperfections to 
which all human endeavours are liable. If it be 
asked, what is the use to us of a grammar and 
dictionary of the language of an uncivUiaed peo- 
ple, with whom cultivated nations have so little 
concern ? the answer is, that as the stmcture of 
their speech forms part of the history of the hu- 
man mind, it may be found in some degree inte- 
resting to the philologist, and still more so to the 
philosopher. 



APPENDIX. 



TOL. n. 



APPENDIX, 

No. I. 



A 

GRAMMAR 

or XBS 

TONGA LANGUAGE, 

I , H I put!— ■ 

. L4M6UAQV which IS Only spoken by a nation ignorant of every 
linciple of grammatical construction, and possessing not the 
•St knowleo^e, nor the most remote idea, either in thecMy or 
ractice^ of the art of writing, cannot be supposed to be richly 
adowed with variety of words, choice of expression, or dear 
ad accurate definitions, e^Lcept of those ideas which arc in com* 
len 4ise. The rules by which it is ^x»k«n, and which can havQ 
other secuiity or foundation but in the constant habit of those 
ho speak it» are nevertheless suficieatly well established ; and 
' we could but readily and for a time emancipate our mindB 
'om a sens^ of the nicer grammatical distinctions in our owii 
uiguages, it is presumed that the Tonga dialect, and perhapa 
thers of the same class, would be found very simple and easy 
) 4ie attained. But, as it is, the wide differences of our qwi| 
shits of i^)eech, will give it the appearance of a language r9- 
lete with idioms, and abounding in circumlocutions. 

The orthogn^y of this language, from Mr Mariner^ pro* 
unciation, I have settled according to the following rulc9 ) 
i'irst, in respect to the vowels» 

i is always pronounced as in the English words, tor, catj pupa t 
or in the French article la, exoc^ when two consonants fol- 
lowi when its sound is much less open, approaching y^ry n^ar 
to the a, in Timn, cof», b^tuu 

^, like the English a, in ro^, »a$ff da^, or the French accent^ 
6 in accabli ordonne ; except where a double consonant foU 
lows, or ichj then it is aouiidftd •& Vn. meniw« taa^ d^xra. ^ 

, like tke English <r, in tee, wc, bt^ «? V %{kV\k^^^\*»i»«^^ 



U A GRAMlltfAR OF 

molt European languages , except before a double cons^^ 
in which case it is pronounced as in ink, sing. 

Q, as the long English o, in mole, roll, dole ; but short V^ 
a double consonant; 

U, like the sound of the English word you^ or tw in y^.^^^ 
cept before a double consonant, then it is short, as i%^ ^ 
tucic, suck, 

T, like the English i, in sigh, die, white; or the German e$, ^ 
menh *^n ; but somewhat more short and sudden, perbs^ 
rather like the English y in ally, apply. The same soun.^ 
when long, is expressed by the following diphthong : 

AI, like the long English t, in dinCf mine, whine. It is a tni« 
diphthong, generated from the coalition of a and «, as abort 
defined ; the first being heavy, the second light. 

AO. This is a sound distinctly of two syllables, the a and the 
being pronounced as defined in their respective places. 

AOO. This is a word of two syllables, the a and the oo being 
pronounced as defined in their places. 

AU. This is a word of one syllable, pronounced like ow (which 
lee below), but somewhat longer, and yet in such a way ■ 
not to run into two syllables like doo, (wMch see above). Thai 
these four sounds, vis. oo, aoo, au, and ow, are very nenly 
similar, except to a good ear ; and yet it is necessary- lliey 

• should be thus distinguished, for three of them are words of 

- very different meanings, aoo, a cloud ; ati, the personal pro- 
noun /, and ow, the possessive pronoun, thy. The same miy 
be said offao, a peg ; faoo, load ; and fow, a turban : alaO| 
tao^ spear ; taoo, to cook victuals under ground , and tow, wik 

AW, as in law, saw, paw, 

O W, as in how, ailow, now. When the w is preceded by a or 0| 
it must be joined in sound with it, not with any vowel or as- 
pirate that may follow ; t»,fawha is to be pronounced yoio-Aa, 
matfaW'^ha ; for in point of fact, the w is not in such instift- 
ces a separate letter, it only serves to give a peculiar souad, 
as above defined, to the a or the o. Ow is to be pronouncsd 
short, else it will run into the sound of au, which see above. 

OY, as in the English words, toy^ coy, &c. 

OO, like the Italian or Spanish u, or like oo in tool, cool, Afr, 
unless one of them be marked thus, o, in which case they are 
pronounced distinctly, VHien oo is accented, the accent is 
uniformly upon the latter* thus 06, When three o*s come to- 
gether, the two which are not marked thus, o, constitute the 
diphthong * or if the first of the three is accented dtus, 600, 
c&e two latter are the diphthong, 

Ab to the cooffQiiants, the foUoninK ool'i tum^Xm "^widmiKl^ 



THE TOMOA LANGUAGE. v 

•oiinded betweeR tfa« b andp, bwt it luw mom Hm ioiumI 

the 6. 

sfora a and o, is hard, and partakes in lik« wntinmr of a little 
the sound of the hard g. It never occurs before e «9id u 
I express the iound of the soft c, the letter t ia alwava 

The sound of this letter is scarcely known in the TcM^pi 
iguage. There is, indeed, a sound approaching to iti but 
8 only the careless coavergational way of pronouncing the U 
This letter is always hard, as in game, giU (of a fish), begins 
• Wherever the sound of the English soft g occurs, j ia 
vays used to express iL 

This letter has not, however, exactly the sound of the Kng« 
h J, but between J and s, so that if the j in our English 
ltd Jest were thus pronounced, it would sound betweep j«it 
d xest, and not very much unlike chest. 
is always sounded as in the English words chooMe^ changCt 
itr, &c. 

The r is never pronounced strongly. When it follows a 
is scarcely sounded, giving merely a power to the e taxfuUlf 
what it has in the French words* /e, m^, te> 
as in the words amo7ig, songj wrong. But this sound is not 
be intimately joined with the foUowinff vowel. For in* 
Bce^ Timga is not to be pronounced Tongiga^ 9$ the Eog-* 
h reader is apt to do, but thus, Tang'-a, 

Here the g is not sounded stronglyi but somewhat rnocv 
than in the word gnomon. 

pon the subject of accentuation, I must observe, as a gene- 
iile (to avcnd the too frequent and unnecessary use of ^po- 
hical accents), that in words of two syllables the emphasia 
be laid on the first ; in words of three syllables, it is to ba 
id on the middle one ; and in words of four syllables, on the 
and third. In all exceptions to this rule, and iu some of 
I instances where vowels themselves form syllables, typo- 
bical accents will be placed accordingly. It is to be no* 
., that in words of three syllables, when the first only is ac* 
ad* that the two others are light ones, and that tbf a^^nt 
ways put upon the vowel of the emphatic syllable* 
be Tonga language may be divided, like most others, into 
t or nine parts of speech, and if nicer distinctions could aid 
sulering the subject more clear, two or tliree might be add* 
But we apprehend that the usual number will be found 
) as many as will suffice for our purpose i and as these wrm 
ilways properly defined, the noim, adjoctive^vecb^snl^pib^ 
\e, beii^ often one and iU MBUt iifK^ ^&Ki^9^^^ 



Ti A ORAMBCAR OF 

by tilt gtnenl tense of the phrase, and Mineliniet wtareely ^. 
that, we might be disposed to lessen rather than to increase -^^ 
quantity. In respect to those parts of speech which migh^ b^ 
superadded, they consist of a peculiar particle used before tbe 
article, noun, adjective, and pronoun, according to certain rulea^ 
signs of the plural number, signs of tbe tenses of verbs, and 
two or three others, whose uses cannot be explained in a few 
words. Of these we shall treat under the different parts of 
Bpeedi to which they are generally attadied, or XJb which they ! 
seem most referable. 

The following, then, are nine divisions of speech, which we 
shall adopt in the present investigation, and of which we shall 
discourse in this ordei^- 

Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Conjunc- 
tion, Preposition, Interjection. 

THE ARTICLE. 

We find in this language a very frequent use of these three 
particles, via. he, co, and coe. On a strict investigation, how- 
ever, we find that only the first, he^ can pn^erly be called an 
Article, being chiefly used before nouns, and is sometimes used 
to distingfuish them from verbs, though it is occasionally used 
before what in our language would be called the participle of 
the present tense, by whidfi it is converted into a sort of noun. 
Whereas the particle co is used not only before nouns, but also 
proper names', to mark certain significations more distinttlj* 
Besides which, it is frequently prefixed to pronouns. As to the 
particle coe, it is only a coalition of the two former, he and co, 
the aspirate being dropped. Upon these considerations, I think 
we may venture to states that there is but one Articlk in the 
Tonga language, vii. he. But as the particles co and coe seem 
to have a strong relation to it, we shall treat of them under the 
same head. 

The article he has no distinction either of gender or number. | 
It may be used, we believe, before all nouns, though there are 
some occasions where it must be dispensed with, instances of 
which we shall give by and by. Its use may be exemplified 
thus : he tangatOy a man ; hefafinej a woman ; he togi, an axft 
When the conjunction mo (and) precedes it, the aspirate is ge- 
nerally dropt, thus, he togi, moe coola, m6t papalangi, m6ejiawiai 
axes, and beads, and cloth, and looking-glasses. The occasions 
where it should be entirely left out, will be best explained when 
jJJustndng the use of the particle co ; and some farther observ»- 
^0129 wiU be made upon this sul^ject when tc eating; of nouns. 
^epartitie.eo is very frequently ua«d\M$Qit« xuavAis^ic^ 
mk/ proper names. The instance ivYiece \X «Bi^«a% t&»I^ 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. ti7 

emntially to occur, is in answer to the qaestion ipAo or what f 
and will then generally bear to be translated by the yerb, it is 
cat it tDOf, &C. Thus, who is there f a man, co he iangata: 
what is that ? an axe, co he togi : who was with you ? a woman, 
CO kefafine : it is a man, it is an axe, it was a woman, &c. 

Before proper names it is used in like manner, the article 
being left out, as in answer to these questions, who did you see 
there ? co Finow : who else did you see there ? co Toobo Nuha, 
But if the names of a number of persons are mentioned, the 
particle co is only put before the first, as, who came in after- 
wards ? CO HavUif mo Mooala, mo Talo, mo Latoo, &c. (mo being 
a repetition of the conjunction). In like manner, it is used be- 
fore the proper names of brutes and of inanimate things, as 
dogs, hc^s, canoes, clubs, axes, &c. ; for axes formerly had pro- 
per names, on account of their extreme scarcity and consequent 
value ; and clubs also, which have become valuable on account 
of having been used in killing great chiefs, or from having done 
much execution. 

Before the names of different varieties of the same species, 
this particle is also used, but the article he is omitted ; as, co 
tooa^ CO cowmele, co caho-caho^ co gyiooy all which are different kinds 
of yam. But when speaking of the yam in general, they would 
put the article he after co : as co he oafi, the yam ; that is, in 
answer to a question, as before. 

Sometimes (not particularly in answer to a question) the 
name of the species and variety are both mentioned, as the chief 
Ooloo ValoOf the man Boboto ; and in buch cases the particle co 
is always used (the article he being omitted) before the proper 
name of the person spoken of, and ojlcn before the word ex- 
pressing chief, man, &c. ; but in this latter case (r. e. without 
the article) it seems to show that the party spoken of is supposed 
to be known to the person addressed ; as co egi co Ooloo Valoo^ 
the chief Ooloo Valoo ; co tangata co Jioboto, the man Boboto. 
If, on the contrary, the chief Ooloo Valoo, or the man Boboto, 
is supposed to be unknown to the party addressed, then the ar- 
ticle he, as well as the particle co, would be used before egi, or 
tangata ; as, co he egi co Ooloo Valoo. t. e. a certain chief called 
Ooloo Valoo ; CO Ae tangata co Boboto, a certain man named 
Boboto. • 

We have intimated just now that the particle co is not always 

• I do not mean, however, to lay down this rule as a fixed 
and certain one. To Mr Mariner's perceptions of the language, 
it appears in general correct ; but he ^)tMvVA ^ficws^ ^»\s«»6isfi«fc. 
rkiate it through inadvertence, and, 1 mw^ v^iV^««ft^^'^^''5^" 
Aapi fyr the $ake oi euphony. 



^i A GRAMMAR OF 

ustfd before tbe woids egi and Uingata^ and iv« tludl -omr petal - 
out when it is not to be used. If the above phraae, lAe ekkf 
Ool&o Valoih or the man Boboto^ were to occur in the latter pot 
of a Rentcnoe, the particle c* would be left out before <ft or (■»- 
gata, but the article he would remain : aa, nai how giate mkt 
tangata co Paloo, there came to me the man Paloo : but if tta 
arrangement of the sentence be altered, thus, the man Fdflt 
came to me, then both the article and particle may be prcfiuA 
to tanfiaiaf as before : as, co A« tangata co Paloo nai how /?Mi ^ 
au. Tliese two examples, however, intimate that the man BdM 
is uuknoum to the party addressed ; but if the oontrery were tht 
case, the last form of the sentence only could be uaed, and At 
article he must be left out : as, co tangala co Paloo nai km 
giaie au, the man Paloo came to me; but nai hew giale n 
CO tangata Co PaUo would not be gramatically expressed Ibraay 
sense. 

In consequence of the fVequent use of co before Ae, the tva^ 
in the rapidity of speech, are coalesced into one, the aafurate be> 
ing omitted ; thus, coe instead of co he, as coe tangata oo Bobdt, 
We have hitherto expressed them separate^ for the sake flf 
clearness, but shall henceforUi write coe^ according to the strict* 
est pronunciation ; for co Ae tangata would not sound very mA 
in the ears of a TongA duef who took pains to pronounce Jm 
language correctly. 

THE NOUN. . 

The noun has, properly speaking, neither gender nor nnmlMr: 
i. e. tbe gender is distinguished neither by any peculiari^ ia 
the woni, not by any sign ; and the number is only distingiudk 
ed sometimes by a sign, or by some other word of singular sr 
plural signification ; but tbe use of this prefixed sign or woid 
will depend upon whether the noun be significant of an animiii 
or inanimate nature ; if of an animate nature, it will depeiA 
upon whether it be a rational or irrational natura i 

The singular number of inanimate beings is usually expreMed 
by the simple noun, with the article he before it: as, Ae togi, u 
axe ; hefalle, a house. When it is intended to lay a particiilar 
stress upon tbe circumstance of thdr being only one, the bo* 
meral is used with the word be (only), and the article is left out: 
as togi be taha, axe only one ; falle be tahOf house only one. 
When a certain and fixed number of inanimate objects are meant 
to be expressed, the numeral \s u&od. accoxd\tv^ \a the foUowiag 
ybrm ; /o^i e ooUf axes two ; j'uUc e toloo, \x«m%«* ^itw^av ^m.^^^ 
y^9 canoes four ; wherein it ia seen tXxaX \>^^ v*Jt^^«^^ « ^*"***^!5r. 
/Jreeji the noun and the numetai, aM n»\vvc^ Viv tiKl \»^i<>»w 
" «*»• JrticJe, with the aspirat* omituA, wid^^actA. «.%»«>« 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. ix 

tion tot the uke of euphony. When ipeaking of an indefinite 
number of inanimate things, the word iahi (many or Kvcral), is 
used before the noun, the article intervening, with its aspirate 
dropped, as Iahi e togiy many the axes ; Iahi e vaca, many the 
canoes. 

This sign of the plural, however, is not always used ; as, for 
instance, whose axes are these ? coe togi ahai co-eniy i. e. the 
axes whose these ? Here there is nothing of a plural significa- 
tion, for coeni means this as well as these, and only the general 
sense or the risible objects can determine it : or it would be bet- 
ter perhaps to express the rule thus : the singular number is 
often used for the plural, when it is sufficiently evident that the 
plural must be meant though not expressed, as in the foregoing 
example. 

In respect to animate beings, the singular is formed in the 
same way as exemplified in regard to inanimate : as, he booacoy 
a hog ; he gooliy a dog ; he tangata, a man ; and if a particular 
strees is laid upon there being only one, the same form as with 
inanimate natures is used, provided it be an irrational living be- 
ing, as booaca be taha, hog only one ; goolli be taha, dog only 
one ; and such might be the answer to the question, how many 
hogs, (dogs, &c.) are there ; but if the word booaca^ {gooli, &c) 
be not repeated in the answer, then taha must come before be, 
as taha be, one only. But if the living object spoken of be a 
rational being, as, only one god, one man, one chief, &c. then 
the word toca (for which no particular meaning, in this case, 
can well be given, unless we translate it person or rational in- 
dividual) must be used before taha, astangata be toca taha, man 
only person one ; and if in answer to such a question, as, how 
many men were there ? the word tangata be not repeated in the 
answer, it must be constructed thus : toca taha be, person one 
only ; toca coming first, and be last 

In respect to this word toca, another observation must be 
made, viz. that it is never used unless with a numeral, or some 
word expressive of number , as, Iahi, many ; chi, few. 

The plural number of animate irrational beings is sometimes 
formed exactly in the same way as exemplified when speaking 
of inanimate beings, as in the following instances : if a certain, 
definite number be expressed, thus, booaca e ooa, hogs two; 
gooli e toloo, doga three ; if an indefinite number be expressed, 
thus, Iahi e booaca, many hogs ; Iahi e gooli, many dogs : but 
if, in similar instances, rationeU beings were to be spoken of, 
then toca must be used, and the article e left out, according to 
this form, tangata toca ooa, two men ; fafine toca tQ^Q^ tVvx«& 
women j but if the number of i«.^nal \^vDk%% \» \sAs*^Y^^\ 
tb9 mode of expression will Vw ihe wsv^ •& ^^ 'JiMtKw&asswjJ^ 



X A GRAMMAR OP 

being!. «ith thk only differenoe, that toea will comt U«lbt« ^ 
fu toi» Uki e taiigata, many men ; toca lahi « hotooa, numjr y^ 

There are two other moides of ezpresaing the plural ni^^^ 
pf nouns of animate natures, and these are by the words ^^ 
and toonga, which appear to be collective nouns, and tx^ ^ 
Ihe signification of company, body, society, or multitude ^ ^, 
may be used indifferenUy, either with rational or irratiot^^/jBH 
tures ; always observing, that in the former case, where s jb^ 
meral is used, or the word lahi or cM (many or few), tocm mii^ 
also be used, but not otherwise : as cow tangtUa^ or toonga tangOt^ 
meoy or a body of men, cow booaca, or toonga hooaca, a quuti^ 
of bogs : and if besides such a collective noun a numeral hm 
also added, then the word toca must be used before the nHmenli 
as in this phrase ; a body of men to the amount of a huadn( 
cow tangata toca teaoo; it e. a body of men, a hundreds €r 
toonga tangfUa toca teaoo. 

The Tonga nouns cannot be said to have the signs of eiM^ 
flr any sort of declension ; and although the particle gi has ftt» 
quen^v a dative signification, it is much more frequently to kt 
taken in the sense of a proposition. The genitive case, wbcM 
the prqf»er name of a person or place is used, is often ezpresMi 
by the sign a, as, Flnow's speech^ Mafinga a Fin6w : but othow 
wise, as in this example, the name of the person^ there is no wi^ 
as, he hingoa heJUna^ i. e. the name the person. 

There is one more remaik to make in regard to douhb Ot 
pressing animate natures, (whether intelligent or not) ; but m 
this regards rather the personal pronouns which are used fbc 
them, we shall only mention it here by the way, and speak mon 
fully upon the sulyect under tlie proper head. The remaik to 
be made is, that when such prcmouns arc the subjects of a veriib 
or of a question, as (speaking of dogs for instance), give raun 
to me ; or in the question, what did you do wUh tmsm ? they ad> 
mit either of a dual or plural number, accordingly as there ars 
two or more : the dual number of the third personal pronooB 
(in the above sense) being gin6wooa^ and the plural numbtfh 
gi»6wt6loo» But more of this hereafter. 

ADJECTIVES, 

The words of this class, for a general rule (not without ei- 
cepUons), follow the substantives whose qualities they express; 
as he langata lilli, a good man : he togi machila, a sharp azCi 
They have no distinction of gender or number ; as, cow tangal$ 

* The particle cow is sometimes used to inanimate nib- 
^^•acea, as, eow m^a^ cord«fd*B cow e<^i ^vski^vXvi)}^ >Sm«i «l 



THfi TONGA LANOUAGfi. «l 

good men ; cow fafima lUlit good wonwn ; laid k§ $ogi ma»- 
t several sharp axes. 

the exceptions to the role that the adjectiTe follows the 
antive, it never comes immediately before the substantivo 
}t in one or two instances, that we can discover, and tiiat is 
the adjective (and sometimes adverb),ybo, great, very ; snd 
vhole, entire, single ; which always comes immediately be- 
its substantives : as foo lahi, ' very many, or it may be be 
lated as an adverb, exceedingly great ; foo U<h great anger, 
it may alse be rendered, very angry. Foe oolooy a single 
» or the whole head ; foe oofi, a single yam, or an entire 
In other instances, where the adjective precedes the sub- 
tvi^ some word or words always intervene. Of this we have 
oitaace in one of the examples to the former rule, vis. 
k« togi machila j where the adjective machila immediately 
WB its noun, serving to illustrate that rule; and the ad- 
re laki comes before the noun, serving to illustrate the 
ittt rule, where it is seen that something intervenes, vis the 
\ehe : but for another instance, we fcusve this, viz. he has 
f axes, gooa lahi enne iogi^ i. e. are many his axes ; f here 
lossessive pronoun enne (his) comes between the adjective 
Bubstantiva 

le adjective in this, as well as other languages, is often used 
k substantive ; as, I regard those brave men, gin6ua6loo toa 
te afa angi,^ i* e. (to) thoae brave (men) do 1 e sto s m give : 
it is seen that the adjectiipe too, braver is used as a substan* 
signifying brave men, tcmgata being understood, 
n the other hand, substantives are often used as adjectives ; 
, tangat<i, a man, often signifies manly : as, he jUna tan- 
, A manly person, i. e. a person b^g such as a man ought 
!; he vaca Fiji, a Fiji canoe. 

Lahi may also mean great or large ; in these examples we 
instances of the indeterminate nature of the elements of 
Tonga language. 

In this example gooa is die sign of the present tense, and at 
IS a plural signification, we translate it by the word are. 
Here the word giH^6loo implies that three or more persons 
ipoken of; had there been only two, it would have been in 
dual number: thus, gin^tDooa, them two, those two, &c. 
word atigt may admit of two meanings ; it may either be 
rari> to give, or the preposition towards ; if the first, then 
[cflteem) must be a substantive, as abov« tK«m!»\x^\\s<oS^'''*S^ 
; be the preposition, ^ben o/o vraiX >» i^«i ^«^»i V^<* «*»^> 
«/ mteem), and tht sentenee mrf >>* <tw» Vc«k^^^ • ^^'^ 
f (m^n) Ifiel eiteem imiMv^^ 1i^ ewifs^**^*^^" 



zii A GRAMMAR OF 

Adjectireft are for the most part the same as the tubitaji 
from which they have derived their signification ; as Wle, g 
goodness ; lUie, good (the a^JO ; covi, evil ; covi, bad, &G. 

They are frequently, however, formed from the substai 
by tlie addition of ia, or sa ; as mafannay warmth, heat ; 
fannaia, warm, hot; and where the substantive ends in e, 
arc mostly formed by the addition of the letter a : as gele^ x 
clay ; gelea muddy, clayey. 

They are also sometimes formed by repeating the substant 
as lolOf oil ; lolo-lolo, oily : but it will be difficult to avoid b 
deceived by this rule, for tliere are many instances where 
double word is a substantiye ; many where it is a verb ; n 
w here the single word has no meaning at all, not being ui 
others where the single word lias a meaning very different i 
the double word : sometimes the word is doubled to ina! 
the degree of a quality, &c. as cooloo^ooloOf a species of di 
alo, to hunt ; alo-alo, to fan ; booi, (no meaning) ; 6001-M 
screen ; coola, beads ; coola-cooiOy red ; kinof a bottle ; A 
hina, white ; liiity good ; lilli-liUe, very good. Tlie vocabn 
must be often refemd to, to decide this rule. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

What is properly called the comparative decree in this 
guagc, is fonned by tlie addition of the word ange to the a 
tivc ; and tlie superlative mostly by the addition of the won 
tOt exceedingly. As to the word ange, it is often used t 
nify against, leaning a fiainst : and also like, similar to .• all 
a little latitude to the first meaning, it may easily be cod 
to signify being opposed to^ or conif-ared with ; and this 
sense in which it must be taken, in quality of a sign of th 
parative degree. It is also often used as a sign of adver 
cording to its other meaning, viz. like, similar to, after tl 
ner of. As to the word obilOy it requires no fartlier ezp' 
at present ; for its simple signification, exceedingly, is ci 
propriated to express the superlative degree. Both th< 
of degrees follow the adjective ; as, lilU^ good ; lUle a 
ter ; lillc obito^ best, or exceedingly good. 

For an example of the comparative degree we will 
thing i.\ better than that. To render this into Tonga, 
cipal circumstance to be attended to is the arrangem 
words ; the substantive verb, or rather the sign of tJ 
tense, will come first, and the whole sentence will n 
is better the thing this, than the thing that ; gooa liUe a 
coenigi he mea coia ; the word gi, wYftcVk \v\«raYL^ tqj 
•""^^ we may translate than, in cotiJoncAt^ ^Vii c 
Veech. ThiB is greater than ti»t, gooa Uhi ange 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. ziU 

gi he mea eoia ; i. e. is greater the thing this to the thing that, 
or than the thing that. 

But when the subject with which the comparison it made is a 
prqper name, the connective gi, which joins the subjects of com- 
parison, is changed to gia ; as, Toob6 is taller than Afoq, gooa 
taki ange Toobo gia Afoo ; i. e. is taller (more tall, more great) 
Toob6 than Afoo. Finow is a greater chief than Toob6. In 
rendering this into Tonga, the word egi, a chief, becomes an ad- 
jective, and the word ange will follow it accordingly ; as, gooa 
egi ange Finoiv gia Toobo ; i. e. is chiefer Finow tlian Toob6. 

The superlative degree is signified for the most part by the 
word obito^ most, ver}-, exceedingly; as, this axe is the best, coc 
togi coeni gooa lille obito ; i. e. the axe this is good exceedingly. 
But the word obito may be left out, and be (only) used in its 
stead, according to this form, this axe only is good, which will 
have exactly the same meaning as the foregoing example, for it 
will not imply that the others are bad, but that they are not good 
(or inferior) compared to it ; for example, coe togi be coeni gooa 
lilUf this axe is the best, or, literally, the axe only this is good. 
If, in reference to 'the last example given, it were intended to 
be implied that the axes with which the good one was compared 
were absolutely bad, this additional circumstance would like- 
wise be expressed ; as, this axe is the only good one among them, 
coe togi be coeni gooa lille, ca gooa covi foolibe ginowtoloo ; i. c. 
the axe only this is good, for are bad all they ; or what is a rocnre 
usual form of expression, gooa covi fo6lib6 he togi, coe togi be 
coeni gooa lille ; i. e. are bad all the axes, the axe only this ia 
good. It seems rather an inconsistency to say all the axes are 
bad, and in tlic same sentence to acknowledge one of them to 
be good. This, however, is the Tonga idiom. 

When it is required to express the superlative degree in a ve- 
ry extended sense, the word obilo is repeated ; and if it is so ex- 
ceeding as to be in a manner almost beyond comparison, it is 
repeated twice ; as, coi togi coeni gooa lille obilo obito, obilo. But 
if the axes witli which this exceeding good axe is compared are, 
on the other hand, exceedingly bad, this is to be expressed by 
the word covi, bad, with obito also attached, according to this 
form ; coe togi f oof ibe coeni gooa covi obito, ca coe togi coeni gooa 
lille obito y obito; which, word for word, is thus, the axes all these 
are bad exceedingly, but the axe only this is good exceedingly, 
exceedingly. 

Lastly, the form of the superlative degree may be^ used even 
though there be only one more axo, or whatever subject it may 
be, to compare it with ; but this is a mattet oi xsvss^ ^^va5:^^w^ 
the form either of the comparalWe ox %u'\j«^>a^'^^ ^e'^^^fe'a»i^\\J!fe 
used in such a case indiscriminaleVy. 
roL, xi, b 



liv A GRAMMAB OF 

PRONOUI^S. 

The Tongm language may be said to have fbinr kindi of pit^ 
nouns, viz. penonsJ, possessive, interrogative, and demoostrativr. 

1. There are two kinds of personal pronouns: 1st, Thon 
which come before verbs, or at least are agents, as, /go; «r 
went ; they love : 2dly, Those which either are the subjects ofli 
verb, as, strike him ; love her ; or are used in answer to •qnst' 
tion, as, who poes ? /; who sings? he ; or are used more stRNig- 
\y to identify the agent, like tlie pronouns myself, thyself, && 
in English, when they are used in addition to the true pentmsl 
pronouns ; as, I myself will go, &c 

The personal pronouns, as Those governed by vnbs or prs- 



agents 


to verbs. 


positions, or used in answer to 






questions, 


&c. 


I. 


Te; Oo. 


Au; 


Gita. 


Thou. 


Gcr. 


Ac6y; 


Coy. 


He» she, it. 


la. 


Aia; 


la. 


We, 


Mow. 


Gim6wooa; 


Gim6t&looii 




Tow. 


Git6wooa ; 


Git6wt6loo. 


Ye. 


Mo. 


Gim6ooa ; 


Gim6t6Ioo. 


They. 


Now. 


Gin6wooa ; 


Gin6wt61oo. 



We shall speak of these several pronouns in their preper a^ 
dcr, and first of those which are the agents to verbs. 

8. Te and oo, Te is only used as the agent of a verb is thi 
present tense, and comes between the sign of the tenae and lbs 
verb ; as, gooa te aloo, I go ; gooa te afa^ 1 love or esteem. €$ 
fa used only in the past and ^ture tenses, and is then usuaH|[ 
joined in one word with the sign of the tense ; as, neoo * aloo, I 
went > teoo aloo, I shall go ; neoo ofuf I loved or esteemed ; teoo 
cfa, I shall love or esteem. 

3w Gert thou. This pronoun is used in all the tenses^ aad 
comes between the sign of the tense and the verb. The prine^ 
pal thing to be observed respecting it is, tV.at when the ugn c£ 
the present tense, gooa, comes before it, gooa is changed into 
goo ; as« goo ger mohe, thou sleepest ; na ger mo/u, thou dSfklt 
Aeep ; te ger mohe, thou dudt sleep. 



' The proper sign of the past tense is na, but in the lint pet^ 
ton where oo is joined with it, \\. I's Ocv«Lfv^«\\x\\» t«. The pro- , 
MgJSJe IB changed into oo in tVve tutoni vev\«e^^xcSt»&A^\Mna»^ 
^^to the fiiff n of that tense ; and. a tc^VxW o1 <t« ^wVvx 
W^ ainbigiioua, a. tetc m^w« o^^i'w*^^ ^^^^ aU*^^*^ 
m$i f9ne* 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. x? 

4h /a, ha* This pronoun follows the verb in all tbt tansct ; 
BMf gooa nwke ia, be sleeps ; na moke la, he slept ; # * mohe to, 
ha shall sleep ; though sometimes ta is changed for fv, and which 
is then joined to the sign of the future tense ; thus, Unne mohe^ 
be shall sleep ; ienne cUoo^ he shall go ; and in the past tense ia 
is sometimes omitted, and the sign na changed into nai ; as, nos 
moke, he slept, instead of na make ia, 

5. Jfow, we. This pronoun comes between the sign of tba 
tense and the verb ; as, gooa mow aloOf we are going, &c. ; but 
the use of it is limited to those instances in which the persoa 
q[K)ken to is not included ; as, when one person tells another 
that himself and others owe him much respect, sayioig, we great- 
\j esteem you, the pronoun mow must be used, because the per* 
son spoken to is not involved in the sense of the word we, (Sea 
the following. ) 

6. Towy we. This comes also between the sign and the verb ; 
its use is, however, restricted to those instances where the per* 
son addressed is meant to be included ; as when one person re» 
minds another that both of them are to go somewhere, to da 
something, &c. ; as» we (i. e. thou and I) are going the wrong 
way; or, we (i. e. thou and I) are sitting here idle. In short» 
mow is idways used in this sense, viz. I and he, or I and they i 
and tew is always used in this, viz. I and thou, or I and you, or 
Iff thou, and they, or I, you, and they, &c. 

7. Mo, ye ; now, they. There are no particular ohservatioBa 
to make reqpccdng these pronouns ; for examples of their use, 
U mo aho^ ye shall go ; na now nrfo^ they remained, where it 
is seen they are placed between tlw sign of the tense and th^ 
^lerb. 

In regard to the second column of pronouns, they are used 
either in addition to the first, the better to identify the person,^ 

Slaying a greater stress ; or to distinguish the dual from the 
ciral number ; or in answer to the question who / or as the 
nibjects of a preposition. 

When a particular stress is intended to be laid, as I myself, 
thou thyself, &c. any of these pronouns may be used in addi-« 
tion to the corresponding ones in the first column, with the ex* 
oeptions of au, ac6y, and oAa ; as» teoo aloo gUa, I will go my* 
self; te ger aloo coy, thou shalt go thyself; tenne aloo ia,f ha 

* Te, the ugn of the future tense, nuikes e in the third person 
dnguhtf. 

f If it were the past tense, as, he went htnuelf, it would be nai 
mloQ ia, tot it would sound awkward to say, na aloo ia ia $ thfix«^ 
one of the pronouna ia dio^^^ vk<sL ^te v^3|^ wx Oc^ass^s^ 



itUi a grammab of 

Aooo fidle ; mj bouae, or bouflML 
Falle aicoo ; my house, or boutsi. 
Ho booaca ; thy bog. 
Booaca ah6 ; thy hog. 
Ana togi ; his axe, or axe& 
Togi a&na ; his axe, or axes. 
Gim6wooa oofi ; our yam, or yams. 
Oofi am6wooa ; our yam, or yams* 
Git6wooa vaca ; our canoe, or canoes. 
Vaca at^wooa ; our canoe, or canoes. 
Gim6ooa ac6w ; your club, or clubs. 
Ac6w amiooa ; your club, or clubs. 
Ginowooa gooll ; their dog. 
Gooli an6wooa ; their dog. 

Those among the above phrases which have living beings for 
their subjects, may be converted into plurals by the use of tin 
word toonga, (see nouns) ; this word coming immediately before 
the noun ; as, thy hogs, ho toonga booaca, or toonga hooaca oho : 
their dogs, ginowooa toonga gooliy or toonga gooli anSwooa. The 
particle cow cannot be used for the same purpose. Those whidi 
have inanimate subjects are either singular or plural, as they 
above stand : they may, however, admit a specific plural, by th0 
addition of the numeral, but in no other way. 

The possessive pronoun is sometimes used instead of the per- 
sonal, particularly where the verbs my and angi are expressed; 
as, give it to him, angi ia ma ana, i. e. give it for his own : gift 
it to me , my ia ma acoo, L e. give it for my own : I will give it 
to you, teoo atoo ia ma ow, i. e. I will give it for your own. The 
pronouns possessive of the dual and plural numbers may also be 
used in the same way. One more observation must, however, 
be made respecting the singular number, that those placed fim 
on their respective lines cannot be used according to this rulc^ 
viz. eoocoo, ho, and enne ; unless some noun follows, and then 
these may, and not the others ; as give it for his dog, angi ia wm 
enne gooli, not ana gooli ; and so of the other two. 

Interrogative pronouns are the following, and are nerer tiied 
but as interrogatories. 

Co-hai?ahii? Who? 
Coe-ha? Which 

Coe-ha? he-ha? What? 
Ah4i? Whose? 

When tbeyform part of a sentcTice, He-ha vcvi aKdi are always 
^aitbe end ; the others are always ipv^x m VVi^tV^xiTAs^S ^a^ 

Co-hai na fy ? Who ^^ yt^ 




THE TONGA LANGUAGE. ik 

Coe-ttttegeriy? What mill yoa do? 
Tegerfyhe-ha? You will do wfatt? 

Coe gooli heni ab&i ? Whose dog is this? 

English word what, when applied to mankind, is render- 
O'hai, (M* ahdi, as, co- kai tangala co-hena, or, cot tangata 

ah&if what man is that? But when brutes, or inani- 
lijects are implied, it must be rendered by coe^a, or A«- 

coe togi co-ena he-ha f what axe is that ? 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

e are co-heni and ahenit this; cohena and ahena, that, 
ttle if any distinction is made between the use of co'keni 
iheni ; or between co^hena and ahena : it is rather mora 
iry, however, to adopt those with the particle co before 

VERB& 

Tonga verb is exceedingly simple in construction, per- 
}re so than is consistent with perfect clearness of speech ; 
very well, however, for the common purposes of dis- 
At most there are three different kinds o? verbs ; viz. 
igular, verbs irregular, and verbs defective ; there aro bat 
' the latter class in the whole language, viz, myt atoot Mid 
bese, from the way in which they are often used, may, per- 
t considered verbs auxiliary; but more of tliis when we treat 
. In regard to the verbs irregular, we have only disco- 
ne, but probably there are a few others : this one will be 
1 its proper place. 

sense of the verb substantive, I am, thou art, he is, &€.» 
y involved in the regular verb, with the sign of the tense 
t pronoun, and is seldom used alone : those which are 
called verbs neuter, as, to sleep, to boast, to walk, &c* 
Jtnicted the same as the verb regular ; those which in 
aguages are called verbs passive are not known in the 
language ; instead of saying, he toat struck by a stone^ 
mid say, a stone struck him ; for the tree was shaken by 
i, the wind shook the tree. 

verb has but three tenses, present, past, and future, de- 
y the signs gooa, na, and te ; and three moods, indicative, 
tive, and potential : the indicative is denoted by the want 
»dal sign ; the imperative, or ^^rec&tiv^ Vs^ ^S^sb ^^^css^nk.^ 
• modal and temponl«9a\ aiDAiQDA viic%>x&s!o^^^^ '^'*' 



ss A GBAMMAft OT 

use of the modal ngn ^«r« In respect 4o Um orAm of eoulne* . 
tion in the indicative mood, first cornea the aiffn of the teaie^ 
then the pronoun, and lastly the veib; except m the tiiiid per. 
son singular of each tense, where the pronoun is placed la* ■ 
In the dual and plural numbers the pnmouna ending in ataai 
ioloo arc also expreaiied, and follow the Terb. 

THE INDICATIVE MOOD. \ 

The masntr tknss is denoted hj the sign fooo, wliidi na . 
unchanged through all penona, except the second peraonoi^ > 
lar, where the a is dropped : the first personal pronoun ialHi ta 
Pronouns. 

Eiample, — ISngukn 

Gooa te aloo. I ga 

Goo ger aloo. Thou goeiL 

Gooa aloo ia. He goes. 

Dual 

Gooa mow aloo gim6wooa. We Ttwo) go (not jou). 

Gooa tow aloo git6wooa. We (two) go (I and you). 

Gooa mo aloo gimdooiL Ye (two) go. 

Gooa now aloo gindwooa. They (two) go* . 

Plural. 

Gooa mow aloo gim6wt61oo. We (three or more) go (not yon^ 

Gooa tow aloo git^wtoloo. We (three or more) go (1, y99,kc) 

Gooa mo aloo gim6t61oa Ye (three or more) go. 

Gooa now aloo gin6wt61oo« They (three or more) gow 

The rAST tcksx is denoted by the sign na^ which h prafiarf 
to all the persons, except the first, where it is changed mto i^ 
and is joined to the personal pronoun oo ; in this tenae^ alacH H 
must be remarked, that the third personal pronoun may cithiv . 
follow the verb as in the present tense^ or it may be left oo^ 
and the sign changed into nai, \ 

SSaagfoHar, 

Neoo aloo» I went 

Na ger aloa Thou didst go. 

Na aloo ia (or nai aloo). He went 

Dual. 

J[m mow aloo ^m6wooa. Vfe (two^ ^«nt (not yon), 

al€}0 git6 wooa. "W e Vtwo"^ -wtivx VV va^^jm^ 

AkM gim6«o«. "«« (two^ ^%ta. 




THE TONGA LANGUAGE. xxi 

Flural. 

Na mow aloo glmowt61oo. We (seTeral) went (not you). 

Na tow aloo gitowt61oo. We (scTeral) went (I, you, &c.). 

Na mo aloo gim6t61oo. Ye (seyeral) went 

Na now aloo gin6wt6Ioo. They (several) went. 

FUTURE TENSE. 

This is denoted by the sign te^ except in the third person sin- 
lUuT) where it is changed to ^ ; in this tense, as in the past, oo 
used for the first personal pronoun, instead of te, because te 
nng also the sign of the tense, the repetition would create con- 
sion in the signification, tete meaning almost. In this tense it 
ust also be noticed, that the third personal sign instead of be- 
g et is sometimes changed to tinne^ and the pronoun is omit- 
d ; but this is for the most part optional. (See rule 4th of the 
■onouns.) 

Singular. 

eoo aloo. I shall go. 

e ger aloo. Tiiou shall go. 

i aloo ia, (or tenne aloo). He shall go. 

Dual. 

e mow aloo gim6wooa. We (two) shall go^ (not you.) 

e tow aloo git6wooa. We (two) shall go, (I and you. ) 

e mo aloo gim6ooa. Ye (two) shall go. 

e now aloo gin6wooa. They (two) shall go. 

Plural. 

e mow aloo gim6wt61oo. 
e tow aloo git6wt6loo. 
'e mo aloo gim6t61oo. 
'e now aloo gin6wt61oo. 



Plural. 

We (several) shall go^ (not you,) 
We (several) shall go, (I, you, &c. 
Ye (several) shall go. 
They (several) shall go. 



THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

The imperative or precative mood is chiefly denoted by the 
eficiency both of a modal and temporal sign ; it has the second 
ersonal singular, and the first and second persons dual and plu- 
il. In the second personal singular, the pronoun coy or sub- 
let of the verb comes after it ; but in the first and second per- 
ms, dual and plural, the pronouns tow and mo come before the 
erb, and the pronouns that distinguish the numbers follow the 

srb. 

£aram;72ff.— Singular. 

Aloo coy* Go iSkntwu 



zxiT A GRAMMAR OF 

or derire is tignffted : as, I want to ecU ; I wish to die, 
]y, where the infinitive mood assumes still more erideatff i^ 
nature of a noun, allowing (even in English) an adjective ^j 
prcssivc of its quality ; as, to sleep is refreshing ; to die is ay^Stl 
In the first case, that is to say, where object, scope or purjnow 
is signified, the particle ^er must be put before the word express- 
ing tlie object: as, na how ia ^ heni ger mohe, he came here 
to sleep ; na aloo ia gi-hcna gkr tow, he went there to fij^ 
Ger mohe and ger tow may here be considered the subjuncttre ' 
' mood, that he might sleej), that he might Jight ; for ger is actual- 
ly the sign of that mood, though the pronoun ia is not repeated 
after mohe and tow, because it was already indicated after how 
and aJoo. 

In the second case, viz. where wish or desire is expressed, the 
noun is used without the article ; as, gooa te Jia mohe, I wiih 
to sleep ; gooa te Jia mate, I wish to die ; and this is exactly 
the form in which it may be expressed in English ; as, I wish 
death, I want sleep; where it is seen that the noun is used 
without the article, as if it were the proper name of a being* 

It often happens in the Tonga as well (probably) as' in other 
uncivilized tongues, that ideas are express€»l by the aid of noiin% 
which could not bear to be translated into cultivated languages, . 
but as verbs, or at least as participles; though in the language 
to which they belong they ^all have all the character of nouns, 
even with the article before them : as, in this sentence, he met 
the mail walking; the participle walking would have in the Toi]|^ 
the article before it, like a noun : as, naifeccatagi hx xva it 
tangata^ he met the walking (i. e. in the walk), the man. ^ 
therefore the noun in this language is proportionably so mud 
more frequent tlian the verb, wherever it may be doubtful 
whether a word be a verb or a noun, for the sake of uniformity, 
we call it a noun. 

The third and last form of the infinitive is where it has de- 
cidedly the character of a noun, and is therefore in the Tonga ] 
expressed with the article ; (that is to say, where desire or wnh 
is not expressed) ; as, to sail is pleasant, gooa lille he fel6w ; i.e. 
is pleasant the sailing ; gooa lUU he mohe, i. e. is good the slecpi 
or, to sleep is good. 

In regard to verbs irregular, we have only discovered one, to, 
envy ; but it is pro})able there are a few others. There are two 
peculiarities in tiiis verb ; the first is, that the first person singu- 
lar and plural of all the tenses is expressed by amoochia, and all 
the others by manoo-manoo. The second is, that in the first ■ 
penon singular of the present tense, neitkief the sign of the tense i 
J^*" the penoaal pnmouncanbetiJMd^but^TCMi^MMX ^aoAtnL i 
^^9f9rbtheyn»y: thoscooate awoochVa^ 1 %wni ^w^^^ 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. 

md grammar; amoochia alone must be uied: the Terb there- 
ore will run thus ; 

Present tente. 

Singular. Plural. 

Amoochia. * Gooa mow amoochia. 

Goo ger manoo-manoo. Gooa mo manoo-manoo. 

Gooa manoo-manoo ia. Gooa now manoo-manoo. 

Past tense. 

Singular. Plural. 

Neoo amoochia. Na mow amoochia. 

Na ger manoo-manoo. Na mo manoo-manoo. 

Na manoo-manoo ia. Na now manoo-manoo. 

Future tense* 

Singular. Plural. 

Teoo amoochia. Te mow amoochia. 

Te ger manoo-manoo. Te mo manoo-manoo. 

£ manoo-manoo ia. Te now manoo-manoo. 

The subjunctive mood will run thus ; ger amoochia, ger ger 
lanoo-manoo, per manoo-manoo ia, ger mow amoochia, &c 

There are three words in this language which may be used 
itber as verbs or prepositions ; these are my, atoOf and augi ; 
5 verbs, they mean to give ; as prepositions, they signify to, or 
noards : they arc to be used, accordingly, as the first, second, 
r third person may follow ; Uius, my signifies to give any thing 
) me, or us ; atoo, to give to thee^ ov you ; angt, to give to kirn, 
er, itf or them : for example, 

My ia giate au : give it to me. 

My ia giate gimSwtoloo : give it to us. 

Teoo atoo ia giate coy : I will give it to thee, 

Teoo atoo ia giate gimSwtoloo : I will give it to you. 

Jtngi ia giate ia : give it to him, or her. 

Angi ia giate gin6wt^oo : give it to them, 

*hey mean, therefore, not only to give, but they signiiy, ako, 
le direction of the gift. As prepositions, they signify not only 
twards, but also the direction in which the motion is made ; 

e. whether it be towards the first, second, or third person. 

The present tense of the verb to give is never used by itself, 
le future being substituted for it: but when my, atoo, and 
ngi are joined to other Terbsy which is often the case where 

* Or, at it ia lomiBtaittot ^ioiMwmicw^> \ASBfin^»»<« 
roi. If. . . . c 



nvi A GEAMBfAR OF 

tnmtferring or gtTing is fcignifted, or motioB towtrdi it hnplM, 
they nuty be used in the present tense if the tense rtqnin ib 
Thus oja means to love : but for I lave you, it is not sufficient 
to say, gooa te oJa coy; the verb aUM must also be used : a« 
ample, gwia te If a atoo giate coy; literally, / Icve give toyimt 
gooa te of a ungt giate ia, I love give to her : in which two ei- 
amples, if atoo and angi be considered verbs, then ofa astuoMB 
the character of a noun ; but if they be considered prepositionik 
then ofa remains a verb, and the literal translation will nm 
thus : I love towards to you ; I love towards to her ; in whidi 
giate (to) will appear superfluous. But it is not of much con- 
sequence whether they are verbs or prepositions, provided m 
understand how to use them. The best rule to be given is, 4ti< 
when the pure simple act of giving or making a present is A^ 
nified, they are used without any other verb, as teoo atoo ta 
giate coy, I will give it to thee ; and, in this case, either the 
past or the future tense must be used as the sense will best in- 
dicate. In respect to their junction with otl^r verbs» it it ge- 
nerally either with verbs neuter, expressing motion towards, ts 
to fly, to swim, to walk, to go, &c., or with such other verbs, tht 
Tonga worda for which may be used either as nouns or veriii^ 
and being nouns, may be conceived to be transferred, or, at 
least, to bie directed from one object towards another ; thus <fii 
means, to love ; also love ; jio means, to see, or look at ; altis * 
look : ta means, to strike ; also a stroke, or 6/ow, &c. as, 

Teoo ofa angi giate ia: 1 shall love give to her ; or, I ffaaU 
love towards to her. 

Neoojio atoo giate coy : He a look gave to thee, or, he looked 
towards at thee. 

Na ta my ia giate au : He a blow gave to me ; or, he struck 
towards at me. 

In these instances the words my, atoo. and angi, are perhaps 
best translated as verbs of giving, transferring, or directing to- 
wards ; but when they are joined with verbs of motion, they 
appear to assume more of the character of prepositions. 

Na boona atoo he manoo giate coy : Flew towards the bird to 
thee ; i. e. tlie bird flew towards thee. 

Nisoo lelle angi gi hefaUe : I ran towards to the house. 

Na lelle my ia giate au : Kan towards be to me ; i. e. be rttt 
towards me. 

In both cases, the words my, atoo^ and angi, immediately fbl- 
low the verb or noun to which they bekmg ; and if the agent of 
be in the third person, whether a pronoun, m proptf 
^•«r aay thing else, it slvtt.7% cotoiea after otoo, my, t» 
Via Uro df the euiwpWW #«m»^ wuvma V>K\iaed\ 
'm, ami ta (he) fdkowt lay. 



THE TONQA LANGUAGfi. iitft 

Th^ alsofbrm parts of compound words t m tHamy', iatatoo^ 
and talangi, which signify to tell, say, or disclose ; but liie first, 
from taia and my, means, to inform me or us ; the second, from 
tola and atoo, to inform thee, or you ; the third, from tala and 
angi, to inform him, her, them. 

As the words my, atoo, and angi, involve the idea of the per- 
son, the personal pronoun is dften not expressed ; as, my means^ 
give to me, instead of saying, mi/ giate atu 

ADVEKB& 

Most of the adverbs are formed from adjectives by tbe addi* 
tion of fucca (mode, or nuinner), or ange (like, or similar to) : 
when the former is used, it constitutes the first part of the ad- 
verb ; when the latter is adopted, it forms the latter part t fior 
examples, 

MamafSs. Heavy. Mamafa-ange. Hea^y. 

UML Good. Lille-ange. Well. 

MalohL Strong. Malohi-ange. Strongly. 

Vy.vy. Weak. Vf-v^-ange. Weakly. 

Toa. Brave. Fucca^toa. Bravely, 

liatta-matta tow. Warlike. Fucca matta-matta tow. In a 

warlike manner. 

Ita. Aneer. Fucca-ita. Angrily. 

Bitnco. Lasy» Fucca-bibico. Lazily. 

In the formation of the greater part of adverbs that are thus 
derived, these affixes may be used indifferently ; or, to speak 
more explicitly, any of them may be formed by arhge, used as a 
suffix, and the greater part by fucca, used as a prefix : but aa 
fucca is oflen employed to form verbs and adjectives, as may be 
seen in the Vocabulary by the list of words beginning with it, 
the adoption of it is not so safe as that of angt : for instance, 
UUi means good ; but fucca litU means peace, peaceful, to make 
a peace ; we must therefore say, lille ange, for v)ell» 

As there are several adverbs, chiefly those of time and place, 
which are not formed according to the foregoing rules, it would 
be well to sutgoin a list of them. 

Be. Only. Ik^ obito. NotatalL 

Behe; tatt6wbe. In like man- Abd. Perbapa. 

ner. MalSe. Well. 

Tete. Almost. Md6ni-ange. Truly. 

Fefe. How. Gi-fe; i-fe. Where; whither. 

Foofr4>e. Universally I wholly. Heiu. Here; this place. 
Fucca taha. Together. Gi«heni. Hither; to thU^l5MA^ 

Gdbe; gelie-geha^ fiepnmiely* B«&ai» T^aMV'^u^^'i^'^ 



xxviii A GRAMMAR OF 

Gi-beoft ; gi-he. Thitber ; to Tow-botoo gi hsiia. Oo that 

that place. side. 

Gi-lota Within. Grebe. Differently; elsewhere; 

Gi-tooa. Without otherwise. 

Gi-botoo ; tow-botoo. On one He aho coeni ; he ahoni. To- 
side, day. 
Gi-hage; gi-aloonga. Upwards. Aho- be; ahoange-be. Daily. 
,Gi-hifo; gi-lalo. Downwards. Abongi-boAgi. To-morrow. 
Gi-mooa ; mooa-ange. For- Anifo6. Last night 

wards ; in front ; in presence Aniafi. Yesterday. 

o£ TokL Lately. 

Gi-mooi ; mooi-aoge. Back- Taloo. Since. 

wards; behind. Any. Presently; by-and-by.^ 

Gi^matow. To the right hand. Tegichl. Not yet ; before that. 
Gi-hema. To the left AfL When (in a future sense). 

Me-fe. Whence. Anifi. When (in a past sense). 

Me-heni. Hence. Loa. Long since; long ago. 

Me-hena. Thence. Iky. Never. 

Me-aloonga; nae-hage. From C6wca. Whilst (only used with 

above. the first person). 

Me-fai£b; me-lalo. From below. Lolotonga. Whilst (only and 
Mamaoo. Afar o£ with the second and third 

Tow-botoo gi henL On this persons). 

side. T6e. Again; orer again. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

There are but few words that, strictly speaking, come under 
this head ; and some of those that do are often not expressed. 
There are many others that partake so much of the nature of ad- 
▼erbs, that they are classed accordingly. 

My ; atoo ; angi. To, towards. The use of these has been 
already explained under the head of verbs. (See Verbs). My 
always precedes the first personal pronoun expressed or under- 
stood : atoo, the second personal pronoun : angif the third, or 
any noun. 

Gi; gia ; giate. To, at, among. These three words have 
the same signification ; but gi is used before nouns and proper 
names of places ; gia before the proper names of persons ; and 
giate before pronouns. 

Gif and gia, also signify than, being used to connect the two 
terms of comparison : before the proper names of persons, guL 
must be used. 

Gf signifies likewisCf against^ oppotite ; and about, or conarmf 

Mix With, along with, besides*. \t ia «2l«o iaok% tociqgiMliM 
*«^# it isg mortoTer, the pronoua y<mi ^mur* 



THS VaSQA UkmUXJAGJL udc 

Tm, Without; dettkote of; not having. Thb particfe is 
in Tery frequent use as a deprivative, joined to other words, Iflca 
our particles in,.un, U, lesa, &c : it always jpreeedai the word to 
which it is joined. 

Ofi, By ; at hand ; near ta 

Me» From ; as, from Vavaoo to Lefooga. 

Jl, Of, or belonging to ; but it is only used before proper 
names of persons and places ; as, malanga a Toob6, the speech 
of Toobo : he gnatoo a Vavaoo, Uie gnatoo of Vavaoo. 

Ma. For ; it is very commonly used befcnre the possessive pro- 
noun, when adopted instead of Uie personal, as, instead of say- 
ing, my ia giate au^ give it to me, we may say, mi/ ia ma acoo^ 
give it for my. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

In respect to these* we need only give a list of those that am 

in common use. 

Oiao ! exclamation of surprise. (This is a word of four syl- 
lables.) 

Seo6ke ! of surprise or astonishment ; the oo is dwelt long upon. 

Seook^! Seook^Ie! Oi£oo^! Of pity, pain, or distress; dwell- 
ing very long upon the ^ 

Oi&oo ! th^ same as above ; dwelling long upon the oo as well 
as the a. 

A w-i ! of pity, pain. 

W6i! of wonder. 

"Wi! of disgust; fye! 

Isa ! of anger, vexation, and rage ; dwelling long upon the i, 

Tangi mo6ni ! a sort of oath ; solemnly declaring the truth. 

Fiamo-aloo ! beeone ; out of my sight. 

N4>n^ ! no wonder. 

Xe ! yes indeed ; well. 

O'ooa! forbear; sofUy. 

NUMERALS. 

1 taha. 10 ongofooloo, or ooloOb 

2 ooa. 20 ooa ongofooloo, or ooafooloo. 

8 toloo, 90 toloo ongofooloo. 

4 fa. 40 fa ongofooloo. 

5 nima. 50 nima ongofooloo. 

6 ono. 60 ono ongofooloo. 

7 fitoo. 70 fitoo ongofooloo. 
i valoo. to valoo on^fooloQ^ 

9 hirj» tf^ \i&.^<nk ock^filtwS^w^^ 



ixx A GRAMMAR OF 

100 tStuM. 1000 afe. 
200 ooa gnfe'&oo. 2000 ooa afe. 
dOO tcdoo gne JLOO. 3000 toloo afe. 
400 & gneaoo. 4000 fa afe. 

10,000 mano. 20,000 ooafooloo mano. 

1 1,000 mano mo afie. 30,000 toloo ongofooloo mano* 

12,000 mano mo ooa afe. 40,000 fa ongofooloo manow 

13,000 mano mo toloo afe. 100,000 giloo. 

In respect to further combinations of these numbers, they nm 
thus: 

1 1 ongofooloo ma taha. 21 ooafooloo ma taha. 

12 ongofooloo ma ooa. 22 ooafooloo ma ooa. 

13. ongofooloo ma toloo. 31 toloo ongofooloo mataluu. 

14f ongofooloo ma fa. 41 fa ongofooloo ma taha. 

101 teaoo ma taha. 1001 afe ma taha. 

120 teaoo ma ooafooloa 1 100 afe ma teaoo. 

121 teaoo ma ooafooloo ma taha. ' 1800 afe ma valoo gneaoo. 

95,741 Hiva manOf ma nima afe, mafitoo gntdoo, ma fa ongo^ 
fooloot ma taha : that is, nine ten-thousands, and five thou- 
sand, and seven hundred, and four tens, and one. * 
It must be observed, that tiiere are two wordv for ten, vis. 
ongofooloo and oo/oo, which may be used indifferently for that 
number simply ; but in combinations the former only can be 
adopted. For twenty there are also two words, viz. ooa ong^' 
fooloo, and ooafooloo, either of which may be employed in comr- 
bination with the digits. In regard to the number of a hun- 
dred, tidoot it is never used in ^e plural, pit&oo being substi- 
tuted for it : thus, 200 cannot be expressed by ooa tUdoo, but 
ooa gn'tdoOt 

In counting out ytms and fish, they reckon by pairs, io the 
particular method explained in the Vocabulary under the word 
tec6w. 

What are called ordinal numbers they express by putting the 
article ke immediately before the number. This indeed is one 



* Their capability of expressing such high numbers in thii 

decimal mode appears to be suspected by some readers ; but we 

ought to reflect, that a people .who are in the frequent habit of 

counting out yams, &c. to the amount of one, two, or thres 

thottsand, must become to\erab\>f fgjOcA ii\im«c«.VQiT%> by findiqg 

•ii^iomt method of rfindenng ih« isflk c( oo>iTx>aA%xi»st%«H)x 



THE TONGA LANGl^AGE. mi 

oodtf of fbnning the plural (see vouks) tlm% ako e toioOf or 
ho he toloo, means the third day, whilst it also numifies three 
ays ; but the sense in most instances sufficiently points out the 
istinction. 

In connecting cardinal words by the conjunction and, they 
enerally use the word ma instead of moy except before afe, a 
lousand, when mo is more commonly used. The conjunction 
a is, however, never employed but for connecting numbers. 
>n other occasions, this word is either the preposition Jhr, or 
le name of a certain preparation df food. 

It may appear strange that they have particular names for 
ich high numbers as 10,000 and 100,000, mano, and gUoo, for 
ley certainly have no use for them. They often have occa- 
on to count yams to the number of a thousand, or more, and 
•metimes to Uie amount of two or three thousand, but never 
gher. M. Labillardiere, however, has had the perseverance 

interrogate the natives, and obtain particular names for num- 
Ts as high as 1,000,000,000,000,000 ! ! Here, however, he 
IS overshot the mark, and instead of names of numbers, has 
dy furnished us with names of things very remote from his spe- 
lations at that time : for 1,000,000 he gives us nanoo, which has 
» meaning that we can discover ; for 10,000,000 laocUaif which 
ould be looSh (according to our spelling), which means the prse- 
itium ; for 100,000,000 laminmia (low noa) which means non-' 
ise : 1,000,^)00,000 liagvee, which we take for liagiy and is the 
me of a game played with the hands, with which probably he 
ide signs ; for 10,000,000,000 tolo tafai (tole ho fie), for which 
* the Vocabulary : 1,000,000,000,000 lingha (linga) see the Vo- 
bulary : for a higher number they give him nova (ihe glans pe- 
i): for a still higher number, kaimaau (ky ma ow), by which they 
1 him to eat up the things which they have just been naming to 
n ; but M. Labillardiere was not probably the first subject of 
a sort of Tonga wit, which is very common with them. In 
s other numbers he is tolerably correct, except in putting 
oo for mano^ and mano for giYoo. His general accuracy in 
^MCt to the numbers does him great credit. 

SYNTAX. 

To enter minutely into this subject, according to the usual 
m of grammars, would perhaps tend rather to perplex the 
imory than to assist the judgment ; for we are not treating of 
anguage the rules of which have been before systematically 
restigated and written down; -w^ «t^ ^\. '^x^skoX. ^'^ *^»- '^'^ 
t ofmukiDg an invejtigation/vtL ^YacV^'fcX^^sitVa.Tw:^^""**?;^ 

■ i 



xnii A GRAMMAR OP 

to accompany us. * General rules have already beta givta aft^ 
' der each part of speech ; we shall now therefore merely fiimub* 
few other ob enrations in r^ard to construction, and give a finr 
of the more difficult idioms of speech ; and in order that Ibt 
reader may be better enabled to construe the ensuing spedmoM 
of composition, and thereby arrive at the genius of the 1angiia|% 
a strictly literal translation will be adjoined to each. 

1. In the first place, it must be noticed, that the tenaei of 
▼erbs are oilen confounded ; the future is frequently used fiff 
the present, and the present for the past ; thus, 1 do nctkfumi^ 
rendered in Tonga by iki/' teoo t/oa, liteially, I shall not Inun, 
The present tense is generally used for the past, when tiie K^ 
tion spoken of hc^ipened not long before. 

2. llie future tense is also often used to express shouldt wtuUt 
likewise can, could : thus, iky' teoo aloo, I cannot go ; capkt 
tenne aloo^ if he should ga 

3. When the future tense is used to express can, oonld, 
would, should, &c. and the n^^tive is connected vdth it; dM 
latter always comes immediately before the sign of the tense ta 
It must also be observed, that, in this application of the futnii^ 
the second class of personal pronouns (or those which fblknr 
verbs, and may be Englished by myself, thyself, &c.) may eidMr 
be used or not, in addition to those that come beforv the vaifcb 
Note also, that in this form of the future the third person unfffk' 
lar is always tenne, &c, : for example, * 

Iky' teoo aloo (gita) ; I can, could, would, or should not gft 

Iky' tegger aloo (coy') ; thou canst, wouldst, or should Ml 
go. 

Iky' tenne aloo (ta) ; he can, could, would, or should notflOb 

Iky^ te mow aloo (gimSwoooj or g;im6iot6loo) g we can, cooU, 
would, or should not go. 

Iky' tet6w aloo {^gU6wooa, or gitSwtSloo); we cauy couU^ 
would* or should not go. 

Iky' tem6 aloo (^gimoooOf or gim6t6loo) s ye can^ ood^ 
would, or should not go. 

Iky ten6w aloo (ginowooa, or ginSwtSloo) ; they cany coulil 
would, or should not go. 

Where the use of the pronouns gUa, coy, to, gim6wooat &c. ii 
<|uite optional : if this form of tense is used interrogative^i 
there is no distinction but in the tone of voice. 

4^ When veibs of the same tense are repeated in a senteBM^ 

* Mr Mariner of course only obtained a practical knowle^* 
cftbe language, for the nadves \hemcelves have no odier. I 
^vs itopended upon bim to funnAi tda wVQd ^^m^l tiwwi^wditiift^ 
jud upon this Oie whoU of Om igivcMiD^VEnsM^^^ia^aXRSft.. 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. zzziii 

«r even in ieve»l consecutive sentencesy the lign of the tense ia 
oAen left out, except in the first. 

5. The personal pronouns that come before vertM, (see Pao- 
vouxs), and are agents of verbs, are sometimes omitted ; but 
then the corresponding personal agents that follow verbs are 
used instead ; as, low gUa, I think, instead of ic lou^^ ; where it 
is seen that the sign of the tense is also omitted : ca tooanf^ 
git6va6loo gi he h^oanfra, whilst we stand near the descent, (upon 
the heights) : here gitowtoloo follows the verb tooangCj but tow 
does not come before it. 

6. The agent to the verb in the third person singular, whe- 
ther pronoun, proper name, or noun, always follows the verb, 
and even other words sometimes intervene : as, na fecow giaie 
ginou^oloo leva TangeUoa, Tangaloa ordered to them accordingly. 

7. The possessive pronoun, when a noun follows, usually has 
the article [U'eceding it: as^ he now vaca, the their canoes. 

8. Coco, which signifies that ist that is it, the very same, is 
oAen separated, co being put at the beginning, and ia at the end 
of the sentence : as co he Ico ntooni ioy thai is the true watching 
or guarding ; literally, is the watch true that, 

9. The particle be may generally be Englished by one of th^w 
conjunctions, and, also, or .* often it may be translated only : 
particularly when it comes at the end of any member of a sen- 
tence, or before the pronoun ia : it is frequently a mere exple- 
tive. For the explanation of co and coe, see the Aetxcls. Mo 
may ^ther be the conjunction and, or the pronouns tfou, your ; 
or the preposition with. The particle nc is occasionally annexed 
to words for euphony's sake : as, n^one for nrfoy to dwell or re- 
main, &C. ; but the e of this particle is scarcely pronounced ; it 
serves, however, to lengthen the o, and the syllable/o/te is then 
pronounced like our words cone, prone, the same with tacotone 
for tacoto ; behene for behe, &c. 

10. Msny of the minor parts of speech are often omitted ; 
such as u^ichy thai,, since, tt-i/A, in, is, are, he, she, it, &c. 

As to particular idioms of speech, we shall take them, more or 
less, in the order in which they occur, in the ensuing pieces of 
composition. 

1 1 . Halo is a term of sal utation , approbation, and good wishes : 
it m^y mean welcome, well done, well borne, well sa\d, &c. 
"When one person visits another, the latter says, malo your com- 
ing or arrival : the otiier answers, malo your staying hero : so 
they may say, malo your harangue or speech ; malo your work. 
Xf a man has borne a siu^cal operation with fortitude, they will 

&ay to him, malo your patience or fortitude. 

12. The figure of speech ^\nc\i ^raxcanaaruisA cTfi^«»&?$«ss»^ 
s my much lued in the Tongi^ \ui^^<^ ^^it \sss»KiS^^^^^^ 



xxsir A GRAMMAR OF 

on dM molt eommon and tbe moet MrUmt ocewigwi. If Aqr 
wiflh to express how great any tbing is, tbey call h litHef «• 
bow many there are, Imw few. Instead of saying, what a nnB> 
her of yams are here, they will say, here is only one yam I Ar 
I love you much, / don't love you at all: hence the word dUt* 
dofth a term of aiiection and endearment, is derived ftvm dd 
atoo ofa, signifying, literally, small towards you (^my)lmfei M 
really meaning my love for you is very great. Several exMi* 
pies of this figure occur in Finow's speech to the Vavaoo pea>- 
ple on his accession to the government. The sense of the em» 
text, or tiie manner or voice of the speaker, alwajrs suffidefll^ 
indicates what is truly meant This fig>ire is also used in dmim 
sion, and it must be acknowledged they have a vein for inniy. 

13b If a man is very brave, it is an usual form of phrase to 
say, he is the only brave man : if a woman is very beaatifti^ 
she is the only beautiful woman, and so with other things. 

I4k There are several fiuniliar phrases which often occur hi 
eenversationf some of which it would be difficult to undenlMii 
from a literal translation ; such as, 
Coe low ; they say ; it is said thai: 
Coe md6ni : true ; it is true. 

Co ho mtf6ni ; it is yoiur truth ; you are in the righl 
Gooa mU ; very welL 

Na ger if6 f where hast thou been ? where wert thon ? 
Na if(g ia ? where has he been ? where was he ? 
Ikf chi ; not so much as a little ; not at all ; also (bj anti^lnii 

sis) a great deal. 
C6wck aloo au ; whilst I go. Here is anothtf instance of Ai 

pronoun au following the verb^ instead of the proDOon H 

coming before it. 
Tkf obito ; not at all ; by no means. 
Coehi ? what ? it means also, what is tbe matter. 
Gooa te 11116 ai ; am I good there ; i. e. I am glad of it. 
He mea coia covi ; the thing that bad ; i. e. I am sony fife It 
Coeh& na ia: I wonder at it This seems an obscure idiom i 

its etymology is probably thus, coihd/ what I na was^ « 

it? (so.) 
In Finow*s speech, which is given the last, there are sevcnl 
phrases difficult to translate; for it is not only the finest pieoi 
of composition, but it has more idioms than those which precedt 
it ; for which reason it is placed after the others ; and to rente 
it more easy to be understood, we here explain those phnMi 
which are the most difficult to comprehend. 

1^ He MOW-MOW HAl TOOIOO RS vow XAI TOOOOO m VAcnt 

w vala'i I he motiMnoip, the desfcrafi^yoBiji iuu« ^3ea ^^ of tfai 
iM^ and te FcoiMM&i«0»'^\ t«AM»^ WBiaftL^i^^ 



THE TONGA LANOliAGE. 

which has ipniiig firom ; he totn^ the war ; lottocgoo, tmeeasing ; 
hg tmado, the chief lying prostrate (metaphorically, dead) ; gi 
mHaif in the mal^d or place where lus grave was ; i, a* the de- 
struction (which) has been caused by tiie war unceastog (of) the 
prostrate chief (now) in the malai. 

16. Co LOLOTONOA BMi ; lolotongOf period, duration ; eni, tUa; 
i. e. now is the time. 

17. GooA FT-rr bba-ba ? Gooa, the sign of the present tense 
used for the past ify'fyy to keep doing, to be incessantly doing ; 
hii^^dj and what ? or, and what is the result ; L e. we have been 
doing a great deal, (waging wars, &c.) and what good results 
Croni iti 

18w Taha hb foo eoi mo taxoata iow aooA taw ! To&a, 
one ; he foo egU the great chief; mo tangata towf and warrior; 
^ooa tawt is fallen ; meaning (by antiphrasis), most of the great 
chiefs and warriors are fallen ! 

19l Co bb loto ah a'i i Cohe /olo, it is the disposition (x wish ; 
oA^'fOfwhom? whose wish or intention is it? meaning, how 
could it be helped ; it has happened in spite of our disposition 
to the contrary. 

20. Ilomoa bk tanoa'ta : Uoftga, a mark, sign, or diaracter ; 
he^ only ; tangata^ (of) a man, (the wisdom of a man) ; i. e. it 
is a manly or noble characteristic. 

21. Hb MBA coxa tai low-no'a : hetnea, (it is) a thing; coto, 
truly ; teU low-noa, not at all fbolibh i meaning, (by antij^uaaia), 
it is a thing exoeedinf;ly foolish. 

22. TooMOA MBA ; toongOf a sign of the plural number of ani- 
mate beings ; mea, things, affairs ; Utonga meOf is used idio- 
matically to express persons, people. 

23L O'ooA VA MO MAKATOO GI HB TOW ; 6ooa, desist : na^ in 
case that ; mo manatoot you (are) thinking ; gi he towt about 
war ; i. e. in case that, or if your thoughts are bent upon war ; 
desist, or give up those thoughts. 

24. Ofa-bb ; Oh that ; would to God ; let but : a contra- 
traction for ofa-be ho egij which is an idiom of speech praying 
the gods to show so much love or mercy as to permit that, &c 

25. L.AHI Lk'vA hb tow GNO'oOE, TATTO'w-BE MO lA HE TOW 

TOA : lahi leva, great accordingly ; he tow gndooe^ our agricul- 
tural works ; tcUtow-be, in like manner ; mo to, with it ; he fotff « 
toa, our bravery ; meaning, as the cultivation of our land be- 
comea improved, our bravery in like proportion will become 
greater, as we shall have something worth fighting for. 

26. Cob lbo mo6ni ia ; coe Uo, the guarding ; mooni, true ; 
la, that : that ia the true guarding (he towfonno^fh of our land\> 
i^udisxff to the above meSiod, cmtiva.\in^\\. , 

9^0'mU on JTA MO BUB BB MO UWO\ Wka\^W«*^N ^^^"^^ 



zzzri A GRAMMAR OF 

little ; na mo behe, in case you uy ; he mto lote, in your 'nAoi^ ; 
In case you say in your minds (so and so)* desist a little firam . 
so saying ; meaning (by andphrasis), desift wboUy or entiiely j 
from sayings &c. 

28. Mo MANATOOy CA lv'a ATOO LWA AU, COK FUCCA-OVOO I 
AToo ia, hb loto A ToB OoMDO, MO Afoo, &c. ; mo monntK, I 
recollect ye ; ca lea, whilst speak ; atoo leva au, to you accord* | 
ingly I ; coefucca-onga is the echoing ; atoo^ to you ; to* it,' 
he latOf (of) the minds ; a Toe Oonioo^ mo, AfoOy Scc^ of Tot ^ 
Oomoo and Afoo, &c. Recollect, whilst I speak to you, my voice 
only echoes to your ears the sentiments of Toe Ooinoo and Odao 
Valoo, and Afoo, and Fotoo, and Alo, and all the chie& and 
matabooles of Vavaoo. 

29* Fiu-Fiu HB MO MAKACO \JUUJUi9 choose , he mo motttei^ 
your wish ; i. e. take your choice. 

In Finow*s speech, it will be observed, that the particle ne is 
occasionally attached to the ends of words for the sake of eu- 
phony, but this has been noticed before, (9). 

The dialogue that immediately follows serves to show a ftir 
of the more colloquial phrases. It is the substance of an actml 
conversation at Vavaoo, between two young chiefs, one (tf whom 
bas just arrived from Hapai. The other pieces of compositioa 
are what have already been given in the ^English, in the iiody 
of the work, and may be referred to, to assist the sense. Tbe 
small numbers refer to the rules and idioms which have just beet 
given. The words in the Tonga part that are put in Italics ut 
either mere expletives, or else cannot be expressed in En^ub 
Tfdthout sounding so uncouthly as to darken the sense. Tht 
English words in parentheses are such as are not exprciied is 
Tonga. 

Malo fel6w my. (11) Welcome (your) voyigt 

hither. 
Malo nofo mo ho egi. Well done (your) remaining . 

with your chiefs. 
Nagerhowanifig meHapii? Did you come when fion i 

Hapai ? I 

Grooa bo ooa he mow how ; Are days two (since) out i 
na mow mohc anib6 gi Motoo. coming ; * we slept last night 

at Motoo. 
Coe vaca gnaholo ho vaca ? Is the canoe swift, your canoe? 
Seo6ke ! c6ia be taha gooa £h ! it's (the) only one i> 
^aholo he fel6w Hapai. swift ( 15) (in) thefleet of H^ ' 

II I I ■■ ■ ^i 

* Qur cominft^ here me«x)&\>e^^'^^^^^^'^''^ ^ vNafia|2^ 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. nxtu 

Low gita ooe vaca lafai a Too* Think I the caaoe Urge of 
h6 Toa gooa gnaholu be taha. Toobo Toa is swift (the) only 

one. 

Cooa ! «o mow vaca ia. Hold ! is our canoe that 

lu! cohai fooa he mo cow- Ah indeed! who all (7) your 
vaca. crew ? 

Coo mataboole co Mooala, The matabook Mooata, also 
bea mo Afoo* mo cow-tangata and Afoo, and the suit of Voo- 
It Voogi. gi. 

. Cohai he cow-fafinc gooa Who the females (that) are 
bow ? come ? 

Coe fafinc co Atoo, bea mo The woman Atoo^ also and 
Latoo Lyfotoo lea, mo — Latoo Lyf6too lea, and— 

I Seo6ke ! aena be 6e6eTooa he Ah ! she only (is) beautiAxl 
mocow-fafinc: naihowiacoiha? (among (7) your women ; has 
low-gita gooa lata be ia gi Ha- she come for what? I think is(l) 
pai. contented only she with Hapoi. 

Co ho mo6ni! coe fonnooa True! (14) is the /ant/ only 
be gooa lalaia ia, ca iky teggcr contents her, for not (1) shall 
iloagooamamanagihetamachl you know (she) is enamoured 
00 Papaoi. with the young man Papani. 

Ne-ne enne how ! hamoochia No wonder her coming! (how 
he tama. lo ! coh&i mo ia. I) envy the youth ! well ! who 

with her ? 

Coe fafinc co Paloo, bea mo The woman Paloo, also and 
Ihfiue ToBga co Feklka. the Tonga woman Fekika. 

Coe fafine Tonga i na mo gi The Tonga woman ! hacve been 
Tonga. you at Tonga ? 

Na mow gi-ai ; co gim^w- We have been there ; (they 
t61oo na capachia he colo co were (ourselves (who)did besiege 
Nookoo Nookoo. the fortress (of) Nookoo Noo- 

koo. 

Nai toca lahi he mo cow-tow ? Was it a body large (7 ) your 
cobai mo gim6t61oo. army ? who (were) with you. 

Co gim6wt61oo be, bea moe TThere were) we only, also 
cowtangata a Ata me Hihifo. and the adherents of Ata from 

Hihifo. 

Coh& fooa gooa cafo? Who all are wounded ? 

Gooa toca Uhi Atf mow cafo; Are persons many, or wound- 
coe toonga jiena fa fanna he ed ; the men (were) dever (at 
colo : gooa mate be tangata co the) bow, (of) the fortress ; are 
Falo, bea mo Boboto ; he gooa killed, the man Falo, also and 
cafo covi he tama co P6w&o6, Bobota; and are wounded badly 
bea Panafi. the youth Powfoo6, also Panafi. 

Seook^ I mow-mow he toon- Mba\ 6mftxo<)^VE%V3fiaaB:^ 
jM ttngam Urn* tant XMOl'^ 

win, u, A 



nxTiii A OBAMMAB OF 

CohomMiii! ^ooamown^o IVm ! we ramflin ngi 
maiMtpo bfc giate gin6wt6kx>» only towards tbem. 

Coe fitfine me-fe, h^ fofine iia The woman from wher 
ger low my. woman you spoke tome (a 

He fa6ne oo Fekika ? The woman FekikA? 

C6iab6. The same. 

Coe ftfine me Mafimga ; ik^ The woman from MaC 
tegger manatoo he fafine mat- not shall (I) you rememb 
tahooa gi he abi a Motoo Lalo ? woman beautiful at the be 
nai tani mama he bo na tow Motoo Lalo 7 she held th« 
mohe gi-ai. the night we slept there. 

Nai tamachi he faiine c6ia ! Was a child the woman 

Nai ge tamachi, lolotonga ho She was yet a child, c 
nofo gi Tonga be gooa foo loa your stay at Tonga, and ia 
bo nofo gi Yavaoo. very long your residence i 

vaoo. 

Coe tppia ah&i he fiifine The child whose, the f 
c6ia? that? 

Coe tama he mataboi^ co Is the child (of) tbe 
Fotao, boole Fotoo. 

Coe law, gooa toe obito ia. They say, is brave ezce 

lyhe. 

Coe m56ni ! na^ toloo enne It ia true ! he had tfai 
cafo be tow towgi Nooko Noo- wounds (in) our battle al 
)coa koo Nookoo. 

Te mo wo afl&gi Hapai? Shall you go when to J 

Ik^ teoo iloa: coe low, te Not shall I know (1) 
mow tatali heni bo yaloo bea say shall we remain hen 
qngofooloo. or ten days. 

E^ooap-ger fget aloo teoo ttfoo When you are about t 
be mea ma 6ooco fiie gi-ei will give (to you) some 

for my mother there. 

OooalillA Very well! 

Toir ^ gi he faye gt loto&> Let us go to the cava 

the fAicing. 

|0|#pwwp. ¥e8p letiiago. 



The following is the sUnj of fangalpa apd his two so 
lated p, 1 15 of this volpme, 

Tomooe paky^ hefotmo^Of Pint pe9pHng the tat 

Coe hotooa co 'frnpHtm, mo The gpd Tangaloa, s 
f^onp foba toca* 00a j^ now ions two, did they dwell 
pafi> gi BolotoOf Iptoo, . 

\f ^^Jf^gn of tbe pkprai niuibef of mtieV^^^iA ^rs 



CJoeUmabotoobito; coiana 
tomooa gnahi he togi, moe coo- 
la, moe papalangi, moe jiawta. 



Coe tama, fy gehe obito, co 
Toob6 ; fucca bico-bioo. 



nofo 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. 

Now nofo-nofb bea low leva They (bad)' dwelt (a kmg 
Tangaloagi ennefobatOGa-ooa, time) when spoke accordingly 

Tangaloa to bis sons two. 
Aloo gim6ooa mo ho ohana, Go both with tout wives, and 
mo nonofo gi mama gi Tonga, dwell in the woiid at Tonga* 

** Vahe oOa he fonnooa, be ** Divide Tinto) two the land» 
mo nonofo gehe-gehe : ** now and you dwell separately :**. they 
aloo leva. went accordingly. 

He hingoa he jiena lahi co The name (of) the person 
T0ob6; he hingoa he jiena chi, large; (i e. the elder) (was) 
CO Vaca Ac6w*4>oli. Toboo ; the name (of) the per- 

son little; (i. e. the younger)* 
(was) Vaca Aoowooli. 

Was the young man (the lat* 
ter) wise exceedingly; was he 
did first make axes, and the 
beads, and the papalangi (doth), 
and the looking-glass. 

The young man did different- 
ly very, (vii.) Toobo ; (he was) 
lasy. 

Remained walking about only 
he ; and sleeping, and envying 
exceedingly the works (of) his 
elder bnMher. 

Tired (of) beg^ng his things 
he bethought himself to kill 
him, and concealed (hiinscdf) to 
effect his evil (purpose). 

Met(he)accordingly &e walk* 
ing, his brother, (and) struck<*he 
(him) accordingly to death. 

At that time coming their fk - 
ther from Bolotoo with great 
anger exceeding. 
Asked then he. Why have you 
tamate ho tehina ? iky tegger killed your brother ? not could 
gnaooe coy &ngec6ia? wi! moe you work (3) like him? fye! 
covi ! fiamoaloo ! and wicked ! begone ! 

Talangi gi hecow-meaa Va^ Tell to the family of Vaca 
ea Ac6w ooli : talangi ger now Acowobli : tell (them) titat they 
how giheni. come hither. 

Now how leva, bea fec6w gi- They came accordingly, when 
ate gin6wt61oo leva Tangaloa : commanded to ^«s&. ^3ds^*\.«&c> 

ga\oa\ 
JIfaifo (oho vaca gitahi; TOO "toa %o V^smSY^jkn^o. w»s 



eva^-eva beia, moe 
moe manaco obito he 



Na 
mohe, 
gn4ooe enne towgete. 



Fioo he cawle enne mea, ma- 
natoo ger tamatea, mo toi-ioi 
ger fi6ia enne covi« 

FeccatagI leva he eva enne 
tehina, t^ia leva ger mate. 

Lolotonga he how now tam*- 
mf me Bolotoo moe foo ita obi- 
to* 

Fdiooi leva ia, Coehi na ger 



x\ A GRAMMAR OF 

fcluw gi tocal6w gl he fonnooa to mo; and sail to the caity ti 
lalii gi-oi, mo nonofo ai : (tlie)land great there^ and dwell 

there. 
Be mo gill tea ange-be-oo mo And your akin (be it) wbita 
loto^ coo loto lille: just like your mincC it ie amind 

good: 
Tc mo boto^ gnafai togi, moe Shall yon (be) wise, makiag 
coloa fooU-be, be mo vaca laht axes, and riches all-whatsoevei^ 

and also canoes laige. 
Cowca aloo au talangi gi he In the mean time, go I (to) 
matangi ger how me mo fou- tell to the wind that (it) coma 
nooa gi Tonga. from your land to Tonga. 

Ik^ cbi te DOW fel6w giate (But) not little, (i. e. not all) 
gim6t61oo moe now vaca covL shall they sail to you with tbeir 

canoes bad. 
LeA^ngi leva Tangaloa gi he Spoke thus Tangaloa to tba 
towffete,te(^;erooli-oolio03f,oo elder brother, shafi yoo (be) 
mo k>to covi ; be ger sese, black, as your mind (is) bad; 

and you (shall be^ destitutSL 

Jkf obito tegger moa lill^ Not much sbafl ypu (bsvf) 

ik^ teggcr aloo gi he fonnooa things good ; not shall you gp 

ho tehma; fefe tm^r aloo ai, to the land (of) your brother; 

moe mo vaca covi r how can you go there with your 

canoes bod ? 
Co ho tchina be tenne how gi Your brother only shall come 
Tonga f6cait6w mo gim6t61oo. to Tonga to trade wi|h you* 



The following is l^e song of which the translation waa given 
in the first volume, p. 244, it belpngs to the Nuha modo of com- 
position. (See chap. IX. of this vol.) 

Blow nofo-nofo talanda gia We remained talking aboat 
Vavaoo Tooa Licoo bea bdie Vavaoo Tooa Lieoo whcB said 
my he toonga laftne^ to us the women, 

Tow aloo fononga gi Licoo Let usjgo fa) walk to Ueoo^ 
ger mamata he hifb he uA : tow that (we may; behold the gafaig 
fonongo gi he maboo he manoo down (of) the sun : we (will) 
mo he tangi he Ipobe. listen to the singing (or) the 

birds, and the lamentations (of) 
the wood-pigeon. 
Tow toU he cacala gi he hi- Wo will gather flowen near 
fiiinga gl Matawto. t)tie pTedv\c<& «x.^^&»x««\a. 

Tow tiofo^nafo bea tow toofa VJ^i <^^VV^ tcnvw^ %»& -«% 
» tato/i oniir me Licoo One. C>^\\^ ^^"^ f^"^ ^'^ ^^^^^5?* 

cowconr gi talii, bea tow W« (.-^\>^V«^ V,^ ^ « 



THE TONGA LANOtTAGE. ait 

IflDOo' gi ha Vaoo Aca mo tow and we (will) Time in the Vaoo 
tak^ hi fkngo nanamoo: tow Aca, and we (will) anoint (with) 
tooi cacala, mo tow fi he chi A« oil sweet-scented : we (will) 
tow toli me Matawta string flowers, and we (will) 

plajt the chi (which) we (have) 

plucked from Matawto. 

Ca tooange git6wt61oo gi he Whilst (are) standing w6 up* 

hifoanga gi Ana Maiioo, tow on the precipice at Ana Marnxv 

jio hifo mo tai-manava * gi he we (will) look down without 

mamaoo he tahi gi-lalo» breath, in the distance (upon) 

the sea below. 

Gooa tow loto ma n a t oo, he As our minds (are) reflecting, 

foo roatangi gooa roabooange the great wind whistles towards 

my me he foo toa gi toogoo oota us from the great (lofty) Toiu 

gi tafanga-fanga. trees in the inland upon the 

plains. 
Gooa te loto lahi f he mamata Is (to) me (the) mind larg% 
he gnaloo gi-lalo, footeange beholding the surf below, eop* 
noa*ai be ger lyigi he macca deavouring in vain to tear away 
ibfeca. the rocks firm. 

Ha mea coia covi be tow no* The thing that bad (by periph. 
fone (9) gihenofogiateginow- goodf vis.) the our state (i. e* 
toloo gi Mooa. thus ^employed) to (i. e. coia- 

pared with) the state among 
tho9e at the Mooa. i 
Gooa ifi-«fl, tow aloo gi Mooa: (It) is evenings (let) ua go to 
fonoDgo ! gooa ongo my he Ian- (the) Mooa: hark ! there sounds 
gi : gooa now aco he bo-oola to me the band of singers : are 
ger fy ab6 gi he Mal4i gi Ta- they practising a bo^ola to per- 
nea? form to-night at the Malai at 

Tanca?' 

Tow aloo gi-ai. Let us go there. 

Ik^ te tow manatoo gi he Not shall we think (by periph. 

tow oolooagi nofo^ lohMooga we shall deeply think) to our 

gooa tegicM lyigi he tow, he former state (of affairs), whilst 

tow fonnooa. not yet (had) torn the war our 

land. 
Oiaoo^ ! coe mea fuoca-m»> Alas ! (it) is a thing terrible^ 

* Breathless, meaning with wonder and astonishment, 
f Loto lahi, means here, a mind elev«!ted.'^i«>^^<& vc&:}^isfi%« 
/ To render this into more \Tvte\Vk^\A& ^tk^vSdl^-^^ -oaaa^ f^ 
press it thus : « Our state wheiv €kw» cns^^^^'^^^"^^^ S 

happy in comparison 'with the ifcrtft cA ^fiosjift «w^s^^ 

common affidn of lAfe.** 



* xlii A GRAMMAR OF 

iMTalM CO lie tow : vackjange the war ; behold U biuhy (c 
gooa v&ooa he fonnooabea gooa grown with weeds and bosluMF/ 
mate covi be toonga tangata. Uie land, and are dead aadif 

many men. 

Gooa nofo noa ai-be ho-cgt : Are rcmuning unsettled there 
iky te now fa tango toc»-taha« our chiefs : not sliall they much 
be he mahina gi he now fcaoo- wander singly ^by) the mo^n^ 
agi. light to their mistresses. 

O'ooa-natowmanatoo-natoo: Desist us reflectins : how can 
cobfriloto gooa tow he tow fon- it be helped is (at) war our 
nooa. land. 

Co he fonnooa co Fiji nai The land (of)Fiji has brought 
omy' he tow gi he tow fonnooa the war to our land (of) Too* 
CO Tonga, bea gooa tow tooboo ga, and (as) it is, let us act po? 
leva ange-co giniSwt6Ioo. cordingly like them ; (i. e* Uks 

the Fiji people). 

Oooa na tow manatoo«natoo, Desist us (being) melancholy 
tow mate ab6 abougi-bongi. (i. e. let us be merry), we (shall 

be) dead perhaps to-morrow. 

Tow Yala he chi-coola bca Let us dress (with) the dii* 
tow nawagi he tapa he gnatoo, coola, and let us bind our waists 
tow. J he &w he tow tooi jiftie, with tapa (of) the gnatoo : we 
bca tow cabooa he hooni gcr (will) put on the head-dresf 
fucc»-h4^ge tow gnano-gnano. (made of) our strung jiale- 

flowers , and (put on) our neck- 
laces (of) the hooni-flower to 
show off our sun-coloured skinik 

Fonongo-ange he mavava he Listen to the applauses (o() 
toonga ky fonnooa. the multitude : (i. e. mark bow 

they praise us;. 

Gooa hili he oola ; he gooa Ncm' is ended the oola ; and 
toofa he genanga he tow ca- (they) are distributing the ma- 
tooanga.; tow aloo alxmgi-bon- terials (of) our feast : let ut go 
gi gi mooa. to-morrow to tlie mooa. 

iky he holi-my be toonga Not (arc) eager towards us 
tangata cawleange tow twinga (meaning, are very eager) the 
cacala, bea beheonge he now ^young) men begging our 
laboo my. wreaths (of) flowers, and thus 

their ijattcry towards us. 

** He-mea-coia tai 6e6efooa They (are) not beautiful, our 

he tow toonga fafinc me Licoo, (young) women (coming) fnun 

iky he I Hie he uow gili gnagnana Licoo, * not good their skins 

£^ooa tdttow he now nanamoo sun-coloured ; is to be compar- 

• ^flfy^ />t'rjpljrasis) our vounp womciiiio«i\AW»w^«»ft^* 
. Ji^fy bfrnutifulg the complexioix oC thw ^JiMAMk'^wi ^fvo^U.^., 



THB TONGA LANGUAGE. xHH 

mo he btfoanga gi Matalocomo ed their franrnmcc^ with the pre* 
Vybooa, gooa te holi ger aloo cipicc at Mataloco, and Vy- 
gi Licoo, tow aloo git6wt61oo booa : I am anxums to go to 
aboogi-bongu ** JLicoo : let us go (we) oorselvei 

to-morrow. 



The following is the speech which Finow the Second made 
on his coming into power ; it may be considered the best piece 
pf Tonga composition. See vol. I. p. 323. 

Mo fonogo my gim6t61oo, Ye, listen to me, chiefs and 
Ho-Egi, mo Tangata tow ! warriors ! 

Cap6w gooa ai taha giate gi- If there be one among yon is 
m6t61oo gooa tu-lata he tow discontented (with) our state (of 
nofone (9)co lolotonga eni (16) aft'airs) now is the time to go to 
ger aloo gi Hapai ; Hapai ; 

Ca iky' obito teoo ioogo he For not at all will I permit 
taha ger nofo gi Hafooloo How one to remain at Hafooloo How 
mo enne loto tai-lata mo fealoo* witli his mind discontented and 
ftgi. wandering. 

Na mainafa ecoo loto he ma- Has been heavy my mind, bo- 
mata he fbo mow-mow nai too- holding the great destruction 
boo he tow taitoogoo he tacoto has caused the war unceasing 
gi Malai (15). (of^ the prostrate chief in the 

Malaif 

Gooafy-fybea-ha? gooa tai- We have been doing mudi, 
raky' gooa vaooa he fonnooa, be and what is the consequence ? 
gooa iky' talia ger enne gnoooo; (17) is unpeopled and overrun 
cani tow nofo Ulley nai caky' with weeds tlic land, and (there) 
y.be. i^ not one to its culture ; if wo 

(had) rcm»ned peaceful, it 
( would )have been populous still. 

Taha he foo Egi mo tangata- One the great chief and war- 
tow |rooa taw! mo tow nofo rior is fallen! (i. e. many, (18) 
fuccataha mo he tooa ; co loto and we remain associated with 
aliAi f the tooas ; how can it be hdlp- 

ed? (19). 

Gooa tow loto-vale ! low-sita Are we mid ! I think is yet 
gooa ge chi he tow miiooine (9). little (i.e. already too short) 

I longa be tangata bea nofo ia our lives, 
ger fucca-manaco, mo fuoca- It is a manly characteristic 
lata enne nofone (0). (20) when remains he (i. e. a 

man) to 1)e fond (of) and con- 
tented (^with'\ U\s sta&XQicw <^\2M»t\* 

He wcai coia tai low-noa ger \\. \s vx Wxvxv^VtqS:^ ^^^^>^^ 
fucca-Doao be men gooa tcgiichi ()»«. ^«t^ io<j!a53ci>*VL^^ft'»>' 



xUv • AGRAHMAROF 

loloa-ange ! the thingB (which) «m uoC jtk 

long (enough). ' 

Coh&i giate git6wt61oo tenne Who among you ahall tsjr (in) 
be-heenne loto « gooate fiamate his mind ** I desire dcmth ■■■I am 
^-gooa te fioo he mSo6i ? '* weary (of) life? " 

Yacky^-my ! na iky* tow ty Behold ! have we not acted 
git6w-t61oo ange-co he toonga- like people foolish-minded? 
mea (22) loto-noa ? 

Na tow goomi he mea, gooa We have been seeking tfaingi 
faoo Iboo-be he tow mea m56nL (which) depriTe (us) altogether 

(of) our true things (i. e. thingi 
really useful). 
Iky^ teoo behe-atoo giate gi- Nor will I say to you, gHrttiif 
in6t6loo, 6ooarna mo manatoo your thoughts of fighting; 
gi he tow (23). 

Ofa be (24>) ger matta-tow my Let but the front of war (ep- 
he fbnnooa, bea how nihi ger proach) towards our land, and 
▼ete he tow abi, tow fuoca-ha- come any (force) to plnadsr 
angi giate gin6vrt61oo, ca lahi our homes, we (will) mak» 
leva he tow gn6ooe, tatt^w-be shew-forth to them (that) wfailet 
mo ia he tow toa : great accordingly our agriculti»- 

ral works, in like manner wilh 
it our Lravery (85). 
Tow fy be leva git6wt61oo he Let us do accordingly, oar> 
gn6ooe, coe Ico mo6iu ia (26) selves, the agriculture (for) thst 
he tow fonnooa. is truly guarding our land. 

Oooa tow holi gi he fonnooa We are anxious towards a laoA 
gehe co-oom&? different, wherefore ' (i- e. why 

should we be anxious for an in* 

crease of territory ? ) 

Gooa lahiinge-fow he fbn- Is sufficiently great the land 

nooa coeni ger fafanga git6wt6- this for supplying food (to) ni: 

loo ; iky' chi te tow fa gena enne not little (not at all) shall we be 

tow. able to devour its produce. 

Neoo iky' abe lea<atoo fucca- I have not, perhaps, spoken 
lotoboto ; coe cow-motooa gooa to you wisely ; the elders (i. t» 
nofo-my, gooa te hoo-ange giate the matabooles) are sitting mm 
gin6wt61oo ger tala-my, cap6w me; I entreat to them that (they) 
te hala : tell me if I (am) wrong. 

Gooa te ge tamachi, gooa te I am yet a youth, I know, nol 

ila iky* teoo boto he boole cap6w should I be wise (in) gnveniing 

n&i fucca- taha acoo loto, mo he if were alike, my mind and ths 

Joto be tac6tone ^ fy-telihe mind (of) the prostrate (dead) 

tocm* taha he, iky* ger ongo gi Yia c\i\«^, \a act optionally, of oqA 

itaw Urn : ^n^*^ %aaaA^ t«fc Na \aiMa. ia 

fe^ lihMt^'M!Qra.T«t\ 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. i^ 

FoGca-letati mo gitn6t61oo he (My) tiumks for your love^ 
ofaybca-mohenofo-mowgUteia. and also fidelity Uywards him. 

Co Fiuow Fiji mo he cow»ma- Finow Fijiand the mataboolesi 
taboolegooanofo-my, nowilaw* are present, they know my fre- 
be gin6 wt^>loo ^oc^coofm fucca-fe- quent inquiries concerning (the) 
booi gi he lille he tow nof6ne(9). good (of) our government. ■ 

O'ooa china (^) mobehehe Do not say in your minda, 
mo loto,— *' ioy CO tow fonongo *' truly (do) we listen to the 
gi he lownoa he tamachi coehi ? ' silly talk (of) a boy wherefore T* 

Momaxiatoocaleaatoolevaauy Recollect ye, whilst speak to 
CO he faoca-ongo atoo ia he loto you therefore J, it is the echoing 
a Toi Oomoo, mo Ooloovaloo of the mind of Toi Oomoo, and 
mo Afoo, mo Fotoo, mo Alo, bea Ooloovaloo and Afoo, and Fotoo 
mo iboli-be he cow-Ho-^ mo and Aloy also and all the dnelb 
he mataboole he Vavaoone (38 )• and the matabooles (of) Vavaoou 

Mo fonogo my! cow fucca- Listen ye to me! I remind 
manatooratoo giate gim6t61oo ; ye,(that^ if there any-one is (of) 
^ap6w gooa ai nihi goca fon* another land, and there any^.one 
nooagehe, be gooa ai nihi gooa is discontented (with) remaining 
tai-late ger nofo fiicca4>ehene in this way, this is the only opr 
(9) CO lolptonga4)e coeni teoo portunity I will give to you to 
•too giate gim6t61oo ger aloo, depart ; for, let-pass accordingly 
ca, hili leva ooeni, ikf chi te this (occasion), not little (i. •• 
tow fel6iwigi mo Hapai ; not at all) shall we communL- 

cate with Hapai ; 

Fili^&li Icra he mo nofeaaga Choose then your dwjellin^ 
CO Siji e, CO Hamoae^ 00 Tonga places $ b Fqi there, is Hamoii 
«^ CO Hapai e, «q FqIooihi mo tbere^ is Tonga there, is Hapai 
Lotooma e> there, is Foioona and Lotooma 

there* 

Xkmga-be mea gooa loto-fucw In particular those having 
cartaha ger manaco ho nofo he minds unanimous, that they lore 
lill£ tai-toogoo^ — gin6wt4Sloo-be remaining (in) the peace un- 
to now nofo gi Hafooloo How. ceasing, they only, sliall they 

TQmain at Hafooloo How. 

Ikjr-chi tfoo behe ger lolomi Mot at all will I suppress the 
be toa he taha loto-tow. bravery (of) one warlike mind. 

Vack^-ange! he fonnooa co Behold 1 the land of Tonga 
Tonga bea mo fiji gooa nofo and of Fgi are remaining (at) 
tow 6f , mo fili-fili he mo mana> war : choose ye your wish to go 
coger aloo gi he taha, ger fy ai to the one, to perform there 
be mo toa. your bravery. 

Mo too ! taggi-taha-be aloo Arise ! each one go to hia 
gi cnnc abi, bea mo manatoo gi home also and reflect u,^i&. NSbe. 
be aloo be vaca he boogirbongi dcpaxtoxc U>t^ >^ cwctfye^ v^ 
gi Hapai, nnoROw \o- naaQt^ 



zUi A GRAMMAR OF 

Theie, it is presumed, will be found sufficient to glre the raider 
a just idea of the nature and genius of the Tonga language ; and 
will sufficiently enable him to compare it with others, to whidi 
it may be supposed to have sdme affinity ; as the Malay, for in- 
stance, or hereafter, perhaps, with those of the Fiji, the SamU 
wich, and the Society Islands ; of each of which places we ought, 
in a few y^u's« to have some better account than we have hitherto 
had ; for there are English and American people who have been 
resident at those several clusu^rs of islands for a number of yeao^ 
and, of course, ought to be perfectly acquainted with the cus* 
toms, and tolerably well venied in their laoguage. There is M 
doubt but the farther inquiry is carried into the history of thi 
South Seas, the more clearly it will appear that a very stroqg 
relationship exists between the natives of the different ialaiid% 
notwithstanding the distance of their geographical sittiatioM* 
Affinities between their serveral languages have been already 
flhown by Cook and other navigators, but under a vei^ diad* 
vantageous circumstance, the want of a free communication if 
ideas ; in consequence of which many wrong words have beta 
given ; thus, liUe is the Tonga word for gootU but Cook givii 
myfoege (my fold), which means, gwe it me if you please: ftr 
a bead he gives, aUtUioa, which should be ciUiooa : he gives iw> 
ooma (co-ooma) for the burnt circular marks in the skin ; )mt 
this word means why f for what f whilst the proper word lor 
those marks is lafa^ for to tueeze^ he gives efango (fafango)^ 
signifying, to blow the nose ; the word for sne^ng bong sia- 
fatooa : for the head, ooloo pokko (oolooboco), which means tht 
tkull : for the number 100,000 he gives laoo noa flaw-noa), 
which literally means nonsense, or foolish discourse ! From il 
least fifty to a hundred other instances of this, out of the sane 
-Vocabulary might be quoted , and the same wi^ Labillardiere'i 
Vocabulary, of which, indeed, we have already noticed a ftv 
remarkable instances. 

With respect to the Malayan language, Mr Mariner has, wilk 
great diligence and attention. Looked over the whole of the £ng- i 
'lish part of Marsden*s Malayan Dictionary, and has selected the 
following list of above sixty words, which bear a considenbto 
resemblance to the corresponding Tonga words. It is here rery 
worthy of remark, that those Tonga words which contain the 
sound of the letter/, have in its pace the letter ;i or 6 in the 
Malayan : and the above author notices, in his Preface to tfas 
same excellent work, that the Malays not having the sound / it 
thftirowa language, generally substitute p Ibr it in those adopcdl ' 
Arabic words where it occuTa. ^ 
— •* 

* The tnauitixm hoax iSimjSA^^l^^y^ Y^^os^ 



THE TONGA LANGUAGE. 



zM 



ikan 


fish 


lima 


fiye 


langau 


a fiy, (the insect) 


dahi 


forehead 


biiah 


fruit 


angin 


wind 


Im mata bilas 


goggle-eyed 


bulu 


hair of the body ;-down 


ulu 


the head 


tangga 


ladder 


ati 


liver 


kutu 


louse 


8USU 


milk ; also the breast 


mara 


misfortune 


palu 


to mix 


niamok 


mosquito 


looho matasusu 


the nipple of the breast 


tiiah 


old 


tai 


ordure 


pilih 


to choose 


ubi 


yams 


tumbuh 


to spring or grow up, as plants 


loo ber bula 


shaggy, hairy 


mala 


«ham«-faced 



at first sight appear. 3ome nations confound the f 
} ; Others the o with the 6, and others again the b vmk 
'he Germans make little or no distinction between the 
'/and V : the Spaniards have an intermediate sound of 
ind the Tonga people of b and />. The word for land 
y, is sounded by the Tonga people fonnooa ; the word 
me idea among some or the Fiji people is vonnooa^ 
lers of the same nation pronounce the first letter like 
fth sound between v and 6, and others again distinctly 
imooo, from which the transition to ponnooa would cvi^ 
I very easy. In searching for analogies between IIm 
B of the South Pacific Ocean, as they regard each 
id as they may have a relation to those of &e Asiatie 
it seemii necessary to pay particular attention not onlf 
itations of sound aboTe noticed, but also to those bo* 
3 / and f , the h and «, the hard g, kf and i, and proba- 
others : without such attention the eye «Ad ^»x \s!t»f|\iRw 
ceived, and overlook, .some "ver^ «teQifi% «sivc»o.^'w>'^«** 
mty for the Fiji pronuncVad&oik «boN^i ^n«^,V.^«^ 
gins, who was at those \fk\atid% tViwXASiti v^vs^^ks». 



xlfiia 



A GRAMMAR OF 



*oiraA. 


MALATAH. 


tvoLisa. 


l611e 


lari 


to nm 


motooa 


tuah 


aged, ancient 


efoo 


abu 


ashes 


toola 


sulah 


bald 


aloo! 


ka-hiar 


begone ! 


matta 


mata 


the blade or edge of a k 


gnignila 


niala 


to blaze 


matta gnila 


mata nila 


blear-eyed 


ila 


chela 


a mole in the skin 


acotr-fanna 


panah 


a bow 


low-papa 


papan 


aboard 


ooa 


dua 


two 


inainina 


mamah 


to chew 


fili 


pilih 


to choose, to select 


fbonooa 


benua 


land or country 


tangi 


tangis 


to weepi to slicd tcara 


mate 


mail 


dead 


toolli 


tuli 


deaf 


gele 


gall 


to dig 


matta 


mata 


the eyo 


mooi 


muda 


young 


&a 


api 


fire 


lahgl 


Ungit 


the sky 


towfa 


tufan 


a gale of wind 


telinga 


telinga 


the ear : the handle of i 


• 


iya 


he, she, it 


mafanna 


panas 


. hot, (glowing) 


aeofw 


kayu 


timber, wood 


oncofooloo 
6afooloo 


aa-puloh 


ten 


dua-puluh 


twenty 


two 


taun 


year, season 


The followiiig are nearly alike In Bound, but bare aon 


shade of difierence in their n 


leaninir. 



TOMGJU MALATAM. 



Toonoo; to roast 
Low papa ; a board. 
Fooloo he matta • the eyebrofr. 
Acoo ; the poss. pron. mine, 
Mamata; to inspect, to fiew. 
Tac&be ; poor, friendieefc 
Moto; wise. 
CatM;toUmgh» 



Tumi ; to bum. 
Loh papan ; acopy-bool 
Bulu mata ; eyelashes. 
Aku ; I. 

Mata-mata ; an inspect! 
Ter-chabe ; ragged, 
Budi ; wisdom. 
Kttak-, to speak. 



VOCABULARY, 



TONGA AND ENGLISH. 



or the Rules of Pronunciation^ see the Grammar.) 



ACO 

lice. 

or belonging to, (used 

;fore proper names of 

> and places), as Fi- 
(peech, coe malanga a 

awake. 

Pincers or forceps of 
id. 

L spider, 
ifffaaps, likely, 
ibitetion; home. 
>-night. 

ongi. To-morrow* 
root. 

kick ; a kick, 
rough ; bored through; 
:e through. 

> teach ; also to learn. 
fy own ; in composi- 
can only follow my« to 
e, as my ia ma acoo, 
me, or literally, give 
ly own. 

rood ; any sort of dub. 

6w^ a tree or plant. 

la* A particuliur kind 

r. 

ina. A bow. 

ina-tangata. A wor- 



AHQ 

Ac6w-fanna-goom4 ; a sporting 
bow. 

Acow-vaoo. A kind of spear. 

Ac6y. You : used only when 
it is the subject of the verb» or 
in answer to the question who? 

A-ena. The relative pronoun 
that : it is more usual, how- 
ever, to say, co-ena. 

A-6nl. The relative pronoun 
this : it is more usual, how- 
ever, to say, co-eni, 

Af4. A hurricane, a storm; 
boisterous weatker. 

A'fe. A thousand. 

Af6. When (used only in a 
future sense.) 

Afe-nima ; see Afi-nima. 

Afi. Fire. 

Af!. To open by separation of 
parts, as the mouth, the hand. 

Afi-nima. The palm of the hand. 

Afi-vae. The sole of the foot, 

Ah^ ? Who. 

AhL Sandal wood. 

Ahi-ahi. To try, essay, endea- 
vour; an essay or endeavour. 

Aho. Daylight ; a day ; the 
daytime ; he aho co6nif to-day ; 

A'hokngeb6. Daily. 



I 



AHO 



Ahoo. Smoke; soot. 
A'hoola. Sooted ; smeared with 
soot ; browned witfi smoke. 

Ai. There, in that place, (^'- 
ai is the more proper word). 

Aia. The pronoun he^ used only 
after tlie verb ; or in answer 
to the question who ? also the 
possessive pronoun his> 

Ala. Applicable, fit, suitable. 

Ala. A term of appeal to draw 
attention, mostly used by chil- 
dren ; a term of solicitation. 

Alanga. A haunch ; a limb. 

Ali. Bald. A term applied only 
to the parts of generation. 

Alo. The suet of a hog ; also 
the circular piece cut out 
round the navel of the hog, 
to embowel it. 

Alo. To hunt ; to paddle. 

Alo-alo. To fan. 

Alofia. A volcano. 

Aloo. To go, to depart: get 
along! begone! 

— I — . The gait or walk. 

Alooi. To persist in motion ; 
to go on. 

Alooanga. The footsteps of 
man, or any animal ; the track 
left by any thing moving. 

Alooangi. To proceed, (as to 
locomotion), progression. 

Aloo*hage. To ascend. 

Aloo^hifo. To descend, alight. 

Aloonga. High, lofty. 

J A pillow ; any thing 

to rest the bead on. 

Amo. To carry on a stick be- 
tween two men*s shoulders : 
the stick so used is also called 
amo. If a man ungly carries 
anj thing upon a stick across 
his shoulders, it is called amo 



AMI 

AmoochiA. See ffamooddM* 
Ana. A cavern; a ship's cabiiL 
. His own : it can onlr 



be used in composition vnm 
angi, to give to hina, as angi 
ia ma anoj give it to him, or 
literally, give it for his own. 

Anga. A shark. 

• Place or situation of 



any thing. 

. ' The disposition or 
per of the mind. 

Anga covi. Bad dispoaitiott| 
ill-natured ; disobHging. 

Anga lille. Good disposition) 
good-natured obliging ; ciift* 
ri table. 

Anga. Habit, custom, knadb 

Anga-b6. Custom, habit, pent 
liarity : quality or property. 

Ange. A ^nst, leaning agaiBit 

■ Alike, similar to taA 

other : a frequent sign of the 

adverb : also a sign of 4i 

comparative degree. 

Ange-be. Like to, (onetUy 
being compared with anoCfaOp 
see angeco)^ just like. 

Ange-co. As, alike, Tone <m<Im 
being compared with another.) 

AngL To give: used only 
when the third person foUmn 
the verb, as to give him, pn 
them. When the first penon 
follows the verb, as ^ve tad, 
my is used instead ; and whn 
the second person follows, ai 
I'll give youj atoo ih used* 

w Towards ; but Ilka thi 

above, only used when it hait 
relation to the third peraon,a% 
aloo angif go towards him* 

Aniafi. Yestefilay. 
9 v<Hi«u »••»•! 1 A' nib6« Yestern ight 
Jucca ufwtu - [ft>roib\y.\A>uvft, N4\\\iY^V>ky»^^sQL^Uii 
A^uaoocln. To snatch, to p\uck\ v**- ««^«ftV 



I 



1 



ANt 



Bel 



li 



Amn^. Just now; flomelitUei B 

time ago. I Bawla. Matdng made ■ of the 



The day after to- 



Aniwiha. 
morrow. 

Alio. A lake ; a marsh ; a bog. 

Adoo. Saliva: to spit; also, 

. to ford or wade. 

Anoo-anoo. To puddle in the 
water, to dabble. 

An^. Presently, by and by. 

Aoo. A cloud. 

A'oochi. The buttocks. 

A'oochia. To grow cloudy. 

A'oonga. Of use; Taluable. 

Api-apL Crowded ; full : as a 

* road cmwded with men: a 
basket full of any thing. 

Ata. Aeflecting, shining, re» 

' aplendNit, to reflect as a mir- 
ror ; also, transparent. 

A(4. W^ide; capacious. 

Ate. • The liver. 

Ate-bili* The kidneys. 

Ato. To roof; to thatch. 

Ato falle, roof of a house, to roof 
a house. 

Atoo. To give; towards; but 
used only when the second 
penon follows. See jin^. 

^m^^ The fish called Bonito. 

Au. The pronoun I. 

Ava. A cove, crevice, creek ; 
a bole ; a gap ; a streight. 

w A fish resembling the 
mullet 

Ave. To take away, to deprive of. 
. To conduct. 

Aw-i. An expression of pity ; 
aho of pain. 

Awi-awi-fooa. Fair, beautiful. 

Awla. Name of a kind of tree 
of which spears are made. 

Awta. Raw, not cooked. 

Awta-aiwta. Dirt ; filth ; re- 
fuse; swee|ung8. 



branches of the cocoa-nut 
tree, with which houses are 
thatched: Bavfla ata, mats 
to thatch with. Bawlafucca 
teficki, matting used to cover 
the ridge of a house. 

Bawlo. The name of a shrub: 
bawlo papalangi i capsicum. 

Be. Only; alone; solely; by 
oneself. Never otherwise 
than ; e. g. gooa nofo malolU" 
he ia he tow, he is never other- 
wise than powerful or success-* 
fill in war. 

-— . The conjunction, and, also* 

— . The adverb, when. 

Bea. The conjunction, or, also. 
Then ; next after that. 

Bea. A contraction of be ia, 
and he, or when he. 

Bea-ha. And what ? i. e. what 
is the result. 

Beca-beca. The swallow, (a 
bird.) 

Becoo. Blunt, not sharp ; ob- 
tuse. 

Becooange. Bluntly, obtusely* 

Behe. So, in this manner ; alike. 
' b To signify, to give ano- 
ther to understand; to re- 
late ; to say ; to resolve or 
determine: to show or exhibit. 

Beita A kitchen or place where 
cooking is carried on. 

Bela. Purulence; corruption; 
pus ; to suppurate. 

Bela-bela-gnedji. Liable to be 
cut by shells in walking : the 
term is extended to other ca- 
sualties ; they say tama bela- 
bela-gnedji, a young man li-* 
able to accidenttu 






Awtf. A prepMntian of food.\Bd<». C\j^ \ft ^vsJ*. o>».^ 



ut 



BSP 



mode of tbe banana leaf. 
JMoo cava, cava cups. 

ilcpe. Butterfly. 

Sibico. Lazy ; indigent ; -(con- 
tracted from bico bico) ; also 
obstinate. 

iiibigi. A child, not more than 
two or three years old. 

Bica Crooked; cunred; awry. 

Bico-bico. Lazy ; indolent ; 
(t. Bibico) crooked. 

BIco-bico-ange. CrodEedly. 

Bigi. To cement { to stick $ to 
adhere. 

Bigi-bigL Adhesive; aicy; to 
stick. 

Bihi. To splash. 

Bihia. Contagious : nuthagi 
ifibia, contagion. 

Bill. A species of lizard* 

BisL This word bat so parti- 
cular meaning of itself^ but 
with lowt to speak, before it, 
thus, lowbisi, it means non- 
aensical discourse ; tittle tat- 
tle : vide low, 

Bito. Full; brimful; the navel. 

Bo. A post ; a pillar. 

•^ Day. 

Boa. To relate I to say. 

Bob6i. A preparation of Ibod. 

Boboola. A prisoner f a slave. 

Boca. To castrate. 

B6i, a preparation of food. 

Bolata. The stem either of the 
banana or the plantain tree. 

Bollotane. Britain* 

Bolotoo. An imaginary island 
to the NW. of Tonga, tbe re- 
sidence of the immortal gods, 
and of the souls of deceased 
chiefs and matabooles. 
Bo-mde. A night dance. 
Jiongi'bongu To-morrow ; lo- 

taarrow morning. 



BOO 

scmbting the Jiah, but frikNU- 
Booaca. Swioe; pork; pig, Ac. 
Booaca taogata. A boar, (Ul^ 

rally a male swine.) 
Booaca fafiue. A sow, (Kle- 

raily a female swine.) 
BoiSbo6. A gargle: Cogtf|^ 
Boobooha. Sultry; hot. 
Boolx>ola. To swell. 
Booboonoo. To close ; to shnti 

the lid of any thing. 
Boogc. To apprehend; to fifai 

hold of; toarrest; alsotfaeliw 

tie hillock or mound in which 

a yam is planted : those parti 

of a double canoe eztendiBf 

beyond the piatform. 
Booge-mow. To cUndi. 
Boogoo-boogoa Squab ; ahirt 

and thick. 
Booha. A box; adiest Bbsis 

ty, a cask, a liquor4>ox. 
Boohi To blow any tfiing ottk 

of tbe mouth with force ; aha 

the name of the party thiit<fi»' 

tribute the bait for rats, which 

is done by blowing it forcibly 

out of their mouths. 
Bom booL A curtain ; aacreoL 
Boola. To swell : fucca booim 

motto, to heetor/tonraggti; 
Boola-boola. A swelling. 
Boole. To order or condody 

to manage, to declaim. 
Boole. A kind of spotted shaB. 
Booleoboole. Spotted, paiiy- 

coloured. 
Bool(S. Veiled, concealed, somi^ 

thing thrown over the bead 

and face, to veil, to mask 
Bool(M)ool^ A mask, tkWtSL 
Bool6a. A mask. 
Boolonga. Ha^ ei^i. 
UooVoo. Gum, pftcb, or any 

ad\\csANe«QSDR)iax«A\ i^BAVnsk 



.^ooa, /i jJiad of aower rM «S «bia cwoMfflfc. 



\ 



BOO 

Booloo-booloa To draw up 

the dfess «o as to cover the 

shoulders, to shelter. 

Booloohi. Sick, sickness, used 

when speakin^if of Tooitonga. 

Boona. To fly, to vault, to 

jamy high in the air. To 

rebound as an elastic body. 

Boon6. To incline, to bend 

down, to droop, to stoop. 
Bo-oola. A night dance. 
Bo-ooli. Night, (iironi 60, day, 

and ooli, black.) 
Bo-ooliange. Obscure, darkly, 

by night. 
BoosL A cat: (probably flrom 

the English word puuy, ) 
Boota. To bet, also a wager. 
Bootoo* Burial ceremony. 
Bopau. A small paddling ca- 
noe made of a hollow tree. 
Bopo, Rotten, mouldy. 
BoCOb Wise, cunning, know- 

ing^ expert, well practised. 
Boto4iota Round, circular. 
Botoo. Alongside, near to, the 
.aide of any thing, except of 
manor animal, then it is vaca 
ui&i i a part of, a pmtion, a 
detachment: Botoo fonnooa^ 
a district, 
Buggi-buggi. A kind of club. 



CAM 



Hi! 



Gk If, but, for, because, 

wfaikt, although. 
Cabe. Abusive, abuse, cursing, 

execration. 

. A certun plant 
Cab6a. To abuse, to call ill 



Caca. To climb. 
Ckck, Deceit, imposition. 
Cacaha. Lighted in flames, 
kindled. 



Cacala. Any flower, a wreath 

or necklace of flowers. 
Cacano. Pulp of fruit, &c. 
Cacava. To sweat, to perspire. 
Coc&vaia. Sweaty, all in a per- 
spiration. 
Cacc6w. To swim, to wadcb 
Cafa. Plait made of the husk 

of the cocoa-nut 
Cafo. A wound in battle ; or, 
at least with a warlike instru- 
ment ; to wound. 
Cafoo. Any covering with 
which a person may be cover- 
ed whilst resting, or sleeping. 
CahL Scrofulous indurations of 
the glands, to which the Ton- 
ga people are very subject 
Cidio. A reed; an arrow for 

sport 
Caho-caho. A superior species 

of the yam. 
Cahoa. A necklace. 
Cainga. A relation ; a kin ; one 
of the same party or interest 
Caky*. Inhabitants ; popula- 
tion ; populous. 
Calanga. To roar out ; to 

shriek ; to halloo : a sliout 
Calanooi. Green beads, or dark 

blue beads. 
Calava. Artery ; vein ; sinew. 
Call. A pillow (made of wood, 

after the Tonga fashion. ) 
Calia. A double suling canoe. 
Cal6. To bark, to yelp like adog. 
C41o. To turn aside an arrow ; 

or to parry any weapon. 
Caloa. A cockle. Gnedji ca^ 
ioa I tt cockle-«hell fixed on a 
stick to scrape out cocoa-nut 
Camo. To give the wink ; to 
hint by nodding the head; 
also, to circuccLcbft vcw^ia&^v^ 



\ 



lift CAN 

Cana. Sponge, spongy. 

Canahc. The fisli culled mullet. 

Can&tfy' ! To be sure ! certainly! 

Cananga. Any phmse, prover- 
bial expression ; caqt word. 

Cani. If; in case tliat (used 
only in respept to time past) : 
formed from ca, if; and na, 
the sign of tlie i>ast tense. 

Cano, The inmost substance of 
any tiling, particularly ker- 
nels of fruit ; also flesh. 

Cano he matta. The cyebalL 

Cano matte. Lean of flesh (^ca- 
no, flesh ; mate, dead. ) 

Cdnognata. Hard-liearted ; re- 
fractory ; stubborn (from ca^ 
nof the flesh or hear^ and 
gnatdj hard.) 

Capa. A ^iiege ; to besi^e^ 

Capachia. To assault, to besiege. 

Capac6w. The wing of a bird. 

Cap6w. If (used only when 
speaking either of tiipe pre- 
sent or future.) 

Ca])pa-cappa. To flap the wings 
witli a noise, (as a bird.) 

Cata. To laugh. 

Catagi. Patience ; sufierancc ; 
to endure ; p suffer. 

Cato. A bag ; a basket. 

Catooanga. A feast, feasting 
and jollity ; to give a feast. 

Cava. The pepper plant ; also 
the root of this plant. Fooa 
Cava* An oath. See Foo, 

Cava. The beard. 

Cave. A handle or sling to a 
basket. 

Cave-cayjB. A swing ; to swing. 

Cavcnga. Burden, load, freight 
of a canoe or other vessel. 

CaiFJe. To beg ; to request 
CawDsu Bitter; brackisU; a\- 

ao intoxicated* 
CbL, finuUJ, 4tt)c, tliin. 



CHI 

ChL TbeaameoraiilaBL 

— * To throw» at cast MTJf 
gently, to toso. 

Chia. Good : this word ia iiMMt- 
ly used ironically foyr bad' or 
ind^eretUp 

Chichi Softly, sb'gfatly, Hglitlf, 
in a very mod<»«te degree. 

Chichi. An m'namental draii 
round the waist for either me, 
made generally of leaves 00 
the chi tree. 

Chiagl To throw away, IS 
leave, to separate from a wUb 
or husband, to divorce. 

Chiange^ The least, lass. 

Chibi. A slap, a blow from a 
club, a particular kind of dnlh 

Chicota. A particular kind of 
club, alsos a pecies of bird. 

ChifxxKTOO. A muscle(8heUfiilL) 

Chifa. A mother o'pearlahdl, 
worn as an ornament by meat 
upon tlie breast, hanging by 
a string round the neck. 

Chike. To sit on the hauncfaet. 

Chi la. The sprits of a canoSi 

Chili. To cast a hand-net. 
Cobenga chili, a band>net. 

Chinamanoo, A sow after die 
has had a litter. 

Chinifoo. The wife of a king^ 
or superior cliief. 

Chino. The body, |tfae trunk 
of a tree, figure^ or form of 
any thing, dimension, dask 
. Stout, large, fat; 

Chino-chi. Thin, slender. 

Chiod6fa. A term of friendly 
salutation, derived from dki 
tUoo ofoy i. c. small towaida 
you (ray) love, meaning by 
antiphrase, my love towards 
^wii&^at. It is also a term 
" "WVj^ «a, poor 5<jlXwnl 



\Co. 



COA 

tiscd in the Tonga languogo. 
It is often joined with the ar- 
ticle he, when tiie aspirate is 
ffonerally omitted, thus, coe* 
It is also used before proper 
names, nouns, &g. See 
Grammar. 

Co. Uncircumciscd. 

Coa. Froth, foam. 

Coa Papalangt, soapi. 

Co-au. It is I ; /, in ansvrcr 
to the question who f 

Cobcnga. Any kind of net. 

Cobenga diili, a hand- net. 

Cob<;chi. Tlie leaves of thc;;a- 
oanga, dried and embroider- 
ed with the fibres of the cocoa- 
nut husk, so as to form an ins- 
trument for imprint! ng^n/of>. 

Coca. A brownish red juice, 
from tho bark of a tree also 
called coca. Thisjuiccisused 
to stain or die gnatoo with. 

Cochi. A goat, to cut with scis- 
sars (fivm hele cochi, scissars^, 
also to cut the hair of the head. 

Cocoho. Eruption of a volcano, 
or of tire, vapour, steam. 

C6e. A word compounded of 
the particle co, and the article 
he: ftee tlie Grammar. 

C6e-loto. Inteij. What* s to be 
done ! how can it be helped ! 

Coeni. This. 

Coena. That. 

Cofe. The bamboa 

Cofoo. To inclose, or wrap up, 
to clothe. 

Cob4i. Who? 

Coia. That (relative pronoun.) 

C6ia. Well done ! that's right ! 
truly. 

C6iab4 The same, literally, co 
ia be, it is ho, she, or it only. 

Coihk ? What ? w hich ? why ? 
wluu IB tbe joaetor ? 



COW 



w 



Coihic? Why? 

Colo. A fortress, a sort of club 
to be thrown from the hand. 

Coloa. Riches, property, any 
thing of value. 

Co-mu6ni. Indeed it is true* 

Conga. A piece. 

Coo. A deprivativC) applied on- 
ly to nima, a hand, and ntfo, 
a tooth. Nima-coo, with the 
loss of a finger : nifo-coo, 
tootlilcss, having lost a tooth. 

Coocoo. Tho muscle, (shellfish.) 

Coogoo. To grasp, a handful. 

Coola. Beads, a species of the 
paroquet. 

Coola-coola. Red. 

Cooloo-cooloo. A species of the 
dove, (the columba purpu- 
rata.) 

Coomoo-coomoo. The chin. 

Cooom4 ? Why ? what for ? 

Cote. Gibberish, jargon, chat- 
tering of birds. The speech 
of foreigners, which they do 
not understand, they compare 
to the chattering of birds, and 
call it cote. The European 
languages they call cole, and 
also the Fiji language, which 
sliows that the latter is very 
different from their own ; but 
the Hamoa (the Navigntor*9 
Island) language tliey can 
manage to understand, and 
they call that lea, or speaking. 

Cotoa. Mass, whole, bulk. 
■ b Complete, entire. 

Cotdab^ Wholly. 

Covi. Bad, malicious, a bad de- 
sign, a wicked intention. 

Coviange. Badly. 

Cow. I, (probably a corruption 

of Co-au.') 
• _, "MVmv^ • \\. v^ ^ w^ ^^ 



Ivi 



C50W 



used when speaking of men, 
or of brute animids. It is 
sometimes, however, used in 
the singular number, as Cow- 
tangata, a friend. This arises 
frcmi the circumstance that 
this word is also taken in the 
sense of a collective noun, 
and may mean company, or 
association. 
Cow. Stalk ; stem ; bunch. 
C6w4. A fence. 
Co-oolihe. The cheek. 
Co-oom&. For what purpose ; 

what for. 
C6wc4. Whilst; (used only 
when the first person is men- 
tioned. ) 
C6w-c6w. To bathe ; to foment. 
Cow-fafine. Female companion. 
Cow-mea. An adherent* or fol- 
lower. 
Cow*mele» A superior kind of 

yam. 
Cow-mya. Cordage. 
Cow-nofo. An inmate, a family. 
Cow-nanga. A female servant, 

or attendant. 
Cow-oofi. A parcel of yams, 

twenty in numl>er. 
Cow-tangata. Male companion ; 

a friend (tangata, a man.) 
Cow-tow. A body of warriors ; 

an army ; an ally. 
Cow-vaca. The crew of a vessel. 
Cow-vae. The leg. 
Cow-vale. A pack of fools. 
Cownatoo. The stick which is 
forcibly rubbed on a flat piece 
. of diy wood to procure fire : 
the flat piece of wood is 
called toionga. 
Coy, The pron. you : used only 
as the subject of the veiH, ot 
in answer U> the quesidoTi, 
who? 



FAB 

£ 
£. A contraction of the aMideAeu 
— . The sign of the third person 

singular of the future tenseb 
Eboo. To weed, to clear of weeds. 
Echia. The handle of an aie^ 

hatchet, or adxe. 
Ecoa Mine ; my own. 
Effenioo. Grated cocoa-nnt ti» 

ter the emulsion is pressed oat 
Efoo. Ashes; dust* 
Efoo-efoo, E'fboia. Duaty^anr. 

ered with ashes. 
Egi. Achief;agod; anoUsi 

the head man dT a party. 
Eha Fetid; putrid. 
Elelo. ThetonguectfanyaniniiL 
£lo. Stinking; putrid. 
£loa. Having the knowladgt 

of; being acquainted widk 
Fucca elo. Commumcativa. 
Emo. To lick. 
Ena. There (see H^ntu) 
Eoj^ Turmeric. 
Eni. Here ; in this place (sec 

Heni,) 
Enne. The possess, proo. Uh 

her. Us* 
E^ooagor. Wait; stoptill: ussd . 

only in an imparative or pr^ * 

cative sense, as, eooagerkam 

ia, stop till he come. 
E'oocoa The possess, pron. s^. 
Eva. To walk. 
Evaeva. To promenade or walk 

about at kssure. 



f 



\ 



Fi|. The numeral ibur. 

— . Much ; exceedingly ; fa- 
mous. 

— ^ Capable of ; apt to be or 
to do ; ready at ; skilled. 
Industrious in agrioiiltiuti 






FAC 

Fc-cawi& Importunate. 

Fachl To break ; to dwlocate ; 
to sprain : broken ; disjointed. 

Fuccafachi. Malevolence, (see 
Fachhfachi.) 

Fachi-fachi. A grudge. 

Fae. This word signifies mo- 
ther, but is never used in the 
▼ocative case. If a person 
calls to his mother, be mdccs 
use of her name ; or as chil- 
dren do, hecallfi out aUt .* see 

F^fine. The armpit 

Fa^ha A stinking breath. 

Fiale. Parturition; child-birtli; 
also the period of confinement. 

Fi-Au To feel ; to grope about 

Fala he bo>4x>li. To grope a- 
beiat in the dark. 

Fafa. To carry on the i>ack. 

Fafavga. To feed ; to nou- 
rish ; to supply with food. 

Fafanga To whisper. 

Faiango. To awaken. 

Fafaoo. To fill up» to ttvff 
fuU, to loadt to burthen. 

Fafatoo. To curl* to fold up. 

Fa^fehooi. Inquisittve. 

F4-fy^. Capable of, able to do. 

Fafine. A woman, a female of 
any animal, m daughter. 

Fafine tacab^ A single or un- 
married aMunan. 

■ ofaana. A married wo- 
man. 

■ motooa. An old wo- 
man,a widow, also a wife. 

Ea-fooagL Free hearted, gene- 
rous. {Fa^ apt or able ; /aod- 
gif to make a present) 

Fo-fooa. Prolific 

Fa-gnao6e. DiMg^nU 

Fagnawta. Shell fit>b of any 
kind/ to gather shell fisli. 

&Jbfy $ifyg-fab^ To split, io\ 



FAL 



Ivtt 



rend, cracked, broken, sepa- 
rated ott*. 
Fahe-gelie. A priest; (fahej a 

division or class (of men) - 

and gehe, original, distinct, 

or different) 
Fa-ila. Perceivable, (from fa, 

able, and t/oa, to perceive.) 
Faite. The posture in which 

the women sit on the ground, 

not cross-leg^jed as the men, 

but with the legs doubled up 

on one side. 
F^va. Knack, dexterity, slight 

of hand. 
F^^. To eat much, to gor- 
mandize, to eat heartily, ffa, 

much, Ay, to eat) 
Fala. A mat to sleep on, 
Fa-leo. Vigilant, (fay apt to 

be, ^, -awake.) 
FaligL To pave, to floor. 
Faligi low papa. To floor with 

boards. 
Faligi tacap6w. To cover the 

floor with plaited mats of the 

cocoa-nut leaf. 
Falle. A house. FaUe booaca, 

a hogsty. FaUe vaca, a smidl 

house in a canoe. 
Falle manoo. A bird-cage. 
Falle lahi. ThjB lijtrge house on 

a malai^ 
Falle-booaca. A pig-sty ; |</*a//e, 

a house ; booaca, a hog or pig.) 
FallfWimanoo.> A cage, (faUe^ a 

house ; mano(h & bird.) 
FalligL {fie»FatigL) 
Falligi taccap6w. To cover the 

floor or ground with plaited 

mats of the cocoa. 
Fal6. To stretch in point of 

length ; no word for to stretch 

in iM)int of cx\^an&loa*. €^x 



Iviii 



FAL 



F&Iofal6. do. do. 

Fananga. A fable, a ficti^us 

tale. 
Fanga. Beach, shore. 
FfDgawta. Shell-fish, the act 

of picking up shell- fish on the 
- beach at low water. 
Fango. Oil of anv kin^ 
Fango-fango. To blow the nose, 

also flutes blown by the no*^ 
Fanifo. The art of swimming 

in the surf. 
Fanna. A mast, to shoot as 

with a gun or bow. 
Tefito fanna, the heel of the 

mast ; ooloo fmnnot the mast 

head. 
Fanna- fonnooa. Great guns, 

ordance, cannon, (fanna^ to 
. ahoot^andyonnooa, the land.) 
Fanna- tangata. A musket, (fan- 
na^ to shoot, tangata, man.) 
F&n6w. Pregnancy, childbirth, 

progeny, offering, to bring 

foT^k young. . 
Fanow mooa. A miscarriage 

(as to childbirth.) 
Fanow mate. Still -bom. 
F&u. A peg, a nail. 
Faoa To take away by main 

force, or by viitue.of superior 

rank or authority; also to 

load, to burthen, to stock with. 
Taoo^ IMm with (» . 

canoe.) 
Faoo vaca. To load a ship or 

canoe. 
Fata. A shelf, a loft, also a 

hand-barrow. 
Fata fata. The chest, the thorax. 
F&tongia. A tax, impost, work 

to be done to discharge a tax. 
Fatoo. The stomach, also a 



F£K 

Fatoo-iatoa Tofbldorwiq^np 
Fatoola. Beardless. 
Fatoo-ooa. A double garment 
of gnatoOf not plaited; when 
plaited, it is called vak^, 

Fawha. OlBfkpring, aoo or 
daughter. 

Fe. To do, (not often med, 
probably a corruption of Ar, 
to do : it is generally uied in 
words compounded of ^y). 

— ^ Where, what place. 

Feife. A race, a running 
match. 

Felilooagi. Variable, incoo- 
Btant, unsettled, wandering 
about. 

Feaoo. To watch, to guard. 

FeaooagL An amour, intrigoc^ 
also a mistress, lover, or 
sweetheart 

Feccatagi.- To meet, to en- 
counter. 

Fec6w. To bid, command, or- 
der, a message, an order. 

F^4? How? 

FefSca. Strong, athletic, stnnly, 
hard, hardness, stiff, inflexible^ 

Feg& Controversy, discusrion. 

F^ia. To bate, abhor, dislike, 
hatred. 

FehooL To inquire, an inquiry, 
a question, to request adviee. 

Feia. To effect, to do, fnmfy^ 
to do, at, it. 

FeichL Copulation, act of ge- 
neration. 

Feke-feke. The ague. 

Fekita. To congrete, to salute^ 
to hug. 

Fekke. The fish commimly 
called cat>fish. 

Fekkika. A certain kind of tree. 

Fekkf. A disposition to devour. 



oaie, xcei&y. a^ ouposiaon lo oevour. 

Fmtoa, To fold or wrap up;\ Qit\MteTn9Ho2usA^«^i^^£iR&.M^tm.. 
y^f^ ia, to furl the uiL ^ vsaaBaSia cttXo «■>! vemMfiL!^ 



FEL 



FIT 



Iix 



bites or eats men, a dog tfaatl pride arising fitmi rank, a- 
is disposed to bite one, is said bilities, extraordinary actions. 



^one, 

to befekkt/, 
Fele, Interspersed, spread a- 

bout. 
Felenoa. Strewed about, scat- 
tered. 
Felle6ca A store-bouse. 
Felow. To naTigate^ to make 

a voyage, a canoe, a fleet of 

canoes, a voyage. 
Feoo-feoo. Coral. 
Feoomoo. To cook. 
Fetaca. Opposite, over against 
Fetai. Thanks. 
FetiagL To Bgfat with clubs. 
Fetagi. To meet. 
Fetama. Gestation, pregnancy, 

(from fe to make, toma, a 

child> 
FetatangL To sob, to shed tears. 
F^tatechili. To lighten, (to flash 

with lightning), lightning. 
Fetehi. To br^, to starve, to 

snap in two, spUt. 
Fetongi. A turn to work to 

relieve another. (In the sea 

phrase) a spell. 
FetoiS. A star, a planet. 
Fctowlagi. To meet, to cross, 

a meeting, a crossing. 
FL To twist, to plait. 
Fia. "Want, being without, to 

want, to desire to be, or to 

have. 
Fooamoo6i fia, sudden death. 

iFooa, entirely, moooiy life> 

fia, wanting). 
Fu^idooagu Wandering, un- 
quiet, discontented. 
Fia-egi. Assuming, haughty, 

affecting the chief. 
Fia-feichi. Venery, venereal 

desire. 
Fia-fia. Delight, gladness, joy, 



&c 

Fia-ky. Hunger, hungry. 
Fia-lahi. To brag, to boast, 

(fioy to wish or desire, lahii 

great or powerful), boasting. 
Fia-oola-covi. lliis is spoken 

of any proud of his own abi'> 

lities. See Oola, 
Fiam6-41oo! Away! begone! 

(from^a mo aloo, desire you 

go)- 
Fichl. To fillip, to snap with 

the fingers. 

Fucca-fichi. To apologize. 

Fi-fie, Firewood, fuel. 

Fiha. How many ? 

Fihi. To entangle, to entwine, 
to twist 

Fihi-fihi. To entwine, to twist. 

Fili. To select, to choose, to 
guess, a choice, to strive, to 
search ; also an adversary, 
(probably from the custom of 
singling out an enemy to 
fight witli) ; to contend widi { 
fiii mo he macca, to strive a-' 
gainst rocks ; to attempt im- 
possibilities. 

Fili-filL To choose, to pick, to 
select 

Filiange. To throw over, to 
turn on one side. 

Fili he-loto. Literally, to search 
the mind, to try to remember, 
to ruminate, to consider. 

Filihi. To overturn, to make 
topsy turvy, upset 

Filo. Thread, string, the peri- 
nceum. Filo oociimmea, wire« 

Fioo. To satiate, to have enough 
of. 

. Satisfied^ ivt^.'^L ^^ . 



pleMBod^ delighted, cOD(;eit or \ ¥\Xoo-ov\^iQ»\wK ^'2N«cxn - 



L FOA 

eotu To burst, to cmck, to 
bmk to pici'es. J-^oa he ta- 
kinc. To (Uiioiir a virgin. 

Foccatoo. On end, endwise, to 
net up on end. 

■ ■ ■ To heap up, to col- 

lect together, to jumble to- 
gether, to amass. 

h To transport, or 



convey goods in a cauoo. 
Vaca-foccatoo, 



small paddling canoe. 
Foe. See Fou 
Fottblla. To unfold, to spread 

out. 
Fofonga. The risage or coun> 

tcnance, appearance. 

. A feature of the face. 
Folia. A son. 
Fdie. A paddle. 
Fohc-oolli. A paddle to steer 

with, a rudder, a helm. 
Fohi-folii. To peel, to strip off 

as bark, &c Fohi he gili, to 

skin. 
F^)i. Cowardice. Tangatafoi, 

a coward. 

» One, or rather a whole, 

bulk, ball, or bead; asfoi 

laho, a testicle, fromyot, a 

whole, a ball or nucleus, and 

lafio, the scrotum, a ball of 

the scrotum. 
Foi-vaca. Either of the canoes 

of a double canoe. 
Foi-oofi. One yam. Foi-nioo. 

One cocoa-nut, &c. tlie same 

as we use tlie word head for 

onr, when we say a head of 

cattle, &c. 
F6i.manoo. An egg (from/oi, 

a ball, or nucleus ; mano<h a 

bird). 
f6i\rih\ The calf of the \eg 
{fhftnfoi, the bodjf or )ni&k, 
"" *> Uiehg) 



FcdLb Pray! if JOB pU 

do ! if you pleise to 
Foki-fo. Fortliwitb,suddenly. 
Foki'f'a-bcj all on a sudden. 

Foky. A species of tlic lixard. 

FolL Kound about, encircling. 

. To circumvent^ to sur- 
round* 

■ . To spread about (as ve- 
getation). I 

Foliangi. Around, cncirding. 

Folo. To swallow. 

Folo ho^ ky, to swallow greedi- 

Fonno. To inlay. 

Fomiooa. Land, clime, eounlrj 

round about, a people. 
Fonnooa taba. Of one country, 

compatriot. 
Loto-fonnooa. Midland, inland. 
Fonnooa-loto. The stone w* 

pulchre, in which the bodiei 

of chiefs are interred. See 

Lol(K 

Fono. A public barangae on 
matters, generally of civil po- 
licy. Also a decree made on 
such occasions. 

. The food tliai is calen 

at cava parties ; also the acf 
of eating it. 

Fononga. A walk, a journey bj 
land, a jaunt 

Fonongob Hark ! to listeiiy t 
harken. 

Fonoo. A turtle. 

Fonoo coloa. The sea-tortoif 

Foo. Great, exceeding. 
u To clap the hollow pa' 
of the hand together. 

Fooa cava (corruption of Ji 
cat¥i, to clap the hands to 
cava), an oath, becaiMe 
lemn oath is gcncraify 



\ 



FiK> 

Foo-ac6w« The vegetable kiiig 
dom, a tree, a plant. 

Fooa. The sliape. 

-— — . Fniit, blossom. 

... . . Bearing fruit, to carry a 
parcel) or burden. 

. All, (in quantity of mass, 
or bulk), size, dimensions. 

— -^ Also a corruption of Foo 
he^ as fooa €avo. Sec Foo. 

Fooa-be. All, (all in quantity 
of bulk or mass), every, uni- 
versally, wholly. 

Fooa - be - fooa-be. Altc^ther 
(in respect of extent, mass, or 
bulk> 

Fooa-cacala. A flower, a blos- 
som. 

Fooa-cava. An oath (derived 
£r(xnfoottf to call, he cava, 
the cava, as a solemn oath is 
generally taken at a cava ring. 
See Foo^, Fooa cava lohi 
perjury. 

Fooa-fenike-anga. The name 
of the twdfth lunar month. 

Fooa-fooa. A pimple, any e- 
ruption on the skin, a car- 
buncle, &c 

Fo6afooanga. Fumice>stonc. 

Fooagi. To mdce a present, to 
give; given. 

Mea fooagi, a present, or gift 
(a thing given.) 

Fooa-hifo. To lie along on the 
ground, with the face down- 
wards. 

Fooa moo6i-fia. Sudden death, 
a swoon. 

Fooanga. A grindstone, a whet^ 
stone. 

Foochi. To haul, to pull, as 
foochi la ; to haul on the iiheet 

■ To deplume (as to pluck 

a fowl). 



FOO 111 

Foochi. The pl^tain. 

Fooe. A whisk usetl to keep 

off flies. 
Foofo6. To hide, te conceal, 

to disguise. 
Retired, hidden, snug. 



concealed, disj^uiscd. 
Foofoola. Swollen, protube- 
rant, bloated, large-bellied, 

intumescence. 
Foofooloo. To wash, lavation, 

washing. 
Fooga. A flag, colours, a 

streamer, as used in canoes. 
Foohoo. Boxing. 
Fooji. The plantain. 
Foola. Swollen, bloated, largc-> 

bellied. 
Habitual expectoration, 

chiefly from disease. 
Foo-lahi. Huge, very great, 
Fooli, All, (in number, not 

mass, or quantity of bulk). 
Fooli-be. All, in number, not 

mass, or quai^tity of bulk), 

every body. 
Fooloo. liair of the body. 
Fooloo-fooloo. Hairy. 
Fooloo-he-manoo. Feathers. 
Foonga. The beach, the deck 

of a vessel, the top or sunnnit 

of a hill where it is flat : the 

top of any tiling. 
Foonga vaca ; the deck of a ves. 

seL 
Foonga moo6nga. The top of 

a hill, or mountain : the sum- 
mit of an island. 
Foo-o. Afresh, anew, new. 

Foo-o^vacUt to build canoes : 

only used in the latter sense 

to canoes. 
Foooh&gi. To He along on the 

ground with the face upwards. 

\ 5 



Ixii 



TOO 



Foote. Efibrt 

To strive with muflcular 

energy, to struggle. 

Fota. llie ceremony of pres- 
sing a cbieTs foot upon the 
belly of a person taboo* d : al- 
so, their mode of compressing 
the skin to relieve pain. 

Fotoo manliva. The right au- 
ricle of the heart 

Fow. A frontlet, a fillet round 
the forehead : headband, a 
turban of any sort. 

A substance used to vvring 

out cava, &c. See description 
of that ceremony. 

— Sufficiently. Sufficient. 
Fovj must in this sense be 
always used with some other 
words in composition, thus ; 
gooa lahifow, it is large suf- 
ficiently ; or, gooa chi fow, it 
is little enough. 

Fowagi. To load, to fright, 
&c., as a basket, or canoe. 

Fucca. To make, to fashion, 
to cause to be done ; after 
the manner of; a frequent 
sign of the adverb ; also often 
the sign by which the noun 
is changed into the verb ; 
consequently it is often used 
in compound words. See the 
list of words of this class at 
the end of the letter F. 
Fungatooa. To wrestle. 

Fy. A fislk called the stin^-ray. 

— To do, to make. Fy-he, 
to keep doing. 

Fy'caky' lolo tootoo. F^cekj' 

lolo matta. Are names of 

particular preparations of 

food ; see the Chapter of the 

Arta and Manufactures. 

-fy-fy. lb go on ineessatrtXy 

•Wpft asgooatovjfyfy bcalid 



FUC 

we go QD. incesmitly doing; 
and what ? i. e. what is the 
result. 

Fyanga. Competition, rivalshipi 

Fyange. To proceed in a dis- 
course, or performance, 

Fy-be-ma often. 

Fyfoki. Encore/ as exclaimed 
at public assemblies (from^i 
do, and /oH, if you please). 

Fy'fy'b4ah6w. Casual, acci> 
dental. 

Fy.gehe. To differ, to do dif- 
ferently. 

A peculiarity, oraoibe- 



thing different from the oom- 
mon. 

Marvellous, straogef 



original. 

Fygna-mea. Actions, deeds, 

ffygnoj corruption (^ ^ss- 

Fygna-pu. Ananas, or the pine- 
apple. 

Fy'gnata. Difficult, aidoooft 

Fygnofooa. Easy to be mocaat 
plished, easy. 

FygnofcKMMinge. Eadly. 

Fyiva. A knack. 

Fy-teliha. To choose, or to dp 
as one pleases, choice wil^ 
pleasure. 

Fytoca. A grave or burying* 
place. 

Fy-y-be. Suddenly, unexpect- 
edly, again and again. 

Fucca. See this word under 
the proper alphabetical ar- 
rangements. 

Fucca iJL To anmse, to aw»> 
ken, to keep awake. 

afoo-mate. The name of 

the ninth lunar month. 
— -afbo m6o6i. Tlie nsmi 
c/i ^^ Xeciiiv VomsKt xcsAth. 



\" 



FUC 

a different tumj; mode or dis- 
position. 

Togi fucca anga gehe. An axe ; 
i. e. a togi, (an adze), having 
the blade differently turned 
in respect of the handle. 

. ' aoo. To become cloudy. 

■ aooky'. To beg yams for 
planting. 

Ita. To aim. 

— * kUu To widen. 

I ava. To perforate. 

— - aw tow. An advanced 
party going forward to en- 
courage tlie enemy on to bat- 
tle. It is more usually pro- 
nounced fucat haw tawf 
"whieh see. 

— becoo. To blunt,to obtund. 

■ I. - bibico. See Fucca bico-bico, 
i»— bico. To bend,to incurrate. 

, bico-bico, or fucca bibico. 

To be lazy or dronish, to ha- 
, rasB, remiss, or faulty in one's 

duty. 

■ Imco bico-ange. Indolent- 

ly. 

» - bigi. To cement or cause 

to adhere. 
_ bihi. To splash, to infect. 

bito. To fill. 

--— booaca. To go on all 
fours, like a svrine, swinish. 

— — boobooha. To swelter, to 
be uncomfortable with heat. 

— boola matta. To hector 
or bluster, (literally, to make 
the eyes swell). 

-— T- bool6. Blindfold, to hood. 

wink. 
—— .- b6-o61]. To encloud or 

become cloudy, to be lurid or 

dark. 
— — boota. To lay a wager. 

— bopo. To moulder. 

— ^ botoo ooB. On both sides. 



FUC 



IxiSi 



Fucca cacaha. To enkindle, to 
inflame. 

— cacava. Sudcmfic, sweaty, 
causing sweat. . 

caffb. To mum. 

caky'. To people. 

' cata* To cause laughter, 
risible. 

cawna. To envenom, to 

intoxicate (with cava) 

— — chL See Fucca clii-chu 

— chi-ange. See Fucca chU 
chu 

' china Alible, nutritive, 

fattening, to fatten. 

— chi-chi. Softly, quietly, 
slightly, to abbreviate or re- 
duce, to decrease ; in a small 
degree, in a little time. 

Inoo fucca chi-diL To sip. 
Vicoo fucca dii-chL Moist 
■ coa. To spume, to froth. 

cofoo. To wrap up, to 

enclose as a parcel : any part 
of European dress, as cofoo 
vae^ a stocking, &c 

— » coola-cobla. To rubify, 

to redden. 
covi. To calumniate, to 

vitiate* to make bad. 
~— — cow-tangata. To make a 

reconciliation. 
efoo. To pulverize. 

— egi. To consecrate, like 
a chief, noble. 

Mowmow mea fiicca egi. To 
profane, profanation, sacrilege. 

elo. To turn putrid, to 

become stinking. 

— eloa. To betray, to com- 
municate, to tell, to relate. 

fachi. To owe a grudge, 

spite, malice. 
— fachi-fafihl. "EASssesJu^* 






Iiiv 



FUC 



PUC 



of females. To sit as tlielFiiccagooli. Canine, like a do^ 



women do, with the legs 
doubled up on one side. 

Fucca fanow. To impregnate, 
to g^iit with child. 

fufeca. To harden. 

fehooi. To interrogate. 

feJc. To disperse, to strew, 

to flpread about. 

fe-tama. To impregnate. 

— — fe-tai. To thanL 

-^— fetowlagi. To cross, to 
meet. 

fia-fiia. To please men- 
tally, to afford joy. 

fichi. To apologise. 

— fihi. To entwine^ to en- 
tangle. 

fioa To satiate, to eatis- 



ha. To display, to ezht* 
bit, to show, to indicate* 

— hah6w. To bedew. 

— hamo. To hanker afbr, 
to long for, to envy, 
—-haw-tow. To skirmish, a 
skirmisbing party, (corrup- 
tion of fucca how he icw, to 
make come the battle). 

— he. To frighten away. 

— hde. To bewilder. 
•— heca. To embaric. 

— hcla. To tire for want of 



breath, to be out of breath. 
— hiib. To sally, to descend. 
-— hina. To whiten. 

hina ho ISku To bleach in 



fy, to be teased i^-ith. 
•— — foH. To expand. 
foojihagi. To lie with the 

face downwards. 
Tacoto fucca iboShagi. Lying 

OR the ground with the face 

downwards. 
— ^ fooohifa To lie with the 

face upwards. 
Tacoto fucca fooohifo. Lying 

along supine on the ground. 

— gele. To beraire, to dirty 
with mud or mirc^ to bank 
up. 

•— — ghe. To contend, to quar- 

rel. 
— — gigihi. To cavil, tenacity 

or obstinacy in principle. 

— si manoo. To chirp as a 
bird. 

— ^ gnac6w. To embowel. 
■■■■ gnalo. To o()I iterates 
gnao6e. To bestir. 

— gnignila. To burnish, to 
brigliten. \ 

gnofooa. To faciUtaie. \ 
eooL The Mi of \nxu\in^. 



the sun. 

hina hina. To blanch or 

whiten. 

-^<— hingoa. To denomioale^ 
to give a name. 

hooa. To banter, to joke. 

— — hoohoo. To suckle. 

— — booo meUe. To siweeten. 

— i— ifi-afi. Of or belonging 
to the evening. 

Ky fucca ifi afi. An evening 
meal, a supper. 

— ilonga. To betoken, to 
note, to mark, to trace, omi- 
nous. 

Tai fucca ilonga. Indiscrimi- 
nately, without selection or 
distinction. 

ita. To affront, Bggn- 

vate, make angry, dispone, 
to pout or look displeased. 

jio. To peep, to pry. 

kevigi. Backwards, lik 

the motion of a crab, 

..— ky. To feed, also to wea' 
«\«o \hQ\)Ctor stake in a w 



FUC 



FUC 



Izv 



ation, exposure to the IFuccamalohL Forcibly, by forces 

to act the tyrant. 



lahi; To enlarge, the 
e of a ceremony, to in- 
se. 

idata. To tame, to make 
L 

ita. To tame, to make 
1. 

[lie moo6i. To amaze, 
wonder, to astonish, to 

ea To watch, a watch- 
, a sentry. 

ia-lia. Abominable, fil- 
odious, ugly, indecent, 
ible. 

ill. To put in a passion, 
rritate, also a paiticular 
laration of food. 
111^. To make good, to 
id, to make peace, recon- 
, a pacification, an armis- 
> 

oft-loa. To elonmte. 
fucca loa-loa. To slit, 
it, a cut 

iolongo or longO'longo. 
quiet, to recompose, to 
li. quiet. 

lOngoa. Noisy, to roar, 
nake a noise. 
.060. To excavate. 
ly. Adulation, to cajole, 
oax, to wheedle, 
ma. To abash, also to 
icate, to cleanse, 
machila. To sharpen, 
ma^ne. To titillate, to ir- 
.te gently, to tickle, 
maha. To drain, 
mahagi. To sicken, to 
>rdcr. 

roaleca. Sensual pleasure, 
malo. Ease, to rest. 



Toho fucca malobi. To drag 
by force. 

mal616. To refresh. 

maloo. To shade. 

— mamahi. To excruciate^ 
to hurt, to pain. 

-— — mamata. To indigitate. 

— manaco. Amiable, to en- 
dear, to be fond of. 

-manatoa Memento, to re- 
mind. 

mana%'a gnata. DepecU- 

ble, tough or clammy. 

mlnava-h^ To frighten 

or alarm, to appal. 

m&nava-chl To frighten, 

— manga. To open the 
mouth, to gape, to gasp. 

manga vie. Astride, to 

get astride. 

— maoo. To explain, de- 
fine, elucidate, explanation, 
also to compensate. 

Tm fa fucca maoo. Inexpli- 
cable. 

' roasima. To preserve food 
with salt : it is a Figi but not 
a Tonga practice. 

— matafia. A gash or great 
cut 

matoloo. To incrassate, 

to inspissate, to thicken. 

— matta. To sharpen. 

— mele-mele. To mingle 
among, to be strewed or dis- 
persed among. 

— mimi. To make or en- 
courage a child to make wa- 
ter. 

— moa moa. To desiccate 
or harden, to dry uq« 
— . iiuacQ-TCioica% '\.^^»'^» 



\' 



Uw FUC 

Fucca tnobc. To lull, to make 

sleepy. 
molle-molle. To plane, 

to smootheo. 
moloo. To intenerate, to 

soften. 
-^— momoco. To cool. 
momcAo. To ripen, to 

maturate. 

— ni66ni. Proof. 

moo6i. To quicken, to 

animate, to heal, to save a 
person's life, also one whose 
life is saved. 

m6oonoo. To bless. 

— motooa tangata. To be 
economical (to act tlic old 
man), thriflj, saving. 

mow. To make fast, to 

fasten, to secure, to tie, to 
furl, (as a sail. ) 

mowaloonga. To heighten. 

— hclalo. To deepen. 

— na. To appease, to quiet, 
to silence, (as a child.) 

namoo cacala. To scent. 



to perfume. 

— nofo. To scat, or cause 
to sit 

— non6. To shorten. 

— ochi. To conclude. 



to 
perfect, to extirpate, to de- 
molish. 

— ofa. To caress, to fondle. 

ofa-ofa. Amiable. 

ofi. To approach. 

— ooa. To divide in two, 
to bisect. 

oolL To begrime, or make 

dirty and black, to blacken. 
sese. To impoverish. 

— taboo. To interdict. 
tabu. To adjoin, unite to, 

coalesce, connect, interlace, 
fo lemguCf to be in company 
^4tb, Cc^theriiinicparatc. 



FUC 

Poloo fucca taha. To infennix 
as fluids, fpaloOf to mix with 
water.) 

Loto fucca taha. Unanimity, 
unanimous. 

Tai fucca taha. ScparatCy not 
unanimous. 

Fucca tack^. To begird, to coil. 

tammachi. Boyish, child-- 

ish. 

Lea fucca tamachi. To prattle. 

tane. To sit cross>I^ged 

on the ground as the men 
do: tlie way the women sit 
is called fucca faite (yid. JuC' 
cafaite. ) 

— tangata. Manly, as a 
man, (worthy of a man.) 

Loto fucca tangata. Magnani- 
mous. 

Tai fucca tangata. Unmanly, 
ungenerously. 

Fucca tangi. Pathetic, moving 
to tears. 

tatt6w. To equalise. 

te. To review troops. 

tee. Water excursions, to 

cause to float 

telefooa. To denude, to 

divest, to strip. 

teteme. Trembling, shiv- 
ering. 

Aloo fucca teteme. To waddle, 
to ynHik feebly and trembling- 

ly. 

■ toca. To strand. 

— — • tonoa' To demonstnte. 

tooa. Common, vulgar, 

inelegant ' 
tooboo. Tobeget, tocause 

to spring up to grow. 
to>ochi. Jointly. 

— toogoo. To appease ;/wc- 
ca toogoo cune ila (^to appease 



\ 



FUC 

f, to waste away, as the 

ly wUli consumption. 

\ totonoo. To'stniigbton, 

nake a discourse clear and 

jct, upriglit. 

tow. To barter, truck, or 

1 with, to commute, to lay 

ager or bet. 

tow. To squeeze or wring 

, as water out of a sponge. 

Ya. To disport, pUy, or 

» 

iraca. Haft, handle, 
iracky'. Mindful, 
^ackyange. Warily, Care- 
ys 
raky. To plait, to pucker. 

vave. To accelerate, 
Jcen, to go faster, cursory. 
rav6a. To huddle. 
ncoo. To dip or wet any 

g« 

ry. To dissolve, to melt, 

adrench. 

▼y-vy. To enervate, 

ken, invalidate. 

G 

Yet : ^e chi^ insufficient, 

yet a little. 

A species of the bread- 
t. 

DiflTerent, differently, 
Vseparate, separately, re- 
•M, contrary, uncommon, 
eUewhere, which last 
d cannot be expressed by 
t-gehCf which see. 
gehe. The same meaning 
ehe, only that it does not 
A elsewhere. 

A dike, a ditch, to dig, 
litrencb, a bank of earth. 
;ele. Earth or mould, the 



GIA 



Ixvfi 



m\Gi 



Gelc-gelea. Muddy, miry. 

Gelea. A couch, also muddy, 
slimy. 

Gelemootoo. The common 
earth-worm. 

Gcllo. Brown, 

Gemo. The eyelash, to wink. 

Gcna. To champ, to muncb, 
to devour, to oat, to corrode 
or canker, as iron or cloth 
with age and exposure. 

Gcnanga. Food, aJso any place 
where people have sat down 
to eat. 

Ger. The sign of the infinitiye 
mood to; also of the subjunc- 
tive or potential mood thcU. 

Ger. Thou. 

Gete. The abdomen,thebe11y,the 
stomach, the gizzard of fowls. 

Getoo. Lame, to hobble ; me- 
le-mele getoo, to hop. 

Ghe. A quarrel, disturbance, 
affray, dispute, to wrangle, to 
dispute. 

Gi. To whistle as birds, to 
squeak as a rat. 

Gi. At, to, into, than (see gta), 
towards, among, through, un- 
til, before (in point of excel- 
lence), against, opposite. — 
Tliis word is only used before 
nouns. See gia and giate. 

Gia. Than, (only used when 
the subject referred to for 
comparison has a proper 
name, as this box is heavier 
than Toobo, otherwise gi h 
used), also to or towards^ used 
before proper names. 

Gia. Tlie gorge or throat, the 
neck. 
Naw gia. To strangle. 

Gi-ai, Thct^, v^ \!c«x ^%s»s.. 



md; no/hgctef living m\G\-i\Qcm%i\% h^«s^> -sfi^^ivvv ^^ 



U^^QilU 



Ixviii GIA 

Giatc. To, na fecow ia giate 
ginSwiSloo, he commanded 
them, he bade to tbem, a- 
moog, used only before pro- 1 
nouns. 
Gi-botoo. On one side, towards. 
Gi-f6? Where? whither? 
Gi-hage. Upwards. 
Gi-hena. There, thither. 
Gi-henL Here, hither, to this 

place. 
Gi-hifo. Downwards. 
Gl-lalo. Below, down, down- 
wards. 
Gi-loto. In the middle, amidst, 

half way, inside, in. 
Gi-mooa. In front, first in rank 

or place, forwards, before. 
Gi-mooi. Behind, or last in 

rank or place, backwards. 
Gl-mooli. Abroad, in a distant 

country. 
Gi-oota. On shore, inland. 
Gt-tooa. Outside, out, without. 
Gi.t6w-mooli. Abaft, astern. 
Gfe. A kind of wearing mat, 
used chiefly in canoes, as they 
are not liable to be spoiled by 
sea-water. There are two 
kinds, viz. gie olongi and gie 
fow ; they are made of bark, 
and are thus distinguished by 
the names of the trees from 
which the bark is taken. The 
latter is the coarser kind. 
Gif6. Where. 

Gigi. Any food used to relish 
some other food, as yams with 
pork, or the contrary. 
Gigihi. To argue obstinately or 
contradictorily, to clash, to 
contradict. 
GibL There, thereabout, in 
that placCf thither. 



GIT 

Gihema. To the left hand, on 

the left hand or side. 
Gihena. There, in that place, 

thither. 
Gili. Bark of a tree, paring, 
skin, husk, or hull, hide or 
skin of an animal, lining or 
dead, leather. 

A file, a saw. 

GiUchi. To file, filings. 
Giloo. One hundred thousand. 
Gi-mat6w. To the risht hand. 
Gim6ooa. Both, the dual num- 
ber to the pronoun wo, 
Gim6t61oo. Ye, you, your, (u- 
sed only when three or more 
persons are signified.) 
Gim6wo6a. We two, both of 
us, our, (the dual number of 
moWt used only when the per- 
son si)oken to is not included.) 
Gim6wt61oo. Us, our, (used 
only when the person spoken 
to is not included, and wlien 
tliree or more are meant.) 
Gin6wo6a. They, them, their, 
(when only two are signified, 
vide ginowtolooj, both of 
them. 
Gin6wo6a-be. Themselves, 
tlieir own, (when two only are 
signified), vide gin6iDl64oo-be, 
Gin6wtuloo. They, them, their, 
(when three or more arc lOg* 
nified), vide gtnSwooa. 
Gin6wt61oo.be. * Themsdve 
their own, (when three i 
more arc signified), vide ^ 
n6wooa-be. 
Gioo. A crane, (a bird. ) 
Gita. The pronoun I, (use^ 
answer to a question, or a 
a verb.) 

Tetanus, trismus. Spa 



OibL A very I little pGT80n> a\ cQ(^ivu^sftal»• 



GIT 

the land when at distance, to 

appear, to view, in sight. 
Gi-tooa. Behind, at the back of. 
Git6wo6a. We, our, (See 

Grammar.) 
Git6wt61oa We; (when three 

or more are signified.) 
Gnaco. Blubber, fat, grcas4. 

Panignaco. Greasy, to rub 
with grease^ 
Gnac6w. The plural of tecoWf 

a score, used only in counting 

out yams and fish. 
Gnac6w. The inside, viscera, 

bowels. 
Gnafa. A fathom, the measure 

of the extended arms. 
Gnafi-gnafi. A mat. 
GnahL To make, to fashion, 

to repair. 
Gnahi-covi, Maltreatment. 
Gnahi-gehe. To alter. 
Gnahda. A pair, a couple. 
Gnahola Reetness, iwiftness, 

fast sailine. 
Gnah6w. A war arrow. 

Gnale. Suitable, consistent with 
one's station, character, &c. 

Gnalo. To disappear, to forget, 
to lose, to leave bdiind. 

Gnaloo. A billow, surf, surge. 

Gnana Red-faced, flushed^ sun- 
burnt, blowzy. 

Gnagn6w. Headach. 

Gn4ooa. A kind of cutaneous 
eruption, much resembling 
the itch, (psora), but confined 
generally to the soles of the 
feet, and between the toes, and 
supposed to arise fixjm not 
waging the feet sufficiently 
before going to bed, particu- 
. larly after walking in clayey 
places ; it sometimes appears 
on the hands ; is not contagi- 

OU3, 



GNO 



Ixix 



Gnao6e. Employment, work> 
also motion. 

Fa gnaooe. Diligent 

Gnat4. Difficult. 

Caca gnata. To climb ; (i. e. to 
get up with difficulty). 
Mow gnata. scarce. 

Gnatoo. The substance used for 
clothing, prepared from the 
bark of theChinese paper mul- 
berry tree, and imprinted: be- 
fore it is imprinted it is called 
tajxi. 

Gnaw-gnaw. A great cowardly 
fellow that does nothing but 
talk, a braggadocio. 

GneSoo. Hundreds ; the plural 
of TedoOf a hundred. 

Gnedji. Hull, husk, pod, a shell* 

Gncc^ji nioo, cocoa-nut shells. 

Gnele. A baboon, monkey. 

Gnignila Bright, polished^ 
bnlliant 

Gnofooa. Easy, easily, plain, 
evident, unprohibited, not 
forbidden, not tabooed, law- 
ful, allowable. 

Gnonga A seagull. 

Gnono-gn6na A kind pf cocoa- 
nut, Uie youpg husk of which 
is eatable. 

Gnonoo. A young cocoa-nut 
not yet fit to be gathered* 

Gnoo. Rather an inferior sprt 
of yam. 

Gn6ooe; To till the land, agri- 
cultural work. 

Tai gn6ooeia. UncuHiyated. 

Gnootoo. Mouth of any ani- 
mal ; beak of a bird. 

Gnootoo hooa. Droll in speech. 

Gno6tool6w. Loquacity, gar. 
nility, talkative, loquacious 

Gnow. To cha^ ^?QL^Kt-'c»s\'ft.« * 

Guo^- -a&, K. %x^x^^\^ -a. ^^^- 

stvcV. 



v 



Ux 6NO 

Gnowooo. A sort of itch. 

Goo. The sign of the second 
person singular of the present 
tense : gooUf being changed 
into goo, (See gooa). 

Gooa. The sign of the present 
tense; in the second person 
singular, it makes goo. 

Gooa-looa. Heretofore, for- 
merly, a long time ago. 

Goc^ Blind, blindness. 

GooU. A dog. 

Gooll fafine. A bitch. 

Goolo. A cauldron, a kettle, 
a sort of earthenware vessel 
of the manufacture of the Fiji 
islands. 

Go6m&. A mouse, a rat. 

Goomala. The sweet potatoe. 

Goomete. A trough, a dish. 

GoomL To investigate, to 
search, to explore. 

Gootoo. A louse, 

Gootoo Fiji. Morpiones. 

Gootooa. Lousy. 



H. 

Ha. To display, to shew^ to 
appear. 

Habe. A cripple. 

Ve habe. Club-footed. 

Hage. Up. 

Hahanga. A reef. 

Hah6w. The dew, a fog, a mist, 
a haze. 

Hahage. That end of any island 
which is most towards the 
north ; or if it should happen 
to lie east and west, that end 
which is most towards the 
east : (from hage, up). 

Hai. To tear, to cut 

Hai-fiai. To dilacerate. 
HiicbSa, To enchain, to tear 
to pieces. 



H£A 

Hala. Entrance, door-way, road 
into a plantation or wood, an 
error, to err. 

Halafel6w. A house where 
canoes are kept. 

Halla. To miss, to fail, to blun- 
der, (tai halla i inevitable^) 
wrong, amiss, a mistake, a 
road or path, a channel into a 
port. 

Halla toho. A drawbridge, (to^ 
ho, to drag, to draw.) 

Halla toca ooa. Two croa 
roads. 

Hamma. The smallest canoe of 
a double canoe, viz. the le^ 
ward canoe. 

Hamma tefooa. A single sailiDg 
canoe. 

Hamo. Envy, a wish. 

Fucca hamo. To envy, to wish. 

HamoochL To snatch. 

Hamoochia. To grudge, to en- 
vy. This word is only used 
in the first person singular and 
plural of each tense ; other- 
wise manoo-manoo, which 8e& 
In the first person singular of 
the present tense, the sign and 
pronoun are not used. 

Hapai. Having deformed l^s. 

HavilL A bli^t, a gale. 

Havili-vilL A breeze. 

Hawla. To escape, to flee. 

He. The article the or a ; tbere^ 

— . A grasshopper. 

Hea. The name of a tree, from 
the fruit of which is expres- 
sed a glutinous red varnish, 
called also hea, and is used to 
stain and varnish the finest 
gnatoo, whieh is then called 
toogt hea, Tlie hea trea is 
. only plentiful at Vavaoo. 



HEA HIV liA 

H^ah6iu. To-daj, (contracted JHifbatiga. Bedhrity, a high 
from he aho coeni,^ I place from which you may 

Heca. To sit down on a chairJ look kown. 
bank, or bench, to embarkyl Hifoangi, To descend. 



deposited, settled, placed in. 

Heca-anga. A bench. 

Hee. To err, astray, wander- 
ing. 



Hegemo. In the twinkling of Hihifa That end of an island 



an eye, derived from he gtmo, 
the eyelash. 

He-ha? What? 

Hehele. An incision, to cut. 

Hebengi. £arly. 

Heke hcke. Slippery, slimy, 
slipperiness, to slide. 

Hela. Fatigue, breathless, short 
of breath. 

Tai hela. Indefatigable. 

Helaha. Fruit of the tree so 
called, used to make neck- 
laces. 

Hele. To cut, also a knife, hele 
ooa, to cut in two, to divide, 
evasion, to dissemble^ to de- 
coy» a trap, a snare, nawhde, 
to snare (with a string.) 

Hele ta. A sword. 

Helecochi. Scissars. 

Heloo. A comb, to comb. 

Hema. The left. 

Nima hema. The left hand, 
nima matoWf the right hand. 

He-mooi. Hereafter. 

Hena. There, thither. 

Ilengi-hengL Morning, break 
of day. 

Heni. Here. 

Heoo. To ward off, to ayoid. 

Hi. Emissio seminis. 

Hico. To take up any thing 
that has been collected to- 



Higgi. 

heave. 
Higgi-tanga. 

corpse 



To raise, to Hft, to 
To dig up a 



which is towards the south ; 
if the island should lie east 
and west, that end which is 
towards the west, (from h^hf 
down.) See Hahage. 

Hili. To leave off or finish any 
work or operation, to put or 
place up or upon, to lodge or 
be fixt, as a body thrown, in 
a tree, &c. 

Hilianga. End of termination, 
(in a moral sense,) as the ter- 
mination of happiness or mi- 
sery: also termination of 
work. 

Hilinga gele-gele. The fifth 
lunar month ; hilinga, a cor- 
ruption of hilianga; gele-gele, 
to dig ; because in this month 
they cease digging the ground 
for planting yams. 

Hilinga-mea. (The end of 
things;) the name of the 
eighth lunar month; the 
month in which the principal 
agricultural work of the sea- 
son is finished. 

Hilo. The anus, 

Hina. A gourd ; a bottle ; a 
spider; hoary headed; grqf 
with age. Hina papalang^ 
a water melon. 

Hina-hina. White. 

Hinga. To fall, to tumble. 

Hingoa. Name, aQisella.tisa»» 



gether, to tuck up, as one's 
dress, the name of a game. 
Hifo. Down, below, to golHwa, TVvt w\TW£»S.x&Ba 
down, Gooa h^6 he Id'dy thcmV^nu to wcv^. 
9ua sets, \HVia oxi^oltocAQtt* 



^>»S?C^' 



IIo. 



HOB 



IGO 



The possessive pronounl for the tendrils of the jams 



your, 
llo-cgi. A title of address to a 

goH, also to a noble, literally, 

your cliief, or your chiefship. 
Hobo. To caper, to jump, a 

jump, to rebound. 
ll()1)0-liobo. To frisk. 
Iloca. To stab, a lance, a thrust 
EIoco. To flow, to splice or knot. 

I'alii hoco. High water. 
Hobolo. To grind. 
Ilolioni. Large cocoa-nut shells 

to bold water. 
Holi. Eager. 
Ilolichi. The open part of a 

house from the eaves to the 

ground. 
Holla. To run away, to desert 
Holo. Friction, rubbing, a rag. 
Holo-holo. A towel, to scrub. 
Holoi. To chafe, to wipe. 
Honge. Dearth, famine. 
IIoo. To pray, to entreat, to be 

submissive, to boil or stew. 
Hoo: vyboo. Broth made from 

fish, (having no other broth). 
Hooa. A joke, jocose, merry. 

Matta hooa. Handsome. 
Ilooa-ky. Gluttony. Tangata 

hooa-h/f a glutton. 
Hoogoo. To dive, to immei^e. 
Hoo hifo. To crouch. 
Hoohoo. The female breast, 

the teat of any animal, also 

milk, a fork or skewer, also 

to pierce. 
Hooi. A bone, also a needle 

orpin. 
Ilooli. A sprout from the root 

of a plant, a staling. 
Hoodoo, To singe. 
Hoodoo hoonoo. To sinee. 



to rest on. 

Ho^ii. To till the land, to clear 
a plantation, aIiK> a wooden 
instrument used for di^ng, 
&c., also taste or llaTOur, 
A (MM /t//e, luscious. 

Ho4}u gele. An instrument to 
dig holes for planting yams. 

&MO, An instrument to 

weed with. 

Ho/»o-ky. Greedy, gluttonous. 

Hopi. The banana. 

Ilootooa. An immaterial be- 
ing, as a p;od, spirit, &c, also 
any evil by the infliction of 
the ffods, a bodily complaint, 
a boil. This word sometimes 
applies to foreigners. 

Hotooa pow. A demon. 

How. A king, tlie supreme 
chief, not as to rank, but 
power. 

How. To come, to approach. 

How-chia. Misty, foggy, cloudy 

How noa. To happen accidimt- 
ally. 



I. A fan. 

I'a. The pronoun he. 

Ia-oo-6. Interjection Ah! 

I&-wh^ An inteijection of dis- 
dain. 

Iboo. A cup, a mug, saucer, &c. 

lea. A fitdi, fish. 

If(^. Where, whither. 

Ifi. To blow. 

Ifi afi« Evenings from ifi to 
blow, afi the fire, because at 
night they blow up the em- 
b^ to li^ht the torches. 

\^\. T^tiC\\.vs«^^ca!(^^^<^\uUet 



JJoonoogi, To stick askewcxx Y*Vi>:i^\AOft.^vs>a«a\.WL\'^ 
|>M in any tAing,the ntme\ \MffVoi;av%Veoh<»\ftVwa.x«i 
— 9 stick put in th« groundMj^oo. TV« x«j^- 



IHO 

Ihoo, The nose ; also used as 
our word nozle, applied fan- 
tastically to the prominence 
of any thing. 
Ihoo vaca. Having a large nose, 

i. e. as big as a canoe. 
Iky', The negative no, never, 

none. 
Iky. obito. Not at all. 
Iky taha. No one, nobody. 
Ila. A mole or mark in the skin. 
Haw, To ascertain, to see, 
Iloa. To perceive, to detect, to 
understand. Tai iloa. In- 
visible. 
Ilonga. A crease, mark, symp- 
tom, omen, criterion. 
Ilonga caffo. The cicatrix of 
a wound made by a warlike 
instrument 
Ilonga e lavea, the cicatrix of 
a wound. 

vae ; a footstep. 

Ilonga-be. Peculiar to, in par- 
ticular. Honga-be mea, those 
in particular. 
Inachi. A share, also the name 

of a religious ceremony. 
Inoo. To drink . 
I'o. The affirmative, yes ; the 

interj. ah indeed ! well ! 
loho. To yell, to scream. 
Isa. An expression, either of 

anger or vexation. 
Ita. Anger, displeasure, vexed, 
angry. 



LAA Ix^iii 

Jio angi ! Behold ! look there / 

— my! Behold! look here/ 

— atoo. Look at yourself as 
in a mirror, &c» 



K 

Kefoo. Flaxen. 
Keve-keve. A familiar phrase, 
implying one's disbelief of 
any thing asserted. 
Kevigi. The crab-fish. 
Kjji kiji vy. The horse-fly. 
Kikila. Dazzling, to flare. 
Kila-kila. Same as kikila, 
Ky. To eat, to take a meaL 
Ky bongi bongi. The first meal 

taken in the morning. 
Ky fucca ifi afi. A meal taken 

in the evening. 
Fia-ky. Hunger, hungry : ^at, 
to want; *^, to eat. Ho6o-ky. 
Ravenous after food, greedy ; 
hooo^ taste, or flavour. 
Ky. This word has a very dif- 
ferent meaning from the a- 
bove, when joined tofonnooat 
the land, or country ; as ky 
fonnooat a vassal, also the 
common people. 
Kyh4. To thieve, to steal. 
Kyhachia. Stolen. 
Kyinga. A relation or kinsman. 
Kynanga. A meal, victuals. 
Ky-tangata. A cannibal 
Ky-vale. Greedy, gluttonous. 



Jia. To entangle, a place to 

catch birds. 
Jiawta. A looking-glass. From 

Jto, to look ; aia^ shining, re. 

fleeting. 
Jicnna. A person. 
Jio* A stare^ to look, to peep. 

VOL, u. 



Iia. A sail of a canoe, or other 
vessel. Fyla, Hoist the sail ; 
tongoo la, lower the sail ;ya^oo 
la, furl the sail ; higgi la, tack 
about ; foochi la, haul on the 
sheet. 



Ixxir LAB 

I^aboa To coax, flattery. 
l^alalMXX The same meaninf^. 
jMi\ The brow, or forehead. 
Lafiu Flat 
Lafarlofa, Lalafa. Fiat, more 

frequently used than Lafa* 
Lafa. The ringworm, or tetter. 
LufTo. To throw or pitch. 
Lahe. Lime, which they make 

from coral. 
Lohe-iahe. Limy. 
Lahi. Many, powerful, gre?»t, 

several. 
Lahiange. Bigger, more, to 

exceed. 
Laho. The scrotum. 
Lala. A bitch, &c. 
Lalaboo. Same as laboo. 
Flat 
Rather large, rather 



Lalaffa. 
Lalahi. 

many. 
Lalanga. 
Lalata. 
I^alava. 



To weave. 
See Laia, 

To fasten the beams 
of canoes, &c with plait, made 
of the husk of the cocoa-nut. 

Lalo. Below, deep, the bottom. 

Lamoo. To chew, to grind be- 
tween the teeth. 

Langa. To plait mats, to weave, 
to build, to make a pole used 
to break the ground for planU 
ing yams. 

Langi. The sky, also the name 
of the burial place of Tooi- 
tonga during the time of bu- 
rial, the ceremony itself also ; 
to sing, a body of singers. 

Langi ma. A clear sky. 

— — ooli. Cloudy. 



JLango. The common house-fly. 
Xjodoo. To wash, to rince. 
Xaoo. To shell or peel off. 
Assassination. 




LIH 

Lata. Tame, to be contented 

with one*s situation. 
Lava-lava. Bounds to vrind 

round. 
Lav6a. Any wound, except 

from a warlike instrument 
Lea. Speech, voice, language, 

pronunciation. 
Lea fa. Hoarseness. 
Lebo. Leaves of the bread- 
fruit tree, sewed together for 
the purpose of covering foodia 
cooking, to keep in the steam. ' 
Lelle. To run. 
Lelle moo6i. Astonished, sur- 
prised (mooot, life), because 
under great surprise or asto- 
nishment, one is seemingly 
left without powers of life or 
action. 
Lell^ Adrift, driven to lee- 
ward. 
Lemoa The buttocks. 
Leo. To watch, to be awake, 

a sentinel. 
Leoo. To parry, to turn aside. 
Lcpa. A well. 
Leva. Adv. Accordingly. 
Li. To toss (as any thing light). 
Lia-lia. Disagreeable to the 
sight, abominable, brutal, 
nithy. 
Liagi. To abandon, to throw 

away, the name of a game. 
Lichi. To fling, to throw with 

force. 
Licoo. That part of any island 
which is least frequented by 
canoes, owing to its rocky 
shores : in all the Tonga Isl- 
ands the licoo is more or less 



To ruib upon and\ ^"•^i-^.'^^^.'^^Z.^ * 



LIL 



LOT 



Inv 



second lunar month (moot, se-\ Lolotonga. Already, time, pe- 



cond). 
Lili. Anger. 
LilingL See lingi. 
Lille. Good, kind, peace, order. 
Lille-y. To approve. 
Lilo. To hide or conceaL 
Li moo. Sea^weed. 
Lingtu The male organs of ge- 

neration (a vulgarism). 
Lingi. . To pour out, to diffuse. 
Lioo. To hold in a vessel. 
Lo. An ant, the leaf of a plant 
fjO'gnootoo, The lips. Lo^oWf 
the inside bark of the fow, 
split to strain cava, &c« 
Lo-tootoo. The bark of the 
heabo, vrhen beaten out, in 
the preparation of tapa. 
Loa. Ancient, long ago, te. 
dious, also to paint the face 
in time of war. 
— loa. Long, extended, tall, 

tallness, sea-sickness. 
liOata. Tlie large black ant. 
Lofa. To hover as a bird, also 

a paper kite. 
Lolii. Falsehood, assumed con> 

duct, to lie, to assume. 
Iiohiagt An aspersion, to de- 
lude. 
Lohoo. A crook to hook down 
branches, for gathering fruit. 
L6ia. A surfeit in eating. 
Lolo. Oil, emulsion of the co- 
coa-nut. 
L0I0-I6I0. Oily. 
Lol6a. See loa-loa* 
Lol6a-ange. Long enough. 
Lolofi. To press down. 
Loloi. Juice of the cocoa-nut. 
Lolomi. To defer, to press down. 
Lolongo. Quiet, sUll, peace- 
ful. 
Loliioule; Frsputium, 
Loloto. Deep, depth. • 



riod, then, at that time. 
Lolotonga he m5o6i. Lifetime. 
Lomagi. To drown, to founder. 
Lona. The hiccups (singultus). 
Longo-loneo. See Lolongo* 
Longoa. iNoise, noisy. 
Loo. A name given to several 
preparations of food. See 
»* Arts and Manufactures. " 
Looa. To disgorge, to vomit, 
sea-sickness. Te looa, nausea, 
almost sick. 
Loobe. A dove. 
Looloo. An owl. 
L06I00-4. To inclose with pal- 
ing. 
Looloo-looloo. To shake, to 

jolt. 
L060. A hole, a pit, a valley. 
L060 he lo. An ant-hill. 
— 1060. Hollow. 
Loo61e. Prseputium. 
Ldooloo. Vide Low* 
Lopa. A sea term, usually 
joined with /anna, a mast; 
as hpa he Janna, to set up 
the mast by the backstays. 
Loto. Mind, temper, idea, opi- 
nion, disposition. 
Loto boto. Wise. 
-*— hee. Frantic, insane. 
-*— lahi. Ambitious, haughty. 

lillo. Good disposition. 

i^— mahala Jealous, jealousy. 

mamafa. Heavyminded. 

taha ; or loto fucca taha, 

unanimous. . . 

ooa. Double minded. 

Loto tow. Brave, heroic 
— — vale. Ignorant. Co acoo 

loto. That is my opinion. 
Loto. Tills word also means 
the middle^ the cftxsfccfe^vs^'^is^ 






liivf 



LOT 



Loto wtL Planution round a 
howte 'inclosed in}. 

Loco, ^"ith r« fcoht) before 
it. a «OTt of intetjection : thus 
rv /o^o / whatS to be done ! 
cje^fito ahai .' wbo can help 
it! CO A; /c<o. 'ds your fault. 

LotoL An enclosed place. 

Ixxoa booaca, a hog^. 

Lotoan^. Inwardly. 

Lotoou Adoration, inTocation, 
to invoke, to pray. 

LoTosa. A pitfall with pointed 
stakes in the bottom. 

Low. To discourse^ to relate, 
hearsay, report. 

L^ne n-ya. To talk at random. 
Vide Xoa. 

Lofe gita (an idiomatic phrase). 
I should have thonglit, me- 
thinks. 

Low. Measure of the surface 
of any thing. 

Low lahL Broad, expansive, 
cfai. Narrow. 

The hair of the head. 
L506I00. A long head of 
hair : it ts some doubt whe- 
ther this word b derived from 
in» ooiooy or loa ooloo (/oa, 
long, 00/00 head), but /ofp 
ao/00 does not afford the idea 
of length, ncNT does ioa ooloo 
afford the idea of hair. 

— % To calculate. Low vale, 
a countless number. 

b To nip, or pinch. 

w A leaif (of a tree), low 

fitagi, a angle sheet, or piece 
of tapa. 



Ma. 



MAH 

M 
Ashamed, bashftiL 

— * Clear, immaculate. 

— s To chew, a mouthfoL 

— w A sort of food. See the 
Chapter on the Arts and Bfa- 
nui^ictures. 

— w The ccmjnnction, and, pro- 
bably corrupted from mo, but 
used only in connecting nnro- 
ben : also the preposition/or. 

Maala. A field of yams. 

Mianga. A mouthful, amorsd. 

3Iaboa To whistle. 

Mabooni. To shut, or close up. 

Macca. A stone^ a rock. Macca 
afi, a flint. 

Macca^macca. Stony, crsggy, 
macctMrnacca^ioj the ssmeL 
Faligi macca. Paved with 
stonesw 

Macca hoonoo. A particalar 
sort of Mack pebble, made hot 
for the purpose of cooking. 

MaccatL A sling. 

Macawns. Full fed, satisfied. 

Machila. I^iarp, havingan edge. 

Madiinavoo. A kind of clu£ 

Macfrfii To scratch. 

Ma^nne. To tickle. 

Maenne-enne. To tickle. 

— gnofooa. Ticklish. 

Maft. Crack, rent, fissura 

Mafadu. See Mafechi, 

BfafiUie. (Same as mafa,) 

Mafanna. Heat, warmth. 

Mafatooa. To sneete. 

Mafechi. Broken, disjointed. 

Mafohi. Stripped off, marked 



ii 

* 



with scratches. 
LowbisL Nonsensical discourse, I Mafoa The heart of any anknak 
tittle tattle, maJtisu Y.m^Vj^'s^icwBvt. 

l^owcow, Phnid, arrogant. msJbaVMo, To ji^\k Ti^^itt. 
The hand. \ Tcnabii. 1E.>a>a Va^^ 




MAH 

lia, contagion. 

• tear. 

. To tear, to make 

listrustful, suspicion, 
o. To suspect. 
:id, sour, tart, 
s. A dolphin. 
. cut, a gash. 
le dress of the Fiji 
Vide voL I. p. 272. 
he moon, moonlight, 
nonth. 

?. One of the months, 
plant. 

. Vide Mohoonoo. 
o twinkle, starlike, 
luck. 

piece of ground, gc- 
»cfore a large house, 
5 grave, where public 
ics are principally 

^nlucky, a public ca- 

!harcoal, embers; 
A public speech. 
Bodily pleasure, sen- 
Jfication. 

U ! well done ! bravo ! 
Ixactly, nicely. Valie 
e. To divide in two. 
a malie. To cut cx- 
two. 

st, welcome, 
term of en courage- 
bear pain or hard la- 
ill borne ! bravely suf- 
dso, welcome ! I am 
see you ; I am glad 
rou here. 

Strong, able, Chino- 
able bodied, 
ge. Potently, bodily 



MAN IxiLvii 

Mal616. Refreshed, rest, release 
from pain. 

Maloo. The shade^ ahadow of 
any large object, as a house, 
hill, or trees, cool, refreshing. 

maloo. I^iady. See 



Maloo. 

Mama. The world, human be- 
ings, society at large. Mea 
mama, any thing belonging 
to this world. 

. Light from the sun, or 

fire, a torch, torch-light 

Mama, To chew cava. 

Mima. The lungs. 

Light, not heavy. 



Mamie. The plantain. 
Mamafa. Heavy, ponderous. 
Mamaha. Shallow, not deep, a 

bank in tlie sea. 
Mamahi. Ache, or pain, to give 

pain, severe, bodily injury. 
^— — ange. Painfully. 
Mamana. To be in love witli. 
Mamaoo. Distant, afar, aloof, 
ange. Farther. 



Mamata. To look, to behold, 
sight. 

-angi. Look tliere! be- 
hold! 

— ^— my. Look here ! 

Mamma. To leak, leaky. 

>, To chew, a morsel. 
. A ring. 

Mana. Thunder, also a sign. 

Manaco. To love, to esteem. 



l)eloved. 
i^— fafine. 



Amorous. 



Manatoo. To recollect, to muse, 
thoughtful, serious, sad. 

— natoo. See Manatoo* 
fonnooa. Low-spirited 






in consequence of being ab- 
sent from ou<i*%\S3»Sv*^^asv«*^ « 



taxttti MAN 

ing if more or loss alfectcnl by 
certain pnssions of the minu, 
some of thi'sc take their naraes 
fh>in this circumstance; as, 
for instance, fear and courage. 
The former is called Mana- 
va-hc (Arr, to wander), or ynor- 
nava-rhi ((*/<i, little), because, 
in fear, the breath fp^ws tre- 
mulous and undecided, or 
small in quantity; and the 
latter is called manava lahi. 
{lahi^ large, or much), be- 
cauw, ivhen the mind is ex- 
cited, and feels itself, as it 
were enlarged by courage, the 
chest is raised, and the breath 
becomes full, bold, and de- 
cided. In common conversa- 
tion, the adjunct words, Ae, 
chi^ and lahi, arc so melted 
into one word with manava^ 
that the quantity of this word 
becomes altered, and the com- 
pounds are pronounced m&- 
Tiavakif mdjuivacki, mdnava^ 
Idhi. 

Manavachi. Fear, consterna- 
tion. Vide Manavcu 

M4navah6. Fear, want of cou- 
rage, &c. Vide Manava, 

Manavaho gnofooa. Startlish, 
easy to startle. 

M4navalahi. Bold, courageous. 
Vide Manava. 

Manga. The barb of an arrow 
or spear, any thing thing o- 
pen, diverging, or fork-sha- 
ped. Fucca manga gnootoo. 
To open the mouth. 

M/tn^-manga. Forked, cloveiv. 
MaaiH, Manifi-ni fi .Thin ,s\cndci 
jfan ijg-angc. Thinly. 
1^^ Ten thousand. 

^^-^.nypain about tA^e^a^c 
uuioo. Tlie tooth-acYu 



MAT 

Manoo. A bird (of any kind]. 

Foi manoo. An egg. 
■ tangata. A cock bird, 

fafine. A hen bird. 

Manoo-manoo. To covet, par* 

simonious. 8ee Hamoockia. 



Manooki. To deride, to sco£ 

Maoo. £xplanatory, clear, to 
define, termination.' 

Marly'. See Maldi, which is 
the true pronunciation. 

Masima. Salt (muriate of soda). 

Mati. A peculiar kind of club. 

Mataboole. A rank below chiefs. 

Matafa. A gash, a notch. 

Matangi. The wind, windy. 

Matta he matangi. To wind- 
ward. 

Matapi. A door. 

Mate. Death, carnage, a corpse, 
an eclipse. 
. To die, to wither. 

he Ilia. Eclipse (sun^ 

he mabina. Edipse 

(moon). 

. To guess, to conjecture. 

Matocfai, Matochi-tocfai. Notch- 
ed, marked with the teeth of 
rats or mice. (^Matta, a face 
or aspect: ocAi, finished, done 

i'i^x worn ont). 

Matooa. An old man. 

tangata. A thriflyy or 



miserly man. 

Matoloo. Thick in respect of 
bulk, or extension (not as to 
fluWity> 

M£t6w. A fish-hook. See Pa» 
Tow matow. To fish. 

Mat6w. Right, in contradis- 
tinction to left. 

» TVi^\u^«i!&\.^<;sQhleca- ' 
woe. 

appV^^di V» coc«»pT«3&fcV 



MAT 

iplexiofi, look, appear- 

re. 

I hooa. Pretty. 

- boto. Subtle, wise. 

- gehc. Maimed, disfl- 
•ed. 

- tangi. Peevish, fretful. 

• tea. Pale in the face. 

- vave. Quick-sighted. 

- kikila. Pulleyed. 

• tepa. Goggle-eyed, 
matta. The eyelid. 

I teve, Feorful, cowardly. 

- looloo. Owl-eyed. 

-h The eye or countenance 
a inetaphorical sense). 

- he hoohoo. The nipple. 

- he l&a. The cast. 

- matan^. To windward. 

- he oole. The orifice of 
urethra. 

- tow. HaTing a good eye 
taking aim. 

• Tal^ Incautiously. 

• he tofc. Pearls (eyes of 
ters). 

• he tow. The front of 
tie. 

. &oochi. The anus, also 
;atious, troublesome. 

Edge of any thing, 
ok, boundary. 

• fonnooa. Coast, or shore. 

• he>langi. The horizon. 

• he-tahi. The sea-shore. 
. fidle. The threshold. 

matta. Having the ap- 
irance of, resemblance, 
•matta cobcnga. A cobweb. 
. matta tooa. Shabby. 

matta tooa-ange. Shab- 

r. 

matta ita. Angry, having 

^m look. 

matta tow. Military, w«x- 



MO 



Utiix 



Matta matta-egL Pl'hicely. 

Mavava. Acclamation, to ap- 
plaud. 

Mawle. To vanishp to disap- 
pear, 

Mawquaw. Presently! wait a 
little ! 

Me. From, (aSj/rom any place.) 

— -• The bread-fruit, or tree. 

Mea. Afiairs, things, effects, 
some, a part 6f. 

Mea inoo. Beverage. 

Mea vala. AppareL 

Mea ky. Food. 

Mea fooagi. A present, a gift. 

Mea mama. Beings, things, or 
aifairs belonging to this world 

Mea hotooa. Beings, things, or 
afiairs belonging to the next 
world, 

Mea tow. Warlike weapons. 

Me aloonga. From above. 

M^*. A dance, to dance. 

M6-fS. Whence. 

Me-hage. From abova. 

M6heffit&nga« An aunt. 

M^-hlna. Thence. 

M^-h6m. Hence. 

M^hifa From below. 

Me-lala From below. 

Mele-mele. To mingle among, 
strewed among. 

Mele-mele-getoo. To hop. 

Melie. Sweet. 

Mello. Brown, yellow, 

Mello-mello. Tawny. 

Miiw-i. Wreathed, serpentine, 
to twist. 

Michi. A dream ; to dream. 
To suck, to inhale. 



Mili. To rub, to smooth down. 

Milo. A top, a tctotum, the 

name of a tree ; to spin round. 

Mimi, To \s\aScj& -^^Sksst ^>axvc«s^ 






llll 



MO 



Mo. The pron. ye, your. 
Moa, Tlic domustie fowl. 
Mob titigata. A cock. 
Mat fafint. A hen. 
Moamna. Drynns, dr;, 
Mdacliibo. The cotton tree. 
Blothi-mochi. To crumble. 
Moco. A species of lizard. 
Mocobootia. A nephew, oi 

Mftcoch'la. Cold, cliilTy. 
Mocohoola. All earwig. 
Mocomoca Cold, diilly, crol. 
Mu6. And the, with the. 
. To pnss down, to iread 

MuiJ-nK^Ki A cerciDonyso call- 
ed. Fu/ep.lfiTofthJiirolume. 

M6rooige. An earthquake. 

Mohe. Sleep, to sleep, to roost. 
Fia mohe. Drowsiness; id 
haleh, to lay ^£% 

Mohe To f reeie with cold. 

Mahenga. A tied, a mat. 

Jlolioogoo. I-ong wetdy grass, 

Mohoonoo. I'arclied, bligilttd. 

Woll. TheshadiiDcfc,lliedtrQn. 

MoKc. MoUe-molle. Glossy. 

Molle-moUeHDge. Smoothly. 

Moloo. Sofi4 fleiible. 

Udonoco. Cold, blealL, a con- 

Mora6k FeOj, nnall. 

Momoe mea. A scrap, a crumb. 

lUomohe. CoitiOQ, i,ej:va\ inter- 

fOOritOiienilly lo*lutp wiilij. 

Moinolio. Hipe, to tiecomi^ 

Monga. The protiibetant car- 
til^ of the throat. 
Mongamonga. A cockchafer, 

a beetle of any kind. 
M6aooii. Fonuoaie, lucky. 
Mao». first, preceding; Ihe 
opitai K>wn of tw iiUnd-. a 
"ok in •ociety. 



MOT 
Mooa-mooa. ToadTance; pe»^ 

Slooa-low. The rrontofbattl 

tllL-vanofaiianny. ^* 

Mooa-mooo-aoge. To prece^ii 
JVlooa-ange. Fom'ards, befois, 
or in presence of, aatcccdent. 

Mooana. Tlie ocean, deep wa. 
ter. Loto mooana. Mid-ua. 

SloDca. The buiU oF the bana. 

na, or plat] luin tree, 
.lood-lu. Any gras^-plau 

Moot. MooiBu;;e. After, IW- 
lowing, tbc end, tip, or ei. 
Iremity of any thing, conclu- 
sion, Ihe hinoennost, ago^ in 
time past, unripe, young. 
Tawniool. Uehind-hand. lE 
mooi. Thereafter, the young. 

Mooi fonnooa. A poiotof land, 



Moditdw. Amorous (^pliid 

Mooli. Foreign, behind, aliaf^ 

3 Im eigner, a strapger. 
MMni. Truth, actual, Irasty. 
M6ooa. Uiiedr.irgim&ooa, after 

tlie prepo^'tJon ma. 

[fiooi. Life, convalescence, ' 

fertile, to live, subMst 
Moooi foo loa. IrimKevity. 
Aliioonga. An eminence, ahiU. 
Muodiiguia. JIouiilainou5,liilly, 
JldoDnoo. l*iosperilj,goodlucL 
ih,ou>o. To brenk, to parL 
Motoliico, A blow with Ihe fi«t. , 
Motoloo. Used for giniiStulM 

after the preposition ma. 



MOT 

applied to bread-fhiit, yams, 
&c. ; signifying full grown, 
ripe : to wear away with age. 

Motooa nima. The thumb. 

— ^^ v^. The great toe. 

Movete. Slack, loose. 

Mow. To obtain, to attain, to 
win, to catch, obtained, to 
overtake, secure, safe, futh- 
ful. 

Mow. We, our; (only used 
when the person spoken to is 
not included). See Tow. 

MoWi-ooa. The dual number 
of the pronoun /, used instead 
of gimowooa afler the prepo- 
sition ma, 

Mow-toloo. The plural number 
of the pronoun /, used in- 
stead of gimowtoloo after the 
preposition ma. 

Mow. Much, very : only used 
before nouns expressive of 
height or deep, as mow he lalo, 
deep ; mow he-4oongaf high. 

Mow-aloonga. Height, lofty. 

Mow-gnat^ Valuable, scarce. 

Mow gnofo6a. Cheap. 

Mow-he-lalo. Depth, low. 

Mowmow. To break, to waste, 
to consume. 

Mow-mow mea fucca egi. To 
profane or abuse holy things. 

My, To ; towards : (only used 
when tbe first person singu- 
lar or plural is implied). 

Mya. A cord or rope. 

M3rili. A species of the myrtle. 

N 
Na. Lest ; in case that 
Na. The sign of the past tense : 
ne in the first person singular. 
fiHa. Hush ! fucca nda, to ap- 
pease^ as one would a child. 
NttiSh A drum. 



NIS 



mxi 



N&L A contraction fbr tm, the 
sign of the past tense, and ta, 
he, as naifoo he cava, he cal- 
led for cava ; instead of say- 
ing, nafoo he cava ia» (See 
Grammar.) 

Namoo. Odour (cither good or 
bad.) 

Namoo cacala. Sweet scent, (as 
of flowers) odorous. 

Namoo. The mosquito. 

Namooa. A bad smell. 

Nanamoo. To smell, aromatic. 

NanivL Meddlesome, to meddle. 

Natoo. To commix, to knead. 

Nava. The glans penis. 

Naw. Belt, girdle, to gird. 

Naw-naw. See ^aw, 

Naw fucca taha. To join. 

Naw-gia. To strangle. 

INawagi. To bind up with. 
Naw-hele. To noose. 

Ne. See na, 

.— . A particle frequently join- 
ed to the end of words for the 
sake of euphony : women more 
frequently use it than men. 

N6-ne. Intcij. No wonder ! 

Neoo. The first person singular 
of the past tense, joined with 
the sign of the tense. 

Nifo. A tooth, teeth, a tusk. 

Nifo-coo. Toothless. 

Nihi. Some, any. 

Nima. The arm, the hand. 
Gnedji nima. The nails of 
the hand. Cow nima. The 
fingers. 

Nima hema. Left-handed. 

Nima mat6w. Right-handed. 

Nima. The number five : (do- 
rived from the hand having 
five fingers. ) 

Nima on^ofooVoft. "^\^. 



Ixxxli 



NOA 



OOC 



Noa. At random, wandering. { O'fa. To measure out lei 

Noa-ai-be. In vain, unfixed. 

Ix)to-noa. roolish. 

Noa. Dumb, speechless, from 
organic defect, or from deaf- 
ness 

. Trivial, trifling. 

Nofo. Nonofo. To dwell, ro- 
main, to ])a.ss one*s time. 

Nofo fucca taha, Solitary. 

Nofo-nofo. 

Nonofo. 

Nofo noa. 

Nofo mow. 

Nofo vaoo. 



5 To associate 
with. 
Disengaged. 
Constant, fixt. 
Uncultivated. 

Nofo- my. At hand, present 

Na nofo cva-eva be ia. He 
passed his time in doing no- 
thing but walk about. 

Nofo. Government, state of 
public affairs. 

Nofoa. A chair or bench. 

Nofoanga. A- dwelling place, 
habitation, sitting place. 

Nofo-mooli. Being abroad. 

N6u6. Short, of little length. 

Nono. A tree, the root of which 
furnishes a red dye. 

Now. They, their. 

Nowooa. The dual number of 
the pron. thetfy used after the 
verb, them : also after the 
prep. ma. 

Nowtoloo. The plural number 
of the pron. tlieyt used as a- 
bove. 

Ny. Perhaps, I wonder if. 

O 

Obito. The sign of the super- 
lative degree, very, most ex- 
tremely, excessive. 

Ochi. To conclude, perfect, 



to fathom. 
Ofa. Love, esteem, mercy- ^ 
Ofa-be. (An idiomatic phr^^gi 

let but! would to Godt OA 

that! 
Ofi. Near at hand. 
Ofi-ange. Near to, approaching 
Ofiange gi se ? Whereabout? -f 
Ohana. A husband or wife, i 

spouse, a married person, to 

marry. 
Ohoo. A scoop to bale out 
Ohoo lioo. To bale out the hold 
Oiaoo^. Alas ! 
Oiaoo. An expression of pity 

or pain, surprise. 
Olonga. A certain kind oftree 
Omi. To bring, to fetdi. 
Omy. To bring hither. 
One 7 Sand: also gon- 
One-one J powder. 
One-patta. Gravel ; (jpaitOt 

coarse.) 
One-6neia, Sandy, gravelly. 
Ongo. Echo, sound, noise, fame^ 

reputation, glory, news, tid* 

ings, to hear. 
Ongofooloo. The number ten 
Ongo-ongo. Sonorous. 
Ono. The number six. 
Ono-ongofooloo. Sixty. 
Oo. A bundle. 
Oo-mea. A bundle of tilings. 
Oo. The personal pronoun I ' 

used in the future tense. 
Oca. The numeral two. 
Ooafooloo. 7^enumer]l 
Ooa- ongofooloo. 5 twenty. 
. The sign of the ditfl'*' 

number of personal and par 

sessive pronouns. 
Ooanga. A maggot * 

Ooan;^la. Maggotty. 



ended* 
Oe'-6tifooa. Beautiful (^app\\cd\Ooc«u N.\«i^-ticrixi55,r 
only to women.) \Oodi\« 'tYife>waX.\JM3fta, 



\L 



ooc 

Oadut. To Wle, stung. 
Ooruinm™. Mrtu! of any MM, 

porticuliirtT rfln. 

Oocummi-a cnola. (Copper, L e. 
ii'd -metal-) 

Oocnmmta l)ina-hin«. (S]»er, 
i. e. white metalO 

Oofi, Theyim, 

Ouli-oofi. To ccirei' cner. 

Oofi-jD.«ciHr, To TOread over 
with Inres. 

Ooht lUin. 

tisAn mncrn. (i. G. Stony r»jn), 
huL It huled M Vavioo in 
the je«r 1809. about dje 
month of June, to tlif grent 
a%tuiii*hrapnt and ■n'ondproi 
the iiBUTHs lwi> or three old 

■ ICB befort 



OShal; 



.mijy, s 



Oulii^ 

™ngof.nya;dra.L 
trolugi nMiun. A young IhtA 

- booau. A young jaff, 



JDterjectiou ftf •' 

ThtT 



■tntai of his 
ispok, 






ofllUown ib'M- 
n; but for EhortncKu sakr 
ley pencraUy lay merely ,/ia 

!. The penis. 



FA Ix 

The bw± of the head, 

hair of tlie head. 
Ooloo fanut. The maat litn 
Oolooagi First, beginning. 
Aolooflgi.male. The elevei 

lunar month. 
Ooloo*oco. A skull. 

?nga. The acTenth lun 

. — ^th. 
OoloOTipa. A plDoir. 
Ooloongia. Bea-to] at a gamL 
Ooma. A ki'^^ 
Ooma, The shoulder. 
Oome. A seal, (pboca). 
Ooma. Clay. 
OotnochL A cork, a stt^ple, 

to huug up, a pledget of ba. 

nana leaf for n-ounds. 
OomOD, l^cluals dresbpd un. 

'ler ground, or bolod. Mca 

fe-iminoo. Cooking ulfnal,;, 
Oono. ScaJc of a fihh, tortoiw- 

«hi>lL 
t'ono-oono. Scaly. 
Oi-o. Cnw-fbh. 
06-0. To crow as a cock. 

To dcrift, hold, for- 

.— ,s..fdy, until. 
Oi-oci. Tobite.topett, towing, 
t>ota. Land or shore. 
Goto. The brain. The cocoa- 

penninaling. 
Ottfo. A line or rov. 
Otooli. A fiJi, resembli:i" 

mactareL 
Oita-ot^a. Rin, uncooked. 
Tiir o™. 



To stter. 

Blaie, flame, to gli 



Pa. A certain kind of fi.h- 
hook, made of tonoiMshell 
and molher of pearl shell, on 



lixsiv PA A 

ancc of a flying fish ; all other 

Id lids of fish-hooks are callud 

mtituw. 
nUo^su A bean U5>ed to play 

with. 
-^— ^ papiilan^i.Cuin, dollars. 
i*uca\%'hL The corpse of one 

slain in battle. 
Pachi. To clap the hands. 
I'achiiie. A necklace. 
Pacoo. Crimp, crisp, cracknel 

of baked pork : also the scab 

of a sore, crust 
Pagia. To impinge, to fall or 

strike against, to squash. 
Pagnata. Backward, olistinacy. 
Pngnofooa. Willing, obedient. 
Palacalaca. A kind of spear. 
Palulooloo. Always used with 

hooi before it, as Hooi pala^ 

looloo. A rib. 
Pale. To push or shove along, 

as a canoe in shallow water. 
— To parry a spear or arrow. 
Pali. The os pubis ; tlie share 

bone. 
Palla. A sore, an ulcer, to fes- 
ter, to suppurate, the name of 

a disease. 
Paloo. To mix with water. 
Pango. Crossness, obstinacy. 
Pani. To bedaub, to smear. 
Paniagi. To besmear. 
Paniooli. Black, dirty. 
Paoonga. The tree, the leaves 
of which arc used for im- 
printing gnatoo. 
Papa, the penis. 
— — Tlie hollow ])iecc of board 
on which gnatoo is imprinted. 
Low papa. A board. 
i'ipa. The mid rib of t\\e ba- 
nana or the plantain leaf. 
-Papalangi. White people,"Eu< 
^^eaji manufactures. 



SOW 

Papanffa. A face deformed by 
die oiaease called palla, 

Papani. To forage, foraging 
l>arty. 

Papata. Grained, rough. 

Papatetcle. A sleeping mat 

Passa-passa. Phrase, iiuplyixig 
disbelief.. 

Pato. A goose. ^ 

Patta. Grained, rough, coarse. 

Patoo. A mark of a wound 
not gained in battle. 

Pato6. Occursion, a clapping 
together with a noise, pulsa- 
tion of the heart 

Peca. A species of bat, (the 
vespertilio vampyrus). 

Pechi-pcchi Pigs fcct,(trotter8). 

Pccoo. Blunt, obtuse, not sharp. 

Pepe. Tlie butterfly. 

Pepinc. Meanness, economv. 

Pete-pete. Rough, rugged, fa 
face marked with tlie small 
pox they would call thus). 

Pow. Mischievous, audacious. 

Powchia. To interrupt mischi^ 
vously, mischievous intemip> 
tion. 

Pya. Destitute, an orphan. 

S. 
Seooke ! Alas ! an interj. denot- 

ing pity, pain, or distress. 
Seooke! An interj. denoting 

surprise or astonishment ' 

Seook61e. Vide Seook<^ ■ 

Scse. Friendless and destitute. 
Sesele. Eccentric, odd. 
Sisi. To hiss. 
Songo. A Fiji word adopted at 

Tonga, implying the act of 

c\osYc\^^3cLSi door of a fortified i 



sow 

ReTenge. 

A kind of spoor. 



To strike or beat, to hew, 
»rve wood or stone. 
. To buffet or beat about, 
tallet, a hammer, 
ite. To kill by striking. 
ti. Kill him, kill it. 
tt6w. To strike the tat- 
. See Appcndixy No. IL, 
urgical Sl'ill. " 
M). Spinning a cocoaF>nut, 
prognostic. 

An obstacle, to obstruct. 

To Bx on, to select. 

To challenge^ a chal- 

, To deracinate, to pull 

. Marriage, or rejoicings 
I chief's marriage. 
a. A song, puetry. 
-V To cut down wood. 

Bellows, also blowing 
fire with the breath. 
. Forbidden, illicit, also 
?d» consecrated, under a 
Jbition, any tiling forbid- 
to be eaten or touched. 
Di. To shut, a bolt or 

L Unmarried) (applied 
to females), whether a 
»w or not. 

i. Necessitous, poor. 
^ An attendant of a 
f. Cow calanga. The 
s of a chief. 

>w. INIats of the cocoa- 
leaf, used for flooring. 

To be present at, or to 
t at any amusement, a 
it or perambulation. 

L,Jt, 



TAI lxxi¥ 

Tacca-mila Flexuous, winding. 
Tacca tock^. To engird. 
Tack^. To wheel, to roll up. 
Tacoto. To lie along, to lie 
down, one lying, to lean a- 
gainst. 
Tae. Dung, excrement. 
Tafa. To cut, to intersect 
Tafanga. A paddling canoe. 
Tafanga-fanga. The open coun- 
try. 
Tafe, To stream like water. 
Taffi-taffi. To sweep. 
Tafoki. To turn back, to re- 
turn, to turn round, to turn 
over. 
Taggi-taggi. To carry or lead 

in the hand. 

Taggi-tah a-be. Each , each one. 

Taha. The numeral one. He 

taha. Somebody, anybody. 

Fan6w fucca taha. At one 

birth. 

Taha-bc. Once only, single, 

ouly one. 
Taha-gche. Another. 
Tahi. Tlie sea, sea- water. 
Tahi-hoco. High tide. 
Tiihi*mamalia. Ebb tide. 
Tahine. A virgin, a young 
girl, also a term of respect to 
female nobles. 
Tai. Without, nothaving, (often 
used to form compound words, 
like tlie English derivatives, 
in, un, less^, 
Tai-abi. Houseless. 
Tai-ala. Unfit, inexpedient. 
Tai-alla-tattow. A mismatch. 
Tai-aoonga. Useless, worthless. 
Tai-booboonoo. Not shut. 
T4i-boto. Unskilful. 
Tai-catagi. Unbearable. 
Tai-cot6a. Incom^^lete. 



1 



\ 



tezTfii 



TE 



T6-td. Same as te. 

«— . Hie personal pronoun /, 

except in tlie future tense, 

when it is Oo. 
— s The sign of the fut. tense. | Tcliha. Choice, wilL 



See Teggcr. 
Tea. Pale, white. 
Teaoo. A hundred. 
Tebi« To trip along, to pace, 

gait or walk. 
Teboo. Knotty, prominent. 
Teboo-teboo. Roughwith knots. 
Teca. To trundle, a wheel, a 

ball, the name of a boyish 

sport, to string a bow. 
Tec6w. A score. Used merely 

as a collective noun, as our 

words dozen for twelve, score 

for twenty. 
T6e. To swim, to float. 
T^-tee. A float, to be buoyant. 
Tefe. To circumcise In the 

Tonga manner. The Fiji 

method is called camo, 
Tefito. The root of any plant, 
— -^ fanna. The heel of a 

mast 
TefooA. Single, alona 
TefoohL One hundred. 
Teggafili. Prostrate, thrown 

down by accident 
Tegger. (From fe, the sign of 

the future, and ger^ thou), 

thou shalt, thou wilt. Taken 

interrogatiyely,it often means, 

canst thou ? 
Tcgi. To break wind, flatus. 
Tegichi. Not yet, ere. 
Tehi. A piece or morsel of 

food ; only used with tny, e. g. 

give me a piece, my tehi, 
Tehina. A brother. Cow te- 
hina, Pretfarcn. 



TOA 

Tcio. To ecrapcy to AaMt^ 

razor, 
Telefooa. Bare, naked^ 
Telic. The name of a tre& 



Telinga. The ear. 

Tenga. The thigh, the htm. 

Hooi tenga. Tlie thigh booa 
Tenga-tangi. Sickness (med 

when speaking of c]iien)i— ■ 

See booloohi, 
Tenne. Used instead of tewad 

ia, he shall or will : as tenm 

aloo, he sliall gOy instead d 

te aloo ia, 

(Used interrogatif^ 



ly), ability of doing ; as Cm- 
tie aloo T can he go ? 

Teoo. To adorn with dress^to 
prepare to go any whera 
Finery in dress. Ready, pn^ 
pared. 

—— s rUsed interrogatitely^ 
can T r (see tey It is iim 
the first person of the futon 
tense, I shall or will. 

T^oot6w. Array of battle. 

Tepa. To goggle, to squint 

T6t6. Well nigh, almost. 

T^te-t^te. Tremulous,chilline8L 

Tetemi. To flutter, to trembWi 

Tevc. The name of a particular 
plant, the root of wliicfa, in 
time of security, is eaten ftr 
want of better food. 

To. The name of a tree, bear- 
ing berries, of which theglu^ 
tinous pulp (called also to) 
is used to paste together the 
different sheets of topa. 

T6-/)cbi. (This word is always 
used wiu fucca before it). 
Seefu-cca to-ochi. 
T6b6w. About to come. VToa. ^xvit^ bravery. 

^'JSt, To i>e]abour, or bcalAToaAxeAovj. ^Mo\i^\TvwtBk 
(fi-am to, to strike, ia^ blmV \Toa, T>Mi cwua-nua. 



TAL 

Talanoa. A narratiyc, conver- 
sadon. 

Talatoo. To relate or tell to 
thee or you. (See atoo), 

TalL To wait for a person. 

— . To entertain. 

Talla. A tliorn. TaUaU thorny. 

Talla^talla. Thorny, prickly. 

Talo. A certain esculent root 

I'aloo. To beckon. 

Taloo. Since, (afterwhich time). 

Tama. A boy, a young man. 
Tama-booa. A doll, (from 
iameu, a boy, and booa^ the 
name of the veood of which it 
is made). 

Tamachi. A child of either sex. 

Tamate. Tamatea. Tokill,(from 
la mate ia, strike, death, him). 

Tammy', A father. 

Tanagi To gather together, to 
collect, to convocate. 

Tanga^caho. A case for arrows. 

Tanga-nvmL The bladder. * 

Tangata. A man, any male; 
also a term of honour applied 
to a braTe man, (as having 
the true manly character). 
jMo fucca tangata. Mag- 
nanimity. Foo tangata, A 
giant 

Tangata fe oomoo. A cook. 

Tangata^tow. A warrior. 

Tangi. To weep, to implore, 
to coo, as tlie doves. 

Tangi-fe-toogi. To bemoan. 
Tangi-mo6ni. Asseveration, an 
interjection dcnotingsurprise, 
(^mSoni, trutli); to take an 
oath ; nai tangi moSni gi he 
egi CO ToobS Totdi, he swore 
by the god Tooho Totai. 
Tango. To wander by night, 

to lie in wait for. 
Tangooloo. To snore. 



TE Ixxxvii 

Tanoo. To oven^helm, to bury. 

Tanoo-manga. The sixth lunar 
month. 

Tao. A dart, lance, spear. 

Tao velo ica. A fizgig. 

Tao fotoi. A spear he»ied with 
stingray, 

Tao talatala. A bearded spear. 

Taoo. To cook victuals. Fy 
taoo. To get ready the leaves, 
&c. with which the victuals 
are covered during the pro- 
cess of cooking. 

Tioobe. Pendent, hanging. 

Taoonga malie. Exactly fitted. 

Tapa. See GneUoo, 

Ti-T£. A mallet, a hammer. 

Tatali. To await, to expect 

Tatao. To w ay-lay, an amb us- 
cade. 

Tattangi. To clink, to jingle 
together. 

Tattao. See page 1 1 of this vol. 

Tatt6w. Sec Ta-tattow, 

Alike, coequal, he tai- 



t6wi a match, an equal. 

A matting used as a 



screen on the weatlier-sidcs of 

houses. 
Tatt6w-anga. Conformity. 
Tatt6w-be. Alike, similar. 
Taw. To cure, a cure. 

— . To drop, to slip down, to 

fall, to let fall, to be killed in 

battle. 

— , To implant, to plant 

— . To open, as a box,or door. 
The sugar-cane 



Tawgia. To commit a rape. 
Tawgootoo. A preparation of 

food. 
Tawto. Blood, to bleed. Pani 

tawto. Smeared with blood. 
Tawto-tawto. Blood^^^ 






\ 



;»- '"/L^'r AquMtic. 

T' .[jTuo-wi". Growing wM 

- " fiBboa The fci 






TPiioo. 
Tebi. 



fW* ^saiiiB of the lowest 
"■^^ fupenor u 



r-J" 



t, tLe loins, be- 
Tfae twck of the 



j^oi-^k, The nape of the nc 
JVKB-Inco. Hump-backed. 
Ttu-fBlle. The outude of the 
roof of ■ house ; the b«ck of 

Tooa-booge. The (Ul, m upper 
BuHkcG of the botigi (part of 
a canoe). See ffoogv. 

ToDBchma. A cousin, an uncle. 

Tu^afaffne, A asttt 

ToonngK. A post, or itarditig 

Tooangc, Standing sgunG 
Tooho tali naOa. A child 
being the ulTipring of a chief 
by a woman not n chief, is 
liable to be strangled. The 
words mean '* Toubo waiting 
the dram ;" perhaps foimerly 
Ihey ustxl drums on tlic OCCA- 

"Mi "TKicriGrini; children. 



•gL. Origin, uurcc 
(tDoti>D>lo spnng ; Dn^,placc) 
■iicab7> Uolooagi looboo- '' 
tnga. FuM fruiu (of tlic 

Tool)oo.aDge.a>. To become 
like. 

To-ochL See/«cca ta-ochi. 
Toocbia. To crop, to cut oflT. 
*" mgn. Itesidual; itisBomis 

mi piouounccd to£nga,>lii> 

engtt. 
Toocnga mea. I*aving». 
Toofa. To auort, tu ded out. 
Toofoonga. A workman, or ar- 

Toofoonga U macca. A maaon. 
fy cava. A barber. 
tB-ta. Any artificer 



Toogi. 1 
also a 1 
blow w 






h (he fist, the nl 






like ai 



»tta 
charm of tatao. 
ToogU. To stumble, lo fiU , 

Toogoo. To abolish, to quit, 
" ' ■" ■ bequeath, id 



inn oflabour. 
xept, lo lij 



- Terroi 

.. Toe 



up or put by. 

. To alli 

to sllow of, 
■ — . To AiniK, \n &x)a^: 
JVicco taoitoo, (ft »\s«*«- 



TOO 

Voogoo. Hold! avast! 

■ ■■ » To dye ; loogoo coolut 
to stain red. 
Toogooanga. The end, or ter- 
mination (of happiness or mi- 
sery). A place where any 
thing is kept, or suffered to 
remain. 
Toogooanga-gelc. A quagmire. 
To6goolo4. For a long time. 
To(^oo-oota. Inland. 
Toogoo-y-be. Be it so. 
Toohoo. The forefinger, to 

point with tlic finger. 
Tooi. A chief, or tributary go- 
vernor of an island, or district. 
. A kind of club. 
— . The knee. 
Tooi niraa. The elbow (the 

knee of the arm). 
Tooi. To string, to plait wreaths. 
■ To sew. 

Tooianga. A seam (in sewing.) 
Toola. Bald, bald-beaded. 
To(^. To pursue. Too^t mohe^ 

to nod with sleep. 
Todli. Deaf. 

Todoo. To drop, like water. 
Tookw he matta. A tear. 
Tooloo-tooloo. Instillation. 

. Eaves of a house. 
V>oiooL To drop into; any 
fluid dropt into the eyes, &c. 
Id abate inflammation, 
longa. A pile, or heap. 
— . The core of fruits^ a 
uiot in woody a kernel, the 
eed of plants. 

mga awta-awta. A heap of 
th. 

igi^igoo. A joint of pork, 
tgagelc. A mound of earth. 
gk A ladder, 
— • A row of plantain or 
MUilrooB. 



TOW X 

Toonga. A sign of tlic pkira 
number of animated beings. 

Toonga mea. A number of peo- 
ple. 

Toonga va«. ITie anklo-joint. 

Toonoo. To broil. 

Too-oo. To get up, get up. 

Too-ooloo. To decapitate. 

Toopa. A window, or small 
opening in a house ; a hole 
in tlie fencing of a fortified 
place to discharge arn)ws 
through. 

Tootanga. A block, a large 
piece or slice of any tiling. 

Tootanga-ac6w. A log of wood. 

Tootanga^-oofii. A large piece 
of yauD. 

Tooto6. To cut» to cut olT, to 
prune. 

Tootoo-ooloa To behead. 

Tooto6. A chisel. 

To6too. Heat, ignition ; to 
bum, kindle, boil. 

To6too. The bark of the Chinese 
paper mulberry tree. 

Tootode. Thin, emaciated. 

Tootooloa Dropping off, or out 
of (as a fluid) : to be perme- 
able to water, as the roof of 
A house when the rain drops 
through. 

Too-y. Dilatory^ slow. 

Totoca. Slow, softly, quietly. 

Totoca-ange. Slowly, softly. 

Totolo. To crawl, to grovel. 

Totonoo. Manifest, clear, 
straight, in a row, upright 

Tot6noo4gi. Minutely. 

Toty*. A sailor, a fisherman. 

^ To fish. 

Tow. War, an army, a battle 
by land, the enemy, to wago 
war, to iQ.^«dA^ Vb. "». ^fcj**'^ 
^i«t. 



\ 



zcu 



TOW 



Tow. The end of any thing. 
Tow-mooli. The stem of a ves- 
sel. 
Tow-mooa. The stem of a vcs- 

seL 
Tow. The year, a season, the 

prodnce of a season. 
^^—, Fit, to suit 

> To barter, to trade. 

. Toexcem, orsqueeseout 

. To reach, or extend to. 

. To meet one's expecta- 
tion of profit in the act of bar- 
tering, or trading (the same 
as taia), 

. The pronoun plural, we 

(only used when the pcrBOn 
spoken to is included). 
Tow-alla. To luff, to bring a ves- 

sePs head nearer to tlie wind, 
Towalo. To row, or to paddle. 
T6wt)6. Annual. 
Towbotoa Nearly adjoining, 

border, boundary, 
Towbotoo gihena. On Uiat side. 
Towbotoo giheni. On this side. 
Towbotoo-my. Hithermost, 
Towl)otoo>angp. Thithermost 
Towfa. A squiill of wind, a gale. 
Tow-falle. A besom, a broom. 
Towgete. The first bom, either 

male or female. 
Tow-hifo. To hang over. 
Towla. An anchor, a cable. 
Towlanga. An anchorage. 
T6wmat6w. To fish. 
Towmooa. The prow of a ship , 

or canoe. 
Tow-mooli. The stem of a ves- 
sel, astern. 
Tow-ooa. The dual number of 

the pronoun tow. 
Towt^, To chide, reproof. 



VAK 

T6w-t6w. To hang. 
Tow-tow-Info. Dependent - 
hanging down. 

A religious ceremony 



^ 



so called, (an ofiering to the 
god of weather. ) 

Tow-tow. To wring as asponge. 

T6wt6woonga. A circular flat 
piece of wood, sunoundiog 
the middle of the stringi 1^ 
which tlic oil baskets hang, to 
as to prevent rats getting to 
the basket. 

Twa^^-fa. A heath, a cxMomon. 

Twenga. Remainder (from to 
anga), 

T win<ra. Avnreath(as of flowGfs)t 
a titring (of beads). 



Va. A piece (applied to wood, 
or trees). 

Va ac6w. A piece of wood. 

Vaca. A ship, vessel, or canoe. 

Vaca foccatoo. A small canoe. 

Vaca-fawha. A IxriL 

Vaca vaca. The side of a miDi 
or any animal. 

Vacca-vacky. Carrful, cautiouSi 

Vacky. To heed, to inspect, to 
search, to be provident In- 
terjection, look ! bohold ! b! 
AUtovaektf\ To proceed care- 
fully, to go circumspectly. 

Vacy-an^e. With circumqieo- 
tion. 

Vacoo. To claw, to scratch* 

Vae. The foot, leg, paw, mark. 

Vahe. Tu parcel, to divide. 

. To separate, or be sepa- 
rated, as two oombatanta. 
■ Farted from. 



Vaheanga. Division, separation. 
Tow-toloo. The plural tvumbetWaSLf , ^s^ers, to plait, orga- 
(in contradistinction to the\ xVvct •, i:^«ft %. ^xk^^ ^snwvNt 
auml) of the pronoun two. o^ ^\».vA^aiwk, 



VAL 

Vakk Apparel, dress. 

Vale. Mod, insane^ iboHsh, 
crazj) delirious; also igno- 
rant Malta vale. Dull, with- 
out thought 

Valea. Insane. See Vale, 

Valoo. The numeral eight. 

Yaloo-ongofooloo. Eighty. 

Vange. A curse, malediction ; a 
string of abusive and impera- 
tive language; See vol. L p. 
237, and vol. II. p. 

Vaoo. A bush, wood, thicket. 

VAooa, or Alloo Vaoo. Un^. 
cultivated (as land)., overrun 
with weeds. Fallow. 

Vasia. Flattery, false praise. 

Vata. The semen of animals. 

Vave or Vavea. Speed, velocity, 
quick, swift-footed, brisk. 

Vave-ange. Quickly, speedily. 

Ve. Corruption of vae^ the leg 
or foot ; as, vevave^ light-foot- 
ed ; veincoj bandylegged. 

Vehaca. A sea-fight 

Vela. Calid, hot, to scald. 

Veli. Prurient, itching, to itch. 

Velo. Jaculation, projection (as 
of a spear , also to launch, or 
slide along. 

Vete. To despoil, to divest, to 
plunder, to dispossess o^ -to 
pillage, to unrol,lK)oty, plun- 
der. 

. To loosen, to untie. 

Vesa. A bracelet of any kind. 

Vicoa Wet, damp, rainy. 

Vicoofuccachi-chL Moist,damp. 

VilL A gimlet 

Vilo. To twirl, to spin round. 

Vivicoo. S^ Vicoo* 



YVA 



xciii 



Vow-vow. To scrape. 

Vy. Water, liquid, fkjidfty, 
juice, a pond, any thing serous 
or watery. 

Vy oota, vy tafe. A river, a 
brook. 

Vy-hoo. Broth made of fish. 

Vy-oofi, vy-hopa, vy-chi, vy-vi. 
Are names of particular pre- 
parations of food. For de- 
scription of which see the ar- 
ticle Cooking in this vol. 191. 

Vy-mooa. The third lunar 
month, (mooa, the first, it be- 
ing the first vy, watery or 
rainy month). 

Vy-mooi. The fourth lunar 
month, or second rainy month, 
{mooi, following). 

Vy. vy. Weak, debilitated, faint. 

Vy-vy motooa. Weak with age. 

W. 

WL Interjection. Fiel for 

shame! 
Wo. Togo, to proceed, used 

in a plural sens, as gooa mow 

wa« we go. 
Wooi. Interjection. La! (of 

surprise.) 
WoL See U^ooi. 

Y. 

Y. To put, to place, to deposit, 
also a corruption of ai, tliere. 

Y-anga A case, a slieath. 

Y-be. Notwithstanding, yet 
still. 

Y-toa ! Serve you rightly ! you 
deserve it ! I am glad of it ! 

Y-vala. To dresa^ to clothe. 



No. II. 
SURGICAL SKILL 

OF 

THE TONGA ISLANDERS. 



1 



Having already given an account of the state of rdigion and 
morals in the Tonga Islands, we ahall now proceed to develope 
their Surgical Skill, the next most important feature, of usefnl 
knowledge to whidi they have arrived. The remedies to which 
generally they have recourse in order to efiPect cures, may veij 
safely be ranked under these three heads, viz. invocation, sacri- 
fice, and external operations. As to internal remedies, tbqf 
sometimes use infusions of a few plants, which, however, prou 
duce no sensible effect, eitlier upon the sjrstem or upon the & 
ease, and we may readily conceive in how little esteem such re- 
medies are held, when the king^s daughter, whose life so grest , 
pains were taken to preserve, took none of them, nor did any 
one propose them. The idea of giving infusions was first taken 
from the natives of the Fiji Islands, who have tiie repute of bs- 
ing skilful in the management of internal remedies : and thoui^ 
almost all the surgical operations known and practised at ie 
Tonga Islands have avowedly been borrowed from the tame 
source, and followed up with a considerable degree of skill and 
success, the Tonga people have generally failed in the fonner; 
and for the cure of constitutional ailments d^>end upon tlie 
mercy of the gods, without any interference on their own paitt» ' 
except in the way of invocation and sacrifice. In such a state of j 
things, it would be natural to suppose that they frequently make i 
use of charms, amulets, &c to assist in the cuxe ; but this, hoiT' | 
ever, is never done, for they have not the most distant idci ' 
of this sort of superstition, which prcv^uls so much over almoct 
all the world, even in the most civilized countriesi. The ns* i 
lives of the Sandwich Islands, however, appear to have i 
knowledge of some medicines, but whether from original disco- 
veries of their own, or from the information of JGuropeans, Ur j 
Mariner could not obtain any information from those natives { 
who were with him at Vavaoo. Owe of these Sandwich 1st \ 
»aders (a petty chief) professed som^i VxioviViii^ ol ^Sor iMsIini i 
**% »ad U ao lu^pened that Mr Mannxit 'wa wv<» ^^ «^)|A^ \ 



SURGICAL SKILL. xc^ 

his idcilL Feeling himself much indisposed by a' disordered 
state of the stomach and bowels, attended with headach and 
drowsiness, this Sandwich Islander proposed to {^ve him some 
internal remedies, whilst a native of Tonga, on the other hand, 
very much wanted him to lose some blood, ^by scarification with 
shells on the arms, legs, &c.) The remedies proposed by the 
former were an emetic and a cathartic The cathartic consisted 
chiefly of the sweet potato grated, and the juice of the sugar- 
cane ; to this, however, was added the juice of some otiier ve- 
getable substance, with which Mr Mariner was not acquainted. 
The emetic consisted of two infusions, one of certain leaves and 
the other of a particular root, both unknown to him. The Sand- 
wich Islander informed him that the root was necessary to 
counteract the effect of the leaves, vrhlch was very powerful, and 
might, in a large dose, and without such addition, kill him. 
Upon this discouraging information, the native of Tonga, with 
his scarifying shells, redoubled his persuasions, ridiculed the 
remedies of the other, and, on understanding what effect they 
would have, laughed most heartily at the idea of curing a sick 
man by means which would make a healthy man sick. The re- 
medics of the Bui^eon, however, were not more agreeable than 
those of the physician, and the patient was at a loss to know to 
whose care he should entrust his licalth ; when the latter signi- 
fied his intention of taking some of his own physic, which was 
the best proof he could posMbly give of his confidence in it. 
Two equal doses were accordingly prepared ; the patient took 
one, and the doctor took the other. The cathartic was first 
given, and the emetic about an hour afterwards. The latter 
operated in about another hour, and the former, in conjunction 
f ith it, in about two hours and a half. They both evinced a- 
landant evidence of tiieir respective properties, and the follow- 
ig morning Mr Mariner found himself perfectly well ; which 
ippy result the man who wanted to bleed him could by no 
eans attribute to the remedies he had taken ! The Sandwich 
lander, notwithstanding he was much laughed at, particularly 
out his cathartics, obtained at length a considerable share of 
dit for his skill. Finow took his remedies twice with very 
id effect, which encouraged some others to try ; but as these 
umstances took place only a short time before Mr Mariner 
, and consequently only a few trials had been made, wc 
to not to speak of them as constituting the medical know- 
e of the Tonga jieople. As this Sandwich Island chief, 
?ver, was a man of considerable judgment, and, as Mr Ma- 
has every reawn to think, a eood <5^s«tN«x^ 's^^voAa^'S^'^^ 
that no ill success, at an eaiVj ^«rwA^\»* ^^wsxwV^- 
Q in the adoption o£ two «\ic\i wuj&Awwns^a"^ 



icri SURGICAL SKILL 

The cere!nonic9 of mvocation in behalf of sick people have 
abcady been described in the account of tlie sickness of the late 
king's dau$>hter; tlic sacrifices adopted on similar occasions 
arc tootoonima and nawgia : cutting otF fingers and stnuigUng 
children ; these also have been described ; the latter is only 
done for very groat chiefs. We shall now proceed to speak of 
their operative surgery, and constitutional diseases, as far as 
Mr Mariner's observation can lead him to speak with accuracy. 
No native of Tonga undertakes to practise surgery unless he 
has been at the Fiji Islands, where constant wars afford great 
op]X)rtunities of becoming skilful; and no native of Tonga 
would employ a surgeon who had not been thus schooled : nor 
would any one, as Mr Mariner believes, undertake an important 
surgical operation, unless he feels himself confidcut in what he 
is about to perform. When a sui^on performs an operation, 
he never fails to obtain a present from the patient or his friends. 
The three most im]K>rtant operations are cawtfo, (paraccntesia 
thoracis) ; tocolosiy (an operation for the cure of tetanus, which 
consists in making a seton of tlie urethra) ; and hocaf or cas- 
tration. 

Cavito is an operation which is performed to allow of the 
escape of extravasated blood, wliich may have lodged in the 
cavity of the thorax, in consequence of wounds, or for the ex- 
traction of a broken arrow. There are no other instances where 
they think of performing it. The instruments they use ore a 
piece of bamboo and a splinter of shell ; sometimes a probe 
made of the mid-rib of the cocoa-nut leaf. Mr j^lariner has 
seen a number of persons on whom the operation had been per- 
formed, and who were in perfect health ; and to two instances 
of the fact itself he was an eyewitness. The one we are about 
to describe was performod upon a Fiji Islander, who had re- 
ceived a barbed arrow in the right side, between the fiflh and 
sixth ribs ; not in a line directly below the nipple^ but about an 
inch backwards. The arrow had broken off about three inches 
from the point, * under the third row of barbs, and from the 
rise and fkll of the thorax in the act of respiration the whole 
piece was perfectly concealed from any external view ; the barbs 
and the point were of the same piece with the rest of the head 
of the arrow. A countryman of the wounded man wished to 
perform the operation, but the patient desired that a friend of j 
his, a native of Vavaoo, should manage it, which proved that 

* They are made tliin under each barb, on purpose that they 
omjr break. The barbs of \hi« arrow were about a quarter of 
^■a iacb transverse diameter, aM i^ %v&^ cA iOd^ vctnw under 
^»ck row Of Jbtrbs about Uvft e\^*Cki oC «xk vm^ 



OF THE TONGA PJQOPLE. xctu 

be placed at least equal confidence in hie skill as fn t!iat of his 
countryman ;— 'indeed ho had seen him perform the operation 
several times before, at the Fiji Islands. The patient was now 
lying on his back, but a little inclined to his left side ; and tliis 
was considered a favourable posture for the operation. It was 
a fine clear day, and the weather warm. Had it been nuny or 
cloudy, or had the patient felt himself cold, fires would have 
been lighted in the house, and a burning torch held to his side, 
to relax the integuments, and to render by sucli means the 
wound more favourable. The wound had been received the 
day before ; and on pressing tlie finger upon its orifice tlie 
broken end of the arrow could not be felt, except by the pain 
which such pressure gave the patient. In the first place, the 
operator marked with a piece of charcoal the situation and 
length of the intended incision, wliich was about two inches ; 
the small wound made by the arrow being in the centre of it 
The integuments were dmwn upwards, so that the black lino 
lay upon and parallel with the superior rib ; an assistant press- 
ing his hand above, and another below the situation of tlie in- 
tended incision, with a view to keep the integuments firm and 
steady. The operator having now chosen a fit piece of bamboo, 
I)e^an his incibion, and carried it down to the bone, the whole 
length of the mark, which was done witli five or six molions of 
the hand, aided by considerable pressure. In this part of the 
operation a shell could not be used, on account of its liability to 
break. The integuments being now allowed to return to their 
natural situation, the incision was cautiously continued with a 
splinter of shell, midway between the two ribs, dividing the in- 
tercostal musc^les to nearly the same extent as the external 
wound, to allow of tlie introduction of a finger and thumb to 
lay hohl of the arrow. During this part of the operation, how- 
ever, the end of the arrow became perceptible, protruding be- 
tween the costae at every expiration. The operator, as soon as 
possible, secured it with the finger and thumb of his left hand ; 
whilst with Ills right he proceeded to widen the incision on 
cither side, tliat he might take a deeper and firmer hold, and 
secure, if possible, tlie second row of barbs. To facilitate the op- 
eration, he now slipt the noose of a string over the barbs he held 
between his finger and thumb, and having secured which, his 
left hand was no longer in the way of his right ; for by drawing 
the string as far as prudence would allow, he kept it prest u]>on 
tlie superior rib, and thereby preserved tlie arrow from receding 
at every inspiration. The incision was now carried tlirough the 
intercostal mus4*les and tlie pleura, sufiiciently to allow oit ^2(^R. 
introduction of tlie finger and \huiG2o ol >CStf4 tv^\. >2^ssw^'» ^^"^ 



zcTiii SURGICAL SKILL 

which he endeavoured to disengace as much as possibly (v^^v 
might obstruct the barbs; whilst with his left finger ae^»^ 
thumb he laid hold of the end of the arrow, and kept ger^-^^ 
]y twisting it, always one way, so as to break down those o^>. . 
•tractions which could not be removed with the other hanc^y- / 
taking care, however, not to use so much force as might be ' 
supposed liable to break the barbs ; and in this way, in the course | 
of two or three minutes, he urithdrew the arrow, bringing vnth 
it a small portion of the substance of the lungs, whidi could not ^ 
be disengaged. During this part of tlie operation, the patient ^ 
was almost insensible ; he was held by tliose about hinif to pre- \ 
vent any mischief ari^ng from his struggles, which at times 
were violent The operat<M* now carefully examined the arrow, | 
and being satisfied that every barb (of which there were three ' 
rows) was entire, he ordered him to be gently turned on the 
right side, so that the wound was depending, and to make it 
more completely so, a quantity of ^afoo was placed under him 
in two situations, viz. under the shoulder, and under die jtdvu 
in such a way that the orifice of the wound was evidently the 
most depending portion of the thorax. The patient being now 
perfectly sensible, the operator desired him to make a full inspi- 
ration, inquiring whether it gave him much pain ; and being an- 
swered that he could bear it tolerably well, he desired him to 
make several full inspirations from time to time, but not so as to 
fatigue himself, and occasionally to move his body gently : by 
these means a considerable quantity of blood was discharged. A 
few hours afterwards, the operator introduced between the ribs 
a portion of banana leaf, smoothly folded several times, and 
anointed with cocoa-nut oil, as a pledget to keep open the wound. 
He ordered his patient to be kept perfectly quiet, not to be spo- 
ken to, no noise to be made, nor his attention to be attracted in 
any way : to live chiefly upon vegetable diet, or if he had any 
kind of meat, fowl in preference to pork, or if pork, it was to be 
very small in quantity, and without the least fat, with cocoa-nut 
milk for drink, in any quantity that he felt disposed to take^ The 
first night he had a great deal of pain, much thirst, and little 
sleep ; the following day he was much easier, a great deal of 
blood was found to have been discharged, and afresh pledget was 
introduced, which was renewed every morning as long as any 
discharge was apparent When the discharge of sanguineoos 
fluid c^sed, which was in about nine or ten days, the operator 
introduced his probe, to be sure that the cessation of the discbarge 
was Dot c>ccasioned by any obstruction. He then conteBted 
himself with a more superficial p\edg;ei, that the external orifice 
Bugbt not heal too soon ; and &e -^laVAftTft niq* s!\Qm^\o ^Jiange 



^ 



OF THB TONGA PEOPLE. xcii 

letter a little more meat was allowed him : but the use 
as interdicted until he got tolerably welU The wound 
about six weeks, without any sort of dresung or wash- 
patient was confined to his house about two months, 
lot perfectly recovered till near a twelvemonth, when 
•d as healthy and as strong as over, with scarcely any 
ving supervened in the meanwhile. This was consider- 
f dangerous wound, and a very well conducted cure, 
aer does not know that they are acquainted either with 
situation or existence of the intercostal arteries* 
B happens that the arrow, not being a barbed one, is 
n without any difficulty ; but still the surgeon thinks 
perform the operation of cawM, not by emar^ng the 
ade by the arrow, but by making another at tome little 
from it, in a part which, either from judgment or educa- 
eems m«re safe and proper. In all those persons whom 
ner knew to have undergone the cawto it had been per- 
1 nearly the same situation as the one above stated, 
ve observed in the before-mentioned case that the wound 
vashed, and it may here be noticed, that in all cases of 
ible wounds produced by pointed instruments, tlie pa- 
lot allowed to wasli hirasolf till he is tolerably well re- 
nor to 8have» cut his hair, nor his nails : for all these 
fly say are liable to produce gUa (tetanus), unl^ the 
e of such a nature, and in such a situation, that it may 
!ty be first laid ciHnpletely open : then there is no dan- 
r Mariner never witnessed a case of tetanus produced 
meansj ; but he met with many who said they had seen 
ions who had got nearly well of their wounds, but liap- 

wash themselves too soon, spasm supervened, and 
ts the consequence. They notice that wounds in the ex- 
, particularly in the feet and hands, kk liable to pro- 
inus : also, in persons already wounded, sudden alarms, 
ftny sudden noise that calls the attention abruptly, is 
produce this complaint. They never allow females to 
oaen thus wounded, lest the stimulus of desire should in- 

1 dangerous complaint. As to cutting the hair and nails, 
itively assert that the mere sensation of these simple and 

. operations has not unfrequently been productive of 
■eadful consequences. The man whose case we have 
itioned, was eight months without being washed, shaved, 
g his hair or nails cut. 

B a disease very common among the Tonga people ; but 
re common among the natives oC\haYv^V^«sAa^'<^^^'» 
sir wariike habits, are ii\«» itwpiexsSiN\T^<i»^«\^'^, 



( 5Uiii7li;Al4 BK.lJL.l4 

borrowed of them, and oonnsts in the operadon of Aoool 
paflsing a reed first wetted with saliva into tfie Urethra, i 
occasion a considerable irritation, and discharge of Uoc 
the general spasm is very violent, they make a seton of tt 
sage, by passing down a double Uiread, looped over the 
the reed, and when it is felt in the perinaeum they cut 
upon it, seize hold of the thread, and withdraw the reed ; 
the two ends of the thread hang from tlie orifice of the u 
and the doubled part from the artificial opening in the f 
um : the thread being occasionally drawn backwards ai 
wards, which excites very great pain, and abundant disdk 
blood. The latter operation Mr Mariner has seen pen 
several times ; but only twice for tetanus, arising in both 
ces from wounds in the foot. In these cases the spaan 
particularly the convulsive paroxysms, were exceedingly i 
extending to the whole body, neck, face, trunk, and e: 
ties ; but in neither case was the jaw permanently locked, 
on every accession it was violently closed for a few secon 
native of the Fiji Islands performed one operation, an 
A'pi A'pi the other. They both hapiicned at Vavaoo, at 
ent times. In either case die disease came on suddenly 
or four days after the wound was received, which was ft 
arrow not barbed. The moment the symptoms became evic 
colosi was performed. In the short space of two hours one ( 
was greatly relieved, and the other in about six or eight houi 
following day the one on whom Hala A'pi A'pi operat 
quite well, and afiterwards had no other attack ; consequei 
thread was withdrawn : but the other on the second day ^ 
quite free from spasmodic symptoms, and a paroxysm i 
on, the seton was moved Arequentiy, which in two or thre 
gave him great relief, and he afterwards had no oUier atti 
was tiiought prudent, however, to keep in the seton till the 
or fifth day, when it was withdrawn. The effect of this 
tion was a considerable pain and tumefaction of the pen 
which gradually subsided (in about five or six days) : the 
cial openings in both cases healed spontaneously, witho 
difiiculty. These are the only two cases of tetanus in 
this operation was performed that Mr Mariner can speak • 
certainty, having been an eye-vritness of them. He hean 
▼end others at the Hapai Islands, at the Island of Ton^ 
some of which were equally fortunate. From what he ha 
and seen of tlic success of this operation at the Tonsra I 
Jie is disposed to believe that about three or four in ten i 
bx the aid of iL The Fiji Islandero, Yioi«evcr, 8\)oak t>f ti 
fr e^lectH of tills singular mode of cwro -wVXv tauOti 'n>«r 
^^ii0iBtb«n the natives of Tong|ik;bu.t«3VhfiicV«&.\svHk» 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. ci 

tlie diiooTeay, they are probably rather too proAise in praise of 
it. Tetanus is not the only disease for the cure of which the 
operation of tocolosi is performed : it is adopted also in cases of 
wounds in the abdomen, upon the mistaken notion that any ex- 
travasated blood in the cavity of the abdomen is capable of pas- 
sing off by tlie discharge from the urethra. Mr JVIariner saw 
the operation performed once in this case, and, as the man was 
considered in a very bad state, and notwitlistanding got well, 
the cure was attributed to this remedy. It is also peiformed for 
relief in cases of general languor and inactivity of the system ; 
but, in such instances, they only endeavour to produce irritation 
by passing the reed without any thread or artificial«opening : the 
present king had it thus perfonned on him for this purpose ; and 
two days afterwards he said he felt himself quite light, and full 
of spirits. . 

The natives of these islands arc very Abject to enlarged tes- 
ticles, and for this they sometimes perform the operation of bo- 
ra (castration). Mr Mariner's limited observation on tliis sub- 
ject does not authorize him to speak with any degree of cer- 
tainty in regard to the precise nature of tliese tumefactions. 
Their mode of ])erforming the operation is summary cnou^i. 
A bandage being tied with some degree of firmness round tlie 
upper part of tlie scrotum, so as to steady the diseased mass, at 
the same time that the scrotiun is closely expanded over it, an 
incision is made with bamboo, just large enough to allow the 
testicle to pass, which being separated from, its cellular con- 
nexions, the cord is divided, and thus ends the operauon. Tlicy 
neither tie the cord, nor take any pains to stop the bleeding : 
but, if the testicle be not very large, and the epidjdimis not 
apparently diseased, they perform that operation by cQssecting it 
from that body with the same instrument The external wound 
is kept from closing by a pledget of the banina leaf, which is 
renewed every day till the discharge has ceased ; the scrotum, 
in the mean time, is supported by a luindage. A profuse he- 
morrhage is mostly the consequence of this operation. It was 
performed seven times within the sphere of Mr Mariner's know- 
ledge, during his stay ; to three of which ho was a witness, 
not one of whom died. One of these cases was that of a man 
who performed the operation on himself. His left testicle was 
greatly enlarged, being about five or six inches in diameter, and 
gave htm, at times, severe lancinating pains. Two or three 
timea be was about to have the operation performed by a native 
of Fiji, but his courage failed him when he came to the trial. 
One day when Mr Mariner was with hiwv, ba twiiAsE^-^ ^vsua- 
ztuned to perform the opera\\oYv ofv \\vavs^^ \ ws^ '^"^ ^"^ '^**^ 



cli SURGICAL SKILL 

much fiooner said than done. He tied on the bondage^ open^^ 
the scrotum witli a very steady hand, in a fit of despop-aa^^ 
tion, divided the cord and cellular substance together, an:^^ 
fdl senseless on the ground : the hemorrfai^c was very pr^^^ 
Aiie. Mr Mariner called in some persons to his aasirtance, a.iM/ ^ 
he was carried into a house, but did not become sensible for 
nearly an hour : the affiiir confined him to the house for two or 
three months. There was one rare instance of a roan, both of 
whose testes were afiectcd with some species of sarcoma, to a do- "■ 
grec almost beyood irrcdit. When he stood up, his feet were f 
necessarily separated to tlie distance of three quarters of a yard, I 
and the loaded scrotum, or rather the morbid mass, reached to 
within six inches of tlie ground. There was no appearance of 
a penis, the urine being discharged from a small orifice about 
the middle of the tumor, that is to say, about a foot and a half 
below the os pul»s. The man's general health was not bad ; 
and he could even walk by the help of a stick, without having 
any sling or support for his burthen. It was specifically lighter 
than fresh water, and considerably lighter than salt water, so as 
to produce much inconvenience to him when he bathed. He 
died at tlie island of Foa, about two or three montlis before Bftr 
Mariner left Vavaoo. 

As to fractures, and dislocations of the extremities, it may be 
said that there is scarcely any native but who understands how 
to manage those that are most likely to happen. They are very 
well acquainted with the general forms of the bones, and articu- 
lations of the extremities. They use splints made of a certain 
part of the cocoa-nut tree : for broken arms they use slings of 
gnatoo. In fractures of the cranium they allow nature to take 
her course widiout interfering ; and it is truly astonishing what 
injuries of this kind they will bear without fatal oonaequences. 
There was one man whose skull had been so beaten in« in two 
or three places, by the blows of a club, that his bead bad an odd 
misshapen appearance, and yet this man had very good health, 
except when he happened to take cava, which produced a tem- 
porary insanity. Fractures of the clavicle and riba Mr Mariner 
never saw there. 

The most common surgical operation among them i« what 

they call tafa^ which is topical blood-letting, and is performed 

by making, with a shell, incisions in the skin to the extent of 

about half an inch in various parts of the body, particularly in 

the lumbar region and extremities ; for the relief of paina, lassi- 

iude, &c : also for inflamed tumours they never fail to promote 

M £ow of blood from the part ; b^ the same means they open ab- 

seeases, and pteaa out the purulent mattec. \xw cura o^lVdud iit- 1 

^feat tutMMQura, (hey either vp^^ iginted tof^m ocVwAVma^- > 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLl 

fruit rcp«atodlj, so as to blister Uie part, and ult 
duce a purulent surface. Ill-conditioned ulcers, 
those persons whoso constitutions incline to such ti 
rifted by shells ; those that seem disposed to heal : 
take their course without any application. 

In cases of sprains, the alFectcd part is rubbed w 
of oil and water, the friction being always continu 
rection, that is to say« from the smaller toward 
branches of the vessels. Friction, witli the dry h. 
often used in similar and other cases, for the purpo£ 
ing pain. 

In respect to inflammations of tlie eyes, which soir 
to a very great height, attended frequently with a ci 
purulent discharge ; they frequently have recourse tc 
tion by tlie application of a particular kind of grass, t 
spicula with which it is replete dividing the inflamed 
it is moved upon the tunica adnata. To assist in 
ophthalmic inflammations, tlicy also drop into the ey 
vegetable juice, and sometimes another of a bitter qua 
first is called vi, the latter bawlo. The species of opi 
to which they are subject, though sometimes lingering, 
scarcely ever to have produced serious consequences, an 
considered contagious. Mr Mariner ncitlior saw nor h 
but one man who had lost his sight by disease. 

Id cases of gunshot wounds, their main object is to i 

wound open, if it can be done with safety in respect 

larger blood-vessels and tendons, not only for the extraci 

the ball, if it should still remain, but for the purpose o: 

verting a fistulous into an open wound, that it may therefc 

•oouer and better. If they have to cut down near larger v 

they use bamboo in preference to the sliell : the same net 

Ions, that there may be less chance of injuring them. TI 

vmys make incisions nearly in the coune of the muscles, 

east parallel with the limb. 

The amputation of a limb is an operation very seldoi 

wmed ; nevertheless it has been done in at least twelve 

duals. Mr Mariner seeing one day a man without ar 

riotdtj led him to inquire how it happened, and found t 

d bean one of the twelve principal cooks of Toogoo Ah 

ant of Tonga, and had submitted to the amputation of I 

if under the circumstances related vol. I. p. 80. The 

vhiuh this operation was performed was similar to that 

tmot described in vol. II. p. 178, only tliat a large hea 

used for the purpose. The bleeding wa& tvo^ w^ '^ 

It be imagined, owing, no do>]\)lt| \o >}cv&V^>xg^\v«»k»^ 

lent and violence of the VAov». tVw* Ax»ss<5i ^^\k» 



ciT SURGICAL SKILL 

Mariner to be a very good one. The arm was taken off ^Sk^f^^, 
two inches above the elbow. Ten were stated to baTe doT\^ 



well ; of the remsunin^ two, one died of excessive hfiemoi^x^T^^^j^ 
and the other of mortification. There was also a man livj/i^ 4^[^ 
the Island of Vavaoo who had lost a leg in consequence of rf^— ^ 
bite of a shark, which is not a very uncommon accident; bx^^ 
there was something unusual in this man's particular case. I^J^ 
leg was not bitten off, but the flesh was almost completely to^n 
awav from about five inches below the knee down to the foot, 
leaving the tibia and fibula greatly exposed, and the foot much 
mangled. He was one of those who chose to perform his own 
operations. With persevering industry, therefore, he sawed near- 
ly through the two bones with a shell, rcne^ving liis tedious and 
painful task every day till he bad nearly accomplished it, and 
tiien completed ^e separation by a sudden blow with a stone ! 
The stump never healed. Mr Mariner had this account from 
the man himself and many ethers. 

Tefe; or the operation of circumcision, is thus performed :— . 
A narrow slip of wood, of a convenient size, being wrapped 
round with giiatoo, is introduced under the prccputium, along 
the back of which a longitudinal incision is then made to the ex- 
tent of about half an inch, either with bamboo or shell (the lat- 
ter is preferred). This incision is carried through the outer 
fold, and the beginning of the inner fold, the reminder of the 
latter being afterwards torn open with the fingers. The end of 
the penis is then wrapped up in the leaf of a tree called gnatdi, 
and is secured with a bandage. The boy is not allowed to bathe 
for three days. The leaf is renewed once or twice a day. At 
the Fiji Islands this operation is performed nt fourteen years of 
age, by drawing forward the pra*putium, and amputating a por- 
tion, according to the Jewish rite. 

The operation of the ta tattowy or puncturing the skin, and 
marking it with certain configurations, tliough it is not properly 
surgical, we mention it here, as it is very apt to produce 
enlargements of the inguinal and axillary glands. The in- 
strument used for the purpose of this operation somewhat rc- 
cembles a small-tooth comb. They have several kinds, of dif- 
ferent degrees of breadth, from six up to fifty or sixty teeth. 
They are made of the bone of the wing of the wild duck. Be. 
ing dipped in a mixture of soot and water, the outline of the 
tuttow is first marked off before the operator begins to puncture* 
which he afterwards does by striking in the points of the instni- 
ment with a small stick cut out of a green branch of tlie cocoa-nut 
tree. When the skin begins to bWd, wYdcVv vlc^ickly does, the j 
cpnntor occaaonally waslies off the b\ood. 'wH.vSev cc^di 'wvXet ^ vdA. \ 
-ffpcmtedUy goes over the same places. A.* iiVft^\% «^ ^wj ^iiteft^ 



OF THE TONGA PEOPLE. 

process, but a small portion of it Is done at oncoj 
tient (who may iustly be so called) intervals of thn 
rest, M) tiiat it is frequently two months before it 
fini&lied. The ])art8 tattowcd are from within two 
knees up to about three inches above Uie umbiiicuh 
certain patterns or forms of the tattowt known by di: 
and tlie individual may choose which he likes. On 
skins the tattow is black, on the skin of an Europear 
blue appearance. This operation causes that portion 
on which it is performed to remain permanently thic 
ing tlie time that it is performed, but sometimes not 
tluree months afterwards, swellings of tlie inguinal ^ 
place, and which almost always suppurate. Sometim 
opened with a shell before they point, which is cons 
best treatment; at other times tliey arc dlowed to 
course. We need not wonder at the absorbents bee 
much afTccted, when we consider Uie extent of surface 
subjected to this painful operation. Even tlie glans ( 
the verge of Uic anus do not escape. It is considered 
manly not to be tattowed, so that there is nobody but w 
mits to it as soon as he is grown up. The women are . 
jected to it, tliougli a few of them choose to have some nr 
Uie inside of their fingers. Tlie men would tliink it vci 
oent not to be tattowed, because tliough in l)attk' thoy w 
thing but tlic mahif they appear by &is means to be d 
witliout having the incumbrance of clothing. * It is a c 
circumstance, tliat at the Fiji Islands, the men, on tlie coi 
are not tattowed, but the women are. The operation is n 
ed by their own sex, tliough by no means to that extent to 
it is pertbrme<l on tlic Tonga men, oonlcntiug theinselve 
having it done on tlio nates in form of a lai^e circuUr 
though sometimes in tliat of a crescent ; and most of then 
t also done on tlie labia pudendi, consisting of ono line oi 
II each side, just witliin the verge of the external labia. 
We cannot with certainty say tliat the glandular ulcci 
tare alluded to are always produced by the tatt6w, thoi 
I likeliliood, when it has recently been performed, it is t 
ing cause ; but tlie people btu very subject to scn^ulc 
rations, glandular enlaigements, and ulcers. Tliey ci 
ease cahi ; tlie parts affected are the groins, axilla; and 
ugh many other parts of tlic body arc also liable to i 

1 have seen two instances of the Tonga tattiW, in Jei 
gins, and in Thomas Dawson^ both uC \K^ VvtW.va.'^ 
beauty and nentnosB oC iVwic\«M»fi».Ss««*»«^K* 
d'ona. 



•i SURGICAL SKILL 

hii'li tlicy call j)dUn. Tlicse dincaacs RomeCimes run on to rad 
11 c&U'iit, iind anHiinrac snrh appearances, that wc bolievi 
;oniv travellers Iinvo mistnkcn thein for lues venerea. It i 
n*rtain that some individuals aiiected with pAUa have beai 
oblif^Kl I'.i stihinit to the losMof a nose, the cartilaginous von 
miftcr partst oC that organ becoming completely destroyed 
It nuist niso Ik* mentioned at the same time, that the native 
are std>JL'Ot tu gonorrha>ttl discharges, attended with ardo 
iirin:c. All tlicHC circumstances apjiear very ccjuivocal ; but M 
Mariner has every reason to believe that the venereal diseasedM 
not exist under any form, either at the Hapai Islands or Vavaoo 
during the time that he was there; although, to hiH certain knoV' 
ledge, three of the survivors of the Port an Princc*s crew hm 
gonorrhccas at the time the ship was fallen ; one of whom h« 
brought it from England, and the otlier two had contracted it i 
tl)c fcbndwich Inland:*. Se\'cnil others of the ship*s compair 
had also venereal aflcetions ; but they fell in the general mas 
sacre on lioard. In the first place we must observe, in respec 
to those labouring under the diseases called cahi and pdUoj tin 
the complaints are either not venereal, or tliat the venereal db 
ease subsides in them, and the constitution cures itself sponti 
neously. 2dly, lliat the organs of generation are never ajfede 
previously to the more general disease coming on. 5dJy, Tfai 
these disi-ases are nut known to l>c, or believed to be, contrada 
by sexual intercourse. 4«thly, That though these diseases ii 
some constitutions produce fatal consequences, yet very fit 
quently the appetite and strcngih, and fulness of flesh, remaii 
much tlic same as if no disease existed, though this happens i 
p6Ua more than in ciUiL In respect of the gonorrfaacas to whic 
they are subject, tliey are for the most part very mild in tbi 
symptoms, and get well in a few dnys ; besides which, they a 
not capable of being communicated between the sexes, or 
least this is not known, or believed to \ye the case. With regr 
to the three men of the Port au Prince's crew, they got v 
witliout exactly knowing when or how: for the constemtf 
occasioned by tlie capture of the ship und the destruction of If 
countrymen, and the alarm and state of anxiety in which 
were for at least two or three days had produced such a ch 
in the constitution, or at least in tlie disease, tliat it had net 
got well before they were aware of it. Mr jNIariner inq* 
among some of tlie oldest men if tliey had ever seen or hcf 
such a disease as sypUiUs or vu\\«iivit\\ ^o\\oy\\\u^% ^^scribir 
^ueral character of it, wwA \\ov* \v. vj«l% cv^vavsi\xvC\^»9^ 
learnt tiiat u woinan^ a uauvc oV uwvt ol VXx^ WwjrtCv X-iNaw 
- connexion with oue o? v\.e «^.^3f^ 
Olt on fire Qas tXic^ exv«««Au.> ^w^^>«d